standard building specifications

نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة (الفروانية) محافظة

_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01100-1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01100

SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 LOCATION OF THE SITE

The Site is located in Farwaniya area, Kuwait, Block no.(18) 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of work under this Contract comprises the construction, completion,

commissioning, handover and maintenance of works related to the Prototype Immigration Buildings.

B. The works mainly comprises of the following but not limited to:

1) New building having four floors (Basement floor, Ground floor, First floor and second floor). Construction includes structural works, architectural finishes and electro-mechanical works.

2) External Works – Includes soft and hard landscaping, storm water, fresh water, drainage and electrical networks.

C. Work under this contract for the Contractor shall include: 1. The Contractor shall take over the site and the site coordination from the Municipality. 2. The Contractor shall not damage the existing services in use and take adequate care to protect them. 3. The Contractor shall check with Governmental and local authorities for any existing services such as H.T. and L.T. electrical cables, telephone cables/ducts, drainage pipes, water and gas supplies etc.. Seal off drain ends. Comply with regulation and obtain necessary permits. When necessary divert all services still in use and provide all temporary works to maintain in full function. 4. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer from all the damages. A complete picture, however shall be obtained from a study of all the Tender Documents taken together. 1.03 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose other than carrying out the works. B. The Contractor shall not display or permit advertisements to be displayed on site without the consent of the Engineer's Representative.

C. Take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to adjoining property. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF SECTION 01100

نموذجي هجرةإنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة (الفروانية) محافظة

_______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01050-1 FIELD ENGINEERING

SECTION 01050

FIELD ENGINEERING

1.01 SITE SURVEY

Before commencing operations, the Contractor shall carry out a site survey in the presence of the Engineer and shall prepare and agree with the Engineer a survey drawing at the scale required by the Engineer. The survey drawing shall show the proposed layout of the Permanent Works in relation to boundaries, bench marks and a grid of the existing ground levels at ten (10) meter centers each way for the whole area of the site. Distribute copy of the drawing to the Engineer and retain one copy permanently on site.

1.02 BENCH MARKS

The Contractor shall accurately and safely establish, maintain and clear away upon completion of the Work site bench marks in accordance with the requirements and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such bench marks shall be related to the nearest Permanent Bench Mark fixed by the Municipality. The location and reduced value of the bench marks shall be shown on the site survey drawing. The contractor shall resurvey and replace to approval, permanent bench marks which are destroyed in the execution of the Work.

1.03 SETTING OUT

After the Contractor is handed over the Contract Drawings and after taking over all the existing Permanent Bench Marks, he shall carry out at his own responsibility and expense the setting out of the work, definitions of levels and setting out lines, axes and slopes, all in accordance with the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work in relation to original points, lines and levels of references given in the Drawings and for the accuracy of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work, and for any delay or loss resulting from errors made in completing the setting out of the work. The Contractor shall protect, preserve and be responsible for all existing Bench marks, pegs and boundary marks and shall keep them in place or replace them when necessary or as directed by the Engineer either in their original positions or in some other approved positions. Setting out shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing the works, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the correct execution of the work.



_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01200- 1 Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule & Payment Procedures

SECTION 01200

PROJECT SCHEDULE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.01 DEFINITIONS RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Project Construction Schedule: The project construction schedule is the

schedule for execution of the total project.

B. Contractor’s Construction Schedule(s): The Contractor’s developed schedule(s) for execution of this Contract that meet the Contract Requirements of this Contract, and the requirements of the Project Construction Schedule, shall include:

1) Design and all other activities as required

2) Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule

3) Intermediate Bar Chart Schedule

4) Detailed Contractor’s Daily Work Activity Schedule

5) Summary Schedule

C. Schedule Update: The updating of the Construction Schedule to indicate the actual progress of work.

D. Milestone Dates: Specified intermediate contractual obligatory dates for the completion of specific item(s) of work within the total contract,

E. Schedule Revisions: Revisions to the approved Contractor’s Construction Schedule(s) indicating changes in logic, changes in activity duration’s and additions of activities.

F. Schedule Adjustments: Approved changes in contract specified milestone or completion dates.

G. CPM: Critical Path Method of scheduling utilizing the computer software referenced under Clause 1.07.

H. Schedule of Values: Approved detailed calculations provided by the Contractor which show the breakdown of cost for each activity, and the corresponding relation to the BQ items,

1.02. GENERAL A. The Construction Program submitted with the Contractor’s Tender shall depict

in general the key activities and milestones and the duration allotted for the same. The Contractor shall be required to plan, perform and coordinate his works with that of other Direct Contractors to meet the overall time requirements of the Project.

B. The Contractor shall be required to plan perform and coordinate his works and those of his sub-contractors with that of all other directly employed contractors and nominated sub-contractors on the site to meet the time requirements of the Project including the contract specified milestone date(s) and construction completion date.


_____________________________________________________________________


C. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting adequate planning data for the development and maintenance of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule(s), all to the approval of the Engineer s Representative as detailed hereinafter

1. The work under this Section consists of the planning scheduling cost reporting and reporting procedures required to be carried out by the Contractor in conjunction with the progress of the Works. The work shall fulfill all Contract requirements and shall include, but is not limited to the following :-

a. Development of a construction schedule using computerized CPM (Critical Path Method) technique.

b. Development of an intermediate schedule for use in planning and controlling construction until such time as the Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule has been approved.

c. Development of a detailed contractor’s daily work activity schedule.

d. Monthly updating of the various construction schedule(s).

e. Revisions to approved Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule.

f. Development of summary schedule.

2. The Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule shall include all elements of work required for construction of the Works including the submittal and approval of shop drawings, materials and equipment, procurement and delivery of materials and equipment, construction, inspection, testing and commissioning, maintenance and acceptance of the Works.

3. The Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule shall indicate the interrelationship with the work of other contracts/works and schedules for meeting milestone dates and to meet the Project Construction Schedule requirements and completion dates.

4. The contractor's construction schedules shall be updated an minimum of once a month and/or as required by the engineer due to special circumstances, at joint meeting with the engineer's representative, the contractor, sub-contractors and other contractors who may be required to attend.

5. Each submittal of the contractor's CPM construction schedules shall be signed by the duly authorized representative of the contractor and these documents, upon approval by the engineer's representative shall be thereupon become incorporated into the contract documents for the project.

6. Failure of the contractor to comply with the requirements of this section or substantial delay is evident in the contractor's actual progress, shall be grounds for the engineer to effect reductions in progress payments until the contractor in compliance.


_____________________________________________________________________


1.03 CONTRACTOR’S SCHEDULER A. Upon signing the Contract, the Contractor shall designate in writing for the

approval of Engineer a qualified Scheduler either in-house or from a recognized specialist company, who will be responsible for the content development, and updating of the Contractor’s schedule(s).

B. Intermediate Schedule

Within fourteen (14) days from the date of enterprise, the contractor shall develop and submit an intermediate schedule in bar chart format indicating the contractor’s proposed work program for the initial three months of the project. The schedule shall be of adequate detail to indicate all elements of construction as well as shop drawings submittals, permits, material deliveries and other procurement work items. The approved intermediate schedule shall be used to plan and monitor progress until the Contractors CPM Construction Schedule is approved. The intermediate schedule shall be updated monthly to provide a three (3) month schedule beyond the date of updating until the intermediate schedule is replaced by the approved Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule.

C. CPM Construction Schedule

Within 30 days of signing the Contract, the Contractor shall submit his CPM Construction Schedule to show the sequence and inter-dependence of activities required for complete performance of all items of work under the Contract and meeting milestone dates as required by the Project Construction Schedule. In preparing the Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule the Contractor shall:

1. Comply with the formatting requirements of the Engineer and exercise care to produce a clear, legible and accurate diagram. Activities to be agreed with the Engineer related to specific physical areas of the Project shall be grouped on the diagram for ease of understanding and simplification. The diagram shall show the following for each work activity:

a) Concise description of the work.

b) Performance responsibility and trade codes.

c) Performance location, or area code.

d) Duration in calendar days.

e) Manpower assignment to activity of work (resource loading).

2. Demonstrate work activities in the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to have a maximum duration of fourteen (14) days with not more than 2% exceeding these limits, except as to non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials, delivery of equipment, etc).

3. Include any trade or material restraints to indicate the movement of trades who are performing the major work.

4. The CPM schedule shall comply with Kuwait Labour Law in so far as hours of work, days of work, etc.


_____________________________________________________________________


D. Supporting Data

The Contractor shall submit the under mentioned supporting data with the submittal of his CPM Construction Schedule. Any changes in this information shall be submitted with successive updates and revisions.

1. The proposed number of working days per week (maximum six days unless approved otherwise by the Engineer).

2. The holidays, and other non-working days observed during the duration of the Contract (by date).

3. The planned number of shifts per day (one shift unless approved otherwise by the Engineer).

4. The number of hours per shift (maximum eight hours unless approved otherwise by the Engineer).

5. The planned usage of major or construction equipment on the site, on a monthly basis.

6. The planned procurement and delivery of local and imported materials.

7. The average weekly manpower usage for each trade to be employed for the Works.

8. Explanation of all changes in logic, in duration’s, manpower and equipment.

E. Activity Details

The Contractor shall provide as a minimum the following schedule information for each activity:

•Activity identifier(s)

•Activity precedent activity

•Activity description

•Area of work codes

•Trade codes

•Related actual quantity of work

•Responsibility of work code (Sub-Contractor’s designated etc)

•Activity duration (original)

•Activity duration (remaining)

• %Completion

•Early start date

•Late start date

•Late finish date

•Actual Start (when applicable)

•Actual Finish (when applicable)


_____________________________________________________________________


•Activity float time

•Critical activity identification

F. Reports

The Contractor shall also provide the following schedule reports:

a. Total schedule sorted by activity identification

b. Total schedule sorted by activity float

c. Total schedule sorted chronologically

d. Schedule by areas of work

e. Schedule by responsibility

G. Summary Schedule

The Contractor shall submit along with his CPM Construction Schedule a Summary Schedule in bar chart format depicting the major elements of construction. The Summary Schedule shall summarize the various activities contained in the CPM Construction Schedule into the major elements of construction and the interrelationship of these major elements as welt as their relationship to work within the Project Schedule performed by others as well as the key milestone dates. The Summary Schedule shall be modified to reflect the approved CPM Construction Schedule and issued with the approved CPM Construction Schedule. The Summary Schedule shall be revised and re-issued whenever there are revisions to the logic of the approved CPM Construction Schedule or approved revisions to the specified milestone dates arid completion date.

H. Contractor Detailed Daily Work Activity Schedule

At monthly intervals and no later than the submittal of the Payment Request, the Contractor shall submit a separate schedule developed from the approved Contractor CPM Construction Schedule, covering a period of 45 days and denoting the Contractor Daily Work activities and, if necessary, relating to those of other contractors.

I. Schedule Submittal’ Requirements

All of the Contractor s Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, will be formatted according to the Engineer’s requirements and consist of the following:

1. One (1) complete blue line set of diagrams from the last approved Contractor’s Construction Schedule, marked-up in red showing all revisions and changes in accordance with the monthly meeting, and s by the Contractor.

2. Three blue line prints of each diagram and three copies of the scheduling reports.

3. Three copies of supporting data.


_____________________________________________________________________


4. Computer generated schedule(s).

5. Two back-up copies on 3.5 inch diskettes

J. Contractor’s Responsibility for Completing the Work,

Failure to include any element of the Works, within the schedule(s) required for the performance of the Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date of each phase notwithstanding the Engineer’s Representative’s approval of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Within seven (7) days of obtaining approval of his Construction Schedule the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s Representative’s approval a Cost Loaded Construction Schedule with a fully detailed Schedule of values and all necessary supporting details of all activities in the Contractor’s Cost Loaded Construction Schedule, based upon the Rates and Bills of Quantities, and the total shall equal the Contract price.

B. Contractor’s Cost Loaded Construction Schedule shall be the basis for calculating interim payments pro rata to the work performed The Cost Loaded Construction Schedule and calculations for interim payment shall employ computerized CPM techniques

C. Revisions to the Contractor s Construction Schedule may require reallocation of costs revised activity cost data shall be submitted with the updated Schedule of value.

1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND UPDATING A. Job site progress meetings will be held twice each month at which time the

Contractor schedule(s) will be reviewed and updated. Those attending this meeting shall include the Engineer’s Represented, and authorized representatives of the Contractor, Sub s and other Contractors as required. At the alternate meet which occurs immediately before the agreed payment cutoff date, the Contractor shall have his copy of the Cost Loaded Construct Schedule and all other data required by the Contract Documents accurately filled in and completed prior to this meeting. Work Progress and the construction schedule(s) will be reviewed to verify:

1. When delay in completion of any act or group of activities indicates an overrun of the Contract Time or m requirements by 14 days or ten percent (10%) of the remaining duration, whichever is less.

2. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are encountered which make re p or scheduling of the work necessary

3. When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and progress of the works a being performed in the field.


_____________________________________________________________________


B. Acceptance of the updated Contractor s CPM Construction Schedule and all supporting data is cont upon compliance with all other articles of this Clause and any other previous agreements or requirements made with or by the Engineer’s Representative.

1.06 ADJUSTMENTS AND REVISIONS A. Variation Orders/Site Works Instructions

The Contractor shall incorporate into the approved CPM Construction Schedule all work related to Variation Orders and Site Works Instructions. They should be incorporated as separate activity(s) into the CPM Construction Schedule in their logical sequence of work. All requests for extensions of time and/or change in milestone dates associated with work related to Variation Orders and/or Site Works Instructions shall be based on the effect the Variation Order and/or Site Works Instruction has on the approved CPM Construction Schedule. No adjustments or revisions to the Contract Time or to specified Milestone Dates shall be shown in the CPM Construction Schedule until such adjustments or revisions have been approved by the Engineer. The CPM Construction Schedule shall continue to be updated for the actual progress of the activities which are verifiable by site inspection.

1.07 SCHEDULING SYSTEM The Contractor shall utilize the latest version of “Primavera” a computerized scheduling software system or any other approved software requested by the Engineer.

1.08 PROVIDING INFORMATION The Contractor shall provide the Engineer’s Representative with copies of data information of the approved Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule and Construction Schedule. The information to be provided on data diskettes compatible for use on the Engineer’s computer system.

1.09 ALTERNATIVE AND SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS A. Definition: The term “product” shall mean any material including proprietary

goods, equipment and manufactured items.

B. The specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue number, etc., shall not act to relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to meet other specification requirements, or from his responsibility to make material submittals for approval.

C. Alternative products: References herein to “approved equal” or similar terms shall mean that the approval of the Engineer is required to any alternative product proposed by the Contractor. The Contractor’s freedom, however, to propose alternatives for the Engineer’s review and approval, shall not be limited to those products in respect of which the term " approved equal” or similar has been used in the Contract Documents, and he may propose alternatives to any specified products provided such alternatives are equal if


_____________________________________________________________________


not better than the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the specified product.

D. Substitute products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the specified product in spite of his best endeavors, and if he is unable to find and propose a suitable equal alternative he may propose a substitute for the Engineer’s review and approval, which substitute shall be similar to, and as near as possible equal if not better than the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the specified product. A substitute product will only be considered if the Contractor has proved to the Engineer’s reasonable satisfaction that the specified product is unobtainable.

E. Engineer’s approval of alternatives and substitutes: The approval of any alternative or substitute product shall be solely at the discretion on the Engineer and such approval shall in no way relive the Contractor of any of his liabilities and obligations under the Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as to the suitability of any proposed alternative or substitute product shall rest with the Contractor, and the Engineer may request and the Contractor shall provide such supporting data, carry out such tests, etc., as the Engineer may reasonably require in order to satisfy himself as to such suitability. Any delay or extra costs suffered by the Contractor because of his failure to propose alternatives, timely so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or because of rejection of alternatives or substitutes found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and he shall not be entitled to additional payment nor extra time for completion in this respect,, .

F. Cost effect in approving alternatives and substitutes: Should any alternative or substitute product be approved by the Engineer, any net increase in cost over and above the specified product shall be borne by the Contractor and any net saving in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.

Alternative or substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the Engineer’s designed space requirements. Any such alternative or substitute product that does not meet such space requirements, where approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and any modification of replaced systems thereby arising shall also be made at his expense.

G. Submission of details of alternatives and substitutes: With any alternatives or substitute proposal, submit:

1. Name of proposed alternative manufacturer or source of proposed substitute material for initial approval by the Engineer.

2. Copies of detailed specifications, brochures, etc., and quotations, in respect of the alternative or substitute materials proposed, for the Engineer’s review and approval in accordance with the requirements of each section.


_____________________________________________________________________


1.10 ALLOWANCES

A. INSPECTION TESTING ALLOWANCES

The Contractor shall allow in his rates quoted for carrying out all tests on the Works required by the Specifications.



_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01312-1 COORDINATION & MEETINGS

SECTION - 01312

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes Administrative and Supervisory requirements necessary for co-

coordinating construction operation including, but not necessarily limited to the followings:

1. General Project Coordination Procedure 2. Pre-construction conference 3. Site mobilization conference 4. Progress meetings 5. Pre-installation conferences 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to these sections: 1. Section 01330 - Submittal 2. Section 01451 – Contractor's Quality Control 3. Section 01610 – Basic Products Requirements 4. Section 01722 - Field Engineering 5. Section 01770 – Closeout Procedure B. The requirements of the above Sections do not supersede or take precedence over

any provision of the Tendering Procedure Doc-1 and Conditions of Contract Doc-2. Should any discrepancy become apparent among those documents, the contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, and the Engineer shall interpret and decide such mattes in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Contract. In this regard Engineer’s decision shall be considered as final/

1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specifications

to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.

B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for

installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work,

which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximum accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


D. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring within the construction. Coordinate

locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate sections in preparation for

Substantial Completion and for portions of work designated for Employers partial occupancy.

F. Coordinate with other Contractor(s) employed by the Employer, for all activities

interfacing or interfering with this work, in particular on the common boundary limits. G. After Employer occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of

defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Employer’s activities.

1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Employer and Engineer will schedule a conference after Contractor has selected his

major sub-trades and prior to signing of Employer/Contractor Agreement. B. Attendance Required; Employer, Engineer and Contractor. C. Agenda:

1. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedules of values and progress schedule.

2. Designation of responsible personnel and manpower organization. 3. Procedures and processing of field decisions shop drawings, submittals,

substitutions, applications for payments, proposal requests, variations, checklists and Contract closeout procedures.

4. Scheduling and sequence of work. 5. Use of premises by Employer and Contractor. 6. Employer’s requirements.

1.05 SITE MOBILISATION CONFERENCE A. Engineer and Employer will schedule a conference at the Project Site prior to

Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required: Employer, Engineer, and Contractor.

C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Employer and Contractor 2. Employer’s requirements 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Contractor 4. Temporary Utilities provided by Contractor 5. Survey and Building layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 7. Schedules 8. Procedures for testing 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Requirements for start-up of equipment


_________________________________________________________________________________________


11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service construction period. 12. Guarantee period for all equipments. 1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The Engineer should schedule weekly and monthly construction progress meetings, co-ordination meetings, and pre-installation conferences, throughout progress of work for the proper management and coordination of the Contract and as required by the Engineer.

B. The Engineer should prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to

participants, three days in advance of meeting date. C. The Engineer will preside at meetings. Record minutes and distributes copies

within two days after meeting to participants, to entities affected by decisions at meetings, with two copies to each of Engineer and Employer.

D. Location of Meetings: Conference Room on Site. E. Attendance: Contractor, Project Manager, Subcontractors and Suppliers as

appropriate to agenda; Employer, Engineer, Professional Consultants. F. Minimum Agenda: 1. Approval of minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress and CPM program. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems, which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and deliver schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding works period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Safety.

14. Contractor’s Resources: Management, Men, Money, Materials, and Machinery.

15. Contractor’s on-site staff progress report. 16. Contractor’s Employer’s and Engineer’s Office Management’s

observations and remarks. 17. Other business relating to work. 18. Samples and mock-ups as required by the Engineer or the Employer

before execution of the work.

G. Subcontractors’ Site Meetings: 1. The Contractor should hold meetings with appropriate subcontractors

and suppliers shortly before main site progress meetings to facilitate accurate reporting of progress.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When requires in individual specification Section, convene a pre-installation

conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by work of the Section. C. Notify Engineer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within

two days after conference to participants with two copies to Engineer. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and

coordination with related work.



___________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01323-1 CPM SCHEDULES

SECTION 01323

CPM SCHEDULES

PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the Critical Path

Method (CPM) of scheduling and reporting progress of the work 1, Refer to the Conditions of Contract for definitions and specific dates of Contract

Time.

2. The work under this clause consists of the scheduling and reporting procedures required to be carried out by the Contractor in junction with the progress of the report.

Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

1.02 DEFINATIONS A. Critical Path Method (CPM) : A method of planning and scheduling a construction

project where Activities are arranged based on activity relationships and network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.

B. Construction Schedules: The Contractor’s developed schedules foe execution

on the Contract that meets the contract requirements for the performance of this contract and the requirements of the Construction Program.

C. Contractor’s Cost Load Construction Schedule: The Contractors approved

CPM schedule with assigned cost on the priced Bill of the Quantities and Schedule of rates (Document III-4) that total the contract lump sum and to be used as the basis for calculating interim payments.

D. Critical Path : The longest continuous chain of activities through the network

schedule that establishes the minimum overall project duration. E. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a work schedule, showing the activities and activity relationship.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


F. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,

monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a constructive schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path.

2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.

G. Event: An event is the starting or ending point of an activity. H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

I. Float: Float is the measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float

time belongs to the Employer.

1. Free Float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following activity.

2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned project completion date.

1.03 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. The contractor shall use a computerized precedence Diagram CPM technique in preparing the Construction Schedule.

The soft ware proposed to be used by the contractor for the CPM shall be primavera latest versions.

B. The Contractor shall develop the construction schedule-demonstrating fulfillment of All contract requirements loading construction schedule activities with the further construction activities hammocked within the milestone activities. Each milestone

activity should represent the construction activities hammocked within it by using true

B. The construction schedule shall be updated monthly and when required by the Engineer's Representative Construction Manager at joint meetings with the Engineer’s. Representative, Construction Manager, the Contractor, Subcontractors and other direct contractors who may be required to attend. D. Failure of the contractors to comply with the requirements of those sections shall be Grounds for recommendations by the engineer that no further progress payment shall be made until the contractor is in compliance. E. Each revision of the construction schedule shall be signed by the duly authorized representative of the Contractor and these documents, upon approval by the engineer, shall thereupon become incorporated in to the contract documents of the project.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor’s Representation: The Contractor shall designate a Scheduling

Engineer who shall be responsible for the content and development of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This representative shall have direct control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements and such authority shall not be interrupted throughout the duration of the contract.

B. Qualified Schedule Engineer with ten (10) years and in compliance with

requirements of Contract Documents. 1.05 CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT A. The contractor shall meet with the Engineer’s Representative/ Contractions Manager within (10) ten days after signing the contract to review the scheduling requirements of the project. This review will include the specific requirements of the contractor regarding restraints and milestones, including the interrelation with other direct Contractors (if any), as they relate to the overall construction programme . B. Preliminary Work Schedule: Submit a preliminary Work schedule within 15 days of the date of signing the Contract. The preliminary Work schedule shall outline activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include a skeleton diagram for the remainder of the work with the preliminary diagram.

Include each significant construction activity. Coordinate each activity in the schedule with other activities .Schedule each construction activity in proper sequence. Indicate completion of the work on the date established for Substantial Completion, unless the Employer agrees otherwise.

C. Within 30 days of the Date of Notice, you proceed the contractor shall submit for Construction Manager approval, the construction schedule in a bar-chart-time- Scaled format, to show the sequence and interdependence of activities required for complete performance of all items of work under the contract or portion thereof.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


Further this schedule shall reflect the milestone required by the contract documents in preparing the construction schedule, the Contractor shall : 1. Exercise care to produce a clear, legible, and accurate diagram. Activities related to specific areas of the project shall be grouped on the diagram for ease, understanding, and simplification. The diagram shall show the following for each construction activity, where applicable.

a. Concise description of the work b. Early start and finish dates c. Number of working days d. Number of working shifts per day e. Number of hours per shift f. Labour productivity rates for all items of work g. Manpower loading h. Cost loading i. Equipment and machinery loading j. Total float of each activity

2. Include any trade or material restrains to indicate the movement of trades who are performing major work.

3. Should the contractor’s schedule software allow open ends to be shown, critical or not critical will be adopted .

4. Demonstrative work activities in the contractor’s Construction Schedule to

Have maximum duration of thirty (30) days with not more than 2% exceeding these limits , unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or Engineer’s representative except as to non construction activities (such as procurement of materials, delivery of equipment, etc.)

5. The construction schedule developed above shall not be changed throughout

the duration of the project without getting prior approval from the Engineer or Engineer’s Representation.

D. At monthly intervals the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s review, e detailed schedule developed from approved construction Schedule, covering a period the of the next 90 days and relating the contractor’s daily work activities. E. Every 2 weeks the contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s review, e detailed

Schedule covering the next 15 day’s activities.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


F. The contractor shall submit the under mentioned supporting data with the submittal of

his construction schedule and any successive updates and revisions in an approved format by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

1. The proposed number of working days per week. 2. The holidays, and other non working days (except Fridays), including days

lost due to diminished productivity during Ramadan, observed during the duration of the Contract ( by date ).

3. The planned number of shifts per day. 4. The number of hours per shift. 5. The planned usage or major construction equipment on the site, on a

monthly basis. 6. The planned procurement and delivery of materials on a monthly basis. 7. The average weekly manpower (e.g. number of carpenters, steel fixers, labourers,etc.) Usage for each trade to be employed for the works considering activities, duration and Production rates for all trades. 8. Explanation of all changes in logic in duration, manpower, and equipment. 9. Actual start dates and completion dates of activities already completed. 10. Computer generated text reports listing activities with their early and late

start and finish dates sorted by activity number, by early start and by critically.

G. Failure to include any element of the works required for the performance of the

Contact shall not excuse the contractor from completing all work required within any applicable competition date of each phase or the whole of the project, notwithstanding the Engineer's Representative's approval of the Construction Schedule.

1.06 COST LOADING A. Within seven (7) days of obtaining approval of the Construction Schedule, the

Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a cost loaded construction Schedule with a fully detailed schedule of values and all necessary supporting details of all activities in the cost loaded construction schedule based upon the priced Bills of Quantities (Document III-4) and the total shall equal the contract price.

B. The approved cost loaded Construction Schedule shall be the basis for calculating progress payments pro-rata to the work performed. C. Revision to the Construction Schedule may require re-allocation of costs. Revised activity cost data be submitted with the updated construction schedule.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


1.07 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall submit an updated Construction Schedule when the monthly payment is due. B. Acceptance of the updated construction schedule and all supporting data Contingent upon compliance with all other articles of this clause and any other previous agreements or requirements made with or by the Engineer or his representative. 1.08 ADJUSTMENT AND REVISIONS A. The contract duration will be adjusted only in accordance with the provisions of Document II. In the event, the Contractor requests adjustments of the contract duration, he shall furnish such justification and supporting data as the Engineer as to whether or not the contractor will be entitled to an extension of tie for completion. Submission of proof based on revised activity, logic, duration and costs is obligatory with any request. B. The contractor shall submit with every request, his revised construction schedule whenever the actual field progress of the work does not confirm to the latest approved construction schedule in force at the time of the alleged delay. C. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of a request for extension of time, advise the contractor of his decision. When the Engineer has not yet made a decision as to any extension of time, and The parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be reflected in the construction programme, and should the contractor choose to reflect the requested amount of time adjustment in this construction schedule, he will do so at his own risk. Such reflection of time adjustment shall only serve the purpose of monitoring the schedule of the works until such time as the employer has made the final determination as to any extension time. The contractor will revise his construction schedule thereafter in accordance with the Engineer's decision and act and perform the works accordingly. E. The contractor shall submit, as requested by the engineer or engineer's representative, a revision to the construction schedule for any of the following reasons: 1. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are encountered which make re-planning or rescheduling of the work necessary.

2. When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and progress of the works as being performed in the field.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


1.09 SCHEDULING SYSTEM A. The Engineer has established Primavera Project Manger Engineering and

Construction Software for windows (P3 – E/C) as the standard scheduling application for this project.

The latest version of this software shall be used to develop all CPM construction schedules. The construction schedules information and supported data to be provided on compact disc compatible for use by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative’s computer system.

1.10 SUBMITTALS A. All Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, shall consist three (3) copies of the following:

1. Complete blue line set of diagram from the last approved construction Schedule marked up in red showing all revision and changes in accordance with the monthly meeting and signed by the contractor.

2. Blue line prints of each diagram and with copies of scheduling reports. 3. Copies of supporting data. 4. Back-up copies of Compact Disc. PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT USED



______________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01330-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01330

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal Procedures. 2. Construction Program Reports 3. Proposed Product List 4. Change of Durations 5. Quality Assurance Submittals 6. Site Layout, Site Staff Organization Charts and Method Statement 7. Cash Flow Statements 8. Digital Record 9. Engineer & Engineer's Representative Action B. Other Submittals : Also refer to other sections in Division 1 and other Specifications Divisions and other Contract Documents for requirements for other submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities at the Contractor's cost. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequencing. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Engineer's Representatives reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 3. Processing: To avoid the need to display installation as result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals. a. Allow 14 days duration for approval of all submittals related to Divisions 1 to 9. Allow 21 days for approvals related to Divisions 10 to 16. b. Allow the same periods in (a)above again for reprocessing each submittal. Allow additional item if the Engineer's Representative must delay processing any submittal to coordinate with other submittals or for other similar reasons.


______________________________________________________________________


c. No extension of Time for Completion will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer's Representative sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Procedures: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 100 x 125mm on the label to record the Contractor's review and signature and for Engineer's Representative action and remarks. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Contract Name b. Date c. Name and address of the Engineer's Representative d. Name and address of the Contractor e. Name and address of the Sub-Contractor f. Name and address of the Supplier g. Name of the manufacturer h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 3. Contractor's Review: a. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogue numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. b. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents.

c. Sign or initial each page of product data, and each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents,

identify as Coordinated Submittal. Notify Engineer's Representative in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.

d. Contractor's submission to contain complete information regarding all drawings, materials used, and related items.

e. Do not fabricate products or begin work, which requires submittals until return of submittal with Engineer's Representative acceptance. C. Submittal Transmittal: Pack each submittal appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer's Representative using a transmittal form approved by the Engineer. The Engineer's Representative will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.

On the transmittal, record all relevant information. On the form, or separate sheer, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document Requirements.


______________________________________________________________________


D. Submittal Procedures by the Contractor. 1. Samples: Three (3) sets of samples of each material or prefabricated Component with transmittal forms to the Engineer's Representative. Two (2) sets will be returned marked with the action taken.

Maintain one (1) set of samples, as approved by the Engineer’s Representative, at the Works Site/sample room available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of the construction activity.

2. Catalogues: Three (3) published copies of technical (not commercial) brochures, one of which must be an original with transmittal forms to the Engineer's Representative. Brochures should be in English or accompanied by a certified English translation. Brochures in Arabic shall be accepted at the Engineer's Representative discretion. E. Submittal of Correspondence: 1. All correspondence to the Engineer's Representative shall be submitted as follows: a. Transmittals: One original and three photocopies of transmittals and letters, including attachments /enclosures. b. Letters: All correspondence from the Contractor to the Engineer's Representative shall be submitted on A4 size paper. All correspondence shall clearly indicate: i) Contract Number ii) Title of the Contract iii) Contractor's Name iv) Date and reference number of the correspondence

F. Contractor's Submittals Log

Within 10 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor should meet with the Engineer's Representative to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractor Submittal Log. 1. Within 21 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor to submit his Submittals Log, listing all the items requiring the Engineer's Representative approval as per the Contract Documents, for the Engineer's Representative initial review. 2. Within ten (10) days after the Engineer's Representative approval of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, resubmit the Contractor; Submittals Log, for the Engineer's Representative's review and approval, after inserting all particular dates and data from approved schedule.

3. Distribution : Following response to the initial submittal, print and Distribute copies to the Engineer's Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the meeting room and field office.

When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

4. Format: Utilize format as provided by the Engineer's Representative and approved by the Engineer.

5. Submit updated submittals log every month for monitoring purposes.


______________________________________________________________________


G. Contractor's Procurement Log Within 10 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor should meet the Engineer's Representative to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractor Procurement Log.

1. Within 21 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor shall submit his Procurement Log, for the Engineer's Representative initial review, including all those items required to be submitted as per the Contract Documents.

2. After the development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit the Contractor's Procurement Log within 10 days, for the Engineer's Representative review and approval, after inserting all particular dates and data from approved schedule, manufacturers/ suppliers and agents confirmations.

3. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer's Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with procurement dates indicated. Post copies in the meeting room and field office. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

4. Format: Utilize format as provided by the Engineer's Representative and approved by the Engineer.

5. The Contractor, in addition to above, will be required to provide, at any Time required by the Engineer's Representative, full and complete details of all product procurement data relating to all manufactured products which have been ordered and/or procured by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works.

6. Such details shall include copies of Letters of Credit, product order forms, Confirmations from manufacturers and/or suppliers, request for quotations, letters of inquiry, etc. 7. Submit updated procurement log every month for monitoring. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTS A. The Contractor shall submit the following reports: 1. Monthly Works status report which shows detailed activities, actual start And completion dates, percent complete or remaining duration, and any Other requirement by the Engineer's Representative. 2. Monthly material status report which includes material description, unit, material delivered (during the month, accum.), material planned (during month, accum.), adjusted by Adjustment Order Variance (quantity, %) and any other requirements requested by the Engineer. 3. Weekly Manpower Report that includes the following:

a. Profession b. Average Number c. Average working days d. Average working hours e. Total man-hours f. Total man-days


______________________________________________________________________


4. Weekly Works report which includes the following: a. Description of major work items b. Contract quantity c. Quantity installed during the week d. Quantity installed to-date e. Percent of the above 5. Daily Report: Submit this report on daily basis. The report shall describe the labour force and its allocation, material, equipment utilized and describe the work in progress during the day. Utilize Daily Report format as provided by the Engineer's Representative and as approved by the Engineer. 1.04 PROPOSED PRODUCT LIST A. Within 30 days after date of Date of Enterprise, submit list of major products

proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name and model number of each product.

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade

name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.05 CHANGE OF DURATIONS A, The Engineer may change any of the durations (other than the Contract Period) mentioned in this section if he considers the change to be in the interest of the Contract. 1.06 QUALTIY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit Quality Control submittals, including design data , certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality control submittals as required under other sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product , material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.

1. Certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer's officer, or other Individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

2. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and

test reports from independent testing agencies. C. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers certificate to Engineer's Representative for review, in quantities specified for Product Data. 2. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference, data, affidavits and certifications as appropriate.


______________________________________________________________________


3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product,

but must be acceptable to Engineer's Representative. 1.07 SITE LAYOUT, SITE STAFF ORGANIZAITON CHARTS AND METHOD STATEMENT. A. Site Layout and Safety Plan. 1. Prepare and submit to the Engineers Representative for approval before commencing any construction activities a Site Layout and Safety Plan and any modifications or renovations thereafter showing the Contractor's proposed layout of facilities on the Site. 2. The layout of facilities shall demonstrate safety considerations and provide clear full details of location, capacity, etc., and shall include but be limited to : a. Temporary facilities including site accommodations, storage areas, Project ID signage, site fences, and gates, fixed cranes, hoists, Sanitary and toilet facilities, manholes, drain lines and pits. b. Access points and access routes c. Plant, generators, water tanks, storage areas. d. Access for other Contractors, visitors and the like. e. Temporary fire fighting equipment types and locations f. First Aid Stations g. Construction cleaning facilities and equipment. B. Location of Contractor's Facilities: The layout of the Contractor's site offices and storage areas is subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative. C. Contractor's Site Staff Organization: 1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days of the date of commencement of the

mobilization period and before commencement of construction activity onsite, or as stated in Document II-2 Particular Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a full listing of his proposed site staff for the organization, management and supervision of the Works. The list shall include all personnel from Project Manager through to foreman level and shall amplify and reflect the details already given by the Contractor in the Site Organization Chart submitted by authenticated details of the qualifications and experience of such personnel, (to the extent not previously submitted with the Tender and incorporated in the Contract) for review and approval by the Engineer's Representative.

2. Before approving any Contractor's staff, the Engineer's Representative Shall have the right to interview any of the Contractor's proposed staff. Notwithstanding their approval the Engineer's Representative retains the Right to instruct the Contractor to remove any person employed by him in Or about the Works, who in the opinion of Engineer's Representative, Misconducts himself, or is incompetent, or negligent in proper performance of his duties, or whose employment is otherwise considered by the Engineer's Representative to be undesirable.


______________________________________________________________________


D. Contractor's Method Statement: Within 14 days of the date of Commencement of mobilization period and before commencement of construction activity on site, the Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement. The method statement to include as following: 1. Phasing of Works 2. Project Organization 3. Schedule Planning 4. Temporary Facilities 5. Resources allocation and leveling (Labour, Equipment and Material) 6. Quality Assurance /Quality Control Program 7. Accident Prevention and Safety Program E. Method Statements: Where required by these Specifications or when requested by the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall prepare method statements detailing the Contractor's methodology for the execution of specific items or areas of work. Such specific method statements shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible to determine his own means and methods. The approval of the Engineer's Representative shall review safety considerations and any other matter that does not detract from the

aforesaid responsibility of the Contractor. F. Project Safety Programme: Within 30 days of the Date of Enterprise and before commencement of construction activity on site, the Contractor shall submit a detailed Project Safety Programme. The Safety Programme to include as in the following: 1. Name and credentials of Site Safety Officer 2. Fire Protection and Prevention Plan 3. Accident Prevention Plan 4. First Aid Plan 5. Laborers Education Plan 6. Special job safety measures specifically for the contract for approval by the

Engineer. 1.08 CASH FLOW ESTIMATES A. From the Date of Enterprise the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer's

Representative monthly cash flow estimate covering the period from the Date of Enterprise to end of the defects Liability Period. Monthly cash flows estimates shall show net figures after deduction of retention and shall compare actual against estimated cash flows as work progresses. 1.09 DIGITAL RECORD A. From the Date of Enterprise until issuance of certificate of substantial completion, the Contractor shall digitally record using a proprietary system all correspondence,

submittals and issued by the Contractor to /through the Engineer/Engineer's Representative. The digital recording system shall enable users to search the database using key words for fast and easy retrieval of related correspondence. The digital recording system shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.


______________________________________________________________________


B. On a monthly basis until substantial completion, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer's Representative three (3) sets of the complete updated digital record database. Three (3) copies of the necessary software for accessing and reading the material shall delivered with the first month's submittal. One set shall be for the Employer, and two sets for the Engineer's Representative. 1.10 ENGINEER AND ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is the Engineer's Representative will review each submittal, marked to indicate action taken, and return promptly, compatible with the requirements of the review, generally in fourteen (140) calendar days but in less time when a request for this has been accepted by the Engineer's Representative or more time when that is unavoidable in the Engineer's Representative's opinion. B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. C. Responsibility for Review: 1. The Engineer's Representative review of submittals by the Contractor is for general conformance with the design concept and information given in the Contract Document and such review or approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the requirements of Contract Documents. 2. The Engineer's Representative review shall not be construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any kind in submittals, or from the necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents, which may have been omitted on the submittals. The Engineer's Representative will review and will return them to the Contractor with the stamp applied thereto. No acceptance or approval of submittals, nor any indication or request marked by the Engineer's Representative on any submittal, shall constitute an authorization for any increase in the Contract Sum or Time for Completion or a change in the Contract requirements. 3. The Contractor will not be relieved from responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract after approval of submittals by the Engineer's Representative or such deviation at the time of submitting submittals. The Contractor shall indicate on resubmitted submittals, all

revisions as well as those requested by the Engineer's Representative. 4. Comments by the Engineer's Representative which increase Contract cost Or time of completion shall be brought to the Engineer's Representative's attention before proceeding with the Works. D. Action Stamp 1. Each submittal will be returned to the Contractor stamped or marked by the Engineer's Representative indicating the appropriate action as follow: Action "A" : APPROVED means that fabrication, manufacture, or Construction may proceed.


______________________________________________________________________


Action "B" : APPROVED SUBJECT TO COMMENTS OR APPROVED AS NOTED means that fabrication, Manufacture, or construction may proceed provided

submittal complies with the Engineer's Representative's comments. If, for any reason, the Contractor cannot comply with the notations, the

Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit as Described for submittals stamped RESUBMIT. Action"C" : NOT APPROVED AND RESUBMIT means that the Submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents and that fabrication, manufacturer or Construction shall not proceed. Submittals stamped RESUBMIT are not permitted on the Site of the Works and are not to be used. The Contractor shall make the required revisions and resubmit. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his works irrespective of approval by the Engineer's Representative and shall pay all costs and expenses incurred by other Contractors, if any, due to improper location of his works. 3. After submittals have been approved by the Engineer's Representative, they shall not be departed from, unless resubmitted and approved by the Engineer's Representative or modified by Variation Order as provided under the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used.



______________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01333-1 SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

SECTION 01333

SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of shop Drawings. Record Documents and As-Built Drawings and other miscellaneous quality control Submittals. B. Shop Drawings, Record Document and As-Built Drawings include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Fabrication drawings. 2. Installation drawings 3. Setting diagrams 4. Shop work manufacturing instructions 5. Templates and patterns Drawings prepared with standard information without specific reference to the Works will not be approved as Shop Drawings, Record Document and As-Built Drawings. C. Quality control submittals include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Design data 1.02 DEFINATIONS A. "Shop Drawings" shall establish actual plans, section and details of all

Construction assembled, manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work , amplify design details whether or not included in contract drawings of all work including but not limited to civil, architectural, interiors, mechanical, electrical and site works in proper relation to physical spaces and incorporate minor changes of design of construction to suit actual conditions at no additional cost.

B. As Built Drawings: "As Built Drawings" are drawings prepared by the

Contractor incorporating all the variations/ changes /deviations to the contract drawings. They represent the As-Built conditions of the works completed.

C. "Record Documents" are a record of the works actually installed as the work progresses including records of all changes and deviation from the Contract Documents.


______________________________________________________________________


1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES BY CONTRACTOR A. Drawings – For approval, every time four (4) paper prints of each Shop

Drawings As-Built Drawings and Record Documents with transmittal forms to the Engineer's Representative.

B. Drawings – After approval, for record and distribution: Three (3) paper prints to the Engineer's Representative and more to all concerned sub-contractors as necessary. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (IF ANY) A. Should the Contractor be required to carry out any design, then design layout provided shall be for the purpose of general guidance. The Contractor is required to submit full design shop drawings, complete with calculations, catalogues,etc for the Engineer's Representative scrutiny and approval before ordering materials or proceeding with the work on site. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Do not Reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of Shop Drawings. 1. Include the following information on Shop Drawings. a. Dimensions using SI units b. Identification of products and materials included c. Compliance with specified standards d. Notation of coordination requirements e. Notations of dimensions established by field measurements 2. Number shop drawings for each section of the works consecutively and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. 3. Dimension: Metric Measurements shall be used in all documents and drawings.

4. The size of shop drawings will be either A0 or A3 depending on the Content of the drawing and as agreed by the Engineer's Representative.

5. Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's stamp and signature certifying that they have been coordinated and checked by the Contractor for completeness and compliance with the Contract and all respective Sub-Contractors, vendors and each subcontractor and each other. The Contractor shall indicate his approval on the original shop drawing/ composite shop drawing.


______________________________________________________________________


In the event any one of the other Contractors employed or to be employed by the Employer is not on board in a timely manner, then

coordination is to be done based design drawings made available by the Engineers Representative. The Engineer's Representative will not accept any shop drawing without this necessary coordination step having been completed.

6. Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which product or

Item is being submitted for consideration and each product or item shall be marked for identification with the applicable page and paragraph number of the Specification and/or the detail and sheet number of the Contract Drawings.

7. The Contractor shall submit composite Shop Drawings coordinating the work of his Sub-Contractors for mechanical, electrical, structural, architectural, and site work, The composite drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural members and related architectural features, and shall show clearance between such work. The Contractor will, apart from individual trade drawings submit composite coordinate shop drawings showing sections, elevations, reflected plans, etc. resolving all conflicts in level, alignment, access space etc. 8. Shop Drawings shall show in detail, materials, dimensions, thickness,

assembly, joints, attachments, relation to adjoining work, and all other pertinent data and information. In checking shop drawing, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions and site conditions and shall check and coordinate the Shop Drawings of any Section or Trade with the requirements of all other Sections or Trades of other Contractors if any; as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation and execution of the Works. The Works shall confirm to the Contract Drawings or to such other Drawings as may issued from time to time during the progress of the Works by the Engineer's Representative.

9. The Contractor, is required, as described elsewhere, to provide design (where It is Contractor's responsibility to carryout design), coordination, installation, shop and builder's drawings, composite drawings coordinated between architectural, structural and services works and other information as appropriate, collectively referred to as shop drawings. Allow for the completion of all such drawings, checking and inspection by the Engineer's Representative and any subsequent amendment, re-submission(s), and Re-inspection(s), when preparing the Construction Schedule for the Works and checking by Contractor.

10. Engineer's Representative's Review: The Engineer's Representative will note any comments on one copy of the drawings, date and sign to show that they have been inspected, then return to the Contractor. Review of drawings, and any comments made by the Engineer's Representative will not relieve the Contractor, Subcontractors and/or Suppliers of responsibility for compliance with Contract Requirements, design, documentation and checking as appropriate.


______________________________________________________________________


11. Amendments: Ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are

made accordance with any comments of the Engineers Representative and resubmit without delay. Unless resubmission is not required, obtain copies of amendment drawings, check; re-submit to the Engineer's Representative ensuring incorporation of necessary further amendments all as before.

12. Distribution of final version: Obtain final version of all drawings, submit the required number of copies to the Engineer's Representative additional copies as appropriate to all concerned Subcontractors and Suppliers, and keep at least one copy on Site. Ensure that work is carried out in accordance with the final drawings.

13. Variations: Should any amendment to drawings required by the Engineer's Representative, or any discrepancy, or divergence be considered a variation, notify the Engineer's Representative without delay and in any case within 7 days, and do not proved with ordering, fabrication, erection or installation until subsequently instructed. 1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. As the work progresses the Contractor shall maintain on a continuous basis a complete and accurate record of all charges and deviations from the Contract Documents which shall be kept at the Site for inspection by the Engineer's Representative. B. The Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda ,written amendments, variation/change orders and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and indexed and annotated to show all changes made to the works during the construction.

C. These record documents together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all approved shop drawings will be available to the Engineer's Representative/ Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Works, these record documents, samples and shop drawings will be delivered to the Engineer's Representative for Employer's record.

D. After the Contractor has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for Substantial Completion Payment Application.


______________________________________________________________________


1.07 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish for the approval of the Engineer's Representative accurate as built drawings incorporating the latest amendments (Variations/Changes/Deviations) to the Contract Drawings. B. The As-Built Drawings shall show the works as executed complete with

existing and finished levels and all other things necessary to form an accurate pictorial record of the finished work.

C. Prior to the preparation of as built drawings the Contractor shall obtain the

Approval of the Engineer's Representative as to the size of drawings, method of drawing and other relevant details.

D. All As-Built Drawings shall be numbered and shall have a number series

approved by the Engineer's Representative. A drawing index shall be provided. E. The Contractor shall submit and resubmit till final approval by the Engineer's Representative: four number of copies during each submittal. F. Finally, submit after approval, properly identified in a permanent manner,

six (6) sets of hard copies or as mentioned in Document 2 -11 of Particular Conditions Section 5-36 of all As-Built Drawings using the latest format of AutoCAD.

1.08 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER'S DATA A. When specified in individual specification Sections submit manufacturers

Specifications, manufacturers printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. Also, submit standard coloured charts, catalogues cuts, standard wiring diagrams, painted performance curves, operational range diagram, mill reports.

B. Submit to Engineer's Representative for review, conformance certificates from manufacturer's to verify their compliance with Contract Documents. Provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for Project Record Documents purposes. C. Submit three (3) number of copies. D. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this Contract. E. Study the Manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents, to combine the two to produce the most stringent requirements to form the basis of contract price, execution method, material and time. F. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.


______________________________________________________________________


G. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention and special environment criteria required for application or installation. H. After review distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for Project Record Documents. I. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction of system. Mark each copy t show with choices and options are applicable to the Works.

1. Where Product Data includes information on several similar products, Some of which are not required for use on the works, mark copies clearly to indicate which products are applicable.

2. Where Product Data must be specially for required products, materials or systems because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit for use, submit as shop drawings not Product data. 3. Include the following information in Product Data: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards, c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurements. f. Notation of co-ordination requirements. 4. Do not submit Product data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

1.09 SAMPLES A. Submit full size, fully fabricated samples, cured and finished in the manner specified, and physically identical with the material or product proposed for use.

1. Mount, display or pack samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualitities indicated. Prepare samples to match a designated sample where so indicated. Include the following information: a. Generic description of the sample. b. Size limitations c. Sample source d. Product name or name of manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Compliance with governing regulations. g. Availability h. Delivery time, measured from the date of the Engineer's Representative approval till the delivery on Works Site.


______________________________________________________________________


2. For review of kind, colour, pattern and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between the submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed: a. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes (except when more restrictive or definite requirements are specified for colour, textures and patterns) for Engineer's Representative selection. b. Where variation in colour, pattern, texture or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented by a sample, submit multiple units that show full range of the variations.

B. Submission of Material Samples. Submit three samples of each material to the Engineer's Representative, each at least 300 x 300mm in size unless the actual size of the materials is smaller. No sample will be reviewed if is submitted in sizes smaller than stated above. The Engineer's representative shall review these samples and shall approve if they are as per the specifications or reject and ask for new submittal if they are not as per the required specifications. C. Submission of Material Samples in System Application. Submit three samples to the Engineer's Representative for approval of finish Building materials, shown assemble in the proposed application for the Works. The application samples must be at least 600 x 600mm in size to show the total assemblage of the intended materials. No sample would be reviewed if the size of the assembly if submitted in sizes smaller than stated above. The Engineer's Representative shall review these samples and shall approve if they are as per the specifications or reject and ask for new submittal if they are not as per the required specifications. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. E. Include identification on each sample, with full information of Works. F. Should requirements relating to samples be mentioned in the Tender Documents elsewhere, the combination and more stringent requirement shall govern. G. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article and for Record Documents purposes. 1.10 DESIGN DATA A. Submit to the Engineer's Representative Design data for the purpose of

Assessing conformance with information given and design and concept expressed in Contract Documents.


______________________________________________________________________


1.11 TEST REPORTS A. Submit to the Engineer's Representative Test Reports for information for the purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1.12 CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit Certification by manufacturer, installation/ application subcontractor, or Contractor to Engineer's Representative, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent test results on material or Product and must be

acceptable to Engineer's Representative.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION A. Refer clause for Product Data. 1.14 ERECTION DRAWINGS A. Refer clause for Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED



_______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01300-1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS

1.01 GENERAL

Contractor's submittals mean but not limited to the following list of items submitted to the Engineer for his approval: − Insurance Policies − Contractor's Site Layout Organisation Plan(s) − Contractor's Manpower Organisation Chart − Contractor's time schedule and updates − Contractor's staff, sub-contractor's staff qualifications and experience − Shop drawings − Design drawings requested by contract − Samples of materials − Catalogues, data sheets, etc. − Mock ups − All types of reports in writing, photographs, and video tapes − Any other items required by the Contract Documents

1.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME

A. General The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a construction programme indicating the phases and extent of Work to be carried out. The Construction Programme is to include: 1. Cash flow prediction All to be updated monthly 2. Bar chart in time scale format to reflect progress 3. CPM/PERT Network

The Owner and the Engineer shall at any time have the full authority to request any modifications to the construction programme whether before or after approval of such programme with an individual time bar for each operation per area of construction. Where any Work must be sequenced or intermittent with other Work, detailed procedures and sequences of operation must be fully detailed in the construction programme.

B. Area Separations The Contractor shall arrange the construction programme with an individual

time bar for each operation per area of construction. Where any Work must be sequenced for intermeshed with other Work, detailed procedures and sequence of operation must be fully detailed in the construction programme. The Contractor shall prepare material status schedule showing date ordered, expected time of arrival (ETA) and programme implications on a regular bi-monthly basis or at such time requested by the Engineer.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


C. Progress and Programme Reports The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer each week a progress report

showing actual progress by identifying activities and Work commenced and those completed during the previous week, estimated time required to complete all activities under way in relation to the programme of Works, a detailed programme for activities to be carried out during the following week and progress photographs. Such reports shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. GENERALLY The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and timely production

of shop drawings, product data and samples as required to show that materials, manufactured and fabricated items, equipment, installations, systems and controls and the position thereof conform to the Contract. This responsibility applied to all sections of the work including work to be executed by sub-contractors and goods, materials or services to be provided by manufacturers, fabricators, merchants or tradesmen, nominated or otherwise. Sub-contractors, manufacturers, etc., shall submit shop drawings, data and samples through the Main Contractor. The Contractor shall allow for completion of all submissions, checking, inspection by the Engineer and any subsequent amendment(s), re-submission(s) and re-inspection(s) when preparing the master programme for the Work and shall submit shop drawings, product data and samples in such sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work. The contractor shall within thirty (30) days of the signing of the Contract or at such other time agreed with the Engineer submit to and agree with the Engineer a schedule of the drawings, data and samples to be submitted; the schedule shall include proposed drawing numbers, titles and scale, brief descriptions of the submissions and proposed submission dates. In the event of disagreement on submission dates the Engineer shall fix such other dates as shall, in his opinion, be reasonable and proper with regard to the necessary progress of the Work. The Contractor shall comply with the programme so agreed or amended and any other amendments to the programme required by the Engineer thereafter. Dates for resubmissions shall be similarly agreed or fixed and complied with. No extension of time will be granted because of the Contractor's failure to have shop drawings, data and samples submitted (and, if necessary, resubmitted) in ample time to allow for processing and review. The minimum review period required by the Engineer shall be three weeks from the date of any submission unless the Engineer shall at his sole discretion agree to any lesser period in a particular instance. Failure on the part of the Contractor to have the Engineer review all or any of the shop drawings, data and samples shall not prejudice the specified period within which the Contract shall be executed or in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities and obligations under the Contract.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer in writing, no Work shall commence until the relevant shop drawings, data and samples have been finally reviewed. Any Work required to be re-done due to the Contractor's neglect to comply with this requirement shall be at the contractor's expense. The term "Contract" as used in this section shall mean the Conditions of Contract. The term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass produced. the term "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS The term "shop drawings" includes design when required by the contract,

fabrication, erection, layout, setting-out, coordination and builder's Work drawings, schedules, bending schedules, diagrams of the various systems and other data to be specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor, sub-contractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers and the like to illustrate the various parts of the Work, their inter-relationship and methods of construction.

Shop drawings shall establish actual detail of all assembled, manufactured or

fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical spaces within the structure and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions. Shop drawings shall show, in details, the design, materials, finishes, dimensions, thicknesses, assembly, fixings, attachments, the brand name and manufacturer's type identification number where a shop coat of paint is required and all other pertinent data and information.

Shop drawings for each section of the Work shall be numbered consecutively

and each sheet shall indicate the total number of sheets in the set. The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.

Shop drawings shall be produced in clear reproducible negative form to a

high standard of draughting and finished in ink on 0.075 mm stable polyester film. The drawings to be produced, the drawing format, numbers, titles and scales and the level of detail to be shown shall be agreed with the Engineer. Prints shall be of approved size, clear, legible blue line prints produced by an approved process using sized cut sheets.

The Contractor shall check and verify dimensions, site measurements and

field conditions for his own purposes in preparing shop drawings and whenever requested by sub-contractors, manufacturers, etc., to enable them to prepare their own shop drawings and pass information to them with sufficient promptness as will not in any way delay the Work. A copy of all such information shall be given to the Engineer. In addition to preparing and submitting shop drawings for each section or trade of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit composite shop drawings showing coordination of the mechanical, electrical, structural and


_______________________________________________________________________________________


architectural work and depicting proposed solutions for tight site conditions. These drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural members and architectural features and shall show clearances between such work.

1.04 PRODUCT DATA

The term "product data" means manufacturers', fabricators' and suppliers' illustrations, diagrams, standard drawings and schedules, performances charts, data sheets, catalogues, brochures, instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection, details of guarantees and other information relating to materials, manufactured and fabricated items, equipment and the like to be provided by the Contractor.

1.05 SAMPLES

The term "samples" shall mean natural materials, manufactured and fabricated items, equipment, devices, appliances and other samples as may be required to determine whether kind, quality, construction, workmanship, finish, colour and other characteristics conform with the requirements of the Contract and are suitable for the uses intended. Accepted samples shall establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

1.06 SUBMISSIONS

Submissions shall comprise:

A. One set of sepia transparencies, reverse printed, rolled and transmitted in mailing tubes and three sets each separately bound of blue-line prints for all shop drawings;

B. Three copies of product data in A4 size bound and indexed booklet or

brochure form; sheets larger than A4 size shall be folded in such a way that they can be unfolded without being removed from the binding;

C. Samples in triplicate; samples shall generally be submitted in containers

bearing or accompanied by manufacturers' descriptive labels and printed instructions.

The drawings, data and samples for each product, installation and system shall be submitted at the same time and shall include sufficient information to permit a detailed study to be carried out. Metric measurements shall be used in all submissions. If imperial or other units are shown, equivalent metric measurements shall be shown in addition. The Contractor shall thoroughly check all drawings, data and samples prior to their submission to ensure completeness and conformance with Contract requirements and that the various works, installations and services do not conflict with each other or with the building structure, fabric or finishes either during construction or in the finished building.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


Each shop drawing and sample shall be properly identified with the name of Project, the Contractor, the sub-contractor, fabricator or manufacturer and the data. Each drawing and sample shall have a clear space for the stamps of the Contractor and the Engineer; where clear space is not available, the Contractor shall attach tags or sticker to the drawing or samples. Shop drawings, data and samples shall bear the Contractor's stamp certifying that they have been coordinated and checked by the Contractor and that they are approved by the contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any quantities and dimensions which may be shown on the submissions. Each submission shall be accompanied by an approved transmittal form. The transmittal forms shall be supplied by the Contractor in A4 size and shall be so formulated as to contain all the information and details hereinafter described. Prior to printing of the forms, the Contractor is to agree their format with the Engineer. the Contractor shall insert the following information on the forms using a typewriter.

1. Name of Project and Project Number 2. Name of Contractor and, where appropriate, the name of the sub-contractor

and/or supplier who has prepared the submission. 3. Name of contractor's employee responsible for Contractor's Review. 4. Transmittal number (which shall be consecutive for the Work). 5. Date of submission. 6. Submission number - 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc., depending on previous submission

for same items. 7. Number of copies submitted and type of material submitted (sepia, print,

brochure or sample, etc.). 8. The applicable detail and sheet numbers of the contract Drawings and the

applicable Specification section, page, clause and paragraph numbers. (items from more than one specification section should not be submitted on the same form).

9. Drawing number(s), title(s), and date(s). 10. Parts/areas, etc., of the Work to which samples pertain and date on which

materials are to be incorporated into the Work. 11. Contractor's remarks including any exceptions or deviations from the

Contract and the reasons there for. The transmittal forms shall also have space available for the information to be inserted by the Engineer in accordance with clause 1.8.6 hereunder.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


Should the Contractor intentionally submit drawings data, and/or samples which differ from the requirements of the Contract Documents, each such difference must be the subject of a formal request by the Contractor for substitution or variation, supported by all relevant information.

Submissions which, in the Engineer's opinion, are incomplete, contain errors or have not been checked or have only been checked superficially will be returned for resubmission. This action from Contractor will put restraints on the progress of the Work.

1.07 ENGINEER'S REVIEW

Except for aesthetic matters such as finish and colour and any other matters left to the Engineer's decision by the Contract, the Engineer's review of shop drawings, data and samples submitted by the contractor is for general conformance with the design concept and information contained in the contract and will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements, design, documentation and checking. The Engineer will process each submission within the times agreed in the program of Works and within such time as is reasonably necessary for review. The Engineer will note any comments on the drawings, etc., date and sign the submission to show that it has been inspected and return it to the Contractor indicating the appropriate action to be taken by the contractor as follows:

A. A “APPROVED” means that fabrication, manufacture or construction may

proceed. B. B “APPROVED AS NOTED” means that fabrication, manufacture or

construction may proceed provided that the Contractor complies with the Engineer's notations. If, for any reason, the Contractor cannot comply with such notations, the Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit as described for submissions stamped C “REVISE & RESUBMIT”.

C. C “REVISED & RESUBMIT” means that the submission does not comply with

the Contract and that fabrication, manufacture or construction shall not proceed. Such submissions are not permitted on the site and are not to be used. The Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit.

The Engineer will, in addition, insert the following information on the transmittal: 1 Date received by the Engineer. 2. Date returned by the Engineer to the Contractor.

3. Name of consultant to whom submission is sent for review and date sent. 4. Number of copies and type of material distributed (sepia, print, brochure,

sample, etc.). 5. Action taken. 6. Engineer's remarks including major deviations from the Contract or

reasons for C REVISE & SUBMIT if there are no notes on the submission itself.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


The Engineer will return one set of shop prints, one copy of product data and one of each sample. The Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the Contract and errors of any kind in the submissions or from the necessity of furnishing any Work required by the contract which may have been omitted from the submissions. The Engineer's review of an individual item shall not indicate review of the complete assembly in which it functions.

Neither acceptance of reviewed submissions nor any comment marked thereon by the Engineer shall constitute an authorization for any increase in the Contract price or time. Should any submission or amendments to submissions required by the Engineer or comments noted on submissions by the Engineer be considered by the Contractor to involve or be a variation, the contractor must notify the Engineer without delay and in any case within seven (7) days and should not proceed with ordering, fabrication, erection or installation until subsequently instructed by the Engineer. Claims for extra cost and/or time if made after ordering, fabrication, erection or installation will not be accepted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and submission of any amplification of drawings required by the Engineer and/or needed for the completion of the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of the Work, irrespective of approval of submissions by the Engineer and shall pay all costs and expenses incurred due to improper location of the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay (at no extra charge to the Employer) for any alterations of the Work due to discrepancies, errors or omissions in his submissions whether or not such submissions have been reviewed by the Engineer, provided that such discrepancies, errors or omissions are not due to inaccurate information or particulars furnished in writing to the Contractor by the Engineer. After shop drawings, data and samples have been finally reviewed by the engineer, they shall not be departed from unless modified by an Engineer's Variation Order. The Contractor shall submit the required number of copies of the final version of all drawings etc. to the Engineer, distribute additional copies as appropriate to all affected sub-contractors, etc., and keep at least one copy on site.

1.08 RE-SUBMISSIONS

The Contractor shall ensure that any necessary amendments to submissions are made in accordance with any comments of the Engineer and without delay. Re-submitted requirements and procedures and transmittal forms accompanying resubmissions shall be as for the initial submission (except that transmittal and submission numbers and dates will differ). The contractor shall indicate on


_______________________________________________________________________________________


resubmitted drawings, samples or data the revisions requested by the Engineer, any other revisions and the resubmission dates. No new submission shall be included on the same transmittal as a resubmission and no group of resubmissions shall be included on the same transmittal. The resubmission process shall be repeated by the Contractor until the Engineer indicated A ACTION or, provided the Contractor complies with the Engineer's notations, B ACTION has been received.

1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:

When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but

must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.11 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Each month submit 2 sets of 20 colour photographs to the Engineer. B. Photographs: Colour, mat, 120 x 180 mm size; mounted on A4 size soft card

stock, with left edge binding margin for hole punch, each set contained in an album, each photograph signed and dated by the Contractor.

C. Take site photographs from differing directions and interior photographs

indicating the relative progress of the Work, 7 days maximum prior to submitting, from directions as instructed by the Engineer.

D. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and project identification


نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة محافظة ( الفروانية )

______________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01500-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL

SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1. Temporary Utilities:

1. Temporary electricity.

2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes.

3. Temporary heating.

4. Temporary cooling.

5. Temporary ventilation.

6. Temporary telephone service.

7. Temporary facsimile service.

8. Temporary water service.

9. Temporary sanitary facilities.

10. Temporary drainage.

2. Construction Facilities:

1. Field offices, sheds, vehicles, kitchens and canteen.

2. Vehicular access.

3. Parking.

4. Progress cleaning and waste removal.

5. Project identification.

6. Traffic regulation.

3. Temporary Controls:

1. Barriers.

2. Enclosures and fencing.

3. Protection of the Work.

4. Security.

5. Water control.

6. Dust control.

7. Erosion and sediment control.

8. Noise control.

9. Pest control.

10. Pollution control.

11. Rodent control.

12. Fire protection.


______________________________________________________________


13. Storage and plant.

14. Coverings.

15. Stairs, scaffolding, ladders, ramps, runways etc.

16. Materials and personnel hoists.

17. Construction openings.

18. Safety measures and standards.

19. Labours sanitary and toilet facilities.

4. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.

5. All Services and Temporary Controls as specified under this section should be provided by the Contractor commencing the mobilization period through the contract duration plus 2 months.

A. TEMPORARY UTILITIES:

1. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

a. Provide, install and maintain all necessary electrical equipment and pay for power service required from utility source or any other means as needed for construction operation. Co-ordinate with and obtain utility source approval (MEW). All temporary electrical works shall be in accordance with latest MEW Regulations. The distribution system design, with all relevant electrical data, should be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

b. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed by Engineer. Do not disrupt Employers use of service.

c. The temporary electrical service shall be of adequate capacity and characteristics as required for all construction operations and lighting purposes.

d. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment. Terminations shall be provided complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system.

e. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location. Feeder switch at source distribution equipment and meter. All wiring shall be maintained in a safe manner and utilized so as not to constitute a hazard to person or properties.

f. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilised during construction.

g. If temporary supply is not granted by MEW, then the Contractor must make his own arrangement for providing supply of electricity in order to accomplish the work. At completion of the work remove all temporary electrical equipments and cabling after obtaining Engineer’s approval.

2. TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

a. Provide install and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum lighting level of 21 watt/sq. m.


______________________________________________________________


b. Provide and maintain 10.8 watt/sq. m lighting to exterior staging, storage areas and entire site, after dark for security and emergency purposes.

c. Provide and maintain 2.7 watt/sq. m H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes.

d. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels.

e. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

f. Permanent building lighting shall not be utilised during construction.

3. TEMPORARY HEATING

a. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

b. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

4. TEMPORARY COOLING

a. Provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

b. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

c. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in accordance with Enclosures article in this section.

d. Maintain maximum ambient temperature as required by Kuwait Labour Law, in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

5. TEMPORARY VENTILATION

a. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapours, or gases.

b. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.

6. TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE

a. Provide, install and maintain as Section 01514 Temporary Telephones, and pay for telephone service and one telephone instrument per room, to Contractor’s field office at time of project mobilisation, and throughout the contract duration.

b. Provide, install and maintain as Section 01514 Temporary Telephones, and pay for local telephone services, to Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer's field offices at time of project mobilization. Provide direct fax lines, Internet lines and hunting lines for Engineer, Construction Manager and Engineer’s Representative.

7. TEMPORARY FACSIMILE SERVICE

a. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone line to Contractor’s field office at time of project mobilisation, and throughout the contract duration.


______________________________________________________________


b. Provide maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone lines, without international line facilities, to Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager and Engineer's Representative Field office.

8. TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

a. Provide and pay for suitable clean, free of deleterious substances and drinkable quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Connect to existing water source.

b. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available for Sub-contractors at ground level by hoses with threaded connections.

c. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

d. Co-ordinate with concerned utility authorities and Employer for the supply of the service.

e. At completion of the work remove all temporary water installations and connection after obtaining Engineer’s approval.

f. No brackish water will be allowed to be used for construction of the Works.

g. Provide adequate facilities for the supply of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled drinking water for employees, where work is in progress.

h. All costs for providing temporary water shall be borne by the Contractor.

9. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

a. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of project mobilisation.

b. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

c. The sanitary accommodation at the ground level shall comprise temporary toilet building(s) in an approved location, of approved construction in compliance with the local authority having jurisdiction and as per Article 1.9.19.

d. Upon completion of work remove all temporary sanitary facilities after detaining Engineers’ approval.

10. TEMPORARY DRAINAGE

a. Upon taking possession of the Site the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for drainage rainwater, ground-water and water arising from construction processes, and shall provide and maintain such temporary drainage installations as may be necessary during the period of construction in a manner approved by the Engineer’s Representative and so as not to adversely affect the permanent works or adjacent areas and properties.

b. Temporary drainage installation (storm water and foul water) may be connected to existing drains provided written permission is obtained from the local authorities have jurisdiction thereof, and provided such connection work is executed and maintained in strict accordance with those authorities regulations and directions.

c. At completion of the work, or at such times s the Engineer’s Representative may direct, remove all temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the Engineer’s Representative satisfaction and as required by the concerned authorities.


______________________________________________________________


B. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 1. FIELD OFFICES, SHEDS, VEHICLES, KITCHENS AND CANTEENS.

A. TEMPORARY SITE OFICES

i. Contractor’s Offices: The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the provision and maintenance during the operational life of the Contract of adequate air conditioned and furnished office accommodation and car sheds, for the usage of the Contractor and his Sub-contractors. Adequate fire prevention measures shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such offices shall be sited as approved by the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative and shall be cleared away on completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The layout of the Contractor’s site offices is subject to the approval of the Engineer’s Representative.

B. FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

i. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

ii. Designated spaces will be identified for locating field offices, sheds and storage areas in agreement with the Engineer. All areas to be fenced and provided with gates and appropriate gatehouse/security to the approval of the Engineer, See Article 1.9.2.

iii. Design, supply and erect the project’s field offices and sheds in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the Employer.

iv. Obtain approvals from statutory authorities having jurisdiction, pay fees and provide guarantees as required.

v. Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit for Engineer’s review and acceptance, copies of specifications for all field offices and equipment verifying that products comply with the requirements.

vi. Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit layout plans for all field offices to Engineer’s for review and acceptance.

vii. Install field offices ready for occupancy within 45 days after Date of Enterprise.

viii. Office: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, air-conditioning and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack, and drawing display table.

ix. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs as Article ‘O’.

x. Provide separate private office similarly equipped and furnished, for use of Employer, Engineer and Engineer’s representatives.

xi. Locate offices and sheds minimum distance of 10m from existing and new structures to Engineer’s approval.

xii. Do not use permanent facilities for field offices or for storage without prior approval of the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________


xiii. Construction: Structural Steel or Pre-Engineered type buildings with concrete footings and slab on grade.

1. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces. Maintain during progress of Work; remove when authorised at completion of Work.

2. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.

3. Exterior Materials: Sandwich Panels Pre-insulated weather resistant, heat insulated, finished in one colour acceptable to Engineer.

4. Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat and sound insulated, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and skirting in entrance, corridors and wet areas. Carpet tiles to all other areas. Provide false ceilings in all rooms.

5. Lighting for Offices: Recessed fluorescent light fittings to all rooms, 500 Lux at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.

6. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate Kuwait Fire Directorate approved type fire extinguisher at each exit, at every 30m of corridor and in each storage area.

7. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of sample products.

8. Name plates and locks to all corridor and office doors.

9. All windows should be located and sized as per approved shop drawings and provided with operable sash and insect screens and Venetian blinds.

10. Provide minimum four 13A, 240 volt single convenience electrical outlet, for each room, one on each wall together with two phone points and one computer networks point.

11. Environmental Control:

12. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions. 20 degrees C, heating and 23 degrees C cooling by split unit A/C system with built-in heating element.

13. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products.

14. Exhaust fan with automatic shutter and insect screen to opening installed to WC, kitchen, tea rooms and meeting rooms.


______________________________________________________________


C. FIELD REPRESENTATIVE OFFICES:

EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE OFFICES

Provide site offices for sole use of the Owner's Representative with new lock and two keys to main entrance provided within 45 days of the Date of Enterprise. Provide one sign board (1) sq.m. with English and Arabic lettering to indicate the office.

A. OFFICES AND FURNITURE

1. EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE

One Room 40 sq. m. net area (including Private Toilets with WC, hand basin and all accessories. − 1 No. “Executive Type” Desk size 2200 x 950mm approx., with side

table and including armchair (swivel). − 1 No. Credenza size 1000 X 600 mm. − 1 No. Table size 2000 X 1000 mm for drawings. − 1 No. Round meeting table with 4 chairs. − 1 No. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system. − 1 No. two bookshelves slide door cabinet. − 4 Nos. chairs for visitors. − 1 No. Tack Board (fibreboard) size 2400 x 1200mm approx. − 1 No. Coffee Table. − 1 No. Book shelf cabinet with 4 shelves (w=900mm, d=400mm,

h=1400mm) − 2 Sets of 3 filing trays. − 1 No. Plastic waste bin. − 1 No. Complete sofa set with one three seater and two single seater

(Executive Type)

2. EMPLOYER'S STAFF (6 Nos.)

One Room each 16 sq. m. area

− 1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx., including armchair (swivel).

− 1 No. Table size 2000 X 1000 mm for drawings.

− 2 Nos. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system.

− 1 No. two bookshelves slide door cabinet.

− 1 No. Computer side table.

− 2 Nos. chairs for visitors.

− 1 No. Tack Board (fibreboard) size 2400 x 1200mm approx.

− 1 No. Book shelf cabinet with 4 shelves (w=900mm, d=400mm, h=1400mm).

− 1 Set of 3 filing trays.

− 1 No. Plastic waste bin.


______________________________________________________________


3. EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE SECRETARY (1 No.)

One Room each 12 sq. m. area:

− 1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx., including armchair (swivel).

− 4 Nos. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system.

− 2 Nos. two bookshelves slide door cabinet.

− 1 Nos. Computer side table.


− 1 No. Shelved Filing Cabinet.

− 4 Nos. Lockable, fire-proof steel filing cabinets each with hinged lockable doors and three intermediate shelves, cabinet size 920x1800x450mm approx.



4. VISITOR HALL (1 No.)

One Room of area 30 sq. m. including:

− Sofa seating sets to occupy 20 persons with coffee tables (8 Nos.) and two middle tables.

B. COMPUTERS: Shall comply with the latest technology configurations, at date of order.

Personal computer (8 Nos.)

Dell, Compaq, (or approved equivalent).

− Minimum Intel Pentium IV original with 1.5 GHz. (or latest at time of ordering)

− 256 KB integrated advanced transfer cache.

− ECC 256 MB PC-133MHz SDRAM – minimum.

− 32 MB 4X4AGP ATI Rage Ultra 128.

− 40 GB Hard disk Internal.

− 56 K V.90 PCI Data/Fax modem or latest.

− Multimedia 17” flat panel display (17” viewable) with latest features.

− PS/2 104 keyboard - minimum

− 1 parallel, 2 serial, 2 USB ports minimum

− 3Com Fast Ether link XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and

− Remote Wake-UP (RJ-45)

− Internal DVD-ROM drive with latest speed.

− Full multimedia (Sound Blaster) latest release.

− UPS with 5 minutes electricity battery backup works also as a stabilizer.

− 3 Nos. HP Laser Jet A4 black and white Printers (latest at time of order) (or approved equivalent).


______________________________________________________________


C. OTHER EQUIPMENT

− Membership with Internet provider in Kuwait. A dedicated direct line for five (5) users minimum to be able to log into the internet at same time.

1 No. Photocopier (Black & White) A4/A3, Xerox 470 or latest, (or approved equivalent), with following minimum requirements: 160 MB RAM, 4.5 GB System Disk, 10/100 Base T network interface, Convenience stapler and work surface up to 50 sheets with stock 5,000 staples per cartridge, Electronic, Auditor Report, Foreign Device Interface with Sixth Sense modem. Print drivers for Windows 95/98/Nt/2000/XP. Print Management Service. Simplex or Duplex printing. Network Fax. Integrated copy, print, fax and scan-ST configuration.

1 No. Fax Machine, Xerox Pro 555 or latest (or approved equivalent), Heavy Duty, plain paper fax.

1 No. Photocopier (color) A4/A3, Xerox DOCUCOLOR 2006DPC (or approved equivalent), 10/100 Base TX Ethernet, heavy weight, coated gloss and transparencies, 512 MB RAM, 6GB internal Hard Disk, Automatic 2-sided printing, Automatic Document Feeder, Oversize Paper Tray (250 sheets).

1 No. 3M MP8750 (or approved equivalent) portable data projector, with minimum 1500 ANSI luments, Digital Light Processing (DLP) with 16.7 million color at true XGA (1024x768) resolution-minimum, Intelligent image scaling technology, optimizes, image quality for SVGA and VGA resolution and video Powerized image shift 0-120 with keystone, free image, five input channels, RGBS and RS232 serial interface support for fixed installations. Soft travel case and hard shipping case, replacement lamp, allow the supplier to give training to use the projector.

2 Nos. portable large screens for projector show. The screen might be tilted forward and backward for good screen result projection.

1 No. Digital camera, SONY (or approved equivalent), compatible with windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP. 3 million lumens minimum. Macro zooming. Capable of panoramic shots. Carrying case that holds all accessories of the camera. Camera stand. If the camera works with memory stick, the 3.5” diskette unit is to be provided. USB connection. Additional rechargeable battery. Battery charger. Additional lenses.

1 No. Digital video camera, with video graphics adapter, Sony (or approved equivalent), with a dual function digital camera and full-motion video camcorder.

1 No. Photo camera – CANON (or approved equivalent), multi lens reflex camera. Wide angle with three focusing points, 6-zone evaluative metering and E-TTL, and with a number of magnetic IX functions. Built-in Flash, Auto-date, two digits display and two-track IX Data system. Include for EF lenses 22-55mm and 55-200mm. Lens for macro zooming. Lens for wide panoramic shots. Print date and time on photo.

1 No. CD Writer (HP or equal) internal/external (latest at time of order)


______________________________________________________________


1 No. Shredder: A3 size shredder

1 No. Binding Machine (A4/A3), spiral type.

ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE (CONSTRUCTION MANAGER) OFFICES: Provide site offices for sole use of the Engineer's Representative (Construction Manager) with new lock and two keys to main entrance -provided within 45 days of the Date of Enterprise. Provide one sign board 1 sq.m., with English and Arabic lettering.


1. PROJECT MANAGER (1 No.)

One Room 24 sq. m. area

− 1 No. “Executive Type” Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx. including arm-chair (swivel).

− 1 No. Credenza size 1000 X 600 mm.


− 1 No. Round meeting table with 4 chairs.

− 1 No. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system.




− 1 No. Tack Board (fiber board) size 2400 x 1200mm approx.

− 1 No. Coffee Table.


− 2 Sets of 3 filing trays.


− 1 No. Complete sofa set with one three seater and two single seater.

2. MANAGEMENT STAFF (5 Nos.)

One Room each 16 sq. m. area

− 1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx. including armchair (swivel).


− 2 Nos. 4 drawer vertical file cabinets with sling type suspension system.




− 1 No. Tack Board (fibreboard) size 2400 x 120Omm approx...


______________________________________________________________





3. SECRETARIES (1 No.)

Room size 12 sq. m. area

− 1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx. including armchair (swivel).

− 4 Nos. 4 drawer, vertical file cabinet, with sling type suspension system.

− 2 Nos. two bookshelves slide door cabinet.

− 1 Nos. computer side table.


− 1 No. Shelved Filing Cabinet.

− 4 Nos. Lockable, fire-proof steel filing cabinets each with hinged lockable doors and three intermediate shelves, cabinet size 920 x 1800 x 450mm approx.



4. SCHEDULING ENG. (1No.)

One Room 30 sq. m. area

− 2 Nos. Desk size 1800 X 800mm approx. including arm-chair (swivel).

− 2 Nos. Table size 2000 X 1000mm for drawings

− 2 Nos. 4 drawer vertical file cabinets, with sling type suspension system.


− 1 No. Tack Board (fibreboard) size, 2400 X 1200mm approx.

− Computer side table.

− 1 No. Drawing rack with ten hangers.

− 2 Sets of 3 filing trays.

− 2 Nos. Plastic waste bin

5. DOCUMENT CONTROL STORAGE ROOM (1No.)

One Room 80 sq. m. area − 1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800mm approx., including armchair (swivel). − 1 No. Table size 2000 X 1000mm for drawing. − 2 Nos. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension

system.


______________________________________________________________


− 2 Nos. Bookshelf cabinet with 4 shelves (w=900mm, d=400mm, h=1400mm).

− 2 Nos. chairs for visitors. − 1 No. Computer side table. − 30 Nos. Metal storage shelving (w=1000 mm, h=1800 mm, 5

shelves). − 1 No. Plastic waste bin.

6. MEETING ROOM (1No.)

One Room 90 sq. m. area − 1 No. Conference table for 30 seats. − 30 No. Arm Chairs − 10 Nos. Fibreboard wall size 2400 x 1200mm approx. − 1 No. Telephone table or shelf. − 1 No. Magnetic - writing wall board 2000 X 1000mm approx. − 4 Nos. Plastic waste bin.

7. KITCHEN (1 No.)

12 sq.m. area − 1 No. Refrigerator (9 Cu. Ft.) single door. − 1 No. 12 Gallon waste bin with cover. − Wall and floor mounted kitchen aluminium cabinet’s (2.40m), with

stainless steel sink. − 1 No. Cooker range - 2 gas rings, gas cylinder and connection. − 1 No. Microwave. − Set of Crockery, Cutlery and Glassware for coffee and tea making

and serving. − 1 No. Water filter. − 1 No. Kitchen table. − 2 Nos. chairs. − 1 No. Water cooler. − 1 No. Water heater. − 1 No. Vacuum cleaner (upright type).

8. TOILET

FOR MALES (20 sq. m. overall)

− 2 Nos. Western WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.

− 2 Nos. Eastern WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.

− 2 wash basin with mixer hot and cold with mirrors 60 x 60 cm.

− 2 urinals with flush valve screen.

− 2 Nos. soap dispensers.

− 1 No. Paper dispenser with trash receptacle.

− 1 No. Electric hand dryer.


______________________________________________________________


FOR FEMALES (12 sq. m. overall)

− 2 Nos. Western WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.

− 2 Nos. Wash basin, mirror 60 x 60cm, tower holder, soap dish.

− 1 No. Soap dispensers.

− 1 No. Paper dispenser with trash receptacle.

− 1 No. Electric hand dryer.

B. COMPUTERS: Shall comply with latest technology configurations at time of order.

1. PERSONAL COMPUTERS (6 Nos.)

− Dell, Compaq, (or approved equivalent).

− Minimum Intel Pentium IV original with 1.5 GHz.









− 3Com Fast Ether link XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and




− UPS with 5 minutes electricity battery backup works also as a stabilizer

2. PRINTERS AND OTHER PERIPHERALS: (Latest at time of Order)

− 3 Nos. HP Laser Jet A4 black and white Printers (latest at time of order) (or approved equivalent).

− 1 No. HP 8150n or latest (or approved equivalent), duplex printing, 160 MB RAM, A4/A3, 4 paper trays

− 1 No. HP Laser printer color8550 or latest with 128 MB RAM, A4/A3

− 1 No. scanner Epson or equal (or latest model) GT10000 Plus.

− 1 No. Plotter: Large format HP Design Jet 1050C Series or latest Series (or approved equivalent), A0/E-size (36-in wide) color.


______________________________________________________________


3. SERVER AND NETWORK:

A server with the following

− Compact, ProLiant ML 350 (or equal)

− Dual Intel, P III 800 MHz Processor

− 512 MB RAM

− 512 KB Second level ECC Cache Memory

− EISA/PCI System Architecture

− 40 GB SCSI hard disk drive

− ADI 15 Monitor

− One -parallel port

− Two serial -ports

− Internal CD ROM Drive

− 56K US Robotics internal Fax/Modem

− Keyboard

− MS-Mouse and mouse Pad.

− Compact T 1000 UPS

− Three years full warranty

− Network Installation, complete with conduits, trunks, cables and outlet nodes, switch 3com 24 ports with full operation support. This networking to include all computer stations at the Employer’s Offices, CM offices and A/E offices.

4. OTHER EQUIPMENT

1 No. Photocopier (Black & White) A4/A3, Xerox 470 or latest, (or approved equivalent), with all requirements and accessories as above.

1 No. Fax Machine, Xerox Pro 555 or latest (or approved equivalent), Heavy Duty, plain paper fax.

1 No. Digital camera, SONY (or approved equivalent), compatible with windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP. 3 million lumens minimum. Macro zooming. Capable of panoramic shots. Carrying case that holds all accessories of the camera. Camera stand. If the camera works with memory stick, the 3.5” diskette unit is to be provided. USB connection. Additional rechargeable battery. Battery charger. Additional lenses.

1 No. Photo camera – CANON (or approved equivalent), multi lens reflex camera. Wide angle with three focusing points, 6-zone evaluative metering and E-TTL, and with a number of magnetic IX functions.

Built-in Flash, Auto-date, two digits display and two-track IX Data system. Include for EF lenses 22-55mm and 55-200mm. Lens for macro zooming. Lens for wide panoramic shots. Print date and time on photo.


______________________________________________________________


1 No. CD Writer (Hp or latest equal) internal/external

1 No. Shredder: A3 size shredder

1 No. Binding Machine (A4/A3), spiral type.

5. SOFTWARES (Latest version at time or order) Contractor to comply with the Sate Law No. 5, Year 1999 for copyrights.

− Primavera Project Planner for Windows (latest version).

− Primavera Expedition (latest version).

− Microsoft Office Professional 2000 (latest).

− Windows 2000 (latest or revision).

− Microsoft Windows NT Network (latest or revision).

− AutoCAD 2000 (latest or revision).

ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE OFFICES (RESIDENT ENGINEER)

Provide site offices for sole use of the Engineer's Representative (Resident Engineer) with new lock and two keys to main entrance Provided within 45 days of the Date of Enter-prise. Provide one sign board 1sq.m. with English and Arabic lettering to indicate the offices.


1. RESIDENT ENGINEER'S OFFICE (1No.)

One room of 24sq. m. area.

− 1No. “Executive Type” Desk size 1800x800mm approx. including armchair (swivel).

− 1No. Side unit 1600x450x600mm approx.

− 1No. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings.

− 2No. Visitor Chairs.

− 1No. Tack Board (Fibreboard), size 2400x1200mm approx.

− 1No. Coffee Table.

− 1No. Three Drawer filing cabinet.

− 1No. Credenza size 100 x 600 mm.

− 2Nos.Filing cabinets (glass fronted).

− 2 Sets of 3 filling trays.

− 1No. Waste Plastic Bin.


______________________________________________________________


2. SUPERVISION STAFF (18 Nos).

Each room of 16 sq. m. area.

− 1No. Desk size 1800x800mm approx. including armchair (swivel).

− 1No. Side unit 1500x450x600mm approx.

− 1No. Table 2000x1000mm for drawings.

− 2No. Visitor Chairs.

− 1No. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.

− 1No. Three Drawer filing cabinet.

− 1No. Drawing Rack capacity six holders minimum.

− 1No. Filing cabinets with double door and four shelves.

− 1No. Waste Plastic Bin.

3. SECRETARY’S ROOM

Two rooms of 15sq. m. area.

− 1 No. Desk size 1800x800mm approx. including armchair.

− 1 No. Computer Side table.

− 2 No. Visitor Chairs.

− 4 No. Lockable fireproof steel filing cabinets each with hinged lockable doors and three intermediate shelves, size 920x1800x450mm approx.

− 1 No. Coffee Table.

− 2 No. Four Drawer filing cabinets.

− 1 No. Waste Plastic Bin

4. CORRIDOR

Notice Board: 2 Nos. Fibreboard with wood framing each size 1200x2400mm approx.

5. MEETING ROOM (1 No.)

One room approx. 45 sq. m. area.

− 1 No. Conference wood table and chairs to seat 28 persons.

− 2 No. Tack Board (Fibreboard) size 2400x1200mm approx.

− 1 No. Telephone table or shelf.

− 2 No. Waste Plastic Bin.

− 4 No. Extra chairs.


______________________________________________________________


6. SAMPLE/ STORAGE ROOM (1 No.).

One room approx. 20 sq. m.

− Complete steel shelving of 300mm wide and 2100mm High, in six tiers covering the whole room perimeter.

7. KITCHEN (1No.)

− 1 No. Refrigerator with freezer compartment (9cu.ft. single door).

− 1 No. 12 Gallon Waste Bin with Plastic cover.

− 1 No. Min. 120Omm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink and 1200mm long wall cabinet.

− 1 No. Cooker range - 2 hot -plates electric and 1 unit gas with table, gas cylinder and connection.

− 1 No. Crockery, cutlery and glassware; for making and serving tea and coffee.

− 1No. Water filter with spares.

− 1No. Water Cooler.

− 1No. Water Heater.

− 1No. Vacuum cleaner (upright type) with spare bag.

8. 1No. Microwave oven.

9. TOILETS:

a. For Male toilets (2x20 sq. m.) each include the following fixtures:

3 No. pedestal WC with flexible hose, toilet roll holder, coat hooks, 3 wash basins with hot and cold water supplies, 3 towel holder, 3 mirror 60 x 50cm, 1 urinal, electric hand dryer, toilet paper dispenser, toilet paper roll and towel.

b. For Female toilet (12 sq. m.) include the following fixtures:

1 No. pedestal WC with flexible hose, and toilet roll holder, coat hook, 1 wash basin with hot and cold water supplies, 1 towel holder, 1 mirror 60x50cm, electric hand dryer, toilet paper dispenser, toilet paper roll and towel.

B. COMPUTERS: Shall comply with the latest technology configurations.

1. COMPUTERS - 11 Nos.

a. Resident Engineer 1 No.

b. Engineers 8 Nos.

c. Secretaries 2 Nos.

d. Quantity Surveyor 1 No.


______________________________________________________________


With the following minimum requirements.

− Dell, Compaq, (or approved equal).

− Minimum Intel Pentium IV original with 1.5 GHz.









− 3Com Fast Etherlink XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and




− UPS with 5 minutes electricity battery backup works also as a stabilizer

− 32X CD-ROM WITH MULTIMEDIA KIT

2. LASER PRINTER – HP or equal (latest) 6 Nos.

3. LASER COLOUR PRINTER – 1 No. HP Desk Jet 1600 (or latest)

C. OFFICE REQUIREMENTS

1. CAMERA: Provide Camera: 35 mm auto focus zoom lense with date and built in flash.

2. CUPBOARDS: Provide three steel cupboards each with pair of hinged lockable doors and three intermediate shelves. Cupboard, size 920x1800x450 mm. Non-returnable. (These cupboards in addition to these specified for each office).

3. BINDING MACHINE: Provide portable manual punch and wire bind machines for A4 size papers of minimum 17mm thickness, similar to Wire-0 punch/bind unit with hand punch (MP/26/M) for papers exceeding 12.7mm thickness, manufactured by James Burn Building Ltd., Douglas Road, Esher, Surrey KT10 8BD, England. Provide 15 boxes of ancillary Wire-0 binding elements, each box containing 100 elements to suit A4 paper. Size and colour of elements to be selected from standard range machine units and ancillary elements. Non-returnable.

4. PHOTOCOPIER: Provide one (1) heavy duty automatic fast speed photocopier model Ricoh FT 6655, or equivalent, of double unit providing A4 and A3 size copying with document feeder, 25 sorter, collator, stapler, large capacity tray, menu reader and voltage regulator.


______________________________________________________________


5. FAX MACHINE: Provide one (1) heavy duty fax machine (A4 size) with dedicated M.O.C. telephone lines to fax. Provide table and consumables for fax machine.

6. Provide one (1) Draughting table Ao size with chair and electric lamp including all accessories.

D. SOFTWARES PROVIDE LATEST VERSION OF:

1. Primavera Expedition.

2. Primavera Project Planner for Windows.

3. Microsoft Office Professional 2000.

4. Windows 2000 Operating System.

5. Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System.

6. Contractor to comply with State Law No. 5, Year 1999, regarding copyright.

E. MISCELLANEOUS

1. Air Conditioning: to all staff rooms, split unit A/C system for heating and cooling.

2. Lighting: fluorescent lighting for all rooms.

3. Plumbing and Drainage: As required to provide workable systems acceptable to the Engineer’s Representative.

4. All windows to be with Venetian blinds and fly screens.

F. SITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

1. The Contractor shall supply and maintain a site wireless communication system for sufficient power to operate over a distance in excess of 6 Kms including building basement and service tunnel for the exclusive use of the Employer, Construction Manager and Resident Engineer. It shall consist of at least the following:

a. Stationary Control

b. Stationary Aerial and Cable

c. Mains Supply Unit

d. Power output in excess of 25 watts

e. Frequency-range 146 to 174 MHz.

f. Sufficient channel spacing

g. 20 Nos. hand portable radio telephone (Walkie-talkie) units complete with battery charges.

h. Include sufficient units, for Contractor's use, working under the same frequency.

i. Provide repeater for proper coverage including basement of car park.


______________________________________________________________


2. Radios are to have scan facility and be compatible with other radios in use on site by the Engineer and C.M. so that any radio set can be used by any of the user groups and be able to access every other radio.

3. The Contractor shall obtain all licenses and permits to operate this wireless communication system and ensure that the system complies with the Regulatory Authorities restrictions and regulations.

4. Include for System maintenance through the whole contract Period plus twelve months.

5. In addition to above, add 11 Nos. cellular mobile telephones with GSM lines, for the sole use of the Engineer and Engineer’s Representatives.

G. CONSUMABLES AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE

1. Provide paper and all consumables for photocopiers, facsimiles, computers, printers and plotters.

2. Provide stationery items for each member of staff.

3. Provide maintenance service for all equipment of photocopiers, computers, printers, plotter, server, network, and facsimiles.

4. Provide files and box files of different sizes.

5. Paper, diskettes for computers and optical juke box, toners, replacement of first aid kit items used, all other consumables, full maintenance for photocopier, fax, computers and printers, and internet user account charges.

6. Stationery items for all members of the supervision staff in accordance with Engineer’s Representatives requirements, i.e. files, pens, markers, pads, scales, etc.

H. Deleted I. KITCHENS AND CANTEENS

1. All kitchens and canteens are maintained to the hygienic requirements of the Ministry of Public Health.

2. Food beverages served from all kitchens shall be prepared and provided in conformance with the latest requirements of the Ministry of Public Health and the Kuwait Municipality. All kitchens shall be open to inspections for hygiene conducted by the concerned government authorities.

3. All staff who are employed to prepare food and beverages from the kitchen shall have been medically certified and accordingly obtained health cards from the Ministry of Public Health before commencing duties.

4. The Ministry of Public Works and the governmental authorities supervising the health affairs in the country shall have the right to remedy the health requirements by Contractor’s personnel and the Contractor will not be entitled to claim for any compensation pertaining thereto.


______________________________________________________________


J. PREPARATION: 1. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away

from buildings.

K. INSTALLATION: 1. Installation: Install office spaces ready for occupancy 45 days after Date

of Enterprise.

2. Parking: As item 1.5. Hard surfaced parking spaces for use by Employer, Construction Manager, and Engineer’s Representative connected to office by hard surfaced walk.

3. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on employer property.

L. MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING: 1. Attendance: Provide electricity, water and gas.

2. Daily janitorial services for offices; daily cleaning and maintenance for office, including equipment, furnishings and storage areas for construction period plus twelve months.

3. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and sand.

4. Provide delivery service between Owner’s office, Resident Engineer’s, Construction Manager’s and Contractor’s offices.

5. Provide three (3) full-time farashes to attend upon Employer’s and Engineer’s staff and other occupants for Contract period plus 2 months.

6. Provide all necessary consumables i.e. Tea, coffee, milk, bottled mineral water etc., cleaning materials for offices, kitchen, toilets, toilet paper, hand towels, vacuum cleaners etc., in connection with kitchen, toilets and janitorial services for Owner’s and Engineer’s staff.

7. Provide bottled mineral water for Employer, Engineer, and Engineer’s Representative and their staff for the duration of construction period plus two months.

M. REMOVAL: 1. At completion of Work obtain Engineer’s approval to discontinue facilities

and to remove furniture, buildings, foundations, utility services, and debris.

2. Restore areas. Obtain and submit Municipality Certificate and Owner’s clearance certificate.

3. As a minimum the field offices shall be maintained until all work including remedial works, additional works, testing and commissioning are completed to approval.


______________________________________________________________


2. VEHICULAR ACCESS:

A. Construct temporary all-weather access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of width and load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded traffic for construction purposes.

B. Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow.

C. Location as indicated on Drawings and approved by Employer.

D. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 6m wide driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials.

E. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions.

F. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

G. Use existing on-site roads for construction traffic only as approved by the Engineer.

H. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself regarding the suitability and availability for his use during the Contract Period of access routes and the like and shall be entirely responsible for the provision of any signs or directions on such routes that may be considered necessary for the guidance of his personnel, sub-contractors, suppliers and the like and for obtaining all necessary permission from any Government, Ministry or Land Owner concerned, for the use of such routes or the provision of such signs or directions. The Employer shall not be held responsible for any claims that may be made by any Land Owner.

I. The Employer will not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular access route and will not entertain any claim in respect of the non-suitability or non-availability for continuous use during the Contract Period of any such route.

J. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary means of access to the site from the nearest permanent roadway together with any necessary crossovers and all necessary temporary site roads leading to or upon the Site and/or working areas.

K. The Contractor shall take over the existing temporary roads, utilize them and maintain the same during his Contract period, but the Contractor must co-ordinate/co-operate and share these roads as necessary with PAAET the Engineers, Engineer’s Representative and other Contractors on site.

L. The means of access, crossovers and temporary roads shall be maintained, altered, adapted, etc., as may be found necessary during the course of the Contract and excavated and cleared away upon completion including forking, leaving same to the

satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative.

M. Access to the Site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be made only from locations approved by the Engineer’s Representative.

N. Contractor to provide flagmen during all working hours at each road crossing where temporary construction access roads cross or abut permanent roads.

O. The Contractor must ensure that all access remain clear to provide access to other users such as may be required for emergency vehicles, service vehicles, and other contractors.


______________________________________________________________


3. PARKING:

A. Provide temporary shaded asphalt surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel as follows:

- Owner’s representative: 12

- Construction Manager: 8

- Resident Engineer: 22

- Visitors: 4

B. Locate as approved by Employer.

C. Use of existing on-site streets and driveways used for construction traffic is not permitted. Tracked vehicles not allowed on paved areas.

D. Use of existing parking facilities by construction personnel is not permitted.

E. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

F. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement.

G. Designate parking spaces for Owner representative, Construction Manager, Resident Engineer and Visitors as Item A.

H. Permanent Pavements And Parking Facilities:

i. Prior to Substantial Completion, bases for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for construction traffic subject to the Engineer’s approval.

ii. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Tracked vehicles not allowed.

iii. Use of permanent parking structures is not permitted.

I. Maintenance:

i. Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, products, mud.

ii. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition.

J. Removal, Repair:

i. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion.

ii. Remove underground work and compacted materials to depth of 600mm; fill and grade site as specified.

iii. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original specified condition.

K. Mud from Site Vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

4. PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Maintain areas and buildings under Contractor’s control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish at all times. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition and as required by the Engineer’s Representative.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, craw spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space.


______________________________________________________________


C. Clean interior areas and all floor/building daily to provide suitable conditions of work.

D. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on as as-needed basis.

E. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet or newly coated surfaces.

F. The Contractor must keep all working areas clear of obstructions, surplus materials, unused plant and debris that are unsightly, obstructive and/or hazardous to the safety of all persons expected to be on the premises at any time.

G. The Contractor is advised that a clean and organised site is advantageous to his costs and timely progress. This reflects on his management efforts to minimize waste materials, improve safety and achieve a smooth flow of labour and materials on Site with minimum obstructions.

H. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at most, weekly and dispose of off site.

I. Comply with regulations of the Local Authorities.

J. Provide sufficient number of 12m3 containers as may be deemed necessary, place and relocate at site as directed by the Engineer’s Representative.

5. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. Project Identification Sign:

i. Three (3) painted signs of construction, of construction, size, design, content and location as directed by the Engineer’s Representative. Please refer to Drawing No.A80061.

ii. Project identification sign board shall be illuminated.

Content of each sign:

1. Project title, logo and name of Employer and Logo as indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Name of Consultants and Logo.

3. Name of Prime Contractor and major Subcontractors.

4. Three dimensional view of buildings with acry-text system.

iii. Graphic Design, Colours, Style of Lettering: Designated by Engineer’s Representative.

iv. Submit design and drawing details for the Engineer’s approval.

B. Project Informational Signs:

i. Painted informational signs of same colours and lettering as Project Identification sign, or standard products; size lettering for legibility at 30m distance.

ii. Provide sign at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct traffic into and within site. Relocate as Work progress and phases requires.

iii. Provide municipal traffic agency directional traffic signs to and within site.

iv. No other signs are allowed without the Engineer’s permission except those required by law.


______________________________________________________________


C. Design sign and structure to withstand 140 km/hr wind velocity.

D. Sign Painter: Experienced as professional sign painter for minimum three years.

E. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.

F. Show content, layout, lettering, colour, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members.

G. Sign Materials:

i. Structure and Framing: New, metal structurally adequate.

ii. Sign Surfaces: 0.5mm thick metal plate.

iii. Rough Hardware: Galvanised.

iv. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; colour as selected by Engineer’s Representative.

v. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colours, as selected by Engineer’s Representative.

Languages: Arabic and English.

H. Installation:

i. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.

ii. Erect at designated location and location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site, as approved by the Engineer’s Representative.

iii. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loading.

iv. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.

v. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

I. Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

J. Removal: Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore area.

6. TRAFFIC REGULATION

A. Signs, Signals and Devices:

i. Post Mounted and Wall Mounted Traffic Control and Informational Signs: As approved by authority having jurisdiction.

ii. Flagman Equipment: As required by authority having jurisdiction.

B. Flag Persons: Provide trained and equipped flag persons to regulate traffic when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes.

C. Lights: Use lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic.

D. Haul Routes:

i. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and site access.

ii. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.

iii. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimise interference with public traffic.


______________________________________________________________


E. Traffic Signs:

i. Provide signs at approaches to site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic.

ii. Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control, and areas affected by Contractor's operations.

iii. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control.

F. Removal:

i. Remove equipment and devices at Substantial Completion.

ii. Repair damage caused by installation.

iii. Remove post settings to depth of 600mm.

C. TEMPORARY CONTROLS:

1. BARRIERS

A. Provide fencing/gates, guard house with guards and other barriers to prevent unauthorised entry to Engineer’s and Engineer’s Representative’s as well as all other, field offices, sheds, storage areas and construction areas, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

2. ENCLOSURES AND FENCING

A. Construction: New fence and gate from mild steel or RHS posts and rails with minimum 1.8mm thick galvanised trough section sheeting panels pre-painted in two colours to the approval of the Engineer. Post shall be at maximum 2.4m centres, set in concrete foundations minimum size 450x450x450mm.

B. Provide 2.50m high fence around field offices, sheds, storage areas and construction site; equip with 5 metres wide vehicular and 1.2 metres wide pedestrian gates with locks and bolts.

C. Prepare and submit shop-drawings of temporary enclosures, fencing and gates to withstand 140 Km/Hr wind velocity for Engineer’s review and approval.

D. Give all necessary notices, obtain licence, permits and pay any fees in connection with the work herein.

E. Relocate and extend during successive stages of construction on in co-ordination with other Contractors on site and Governmental Authorities with no extra cost to the Engineer.

F. Maintain during progress of work. Wash and repaint painted surfaces semi-annually.

G. Provide adequate safety barriers, guard rails, handrails, covers to trenches and openings, with safety signage or tapes; as required to comply with the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction.


______________________________________________________________


H. Remove safety fence and gates on completion of construction period plus 2 months after obtaining Engineer’s approval.

I. Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading and chipping for duration of construction. Metal fence panels to be 2 mm thick factory painted finish.

3. PROTECTION OF THE WORK:

A. Exterior Enclosures

i. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating/cooling and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorised persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

ii. Provide temporary roofing if required.

B. Interior Enclosures:

i. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings if required to suit construction progress to separate work areas and to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into finished areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

ii. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene, plywood or gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces.

4. SECURITY

A. Security Program:

i. Protect Work products, materials, plant, and temporary work from theft, vandalism, and unauthorised entry.

ii. Initiate program in co-ordination with Employer’s and other Contractor’s existing security system at project mobilisation.

iii. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance precludes need for Contractor security or as directed by Engineer.

B. Entry Control:

i. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site.

1. Allow entrance only to authorised persons with proper identification.

2. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Employer on request.

C. Security Service:

i. Employ uniformed guard service to provide watchmen at site twenty four hours a day, seven days a week.

D. Restrictions:

i. Do not allow cameras on site or photographs taken except by written approval of Engineer.


______________________________________________________________


5. WATER CONTROL

A. Rough grade site and provide all necessary drainage to prevent standing water and to direct surface drainage away from excavations, trenches, adjoining properties, and public right-of-way until permanent drainage is accepted.

B. Protect site from accumulating or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Allow for removal of temporary drainage upon acceptance of the whole work.

D. Maintain excavations and trenches free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment of a capacity to control water flow.

E. Provide dewatering system to maintain excavations dry and free of water inflow on a 24 hours basis.

i. Provide piping to handle pumping outflow to discharge in a manner to avoid erosion.

ii. Remove equipment and installation when no longer needed.

iii. Comply with the Local Authorities Regulations.

6. DUST CONTROL

A. Execute Work by methods to minimise raising dust from construction operations.

B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

7. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.

B. Minimise surface area of bare soil exposed at one time.

C. Provide temporary measures including beams, dykes, and drains, and other devices to prevent water flow.

D. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.

E. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures.

8. NOISE CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimise noise produced by construction operations.

9. PEST CONTROL

B. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the Work or entering facility.

10. POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


______________________________________________________________


11. RODENT CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION

A. Ensure that no fires are lit, in or about the Site, and take all reasonable precautions to avoid outbreaks of fire on the works, temporary works, offices, stores and other places and things connected therewith. Especially with respect to the safe storage of petroleum products, paints, explosives and other combustible, dangerous or hazardous goods. Comply with all rules, regulations and orders, which are made by local authority having jurisdiction, and provide and maintain in good order and hold available at all times, and in all places connected with the works a sufficiency of efficient fire fighting facilities and equipment together with personnel trained in its use.

B. The type, location and sufficiency of the fire fighting facilities and equipment shall be to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's satisfaction and shall be approved by the Kuwait Fire Department. Such facilities/equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following:

i. A temporary fire water tank which shall be of a non-corrosive material with an "actual”, capacity of at least 7,500 litres.

ii. Temporary fire pumps shall be provided in duplicate and shall be automatically controlled by pressure switches. Capacity of each pump shall be 460 litres/minute against 110 metres head as Grundfos (Denmark) Fig No. CR30-110/10 (20 HP) or other approved equal.

iii. Temporary standpipe system (min. 10Omm dia. steel) with landing valves and 30m cradled fire hoses with nozzles. The number of hose stations around the site shall be approved by the Engineer, or Engineer's Representative and KFD and shall be sufficient to ensure that all parts of the permanent works are within effective reach of water hoses.

iv. Provide one 4.5 Kg dry powder fire extinguisher (non CFC type) adjacent to each hose station and at any other location requested by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

v. Provide all fire fighting facilities and equipment required by the Kuwait Fire Department, whether or not specifically detailed herein. It is not permitted to use the temporary fire fighting system for any other water source purpose at site.

C. Take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and torch cutting operations as follows:

i. Welding or torch cutting operations shall be carried out only in well ventilated spaces having little or no combustible materials in the vicinity, and preferably in an area designated and used exclusively as a 'welding shop'.

ii. Where welding or torch cutting operations are carried out in-situ, surrounding areas shall be suitably protected by the covering or screening off, and suitable portable fire extinguishers shall be kept immediately available with an attendant standing-by.

iii. The number of gas cylinders in any working area and the storage of such cylinders, full or empty, shall be in accordance with the FOC leaflet, 'Precautions to be observed in connection with the use of gas or electric welding and cutting apparatus'.


______________________________________________________________


D. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from 'UL' listed safety containers and in conformance with requirements of the KFD. Storage shall not be within the building.

E. Tarpaulins used during construction work shall be made of material, which is resistant to fire, water and weather. Tarpaulins shall have 'UL' approval and comply with US Federal Specifications CCC-D-746 and KFD requirements.

F. Make all arrangements for periodical inspection by local Fire Authorities and Insurance Underwriters' Inspectors, co-operate with such Authorities and promptly carry out their recommendations.

G. Ensure that adequate, and to the extent possible, unimpeded means of egress from all parts of the Works, is available at all times in case fire.

H. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer or Engineer's Representative may direct, remove all temporary fire fighting installations and equipment and replace all worn or damaged parts of the permanent systems leaving such systems in first-class condition equal to new.

I. The temporary fire fighting system shall be fully operational as soon as construction starts. Extend the system progressively as construction proceeds maintaining its operational status at all times.

J. Schedule work so that risers for the permanent fire protection system are installed, tested and made operable at the earliest possible date. Obtain early approval and delivery of permanent fire pumps and jockey pump with temporary motor controller and install in permanent or temporary location ready for use in the event of fire.

Furnish sufficient properly sized fire hoses with nozzles to provide adequate coverage of all floors and the site.

K. The temporary fire fighting shall not be removed until the permanent system is operational, thereby ensuring that the building is always protected during construction. The permanent system shall not be placed in operation without the prior approval in writing of the Engineer’s Representative.

13. TEMPORARY STORAGE AND PLANT

A. Provide at or near the Site and maintain in good condition, suitable watertight storage required for materials that may be damaged by storage in open and provide adequate Fire Protection as approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

B. On completion of the Works, or when directed by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, clear away all temporary storage, plant and reinstate areas to their previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

14. TEMPORARY COVERINGS

A. Protect finished surfaces including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which materials are handled against possible damage resulting from conduct of work by trades.

B. Tight wood sheeting shall be laid under all materials stored on finished surfaces. Planking shall be laid before moving materials over finished areas. Wheelbarrows used for such areas shall have rubber-tyre wheels.


______________________________________________________________


C. Finished surfaces including factory finished and job-finished items shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the Project to the Employer. The Contractor shall without extra compensation refinish such spaces where such surfaces prove to have been inadequately protected and are damaged.

D. Waterproofed and roof surfaces shall not be subjected to heavy traffic nor used for storage of materials. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the work, adequate protection, subject to approval by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, shall be provided.

E. Provide all necessary protection to executed work to the approval of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, including but not limited to temporary coverings and protective measures stated herein.

15. TEMPORARY STAIRS, SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS ETC.

A. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, scaffolding, ladders, ramps, runways, chutes, tower cranes and/or other hoisting facilities etc., as required for the proper execution of works.

B. As soon as permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary protective treads, handrails and shaft enclosures.

16. TEMPORARY MATERIALS AND PERSONNEL HOISTS

A. Provide temporary material hoists to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's approval and as required facilitating the execution of Works. Such hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance with ANSI A10.5 "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists", and shall not be used for transporting personnel.

B. Hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance with ANSI A10.4 "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists".

C. All hoists shall be constructed, maintained and removed so as not to cause damage, staining or marring of the permanent work.

D. Provide tower crane(s) of adequate capacity for material handling and execution of works. Upon installation of tower crane(s), get the entire installation tested by Lloyds or other approved testing agency certifying fitness prior to commencement of operation.

17. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS.

A. Provide openings in slabs, walls and partitions where required for moving in or out large pieces of equipment and plant. Close or restore and finish all openings after the equipment and plant is in place or removed. Structural modifications shall be subject to review by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

18. SAFETY MEASURES AND STANDARDS

A. ACCIDENT PREVENTION PROGRAMME

i. Within 30 days of contract signing, the contractor will submit, for the Engineer's approval, his Accident Prevention Programme naming the key person in his organization who will be responsible for administering of Safety Programme, which follows, and in particular the safety requirements listed in the safety check list.


______________________________________________________________


ii. All employees will be physically qualified for performing the duties to which they are assigned. Operators of equipment and vehicles shall be able to read and understand the signs, signals and operating instructions is use. Prior to start of work, arrangements will be made for assistance from medical services in existence in the vicinity of the project site. Communication and transportation to effectively care of injured workers will be provided as necessary. First Aid Kits, in the ratio of one unit for each 25 persons or less, will be provided on the job. They shall be easily accessible to all the workers.

B. SAFETY PROGRAMME

i. The safety programme established and maintained on this project will incorporate the requirements of the Safety and Health Requirements of the Government of Kuwait, the AGC manual of Accident Prevention in construction, and all other local codes and regulations.

ii. The purpose of the Programme is to elicit the interest and efforts of all personnel both management and supervisory, required for the prevention of injuries and accidents, through proper and through training and instructions to employees and labour.

All contractors are responsible for the administration of a comprehensive safety programme.

iii. This safety programme embodies the prevention of accident injury, occupational illness and property damage. Each contractor shall provide and maintain a safe, hazard free workplace for their employees, for fellow workers and the general public. As a minimum, the contractor's safety programme shall incorporate all of the principals of the project safety programme.

iv. This project safety programme shall ensure the involvement and active participation of all project employees by requiring safety training will promote recognition of unsafe acts, potential and actual hazards and the immediate corrective action to be taken. All employees shall be constantly aware of their responsibility to work in a safe manner.

v. Each contractor, and his subcontractors, has a contractual obligation to perform their work using safe methods and to comply with Project's safety programme.

C. MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION

i. A Safety Co-ordinator is responsible for the implementation and further development of the safety programme. His duties will include the following:

1. Conduct monthly safety meeting with personnel and subcontractors.

2. Inspect the project daily, and record all visible safety hazards, including identification of violators.

3. Follow through on timely correction of safety hazards, making immediate corrections as necessary.

4. Monitor on-the-job safety meetings and report the same on this Daily Report.

5. Foster a "Safety Awareness" in all tradesmen and supervisors on the Project.

6. Follow up, for insurance purposes, all relevant safety reports.

7. Check all areas at least once a day for housekeeping and cleanup. Take immediate action to ensure compliance with requirements.


______________________________________________________________


8. Submit Job Hazards Analysis for each major phase or element of work as necessary.

9. Post Safety signs on the project.

D. SUBCONTRACTOR PARTICIPATION

The officers and personnel of all subcontractors shall be responsible for compliance with this safety programme. This will entail indoctrinating their on-the-job representatives with a working knowledge of the General Safety Programme on the job. They are further responsible to have their firms represented at all project safety meetings.

E. ACCIDENT PREVENTION RESPONSIBILITY

i. Safety Meetings will be held at least once a month at the job site. The meetings will be convened and conducted by the safety co-ordinator. All supervisors and foremen are expected to be in attendance. Each subcontractor will have a responsible representative present to follow through on information and resolutions discussed and adapted at these meetings. The Engineer's representative may attend these meetings.

ii. The Agenda for the safety meetings will generally include inter-alia.

1. Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety bulletins, Signs and Notices.

2. A review of the Safety Co-ordinator's inspection.

3. Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month and discussion and implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.

4. Appoint of safety Representatives for subcontractors.

iii. All supervisors and foremen are responsible to plan and accomplish their work with due regard for the safety of all individuals on the job site. They will be expected to eliminate all possible accident hazards when planning the work under their control. It is expected the subcontractors will observe and correct any accident producing practices before injury occurs. If an accident does occur, they will investigate to determine the cause and take the required corrective action to prevent a recurrence. All accidents shall immediately be reported to the project superintendent and to the Engineer.

F. FIRST AID AND MEDICAL FACILITIES

The Contractor shall provide first aid and medical services as required by the relevant municipal and ministerial authorities of Kuwait.

G. ACCIDENT REPORTING

i. All lost time injuries, property damage accidents (excluding of project vehicle accidents) and material losses in which the property damage exceeds KD 100/- will be reported in writing to the Engineer within 48 hours of the accident or incident. Immediate notification will be provided in advance of the written report.

ii. In the event of any employees being sent to a doctor for treatment, a release will be obtained from the doctor stating whether (1) the employee is not fit for duty; (2) the employee is fit for light duty; or (3) the employee is fit for duty. A copy of this release will be accompanied with the accident report.


______________________________________________________________


H. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

i. Minimum requirements for protective equipment shall be the wearing of hard hats by all personnel, including subcontractors, as well as protective clothing, as warranted.

ii. Supplemental requirements for protective equipment shall b developed to cover specific areas of the work for such items as eye protection, protective clothing, life belts and life lines as per the requirements of this safety specifications.

I. HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS

i. All hand tools and portable power tools to be used shall be of good order and shall be used for the purpose intended. All electric power tools will be grounded and will be inspected frequently for worn out parts and connections.

ii. Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose cutting edges. Radial arm power saws shall be equipped with automatic brakes. Explosives actuated tools and the use will be discouraged, and must have prior written Engineer's Representative's approval before delivery to the project.

J. WORKER INDOCTRINATION

i. Minimum Protective Clothing

1. Hard hats are required at all times.

2. Protective eye covering will be worn when welding, hammering metal, stone, or concrete, grinding or cutting metal units.

ii. Minimum Safety Observances

1. Work areas and access ways are to be free of trash, material and all tripping hazards.

a) Temporary electrical wiring will be protected from damage by traffic, be in good condition and protected by ground fault interrupters.

b) All portable containers for gas and other inflammable liquids shall be UL or FM approved, with self-sloshing lids. No plastic containers are allowed.

c) Maximum speed for automobiles and vehicles on the site is 10 Kilometres per hour.

d) All accidents are to be reported directly to supervisors, the Engineer and the Engineer's Representative. If serious injury is apparent or suspected, utilize the pre-established emergency hospital service. The telephone number shall be prominently displayed at all site telephone locations. Then attempt to put out the fire with available fire extinguishers and water hoses until help arrives. Do not endanger personnel in fighting the fire.

e) Heavy Equipment Suppliers must obtain clearance from the Engineer's Representative before commencement of their work.

f) All equipment must meet the Safety Standards, described in these specifications.

g) No site visiting during nights weekends or holidays without prior permission.


______________________________________________________________


K. SAFETY CHECK LIST

i. Prepare safety programme

ii. Post safety programme on job bulletin. Prepare and post fire prevention programme

iii. Analyse job for potential hazards and hazardous procedures

iv. Establish plan for location of shanties, material storage, and personal facilities and traffic flow

v. Arrange for sanitary facilities

vi. Arrange for debris removal

vii. Establish procedure to obtain Subcontractor Safety Programme

viii. Arrange-for Doctor

ix. Arrange for Hospital

x. Arrange for ambulance service

xi. Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical and ambulance service at each of the on site telephone locations

xii. Obtain claims forms

xiii. Contract loss Prevention Department of Insurance Carrier

xiv. Arrange for exposure check by Insurance Carrier.

xv. obtain form the Engineer's Representative a report form for reporting accidents and injuries

xvi. Establish adequate first aid kit and stretcher facilities

xvii. Post char to signify weekly check of first aid kits

xviii. Hire qualified first aid personnel, if more than ten minutes from a medical facility with which and emergency medical service has been established

xix. Conduct a pre-construction survey of surrounding property existing condition, if appropriate

xx. Prepare and post at each on site telephone location "off hours emergency notification list"

xxi. Arrange for watchman service, if required

xxii. Prepare a watchman's log

xxiii. obtain any required state forms and posters

xxiv. Verify insurance on sub-contractors stating work on site prior to final execution of sub-contractors

xxv. Obtain safety equipment appropriate to operations

1. Hard hats

a) Safety belts

b) Goggles

c) Ear protection

d) Carbon monoxide tester


______________________________________________________________


xxvi. Post sketch, showing location of fire alarm boxes, hydrants and first aid facilities

xxvii. Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs

xxviii. Establish weekly tool box and safety talks

xxix. Set up an accident control chart

xxx. Establish monthly safety meeting

xxxi. Appoint a safety supervisor and set date for the first safety meeting.

L. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

i. Where the Contractor violates any of the safety provisions described within this section 01500, the Engineer shall take the appropriate remedial action, and all costs associated therewith for the Contractor's account.

ii. On the occurrence of the first violation, the contractor shall be warned in writing by the Engineer's Representative and shall be instructed to remedy the violation within a specified time. Where the contractor fails to remedy the violation within the time stipulated, the contractor will be prohibited from carrying out any further work within the affected area until the specific exposure has been corrected.

iii. On the occurrence of all further violations, the severity of each violation shall be considered by the Engineer's Representative.

iv. The contractor instructed accordingly. Where the contractor unreasonably ignores the Engineer's Representative's instructions, then the foreman responsible for operations in the area where the safety violations are occurred shall be dismissed from the site.

v. Should the contractor persistently breach the safety requirements with undue reason, then the principal of the contractor shall be summoned to the site and instructed to take the appropriate action to ensure that his employees comply with the safety requirements of the contract. The following is a summary of engineer's action in the event of the contractor's non-compliance with safety requirements.


______________________________________________________________


Summary of Engineer's Action

In the Event of Contractor's non-Compliance

with Safety Requirements

CATEGORY SAFETY ITEM ORDER OF ACTION ACTION

Material

Or

Equipment

- Scaffolding

- Guard Rails

- Excavation Protection

- Safe Hand & Power Tools

- Temporary Elect. Grounding

- Machinery & Mech. Equipment

1.0

2.0

3.0

Contractor warned to rectify. If contractor fails to rectify, Contractor is barred from working in exposed area. In the case of continuous breach, employees and foreman responsible for exposed area shall be dismissed from site.

Protective

Garments

- Head Protection

- Eye Protection

- Hearing Protection

- Respiratory Protection

- Hand Protection

- Foot Protection

- Body Protection

1.0

2.0

3.0

Responsible employee prevented from continuing work unit properly attired.

When same employees are in breach a second time, he will be dismissed from the site.

When more than 2 employees are dismissed per week, then responsible foreman shall be dismissed.

Facilities First Aid

Sanitation

Material Storage

Fire Protection

1.0

20

Contractor warned to supply. If contractor fails to supply, engineer shall supply and deduct the cost from the contractor.

19. LABOURS SANITARY AND TOILET FACILITIES

A. Provide sufficient number of prefabricated structure buildings as site toilets with all necessary plumbing, electrical, electrical and ventilation connections required making the system operational. Location and relocation to be to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

B. Each of the site toilets units shall comprise of the following:

i. Steel frame with sandwich panel to walls and partitions, and corrugated metal sheet roofing. Size and layout to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer's Representative.

ii. Wall mounted lavatories with faucet, plastic shelf and mirror. At least 1 No. f or the use of and per each (25) persons.

iii. Wall hung urinals with water stop valves. At least 1 number for the use of, and per each (25) persons.

iv. Water closets with plastic flush tank and flexible wash hose. At least 1 No. f or the use of and per each (25) persons.


______________________________________________________________


v. Electrical water heaters complete with safety valves.

vi. Electrical connection for power and lighting.

vii. Exhaust fans and ventilators.

viii. Water supply connection from source provided by the Contractor.

ix. Plumbing and drainage connections.

x. Percolating (collection) pits of proper capacity.

xi. Drainage manholes as required.

C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary.

D. The Contractor shall clear away and remove all structures, buildings, tanks, manholes, pits and to make the area clean and tidy as and when instructed by the Engineer.

E. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the facilities ready for inspection by such authorities whenever requested.

F. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than these facilities shall be discharged immediately.

D. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

1. Remove temporary utilities, barriers, fencing, gates, equipment, facilities, and materials, at Substantial Completion inspection.

2. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 600mm.

3. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

4. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.



________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01600 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Products.

B. Product delivery requirements.

C. Product storage and handling requirements.

D. Product options.

E. Product substitution procedures.

1.2 PRODUCTS A. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish

products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Obtain Engineer’s approval for any on site storage and storage areas.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.


________________________________________________________________


I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Definitions

1. The terms “Product” shall mean any material including proprietary goods, equipment and manufactured items.

2. Alternative Products: Reference herein to “Approved Equal” or similar terms shall mean that the approval of the Engineer is required to any alternative product proposed by the Contractor. The Contractor’s freedom, however, to propose alternatives for the Engineer’s review and approval shall not be limited to those products in respect of which the term “Approved Equal” or similar has been used in the Contract Documents except where it is specifically stated otherwise in individual specification sections. The Contractor in accordance with the above may propose alternatives to any specified products provided such alternatives are equal in all respects to the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the specified products.

3. Substitute Products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the specified product in spite of his best endeavors, and if he is unable to find and propose a suitable equal alternative he may propose a substitute for the Engineer’s review an approval, which substitute shall be similar to, and as near as possible equal if not better than the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the specified product. A substitute product will only be considered if the Contractor has approved to the Engineer’s reasonable satisfaction that the specified product is unobtainable.

B. Submittals

1. Alternative and substitution submittals:

a. Submit 3 copies of each request for alternative and substitutions for consideration.

b. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related specification section and drawing numbers.

c. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirement for alternatives and substitutions and the following information, as appropriate.

i. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by he Employer and separate Contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed alternative or substitution.

ii. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed alternative or substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability and visual effect.


________________________________________________________________


iii. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

iv. Samples, where applicable or requested.

v. A statement indicating the alternatives and substitutions effect on the Contractor’s Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the alternative or substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed alternative of substitution on overall Contract Time.

vi. Cost information, including a proposal of the net reduction, if any in the Contract Sum. Additional costs are not accepted. This should be substantiated by comparative quotations (CIF) with complete rate breakdown for both the proposed alternative/substitute item and the specified item.

vii. The Contractor’s waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the alternative and substitution to perform adequately.

2. Engineer’s approval of alternatives and substitutes: The approval of any alternative or substitute product shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer and such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and obligations under the Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as to the suitability of any proposed alternative or substitute product shall rest with the Contractor, and the Engineer may request and the Contractor shall provide such supporting data, carryout such test, etc., as the Engineer may reasonably require in order to satisfy himself as to such suitability. Any delays or extra costs suffered by the Contractor because of this failure to propose alternatives in a timely manner so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or because of rejection of alternatives or substitutes found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and he shall not be entitled to additional payment, and no extra time for completion in this respect.

3. Cost effect in approving alternatives and substitutes: Should any alternative or substitute product be approved by the Engineer, any net increase in cost over and above the specified product shall be borne by the Contractor and, any net saving in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.


________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Alternative and Substitutions 1. The specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name,

catalogues number, etc., shall not act to relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to make material submittals for approval.

2. Alternative or substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the Engineer’s designed space requirements. Any such alternative or substitute product that does not meet such space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and any modification of replaced systems thereby arising shall also be made at his expense.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED.



_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/01700-1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This Section describes the requirements and general procedures for expediting the final stage of the Contract.

1.02 CLEANING UP A. Final Cleaning Up

1. Remove rubbish by means of chutes, hoists or receptacles. Do not drop or throw rubbish or waste from one level to another within or outside the building.

2. Care shall be taken by workmen not to mark, soil or otherwise deface finished surfaces. In the event that finished surfaces become defaced, clean and restore such surfaces to their original condition.

3. Clean up during and immediately upon completion of each trades’ work.

4. Clean areas in which painting and finishing work is to be performed just prior to the start of this work, and maintain these areas in a clean condition. Cleaning includes the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust and other extraneous materials from finish surfaces, and surfaces that will remain visible after the project work is completed.

B. Removal of Plant and Temporary Works Upon completion of the Works or when directed by the Engineer clear away all surplus materials, plant and temporary Works including scaffolding, temporary buildings, equipment, utilities, services, facilities, access, fencing, gates, covering enclosures., and make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Back-fill and compact trenches after removal of temporary drains. Break-up and remove temporary manholes, pits, septic tank and percolating pit, or, if permitted by the Engineer and local authorities having jurisdiction, disinfect and fill in solid with approved filling. Comply with all Municipality Regulations regarding final site clearance and obtain all relevant approvals and certificates.

C. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts The Contractor shall submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating:

a. Original Contract Sum b. Previous Variations


_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________


c. Deductions for Uncorrected Work d. Deductions against Advance Payment, if any e. Deductions for Delays Penalties f. Deductions for Engineer’s Fees g. Other Adjustments to Contract Sum h. Total Contract Sum as Adjusted i. Sum remaining due

2. The Engineer will issue a Final Variation Statement reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Variations for Employer authorization.

D. Contractor’s Obligations during the Defects Liability Period 1. Make good all damage consequent upon the work. 2. Make arrangements with the Employer’s Representative and

give reasonable notice of the precise dates of access to the various parts of the works for purposes of making good defects. Inform the Engineer when remedial works to the various parts of the works are completed.

1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Documents Required Prior to Final Payment

Prior to the expiry of the Period of Maintenance and prior to any final payment (including release of outstanding retention monies) the Contractor shall have submitted to the Engineer and obtained his approval to the following:

a. All guarantees and warranties required by the Contract including those required of manufacturer’s, suppliers and Sub-Contractors.

b. Reports containing certified results/readings of all testing and balancing required by the Contact. .

c. All operation and maintenance instruction manuals brochures, catalogue cuts, etc., required by the Contract.

d. All as-built drawings, Aut0CAD, final photographs, etc., required by the Contract.

e. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment required by the Contract for use after the expiry of the period of maintenance.

f. Complete listing of all consumable stores and spare parts used by the Contractor in operating and maintaining the electro-mechanical works throughout the period of maintenance.


_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________


g. Return of all Contract Documents provided under the Contract - pursuant to Clause 6 (2) of the Conditions of Contract.

B. Record Drawings 1. As the work progresses the Contractor shall maintain a

complete and accurate record of all changes and deviations from the Contract Drawings, Shop Drawings and Contract Documents, indicating the Works actually installed. This record set of prints of Contract Drawings, Shop Drawings, and Contract Documents shall be kept at the Site for inspection by the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative.

2. At the completion of the Works the Contractor shall certify that each of the revised prints for the Drawings and Documents stated above is complete and accurate and shall submit them to the Engineer’s Representative for review and approval.

3. Drawings are to be made available in CAD format. C. As-Built Drawings

Refer to Document II, General Conditions, for Additional Requirements Governing As-Built Drawings 1. Within thirty (30) days of the completion of the Works, the

Contractor shall submit one (1) inked original and five (5) printed sets of the “record drawings” and three (3) copies of manufacturer’s descriptive data for materials, equipment and fixtures including performance characteristics, capacities, technical information and operating manuals and other pertinent data necessary to enable the Employer to operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble and adjust all parts of the Works. The original shall be on untearable transparencies and transparency material and size shall be to the Engineer’s approval.

2. “As Built” drawings shall have all revision clouds and revision triangles removed and the words AS BUILT shall be written in the revision box above the title block. The latest revision and date shall be indicated in the appropriate spaces.

3. The As-Built Drawings shall be collated and each copy delivered to the Engineer in a wooden protective case of approved design with the Project Title, Contract Number and the legend “As Built Drawings” clearly and indelibly marked on the outside of the case.

1.04 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Building Products, Applied Materials and Finishes: Include product data

with catalogue number, size, composition and color and texture designations. Provide information for reordering custom manufactured products.


_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________


B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture-protection and Weather exposed Products: Include product installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance and repair.

D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Document Ill-I and 111-2 Sections.

E. Provide a list in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each item of equipment and each system: Include description of unit or

system and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

B. Panel and board circuit directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.

C. Include as-installed colour coded wiring diagrams. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in and routine normal

operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping shut-down and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble shooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly instructions and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required.



_______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02110-1 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 02110

SITE CLEARING

PART-1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The preparation of the site of the Works by the removal of all impediments to the commencement of the Earthworks for the permanent constructions.

1.02 APPROVAL OF ENGINEER A. The approval of the Engineer that the site has been properly prepared shall be

obtained before subsequent earthworks are put into operating. PART - 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Remove all debris from the site of the Works inclusive of loose and semi-buried

pieces of concrete, etc. which require disposal to avoid incorporation with excavated material which may be used in filling into excavation.

3.02 Scrape out all growing vegetation including roots which require disposal to avoid

incorporation with excavated material which may be used in filling into excavations.

3.03 All material removed under this section shall be disposed of in a place of deposit

found by the Contractor who shall be responsible for all charges in connection therewith. No burning of materials on site will be allowed.


نموذجيإنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة (الفروانية) محافظة

________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02250-1 EARTHWORK SUPPORT

SECTION 02250

EARTHWORK SUPPORT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required for

designing, furnishing, installing and maintaining a lateral support system, including bracing and tiebacks, installed to the depths required for the support of the perimeter of the excavation and adjacent facilities.

B. Design, furnish, install, test and maintain lateral bracing or tieback

systems including the vertical shoring support system if required. C. Provide adequate and continuous support of structures, streets,

utilities, sidewalks and other facilities within the vicinity of the excavation to protect such facilities against damaging movements or other effects of the work.

D. Provide support for including underpinning of walls of adjacent property

should this be necessary. E. Provide shop drawings for the lateral support system for the approval

of the Engineer. F. Continually inspect and monitor the performance of the system and

report findings to the Engineer. The Engineer may request independent inspections and testing of the system. Such inspections and testing if requested should not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to carry out his own inspections.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the

related sections within the Project Specifications. It is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor’s responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full scope of work intended.

1. Section 01330 - Submittals 2. Section 02240 - Dewatering


________________________________________________________________________________


1.3 REFERENCES A. BS 5950 – Code of Practice for the structural use of steel in building. B. BS 5268 – Code of Practice for the structural use of timber. C. BS 8110 – Code of Practice for the structural use of concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit for approval manufacturer’s specifications

and installation instructions for each item of proprietary material used, and shall confirm his intention to comply with such requirements.

B. Shop drawings showing overall plan layout of the system indicating

clearances from existing and proposed utilities, structures or other obstructions. Indicate the dimensions, material properties, locations, and spacing and penetration depths of all members and the locations of the various types of lateral supports.

C. Written data and calculations showing the design intent for the lateral

support systems, to include Engineering calculations and design assumptions for determination of loads and stresses acting on and within the lateral support systems. The calculations shall be prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer, who is experienced in this field.

D. As-built information for the lateral support system including a detailed

as-built location plan of all members showing identification, size, plan, location plan at the top and excavation level for each member, length and top elevation of each member, support levels, location of walling, and other supplementary members.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Design earthwork support under the direct supervision of a professional

Structural Engineer experienced in this work and registered with Kuwait Society of Engineers. Work should conform to necessary code requirements.

B. The Contractor shall provide personnel, qualified by training and

experience to perform the required tests and to monitor, record, plot and report the data.

C. The Engineer may be present for selected installations and shall be

allowed unrestricted access.


________________________________________________________________________________


D. Examine the site and all work prepared by others and monitor as work progresses and report to the Engineer any defects having detrimental effects on work of this Section.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for making prompt and continuous

evaluations of the test data and written weekly reports of the lateral support system performance and whenever necessary, taking immediate steps to correct any deficiencies in the capacities of individual members or providing other corrective measures which may be required to prevent damage or excessive movement.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all

authorities having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits. Obtain written permission from adjoining

property owners if proposed system of the tie-back anchors will project beyond the vertical projection of the contract limit lines. Submit such permissions with shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural steel used for shoring and lateral-bracing systems shall be

designed in accordance with BS 5950 – Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steelwork in Building.

B. Timber used for shoring and lateral bracing system shall be in

accordance with BS 5268 – Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Timber.

C. Concrete used for lateral bracing system shall be in accordance with

BS 8110 – Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete. D. Tieback tendons if required shall consist of either high strength bars or

groups of wire strand cables; the sizes and capacities to be proposed by the Contractor.

E. Cement grout materials and admixtures for tieback anchorage shall be

proposed by the Contractor for approval of the Engineer.


________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The following Geotechnical data is available and included in this

document for the Contractor’s information – Soil Investigation Report. The accuracy of the borehole test information cannot be guaranteed. The borehole logs and related information depict subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the specific locations and dates indicated. Soil conditions and water levels at other locations and times may differ from conditions occurring at the specific borehole locations.

B. The Contractor shall visit the site and make such inspections, as he

deems necessary and reach his own conclusions regarding the nature of the ground and the conditions likely to be encountered. No claim due to site conditions, nature of soil and obstacles encountered will be entertained.

C. Perform preparatory work to discover, protect, maintain, and restore

utilities or other facilities located in close proximity of the lateral support bracing system.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Subsurface soil and water data for use in determination of lateral

pressures for design of the lateral support system are provided to the Contractor for information only within the Soil Investigation Report, see article above 3.1A. It is intended that the Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of excavation supports, which must take into account the actual field conditions.

B. The Contractor is to supply a method statement for the execution of the

work endorsed by a qualified Geotechnical Engineer. C. The Contractor’s design shall take into account all soil pressures,

hydrostatic pressures, applicable traffic and construction equipment loads, stockpiles and any other surcharge loads.

D. The lateral support system shall retain and provide support for adjacent

soil, water, subsurface, utilities, streets, and other features and protect them from damage due to settlement, lateral movement, loss-of-ground, vibration or any other causes related to the work. All precautions should be taken to prevent such damage.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the movements of

the lateral support system by carrying out regular tests or inspections of specific reference points in the support system. All such data are to be collected, recorded, and submitted to the Engineer for approval.


________________________________________________________________________________


F. The Contractor shall take steps to control any unacceptable movement

in the lateral support system immediately by providing supplemental bracing or other measures (working 24 hours per day if necessary) as required if any of the following occur:

a) Field measurements indicate that significant or sustained

movements are occurring to the lateral support system.

b) Detrimental movements of adjacent structures, utilities, and other facilities are noted.

3.3 SCHEDULE A. Produce a program scheduling the start and finish date of the works

and the sequence of operations. B. Agree schedule with the Engineer and Construction Manager.



_____________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02300- 1 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL

SECTION 02300 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

PART-I, GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials, and performing all operations in connection with excavating, placing, stabilizing and compacting earth (including rock) and disposal of excavated material.

B. Perform earth works in accordance with the drawings and specification. Determine the extent of excavation based upon the requirements of the chosen procedures and methods.

1.02 RELATED STANDARDS BS 4I0 Test sieves

BS 812 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sands and filters.

1.03 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site prior to submitting his

tender, examine the site, records of existing utilities and construction, record of test boring, and the sub-surface exploration reports to determine all conditions under which the work will be performed.

B. The Contractor shall conduct a topographical survey of the site an details in a report and drawing (1/500) shall be submitted to the Engineer for information record before starting.

C. Obstructions, old construction, etc., of which no records are available, may be encountered. Make enquiries and formulate conclusions as to the extent of any such obstructions, old construction, etc., and remove all materials of any nature to the designed sub-grades indicated or specified.

D. The records of existing utilities and existing construction (including underground construction) represent all conditions known to the Engineer.

E. Existing utilities remaining in service, including those remaining in service until after relocation and relocated utilities are shown on the Drawings. Before excavating near any existing utilities, notify the Utility Owner, co-ordinate protective work and comply with the Utility Owner’s, requirement. Safeguard and protect from damage or movement any existing services, utilities and utility structures uncovered or encountered which are to remain in service.

F. Within the limits of excavation, remove existing piping, cesspits, sub soil drainage systems, conduit, manholes and related items which are to be abandoned and plug open ends with concrete.

G. Consult the Engineer immediately for directions regarding any uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or utilities encountered during excavation. Cooperate with the Utility Owners in maintaining their utilities in operation.


_____________________________________________________________________


H. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Employer against any damage whatsoever caused to any structures, services adjacent to or under the Site, due to the Contractor’s construction activities.

I. Give due consideration to the possible effects on the existing structures of lowering of the ground water level. Allow for proper shoring of the excavation next to the adjacent structures, roads and walkways, which will be essential to avoid any lateral yield of the soils, loss of foundation support, etc., and while the excavation remains open, settlements and any lateral displacement of these structures, roads and walkways should be monitored on a daily basis. Any required rectification to the shoring system should be carried out immediately so that the maximum lateral displacement at top of soldier beam should not exceed 1 mm a long the existing premises.

1.04 SAFETY AND AVOIDANCE OF NUISANCE A. Perform all work in such a manner as to ensure the safety of the Works, the

public and adjoining sites and so as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to the public and adjoining Owners, and allow in the Tender for all necessary precautions to that end.

B. Provide a temporary and strong barrier around the edge of excavations as a safety measure.

C. Keep stores and material away from the edge of excavations so as to allow free movement of labourers and staff around the excavations.

D. Use sturdy steel or timber stairs as means of entry to and exit from excavations. Do not use ladders.

E. Execute earthwork and shoring activities (and site work generally) in such a manner to ensure that no damage occurs to adjoining property.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit information and full details regarding the procedures proposed for

excavating over the area of the site, for the review and approval of the Engineer.

B. Submit shop drawings detailing temporary works relating to excavations including barriers, accesses, lighting, etc.

C. The Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and liabilities under the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for executing the excavations and temporary works in a safe and workmanlike manner.


_____________________________________________________________________


PART -2, PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Compaction Controlled Fill 1. Sound, clean, durable, granular materials free from deleterious matter

and in accordance with the following gradations: ASTM Sieve Size Total % Passing by Weight

51mm 100

38mm 70-100

25mm 55-85

19mm 50-80

9mm 40-70

ASTM Sieve Size Total % Passing by Weight

No. 4 30-60

No. 10 20-50

No. 40 10-30

No. 200 5-15

2. Gradations in the table above represent the limits which shall determine suitability of aggregate for use from the sources of supply.

3. Compaction controlled fill may be classified as well graded granular soils - Group 1 (non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient exceeding10).

4. Use compaction controlled fill under concrete slabs, side-walks, paving, under utility pipes, and at other soil bearing situations for fill within 300 mm measured horizontally from edges of footings and other below-grade vertical surfaces as approved by the Engineer, except where drainage fill is indicated or specified.

5. If sufficient compaction controlled fill material is not available from excavations under this Contract, then additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site from other sources. Both excavated material from the Site for use as compaction controlled fill, and material brought to the Site for use as compaction controlled fill, shall meet the above requirements.

B. Ordinary Fill 1. Ordinary fill shall be natural soil, well-graded and free from all organic,

weak, compressible and expansive materials,(such as high plastic clays) and also free of materials subject to decay or decomposition, and shall contain no stone larger then 150 mm in maximum dimension.

2. Ordinary fill may be classified as uniformly graded material - Group 2 (non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less).

3. Use ordinary fill for general grading and back-filling except in areas where Compaction controlled fill or drainage fill is required.

4. Use ordinary fill for earth modeling. Heights of mounds (Max. slope 1:2 (shall be as indicated in the drawings. The mounds shall be integrated


_____________________________________________________________________


naturally within the area by careful contouring. The sides of the mounds shall be perfectly stable and resistant to erosion in the event of heavy rain.

5. Do not over-compact fill material in areas which are to be planted in order to allow for maximum root penetration.

C. Drainage Fill 1. Drainage fill shall be fine aggregate, clean, well graded ,free-draining

sand, complying with ASTM C 33.

2. Drainage fill material shall be placed where called for in the Specifications or Drawings, (e.g. under pipe and utility trenches).

D. Water 1. An adequate supply of water for use in constructing earthworks in

accordance with these Specifications shall be provided.

2. The use of fresh water and brackish water will be permitted for all earthwork operations (provided that the total dissolved solids do not exceed 4500 parts per million) unless specifically stated to the contrary.

2.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ and pay all charges for a Soil Testing Laboratory acceptable to the

Engineer, to perform all tests and submit reports specified in this Section

B. The Soil Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each report whether or not the test specimens comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents and shall specifically note any deviations therefrom.

C. Testing of Materials: Contractor shall performed all tests and any additional tests shall perform all tests herein specified and any additional tests as may be required and submit test reports to the Engineer, including the following:

1. One optimum moisture maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in subgrades and fills under isolated and continuous footings, slabs on grade and paved areas. Determine maximum densities in accordance with ASTM-D1557.

2. Each type of borrow material shall receive:

a. Mechanical Analysis, ASTM D422/AASHTO T88.

b. Plasticity Index Determination. ASTM D242/AASHTO T91.

c. Moisture-Density Curve Determination. ASTM-D1557

d. CBR test as a measure for bearing capacity when required.

e. The Soil Testing Laboratory shall determine the suitability of materials to be used for fills and obtain the approval of the Engineer.


_____________________________________________________________________


D. Testing of Sub-grade and Fill Layers: Sub-grades and fill layers shall be approved by the Soil Testing Laboratory and the Engineer before construction of any further work thereon. Tests of subgrades and fill layers shall be taken as follows:

The top 300mm of sub-grade resulting from excavation shall have the maximum density at optimum moisture as hereinafter specified. In fill areas, each layer of fill shall meet the required density as hereinafter specified. Make at least one (1) field density test of the sub-grade for every two hundred square meters (20Dm of foundations, paved area or slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one (1)field density test for every overlaying two hundred square meters (200 m of paved area or slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.

E. Cooperate with the Soil Testing Laboratory in every respect in the performance of the required tests.

F. If, based on reports of the Soil Testing Laboratory and inspection, the Sub-grade or backfills are found to be below the specified density, the Engineer may require additional compaction and testing and all this shall be carried out at the expense of the Contractor.

PART -3, EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General

1. Clear and grub the site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation (above and below-grade)and all disused services and obstructions to construction.

2. Excavate in any material (including loose sand, rock and old foundations) to the lines and elevations as required. This shall include any necessary compaction to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Make excavations sufficiently large to permit placing and removal of forms, installation of waterproofing, utilities and other work below grade and for inspection thereof.

B. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavations performed below the elevations shown or specified without the Engineer’s prior written approval shall, at the Engineer’s discretion and without additional cost, be backfilled with Type V (Suphate Resistant) concrete of approved strength, unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer.

C. Authorized Additional Excavation: In case unsuitable bearing soil is encountered at sub-grade elevations shown, the Engineer may require the removal of unsuitable soil and extension of foundations, blinding concrete and slabs on grade. The cost of this extra excavation and all relevant works will be reimbursed to the Contractor at contract rates.


_____________________________________________________________________


D. Excavation for Slabs on Grade.

Subgrades: Subgrades below slabs on grade shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with the construction. Slabs on grade shall be founded on compacted soil at elevations indicated on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Subgrades to receive slabs on grade shall be level and free of loose rock, debris and standing water prior to acceptance for placing blinding concrete.

E. Excavation for Paved Areas and Kerbs: Sub-grade shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding with construction of pavements and kerbs.

a. The top 300 mm of sub-grade resulting from excavation shall be free of unsuitable materials and be equal to the following percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:

i) Under paved areas and kerbs : 95%

ii) Under slab on grade: 95%

b. If the sub-grade does not meet the above requirements after proof- rolling, compact the sub-grade by rolling with suitable compaction equipment to obtain the density specified.

F. Excavation for General Grading: Excavations made below the elevations shown or specified, unless authorized by Variation Order shall be filled and compacted as hereinafter specified for filling and compacting with no additional cost to the Employer

G. Excavation for Isolated and Continuous Foundations: Excavation for isolated and continuous foundations shall be in accordance with the dimensions shown on the drawings. The ground to receive blinding concrete below the foundations shall be level and free of loose rock, loose soil, debris and standing water prior to acceptance for placing concrete.

H. Trench Excavation: Trenches for piping and utilities shall be not less that 400mm nor more than 600mm wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded with bell holes scooped out to provide uniform bearing support of pipe and utilities on undisturbed soil throughout their entire length, except where other means of supporting pipe are indicated. Rock materials shall be excavated to 150mm below pipe invert and bed back-filled with drainage fill ,well tamped in place.

3.02 FILLING AND COMPACTING A. Materials: Materials for fill and backfill shall be as herein-before specified,

obtained from the required excavation on Site, if acceptable, or from borrow sources.

B. Utilization of Excavated Materials: Suitable excavated material for fill and backfill as defined in Paragraph “Materials”, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. Material which is suitable for use as fill under exterior slabs and pavings and for backfill shall be separated from material which is only suitable for general grading.

C. Borrow: Provide additional material, if required, at no additional cost to the Employer. Acceptable borrow shall consist of suitable material as herein-before specified. Representative samples of each type of borrow material considered suitable shall be delivered to the Engineer for approval.


_____________________________________________________________________


D. Placing: Place fill materials in horizontal loose layers in such manner as to produce a uniform thickness of material. Placement shall start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to the finished grade. Thickness of layers after compacting shall not exceed 200mm.

No fill material shall be placed on areas where free water is standing or on surfaces which have not been approved by the Engineer.

E. Compaction: Compact each layer of fill with equipment to achieve the following percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:

LOCATION % MAX. DENSITY Under Paved Areas and Kerbs - 95%

Under Slabs on Grade - 95%

General Grading - 90%

1. Do not compact soil when the moisture content varies more than 3% from the optimum moisture content. Maintain moisture content by wetting or drying manipulation. Suspended compacting operations when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions.

2. In lieu of drying by manipulation, hydrated lime, monohydrated lime, or similar beneficial ingredients may be used to reduce the moisture content, reduce the plasticity index or improve workability. Apply such ingredients in a manner and quantity as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by the Soil Testing Laboratory and approved by the Engineer.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall gain prior written approval from the Engineer and from

the appropriate authorities having jurisdiction for the disposal of surplus excavated materials from site.

B. Material resulting from clearing and grubbing operations must not be burnt on the site. Dispose of all such material legally off the Employer’s property.


نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة الفروانية)محافظة (

______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02360-1 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 02360

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 02200 – Earthwork: Backfill materials 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Soil treatment below slabs-on-grade for subterranean insects. B. Soil treatment at interior and exterior foundation perimeter, for

subterranean insects. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Building Research Establishment.

1. Overseas Building Notes No.170: Termites and Tropical Building.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with five years documented experience.

B. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants conform to specified

requirements.

C. Materials Packaging: Manufacturer’s labels and seals identifying contents.

1.5 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution

schedule, and intended application rate.

C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment, date and rate of application, areas of applications, diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.7 WARRANTY (Defined in General conditions as defects liability)

A. Provide ten-year warranty for material and installation under provisions of contract from the date of certified completion.

B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean

termites, damage to building or building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused.

C. Inspect work annually and report in writing to Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Toxicant Chemical: Water based emulsion, uniform composition, and synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil, of the generic chemical chlordane, aldrin or dieldrin.

2.2 MIX DILUTION

A. Dilute toxicant chemical aldrin or dieldrin to a 0.5 percent solution. B. Dilute toxicant chemical chlordane to a one percent solution.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify the soil surfaces are sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment.

B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil conditions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of slab-on-grade or finish grading outside foundation walls.

B. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Apply toxicant to soil at the following rates, using metered applicator:

1. Under floor slabs-on-grade: 5 liters/m2 2. Both sides of foundation wall 6-liters/linear meter/300 mm depth of

soil backfilling.


______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Apply extra treatment to structure penetrations, pipe, ducts, and other

soil penetrations.

E. Apply as a coarse spray to ensure uniform distribution.

F. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil.

3.3 RETREATMENT

A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest. B. Use same toxicant as for original treatment.

END OF SECTION


_______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02772-1 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS

SECTION 02772

PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REFERENCE A. The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Contract Documents and is

not intended to be interpreted outside that context. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labour, material, equipment, services and accessories necessary to

furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and functional, as indicated in Documents and as specified herein.

B. The principle work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to the following. 1. Precast concrete kerbs (Raised or Sunken as Described). 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03300 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as

further cited herein. ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials. BS 368 : Precast Concrete Flags 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract and as directed by the Engineer and obtain the Engineer’s approval before proceeding with the fabrication and work.

1.06 SUBMITTAL A. Submit all samples and other information as requested by the Engineer of materials

specified herein in accordance with requirements of the Contract, and before ordering materials, obtain written approval from the Engineer.

Precast Concrete Kerbs: Size as shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer. B. After the material samples have been approved, build for the Engineer’s approval a

sample length of precast concrete kerb, in conjunction with the sample panel of unit pavers, showing materials and jointing to be used.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


Combined sample of unit pavers and precast concrete kerb to be retained as assurance of the minimum standard acceptable, Protect sample for the duration of the works and remove upon completion.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials in so far as practicable shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s original

unopened containers and packages with seals unbroken and labels intact and shall be stored in a dry place. Materials such as cements, which are partially caked, the containers for which show water stains, or which are otherwise damaged or unsuitable for use, shall be removed from the site immediately.

B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage,

during the unloading, and storage on the site. Damaged kerbs will not be allowed to be installed, and should any damage be found in installed work, such work shall be removed immediately and replaced with new material. The Contractor shall assume all expenses incurred therefrom.

1.08 COORDINATION A. The work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other

Sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS A. Precast Concrete Kerbs shall be formed on hydraulic presses. B. Face Section of Precast Concrete Kerbs shall consist of Portland Cement

conforming to ASTM: C-150, Type V and BS No. 12 sulphate resistant cement. C. Desert sand to BS882 or1201.The maximum clay and silt content should not exceed

3%. D. Coarse aggregates to BS 882. Aggregate shall be free of deleterious materials and

organic matters. 2.02 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Concrete bedding materials shall be in accordance with Specifications Section

03300.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a proper surface to receive precast

concrete kerbs. B. Floor slabs and concrete to receive precast concrete kerb finish shall be clean and

free of all foreign matter detrimental to the bond. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Set kerbs in full bed of mortar complying with ASTM 270 Type M to the approval of

the Engineer. B. Provide expansion joints in kerbs at the ends of all returns and at intervals not

exceeding 6 Meters. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. At the end of each day, remove from the site and dispose of all cartons, rubbish and

debris resulting from the work of this Section.



_______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02780-1 UNIT PAVERS/INTERLOCK TILES

SECTION 02780

UNIT PAVERS / INTERLOCK TILES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide unit pavers in accordance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1.02 STANDARDS A. In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply with the latest applicable

standards, specifications, and published recommendations by KSS, BS, ACI, AWS, PCI, National Building Granite Quarries Association Inc. and Marble Institute of America. This specification governs in case of conflicting requirements.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication

of concrete pavers and stone work units of the sizes, shapes and finishes to the units required for this project and shall have adequate facilities to provide the units.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for the types of manufactured

units, including certification that the types of manufactured units comply with specified requirements.

B. Shop Drawing: Submit shop drawings indicating the dimension of units, details of

special shapes and reinforcing for each unit. C. Samples: Submit full size samples using the materials, and finish specified. Sample

acceptance will be for colour, finish, and appearance only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.05 VISUAL MOCK-UP A. Following approval of samples of unit pavers construct a visual mock-up of 15 M2 of

each type of paving on a location approved by the Engineer. Mock-up shall be representative of the final work in all respect, including setting bed and joint grout. Mock-up, if approved, may be used in the final work.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Transport, store and handle paver units in a manner to avoid undue strains, cracks,

staining or other damage. Store units free of the ground and protect from mud or rain splashes.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


PRODUCTS –PART 2

2.01 MATERIALS A. Interlocking Paving Blocks: Shall conform to ASTM C 936-82. Precast Interlocking

tiles, 80mm thick Dark Gray Colour, heavy duty and as shown in the drawings. B. Concrete Pavers: Precast concrete tile, 65mm thick, Size and Type shall be as per

requirement of the contract and as shown in the drawing .

1. General: Obtain cement, aggregate, and water from single source sufficient to complete the entire work and assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of colour.

2. Portland Cement: BS 12 or ASTM C 150, Type I, or KSS 36, non-staining.

Cement used shall be from the same mill and manufacturer to ensure uniform colour for the entire paver units required for the project.

3. Aggregates: Provide aggregates from a single source to ensure uniformity of

colour, size, and shape. a. Fine Aggregate: BS 882 or ASTM C33. b. Course Aggregate: BS 882 or ASTM C33, size No. 7. 4. Admixture: ASTM C260, air-entraining type. 5. Water: Potable clean water. 6. Formwork: Comply with Section.

7. Mix Design a. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mix (mixes) as required to obtain the

strength specified.

(i) Compressive Strength: 300 Kg/Sq. cm characteristic cube strength

minimum at 28 days.

(ii) Slump: 75mm maximum.

(iii) Air Entrainment: 3% minimum, 5% maximum.

8. Size: As shown.

C. Setting Bed for Interlocking Tile and Concrete Pavers: Sand complying with BS 882 or ASTM C33.

D. Joint Grout 1. Precast Concrete Pavers:

a. Cement: BS 12 or ASTM C150, Type I or KSS 36, non-staining as appropriate.

Water absorption not more than 2.5% after 10 minutes and 6.5% after 24 hours.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


b. Sand: Clean, natural sand complying with ASTM C144. c. Water: Potable clean water.

d. Mix: One part cement to three part sand by volume, with water as required to produce a workable homogenous mix.

2. Interlocking Paving Block: Fine sand; as recommended by the paver

manufacturer. E. Control Joint Filler F. Pigment: Pure mineral pigment, resistant to alkalies, non-fading and weatherproof,

colour as required to match approved sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Paving and Interlocking Paving Blocks

1. Sub grade: Grade and compact the sub grade to the required elevation. Reduce high spots and raise low spots to grade with approved compacted materials.

2. Setting Bed: Spread bedding sand, on compacted sub grade, and compact to the thickness shown to achieve an even, accurate surface, at proper elevation, for the pavers and blocks.

3. Pavers and Blocks:

a. Set the pavers and blocks on the setting bed and work into place so as to provide total bearing of the setting bed, without voids under the pavers and blocks.

b. Set pavers in the pattern shown with uniform open joints of the size

shown. If joint width is not shown provide 10mm wide joints. c. Grout paver joints as per manufacturer’s instruction.

d. Provide control joints with compressible joint filler, at every 6.00m on both directions, unless shown otherwise.

e. Set Interlocking blocks in the pattern shown with close joints and grout

the joints with fine sand.

f. Provide a complete installation to the pattern, grades, and lines shown, not more than 3mm out of level or alignment with adjacent units. Replace damaged or defective units.

g. Use plate vibrator having 3500-5000 cycles per second frequency. A

rubber mat shall be attached to the vibrator to protect the tiles from cracking and chipping. Carry out the compaction job all as per Manufacturer’s instruction.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


h. Follow and comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for laying of Interlocking paving blocks.

3.02 PROTECTION A. Clean and protect finished work from damage due to subsequent building operations.

Do not permit vehicular traffic on finished work.



_______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02820-1 FENCE AND GATE

SECTION 02820

FENCE AND GATE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide ornamental fencing and gates in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 STANDARDS A. he fence and gate except as otherwise shown or specified, shall comply with the following codes, specification, and standards.

1. AASHTO M-181: “Chain Link Fence”. 2. BS 1722 – PART 1: “Specification for Chain Link Fences”. 3. FS RR-F-191/1B, 3B, and 4B: “Fencing, Wire and Posts Metal (Chain Link Fence Fabric, Posts, Top Rails, Braces and Accessories) Detail Specifications”. 4. ASTM A116: “Specification for Zinc – Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric”. 5. ASTM A120: “Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot – Dipped Zinc – Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses”. 6. ASTM A123: “Specification for Zinc (Hot – Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip”. 7. ASTM A153: “Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 8. ASTM A513: “Specification for Square Steel Tube”. 9. ASTM F668: “Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) – Coated Steel chain – Link Fence Fabric”.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit to the Engineer, for information only, copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for chain link fencing and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, samples of PVC coated fabric material, post section, and typical accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, shop drawings, including plan layout and details illustrating fence height, location and sizes of posts, rails, footings, accessories and erection procedure.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable, subject to the Engineer’s approval. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products of one of the following or other equal and Approved manufacturers :

1. Chain Link Fencing a. The Chain Link Industries Co. W.L.L., Kuwait. b. Chain Link Fencing Ltd., King’s Langley, Herts, England. c. American Fence Corporation, Phoenix, Arizona, U.S.A.

2.02 CHAIN LINK FENCING A. Mesh and Gauge: Provide chain link fabric, in one-piece widths, height as shown on the Drawings with 6 gauge (4.88mm) wires and 50 x 50 mm mesh. Top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed. B. Polyvinyl Chloride Finish (PVC) : Minimum 22 mil (0.56 mm) polyvinyl chloride resin fusion bonded or thermal extruded over hot dip galvanized wire with minimum zinc coating of 120 g/m2 (0.4 oz. Per sq. ft.) in accordance with ASTM A116. Comply with ASTM F668, Class 1. Colour shall b selected by the Engineer. C. Framing and Accessories 1. Steel Framework, General: Galvanized steel, ASTM A120 or A123 with not less than

550 g. zinc per M2 (1.8 oz. Zinc per sq. ft.) of surface. a. Fittings and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A153, with zinc wrights in accordance with Table I. b. Steel Framework Finish: Provide framework, fittings and accessories in

accordance with manufacturer’s standard fusion coated chemically bonded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic resin finish over galvanizing with an appropriate cured primer. Coating thickness to be 10 to 15 mils (0.254 to 0.381mm). Colour to match chain link fabric.

2. End and Line (Intermediate) Posts: Provide end and line posts of the minimum sizes and weights as follows:

a. 48.3mm O.D. pipe weighing 4.05 Kg/lin.m. 3. Brace Rails: Provide brace rails between posts where shown on the Drawings, consisting of 42.2mm O.D. pipe weighing 3.38 Kg/lin.m. 4. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire where required consisting of galvanized 6 gauge (4.88mm) coiled spring wire coated to match fabric.

a. Locate at top, middle, and bottom of fabric.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


5. Wire Ties: Provide tie wire consisting of galvanized 9 gauge (3.76mm) wire coated to match fabric.

a. Use for tying fabric to line posts at 350mm centers.

6. Hog Rings: Provide hog rings of galvanized 9 gauge (3.76mm) wire coated to match fabric. a. Use for tying fabric to tension wire at 500mm centers.

7. Post Tops: Provide weather tight closure cap with loop to receive tension wire; one cap for each post. Coat cap to match fabric.

8. Stretcher Bars and Bands: One piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with a minimum cross-section of 5mm x 20mm. Provide one stretcher bar for each end

post. Secure bars to end posts with bands spaced not more than 375mm centers. D. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of sulphate resisting cement.

Provide all concrete work as specified in relevant Concrete Section Specifications as applicable.

2.03 GATE MATERIALS A. Gates

1. Steel gates (as shown in the drawing) shall be either “Swing” or “Sliding” type as shown in the drawing.. Frames shall be 150 x 150 mm and 100 x 50 mm steel box sections conforming to ASTM-A513.

Picket dimensions and spacing shall be 6 x 50 mm flats. All standard mounting hardware, including locks and latches, wheels and drop bolts shall be supplied. Gates shall be manually operated. 2. Chain link gate (as shown in the drawing) shall be of swing type, comprising of 50mm diameter vertical, horizontal and cross frame and 50 x 50 mm diamond mesh infill panels. Frames shall be 100 x 150 mm hollow metal box section conforming to ASTM-A513 including all standard mounting hardware, including l locks and latches, wheels, drop bolts. The gate shall be similar in shape to the existing one. Gate shall be manually operated. B. Coatings 1. All panels, gates and hardware shall be coated in a similar fashion after fabrication and surface preparation of no less than SS PC-SP 2-63, hand tool cleaning or SS PC-SP-3-43, power tool cleaning followed by coating of iron phosphate, using one of the following methods:

a. Zinc chromate gloss enamel applied electro-statically to provide a uniform 2- layer coating with a minimum 1.5 mil. Dry film thickness.

b. Electrostatically applied UL approved resin base fusion bonded polyester with a minimum 3 mil. Film thickness. c. The above coatings shall be applied after hot dip galvanizing with a minimum

of 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot as per ASTM-A90.

2. All panels, gates and hardware shall be spray coated with a high quality rust- inhibiting metal paint. Contractor to submit color samples to match building cladding to be approved by the Engineer.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CHAIN LINK FENCE A. General: Do not begin fence installation and erection before the final grading is completed, with finish elevations established, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. B. Excavation: Excavate holes of sizes and spacing shown, for post footings in firm, undisturbed, or compacted soil. C. Setting Posts: Remove all loose and foreign materials from sides and bottoms of holes, and moisten soil prior to placing concrete.

1. Center and align posts in holes 75mm above bottom of excavation. 2. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, and vibrate or tamp

for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. 3. Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct water away from posts.

4. Keep exposed concrete surfaces moist for at least 7 days after placement, or cure with membrane curing material, or other acceptable curing method.

D. Concrete Strength: Allow concrete to attain at least 75% of its minimum 28-day characteristic cube strength, but in no case sooner than 7 days after placement, before tension wires or fabric are installed. Do not stretch and tension fabric and wires until the concrete has attained its full design strength. E. Brace Rails: Provide brace rails where shown. Install in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. F. Tension Wire: Install tension wires, if required, through loops in the posts before stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 9 gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced 500mm centers. G. Fabric: Leave approximately 200mm between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taught and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor fabric to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. H. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric at 100mm centers, and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 375mm centers. I. Tie Wires: Use U-shapes wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Space tie wires at 350mm centers. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GATE A. General: Job site shall be cleared of excess spillage of concrete, spent welding equipment, packaging, and other debris. No work is to begin prior to final grading, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Frames, Pickets and Rails: Frames and pickets shall be installed truly vertical and all rails shall be truly horizontal. C. Retouching: After installation the complete gate shall be retouched wherever paint has been scratched, abraded or removed. Retouching paint shall be of the same formulation and colour as that used for the original painting.



___________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/02900-1 LANDSCAPE PLANTING

SECTION 02900

LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. Section 02110 – Site Clearing. B. Section 02200 – Earthwork. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. The supply, installation and maintenance of planting soil mix, drainage layers to planting areas on grade as shown on the drawings. B. The supply, transportation, planting and maintenance of vines, palms, trees, shrubs,

groundcovers and grass where planting is scheduled in the drawings and specifications. C. Maintenance service for two-year guarantee period. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature Standardized Plant

Names(AJCHN) B. American National Standards Institute Z60 1 (ANSI), 1980, American standard for

Nursery Stock. C. Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services, USA. Division of Plant Industry Publication Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants – Part I and Part II. D. Sunset Western Garden Book 4th Edition, Lane Publishing Co., Menlo Park, CA, USA. E. Hortus Third, staff of Bailey Hortorium, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., New York, USA. F. Landscape Plants in the United Arab Emirates, by Teresa Kwei and Tony Esmonde,

1978 published by Teresa Kwei. G. American Society of Agronomy Publication – Turfgrass, Monograph 14. H. Golf Course Management by James B. Beard I. Grass – U. S. D. A Yearbook of Agriculture. J. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:

1. C 136 – 81 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 2. D 442 – 63 (1972) Particle – Size Analysis of Soils.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


3. D 2607 – 69 Standard Classification of peats, mosses, humus and related products. 4. D 2974 – 71 Standard method of test for moisture, ash and organic matter of peat materials. 5. D 2976 – 71 Standard method of test of pH of peat Materials.

K. Official Method of Analysis (11th Edition and Supply, 1 October 1970). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples:

1. Submit samples of the following in accordance with Section 01340. a. Agricultural Soil: 1 Kg. b. Organic Soil Amendments; 1 Kg of each specified. c. Inorganic Soil Amendments; 1 Kg of each specified. d. Drainage store: 0.25 cubic meter. e. Water: samples of landscape water in use shall be submitted to Engineer as required for suitability analysis of irrigation water. f. Sand, Soil Mixes, and Organic Amendments: Samples of sand, soil mixes and organic materials shall be submitted to the Engineer as required.

2. Allow 14 calendar days for Engineer’s review.

B. Manufacturer’s Literature:

1. Manufacturer’s literature and labels for the following materials shall be submitted:

a. Fertilizer. b. Pesticide. c. Anti-desiccant.

C. Test Reports:

Test shall be based on a representative sample of material to be used. Submit reports to the Engineer. Do not use materials until reviewed by the Engineer. Material used in construction shall be the same as that reviewed in testing. The Testing shall be performed by an authorized testing laboratory accepted by the Engineer and all cost for this work shall be at the expense of the Contractor. a. Agricultural soil. The following information is required.

1. Mechanical analysis. 2. Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C. 3. Electrical conductivity expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C. 4. PH 5. Boron content expressed in milligrams per liter.

b. Organic soil amendment the following information is required: 1. pH.

2. Loss of weight by ignition expressed as a percentage of ash content Compared to the oven dry weight of the peat moss.

3. Moisture absorption capacity expressed as a percentage by weight as compared to the oven dry weight of the peat moss.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Certificates of Inspection: 1. Certificates of inspection shall accompany the invoice for each shipment of plants as

may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with Engineer prior to acceptance of the material.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under

direction of a skilled and qualified foreman. B. Substitutions:

1. When material or plants of the species specified are not available, substitution may be made only with the written approval of the Engineer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF PLANT MATERIALS. A. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Groundcovers: 1. Notify the Engineer 14 calendar days in advance of time and manner of delivery of plants. 2. Immediately before shipping all plants in partial or full leaf shall be sprayed with anti-

desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunk, branches, twigs and/or foliage. 3. Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that shall not cause damage to the branches, shape and future development of the plants after planting. B. General: 1. All plant material shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic, seasonal or breakage injuries during transit. 2. Evidence of inadequate protection, carelessness while in transit or improper handling shall be caused for rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh and protected at all times. Such protection shall encompass the entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled or being planted. 3. Containerized plants shall not have their containers broken or their root system cracked or damaged in any way. 4. Upon arrival, plants will be inspected for proper transit procedures. Should the

roots be dried out, large branches be broken, balls of earth be broken, or loosened, or areas of bark be torn, or should the plant have desiccation, leaf shredding, diseases, insect eggs, insect infestation, frost damage, damage from browsing or grazing, the Engineer will reject the injured plant(s).

1.07 ACCEPTANCE A. The Engineer will inspect plant material upon delivery to the site. Upon acceptance of the plant material as to the correct species, qualities and condition, written approval will be given and notice to proceed.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty from Date of Substantial Completion under provisions of

General Conditions of Contract. B. Replace plant materials found not in a healthy growing condition. C. Replacements: Plant materials of same size and species at the time of replacement with

a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. 1.09 AINTENANCE SERVICE A. Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until

termination of warranty period. B. Maintenance shall be including measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in

a vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:

1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides.

2. Watering sufficient to saturate root system. 3. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches and treatment of prune wounds. 4. Disease and insect control.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS A. Selection of Plants: 1. Locate and tag the plant material in the Plant List. Tag plants provided that the quantity of any one species is less than 50 units. Where more than 50 units of one species are specified, tag 10% of the required number as “Sample Plants” and all plants of this species delivered to the job shall match the quality of the sample. 2. Once having located the material in the nursery(s), notify the Engineer in writing 14 calendar days prior to digging or assembling plant materials for shipping. B. Reference : 1. Nomenclature: Plant names shall agree with the nomenclature of the references listed in 1.03 of this Section. Names of varieties not listed therein shall conform generally with names accepted in the nursery trade.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


C. Plant Size and Quality: 1. Palms: Shall be of a quality equal to palms as designated in the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Service Publication – Part II Palms and Trees. a. All Plants shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of diseases or insect infection or damage. b. Fronds shall exhibit no signs of moisture stress. All palms shall have straight trunks. Any palm having a weak or thin trunk not capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be accepted. c. Palms shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Kuwait for a period of two years. 2. Trees, Shrubs and Vines: a. Plants shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of diseases or insect infection or damage. b. Plants shall be of a quality equal to standards set forth in ANSI Z60.1. c. Container grown plants shall be healthy, vigorous, well rooted and established in the container in which they are grown. They shall have tops which are of good quality, normal size for the species, and are in healthy growing condition and

shall not be root bound. Fibrous root to have developed so that the root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container.

d. Plants shall be grown in climatic conditions similar to Kuwait for a minimum period of one-year depending on container size.

3. Groundcovers. Shall be healthy, vigorous, well formed and free of diseases. 4. Grass Stolons Grass stolons shall be fresh living sections of rhizomes and having nodes which will produce growth when properly planted and maintained. Stolons shall be grown from high quality vegetative material in soil treated with approved pesticides, and be free of diseases, insects, and weeds or weed seed. 2.02 PLANTING MEDIUM

A. Agricultural Soil: 1. Soil shall be obtained from well-drained arable land. It shall be free draining

and non- toxic. Soil shall not contain calcium carbonate subsoil, excessive boron, refuse, roots, heavy clay, clods, noxious seeds, phytotoxic materials, rocks, sticks or litter.

2. Soil shall be agricultural soil obtained from a source approved by the Engineer following testing and inspection of a representative sample. A sample load of

approved agricultural soil shall be retained on the site until the end of the agricultural soil filling operations for comparison with subsequent deliveries.

3. Agricultural soil shall be as follows:

Physical Characteristics: Material Passing Sieve No. 10 90 – 100% Material Passing Sieve No. 35 70 – 80% Material Passing Sieve No. 140 0.5 – 1% Material Passing Sieve No. 270 0.0 – 0.5%


___________________________________________________________________________________________


Chemical Characteristics:

1. Salinity (ECe x 10^3) less than 4 2. SAR (Sodium adsorption Ratio) less than 6 3. Boron (Saturation Extract) less than 1.5 ppm 4. pH less than 8.5

B. Organic Soil Amendment:

1. Peat Moss: a. Peat shall be sphagnum peat of a coarse agricultural grade 1 or 11D. It shall be free of sticks, stones and roots. The pH shall be form 3.8 – 4.2. The minimum organic content shall be 80% on a dry weight basis. The peat shall be supplied in undamaged commercial bales in an air dry condition.

C. Fertilizer: Fertilizers are as indicated below: 1. Soil Mix

a. Granular compound fertilizer, shall be balanced complete fertilizer, with an analysis of 15 – 15 – 15 + Te + Fe in a free flowing granular form and shall be available for plant absorption form 1 degree up to 30 degree soil temperature.

b. Soil sulfur, S, 99% sulfur content with 100% passing a 16 mesh screen and 50% passing a 100 mesh screen.

2. Tree and Shrub Pits a. Slow Release Fertilizer: Shall be slow release 21 gram size planting tablets with an NPK of analysis 20 – 10 – 5 + traces (chelated Fe, Mn and Zn), longevity approximately 12 – 14 months, or approved equal.

3. Lawn Areas a. NPK analysis of 16 – 20 – 00 @ 2Kg / 100m2 once per year. b. Urea @ 50Kg / 100m2 three times per year. c. First fertilizing shall be with 16 – 20 – 00.

4. All Planting Areas- Additional fertilizer shall be Gro Power or equal to be approved from engineer.

2.03 ANTI - DESICCANT A. Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion, which provides a protective film over D-way or

plant surface and permeable enough to permit transpiration. It should be delivered in containers of the manufacturer, mixed according to the manufacturer’s directions, and shall be ‘Wiltpruf’, Foli-Gard or approved equal.

2.04 HERBICIDE A. Herbicide shall be as approved by the Engineer. 2.05 MULCH A. Shredded bark mulch as approved by the Engineer. 2.06 EDGING

A. Plastic PVC Edging 6mm thick by 150mm deep by 6m lengths with connecting metal.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


2.07 STAKES / TIES A. Tree stakes shall be of wood free of knots, straight of a size 5cm x 5cm square of

lengths as indicated on drawings. B. Tree ties shall be of 12 gauge G.I. wire and ½” reinforced rubber hose. 3 ties shall be

used per tree. PART – 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES (covered under general conditions) A. Prior to any plantation works, locate, inspect, mark, and protect all site utilities, structures, irrigation equipment and piping, and existing vegetation during work. B. Paving and other work installed under other sections of this specification, shall be kept

clean and free of soil, and other materials incidental to this work. C. Provide such barricades, temporary fencing, signs or policing as may be necessary for

the protection of all planted areas until they are accepted. 3.02 PLANTING SEASON A. Upon approval of the Engineer. B. Plant only when weather and soil conditions are in accordance with locally accepted

practice. 3.03 PLANTING SOIL MIX PREPARATION A. The planting soil mix for both Agricultural and Bio-remediated soil shall be:

1. Agricultural or Bio-remediated Soil 70% 2. Organic Soil Amendment 30% (Peat Moss) 3. 1Kg soil sulphur per M3 4. 2.3 Kg/cu meter NPK 15 – 15 – 15 + Fe + Fe compound fertilizer. 5. Gro Power @ 70 Kg per 100 M2 6. Gypsum as per soils test 7. Wetting agent as per soils test

B. Soil mixes will conform to the following requirements:

1. Salinity (ECe x 1000) less than 4.0 2. SAR less than 4.0 3. pH 6.5 to 7.5 4. Boron (by saturation extract) less than 1.0 ppm

C. Soil Mixing Procedure:

1. Mix physical ingredients (Peat and Agricultural Soil) to a uniform mixture. The organic portion should be moist (50% moisture content as received basis) but not overly wet to the point where fertilizer particles cling to it. The agricultural soil should be moist (1 to 2%) but not wet.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


2. Mix fertilizers ingredients until homogeneous and as per manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Apply fertilizer ingredients to the physical mixture and mix until homogeneous. 4. The result mix should be moistened to about 5 – 10%. The mix should be covered if not to be utilized immediately. Soil mixes should not be stored for periods longer than two (2) weeks.

3.04 PLACEMENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX. A. The planting soil shall be placed in planting areas and compacted using water saturation to the full mix depth. The area shall be leveled to within plus or minus

50mm and then again be thoroughly irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets and settle soil. The soil shall be evenly moistened to a depth of 300mm. After the irrigation system has been installed, re-compact and settle all disturbed areas and fine grade to a smooth continuous grade. There shall be no uneven surfaces greater than plus or minus 15mm.

B. After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the area and

the soil shall be re-leveled to form a smooth continuous grade. 3.05 LAYOUT AND STAKING A. When planting areas are ready to receive plants, stakes shall be driven in tree and

shrub locations. Shrub and groundcover plants rows shall be marked and Coordinated with tree locations. B. Give the Engineer 7 calendar days notice in writing before the inspection of staking. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF PLANTS. A. General 1. Planting operation shall be confined to one area at a time. The object being to

prepare, plant and finish each landscape area in one operation complete with its own functioning irrigation system.

2. Move and handle plants by container or root ball. Large Palms and Trees which are moved by crane or front end loader must be protected so as not to damage the rootball, trunk, branches or fronds.

3. Plant containers shall be cut off all container grown plants and removed 4. Set the plants at the same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were dug or soil level in their container except palms. 5. Water all plants immediately after planting. 6. Immediately after planting, all plant material shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs and/or foliage. 7. Cut ropes or strings from the tops of all plants after plant has been set, except palms. 8. Apply shredded bark mulch where shown to a depth as specified in drawings.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


B. Container Grown Plants 1. Set all planting plumb and brace trees and shrubs rigidly in position until the planting soil

mix has been consolidated around rootball by water settlement. 2. When planting, water thoroughly and lightly tamp to eliminate all air pockets in the

planting soil mix. 3. Apply slow release planting tablets evenly in tree, palm, shrub and groundcover pits

below soil level as recommended by the manufacturer at the following rates: a. 1 gallon plants : 1 tablet b. 5 gallon plants : 3 tablets c. 3 meter palms : 9 tablets

4. Groundcover and small shrubs shall be planted in neat rows with triangular spacing as

shown on the drawings. D. Grass Stolons 1. Grass stolons shall be installed the same day as delivery to the site. 2. Stolons should be spread over the prepared area at a rate of 8 bushels per 95

square meters and planted 12mm into the soil by means of a stolon “crimper”, by hand, or other piece of approved equipment. It shall then be rolled and leveled in the event of low spots.

3. Immediately after planting, the area shall be irrigated until the top 80mm is wetted. The planting soil must be keep damp at all times until the stolons show signs of significant growth.

3.07 PVC EDGING A. Install PVC Edging between all shrub beds and lawn areas as indicated on plans prior to planting. B. Install as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.08 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done after planting and staking operations are complete. B. Pruning shall be done only by an experienced horticulturist or aborist.

Do not prune until guidelines for pruning have been established in the field with the engineer. The engineer will require that several trees or shrubs be pruned in his presence, such pruning being prototypical for the entire job.

C. Plants shall be pruned according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the

natural character of the plant. Tip back crowns if so instructed. D. Remove all dead wood, suckers and badly bruised branches. E. All saw cuts on branches larger than 2cm. to be made with 3 cuts; i.e. undercut, stub

cutoff and final cut. F. Only clean sharp proper tools shall be used. Do not use pruning shears where loppers are required or loppers where a pruning saw is required.


___________________________________________________________________________________________


3.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labor for maintenance of all landscape areas and irrigation installed as part of this contract. B. The work shall include but not be limited to mowing, weed control, Insect control, disease control, pruning, replacement of substandard or dead plant material and maintenance of the irrigation system in full working order at all times. All maintenance shall be coordinated with the Owner. C. Maintain of lawn areas shall be as follows:

1. Maintain surfaces and supply additional planting soil mix where necessary, including area affected by erosion. 2. Water to ensure uniform growth. 3. Mow grass regularly with a sharp reel-type mower. Normal mowing height shall be 2

–35mm. Remove clippings immediately after mowing. 4. After first mowing water grass sufficiently to moisten soil from 75 to 125mm deep. 5. Apply herbicides when weeds start developing, during calm weather, according to

manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Re-sod or re-stolonize damaged grass areas (larger than 150mm x 150mm) showing

root growth failure, deterioration, bare or thin spots and eroded areas. 7. Fertilizer shall be distributed on designated area during period when grass is dry. Fertilizer conforming to physical condition, packaging and marking as specified

under “Products” shall be provided. For each application of fertilizer, apply uniformly over the area, in two successive applications using half of the quantity for each application, applied at right angles to each other. In re-fertilization operations, the following sequence shall be observed: a. Mow turf. b. Remove grass clippings. c. Apply fertilizers. d. Surface irrigates to force fertilizer downward.

D. Perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications. E. Perform maintenance for a period of one-year commencing from certified completion.



_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/03100-1 CONCRETE FORM WORK

SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORM WORK

PART- 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with the design, fabrication, erection and striking of formwork.

B. The responsibility for the design, fabrication, erection, striking, safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest entirely with the Contractor

1.02 REFERANCE STANDARDS: A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as

further cited herein: American Concrete Institute ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork” and chapter V, ACI 318 except where more stringent standards are required by this specification or are shown on the drawings.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Formwork design and construction shall be executed and supervised by fully

qualified personnel having a minimum of five years’ experience on similar sized projects.

1.04 COORDINATION: A. The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of other

sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this section before the installation of items herein.

1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA: A. Formwork systems shall be prefabricated and properly designed to meet the

requirements specified herein. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true, water and mortar tight, sufficiently rigid and strong to prevent bulging between supports and to maintain true position and shape during and after placing of concrete without bowing and distortion.

B. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking

of fins and other defects. C. Design shall take into account:

1. Height of pour 2. Thickness of member 3. Rate of pour 4. Concrete slump 5. Placing temperature


_________________________________________________________________________________________


6. Texture of finish 7. Concrete density 8. The worst combination of :

a. Formwork forces b. Reinforcement weight c. Wet concrete weight d. Incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and

compacting concrete. e. The use of externally applied vibrators.

9. Methods of concrete discharge. D. Design formwork to be :

a. Sufficiently rigid to maintain the correct position shape and profile.

b. Demountable without shock, disturbance or damage to concrete. Formwork properly supported on shoring and ties shall be capable of being retained in position during concrete maturing period.

E. Adjustable steel ties, supports and shoring shall allow form boards and framework to

be accurately adjusted to line and level.

F. End forms or bulkheads shall be rigid enough to prevent distortion during placing and compaction of the concrete and shall be securely fastened. Holes or slots shall be plugged or sealed to prevent grout leakage.

1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples:

1) Submit samples of all materials proposed for use in formwork.

2) Submit all other information requested by the Engineer. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings of formwork design, including plans and sections, and

proposals or jetting and lifting arrangements.

Scales of shop drawings : i. Details 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20. ii. Construction 1:5, 1:100 iii. Layout and Site Plan 1:100 or 1:200

2. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer's review of shop drawings.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


PART – 2 : PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS A. Forms shall be of a suitable permanent type such as metal or plastic. Wood forms may

be used for short runs of special shapes but should be constructed to produce work of a quality equal to that produced by the permanent forms. A concrete foundation for the casting bed shall be provided. All forms for precast must be constructed to permit movement of the member without damage during lifting, handling, transporting and storing. In case wood forms are used, exterior type Douglas Fir Grade B-B (Concrete Form) plywood minimum 19mm thickness shall be used or approved equal. Before reusing forms, nails shall be withdrawn and the surfaces in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, otherwise forms shall be water and moisture tight to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Offsets at form joints due to misalignment or open joints should avoid.

2.02 FORM COATING A. B.P. CCM-3 (British Petroleum) or B.P. CM-3 (R) (V Petroleum) or Calform (Caltex)

or form wax of a type which does not impart any stain to concrete nor interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, or waterproofing material applied to concrete surface.

2.03 FORM TIES

1. Factories fabricated adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form tie designed to prevent form deflection and bulging.

2. For surfaces exposed in finished work use tie screws with removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or Series 300 stainless steel snap ties.

3. For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used. Use sties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is closer than 40 mm from the finished concrete surface.

2.04. FILLET AND CHAMFER MOULDING STRIPS A. PVC, or timber to the approval of the Engineer. 2.05 TAPES A. Tapes for sealing joints of formwork panels for smooth finished concrete shall be

plastic faced adhesive type to the approval of the Engineer. Any tape marks left on concrete surfaces shall be removed.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


PART-3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Forms shall conform to the lines, dimensions and shapes of concrete shown,

providing for openings, keys, slots, projections as required.

B. Design formwork so that no discernible imperfection is in evidence finished concrete surface keys to deformation, bulging, jointing or leakage of forms.

C. Location of joints for plywood facing to be submitted for review by the Engineer.

3.02 ERECTION A. Supports: Props and supports shall be, sufficiently strong to support the entire

construction load. Supports shall in all cases be in accordance with the formwork design approved by the Engineer

B. Ties: Position of ties to be strictly as per approved shop drawings, especially for exposed concrete surfaces and in all cases the approval of the Engineer must be obtained prior to construction.

C. Release Agents :

1. Apply evenly to face of formwork, where required. 2. Avoid contact with re-enforcement and previously cast concrete at construction joints. 3. Where concrete to be permanently exposed, use one approved agent over the whole area. 4. The contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the type of Form releasing agent he proposes to use.

D Fillets :

Install fillets at all interior right angle junctions in the formwork.

3.03 STRIKING A. Striking of formwork: Striking of formwork is subject to concrete attaining at least 75% of specified strength and/or in accordance with MPW Specification.

3.04 FORM CLEANING A. All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete and suitable

temporary openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials from the interior without disturbing the whole formwork. All surfaces in contact with concrete shall be wetted or treated with and approved form releasing agent before placing of reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old concrete or any other deposit before re-use.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


B. Ensure that during concreting, formwork and supports are inspected by experienced

workers and that any portion which shows signs of sagging or displacement is straightened.



______________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/03200- 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART- 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with steel bar reinforcement.

1.02 REFERANCE STANDARDS:

The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as further cited herein: ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced concrete

Structures. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ASTM A-185 Welded Wire Mesh Reinforcement ASTM A-497 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete

Reinforcement. ASTM A-615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. AWS DI.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. BS 4449 Hot Rolled Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete. BS 4466 Bending Dimensions and scheduling of Reinforcement for

concrete.

BS 4483 Steel fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete. BS 5135 Metal-Arc Welding for carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels. SSPC-SP-10 Structural Steel Painting Council

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Supervisory staff shall have at least the qualification and experience to meet the

requirements of this Specification. B. Welders: Only certified welders shall be employed for welding reinforcement.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


1.04 CO-ORDINATION A. The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of other sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this section before the installation of items herein.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or

evaluation by the Testing Laboratory. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detail and placement drawings for all reinforcing steel which

are correlated with foaming and concrete placement techniques and requirements. a. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations, which

have been shown on shop drawings reviewed by the Engineer. b. The drawings shall be in such detail as to ensure that there will be a

minimum, if any, of difficulties in execution of the work in the field.

c. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations, sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include schedules and diagrams to indicate bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.

d. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint

locations, shall show all floor openings, wall opening and edges of concrete. Floor openings, wall openings and sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be coordinated with the respective trades and shown on these shop drawings in accordance with the criteria indicated on the Contract Drawings.

e. No work shall be fabricated until both sets of shop drawings (Reinforcing

Steel and Concrete Dimensions) have been reviewed by the Engineer (with corrections and re-submittals as required by the Contract Documents). After review by the Engineer, furnish all copies needed for fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.

f. Be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materials called for or

required by the Contract Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the reviewed shop drawings.

g. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer’s review of shop drawings.

C. Certificates :

a. Submit for each consignment from each source a certificate verifying

compliance with this specification.

b. Submit Reinforcement Manufacturer’s routine test records.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Before any order is placed by the Contractor, he shall notify the Engineer of the

prime source of supply where the reinforcement is drawn of rolled. The Contractor shall ensure that all steel delivered to the site shall come from the source accepted by the Engineer. Merchants and stockholders will not be an acceptable source unless it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the whole of the reinforcement applied to the contract complies with this Specification

B. All batches of reinforcement in which unacceptable material has been mixed with acceptable material shall be rejected and shall be removed from the site forthwith.

C. Reinforcement shall be protected at all times from contamination and corrosion

from the ground and atmosphere during all storage, bending and handling operations.


2.01 BAR REINFORCEMET

A. Bar reinforcement shall be hot rolled high yielding deformed bars complying with

ASTM A-615 Grade 60 with minimum yield strength of FY. 4200 Kg. /cm2.

B. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall comply with ASTM A-497 with minimum ultimate tensile strength of 4200 Kg./cm2.

C. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting

transporting, and placing at the site. 2.02 BAR SUPPORTS : A. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the

Engineer for support of the bottom layer of reinforcing in the foundations and slab on grade only. The blocks shall be of minimum size and made from cement sand small aggregate mix to match surrounding concrete strength appearance and durability.

B. Other spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spoiling of the concrete cover. The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following, subject to approval be Engineer 1. High density plastic. 2. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet. 3. Stainless Steel.

2.03 TIE WIRE : A. Shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 16 gauge or approved fasteners,

unless shown otherwise on the drawings.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


2.04. TESTING OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL : A. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be

carried out in strict accordance with the provisions of BS 18 Part 2 in addition to MPW Standards and Specifications.

B. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain curve will be required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also be required of cross-sectional area and deformation/bond characteristics of deformed bars.

C. The Contractor is to allow for tensile and bound tests, at his own cost, for each size

of bar to be used in the concrete construction. D. Test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3) weeks

before concrete work commences on Site. Tests will be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer from time to time.

E. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes

in which case the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When any test results do not conform to the relevant standard the reinforcement steel shall be removed from the site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART-3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall supply and incorporate in the work such steel reinforcement

including tie wire, support and spacer bars and the like whether shown or not shown on the drawings which are necessary to complete the work, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall check his bending schedules against the latest drawings and any discrepancy must be immediately referred to the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for ordering all materials required to complete the job according to normal good practice and to the approval of the Engineer.

C. Store all reinforcement under cover to avoid contact with the ground, moisture, dust

and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage will be sufficient cause for rejection of reinforcement.

D. All steel, before being placed in position, shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose rust,

scale and any other coating. If reinforcement has been badly rusted or potted it will be rejected. Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning the steel bars

E. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after the placement of the

reinforcement the Engineer may require the Contractor to restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory condition and may require protection of same from further corrosion.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


F. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be

painted with a heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to continuation of concreting.

G. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the

allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1. H. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be used in the

work. 3.02. CUTTING AND BENDING : A. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar

bending schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar number as shown on the relevant bar bending schedule.

B. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with B.S 4466 or ACI 315. C. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the

temperature of steel is below 50 C, special precautions may be necessary such as reducing the speed of bending or, with the Engineer’s approval, increasing the radius of bending.

D. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be

taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in B.S 4466.

Reinforcement projecting from concrete shall not be bent without prior written approval from the Engineer.

3.03 SPLICES: A. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall be in

accordance with AC 1318.

B. Splices shall be staggered to the approval of the Engineer, and the fabric shall be securely tied layer to layer.

C. Bars shall have minimum anchorage and lap lengths in accordance with ACI 318 requirements unless otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents.

3.04 ERECTION: A. Give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice before commencing fixing reinforcement

to allow inspection of formwork.

B. Ensure that spaces to receive reinforcement are clean and free from debris. C. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in

place to prevent displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings is obtained by the use of approved plastic tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement and cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be securely tied together at every alternate intersection, or as approved by the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, and Para. 7.3 to ACI Standard 301, Chapter 5,

Para. 5.5. Reinforcement to be secured against displacement out side the specified limits unless specified otherwise. Cover shall be clear cover as shown on the drawings.

E. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on the drawings, together with such other

supports as may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the links and formwork shall be of the same dimension as the nominal cover. Spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling or the concrete cover. Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with steel wire or tying devices. Care shall be taken to ensure that the projection ends o ties or clips do not encroach into concrete cover. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections.

F. Surface Condition of Reinforcement: Concrete shall not be placed unless reinforcement is free from mud, oil paint, retarders, loose rust, loose mill scale, grease or any other substance.

G. Laps and Joints of Reinforcement: Laps and joints shall only be made by methods

specified and at the positions shown on the drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.



___________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. This specification section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the complete project except where more stringent or specialized requirements are indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the entire project homogeneous concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or other structural defects, and free of honey combs, air pockets, voids, projections, offsets of plane and other defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or damage in the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the cost of remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the Contract Documents.

C. Supervise and co-ordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and be responsible for the complete manufacturing process for all concrete work. All methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and manufactured concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to execution of the concrete work.

D. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be properly selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed by the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the complete concrete construction phase. Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities shall be available for all tools and equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, methods and the work, and if any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall implement removal, replacement or remedial work and revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Employer.


___________________________________________________________________________________


1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following

Agencies as further cited herein: BS 12 Portland cement. BS 410 Test Sieves BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources BS 1305 Batch type concrete mixers BS 2539 Preferred dimensions of R.C. structural members BS 3148 Tests for water for making concrete BS 3797 Light-weight aggregates for concrete BS 4027 Sulphate Resisting Portland cement BS 4251 Truck type concrete mixers BS 4254 Sealants BS 4550 Methods of Testing Cement BS 5075 Concrete admixtures BS 5328 Methods of specifying concrete, including ready-mixed

concrete BS 5337 Code of Practice for structural use of Concrete for retaining

aqueous liquids BS 5606 Code of Practice for accuracy in building BS 8110 Part 1: 1985 Code of Practice for the Structural use of

concrete ACI 117 Code of Practice for Accuracy in Building ACI 211.1 Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,

and Mass Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 304 Recommended Practices for Measuring, Mixing,

Transporting and Placing Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 309 Consolidation of Concrete ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete AASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete AASHTO M182 Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf ASTM C31 Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Field ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for

Concrete ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of

Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C114 Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement ASTM C117 Test Method for Material Finer Than 75-um (No.200) Sieve

in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.


___________________________________________________________________________________


ASTM C125 Definitions of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete

ASTM C142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates

ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing

Materials ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ASTM C227 ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates

(Chemical Method) ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C403 Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration

Resistance ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C641 Aggregate Staining Test Reports ASTM D1751 Joint Fillers ASTM D1752 Joint Fillers ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapour – Transmission of Materials ASTM E154 Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapour Barrier

under Concrete Slabs and as Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces.

K.S.S. 36 Ordinary and Quick-Solidifying Portland Cement K.S.S. 39 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement. K.S.S. 100 Testing

Techniques for Portland Cement Properties

Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by US Department of Transportation

Curing Compounds: UK Ministry of Public Building and Works.

UK Department of Transport Note: Copies of all the above codes shall be submitted to the Engineer.


___________________________________________________________________________________


1.03 DEFINITIONS : A. Water/cement ratio: The ratio of water to cement in a mix, expressed as a

decimal fraction. Water being that which is free to combine with cement, including free water in aggregate but excluding that absorbed by aggregate.

B. Hot weather: A shade air temperature of 35 o deg. C and rising.

1.04 QUALITY CONTROL : A. Supervisory Staff: The Contractor shall provide details of his supervisory

staff and foremen for the approval of the Engineer before commencement of Concrete Work: The Engineer retains the right to reject any Supervisory Staff who in his opinion do not have sufficient experience for the requirements of the Project. The Supervisory staff shall be present on site at all times when concrete work is being carried out

C. Testing Authority: All tests required and / or specified herein and/or elsewhere shall be carried out by the State Research Station or other approved agency, or an approved site laboratory at Contractor’s expense.

D. Preliminary Test (Trial Tests):

1. Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the required minimum cement content and mean strength greater than the required characteristic strength by at least the current margin. The current margin shall be taken as the lesser of:

a. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cylinder tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant and under similar supervision, but not less than 2.5 N/mm2 for concrete with compressive strength less than 20 N/mm2 or not less than 3.75 N/mm2 for concrete with compressive strength greater than 20 N/mm2.

b. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cylinder tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of

similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than 5N/mm2 for concrete with compressive strength less than 20N/mm2 or not less than 7.5N/mm2 for concrete with compressive strength of 20N/mm2 or above.


___________________________________________________________________________________


When a concrete production facility does not have enough field strength test records for calculation of standard deviation, required average strength fc’s shall be determined from Table A.

Table A – required average compressive strength when data not available to establish a standard deviation.

Special Compressive Strength fc’, N/mm2

Required Average Compressive Strength N/mm2 (Target mean Strength)

20 N/mm2 to 35 N/mm2

fc’ + 8.5 N/mm2

Over 35 N/mm2 fc’ + 10 N/mm2

Evidence shall be submitted to the Engineer for each grade of concrete showing that at the intended workability the proposed mixed proportions and manufacturing method will produce concrete of the required quality. Declare any change in source of material and any change in cement content, nature and source of each material, full details of tests on trial mixes, proposed quantities of each ingredient per cubic meter of fully compacted concrete.

2. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work,

unless specified otherwise, make preliminary tests and prepare design mixes, in accordance with ACI-301, Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.8, Method 1 or Method 2, in a design laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.

3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make one test for each design mix to verify that the total Chloride (C1) Ion content and the total Sulphate (SO3) content of each mix is within the specified limits. Perform Chloride tests in accordance with “Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete” as contained in Report No. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration. Perform Sulphate (SO3) tests in accordance with ASTM C114.

4. Trial Mixes :

a. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three separate

batches of concrete shall be made using materials likely to be typical of the proposed supply and preferably under full scale production conditions. If circumstances make this inconvenient the batches may be mixed in the laboratory only if approved by the Engineer.


___________________________________________________________________________________


b. Sampling and testing shall be strictly in accordance with ASTM C-39. The workability of each batch of concrete shall be determined and three (3) cylinders made from each batch of concrete for testing at 28 days. A further three (3) cylinders from each batch shall be made for testing at an earlier age. The trial mix proportions shall be approved by the Engineer if the average strength of nine (9) cylinders tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the appropriate margin or if nine (9) cylinders tested at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount. The appropriate margin is the margin as given in Clause 1.06.C.1 herein for concrete of nominally similar proportions and of similar materials to the trial mix. For this purpose if the trial mix does not differ by more than 30 kg/m3 of cement from a reference mix of similar workability, then the proportions may be regarded as “nominally similar” and the current margin for the reference mix can be taken as the appropriate margin for the trial mix. If trial mixes are required to demonstrate that the maximum free water/cement ratio is not exceeded, two batches shall be made in a laboratory with cement and saturated sand surface dry aggregate known from past records of the suppliers of the materials to be typical. The proposed mix proportions shall be accepted only if both batches have the correct cement content and free water/cement ratio below the maximum specified value at the proposed degree of workability.

5. Whenever a change of brand or source for any of the concrete

ingredients occurs, additional “Preliminary tests” will be required and the cost of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection :

1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests at the

plant and in the field. Notify the Engineer one day in advance of concrete work inspections and tests. Sampling of concrete taken from the job will be carried out under the direction of the Engineer. Likewise the conducting of tests carried out by the Contractor in his site testing laboratory shall be under the direction of the Engineer.

2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with BS 5328. BS 5328

requires that tests are made on the constituent materials in accordance with the relevant British Standard, (refer to Part 2 of this section), and that control tests are made on concrete to ensure compliance with the specified requirements.

When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified in BS 5328, i.e.

a.. Characteristic compressive strength b. Specified mix proportions c. Minimum or maximum cement content.


___________________________________________________________________________________


d. Maximum free-water/cement ratio. e. Workability f. Air content of concrete g. Temperature of fresh concrete h. Density of fully compacted concrete

3. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or directed by the Engineer. The cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

4. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labour and material as

required. Notify the Engineer when reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any inspection he deems necessary. Submit checking sheets before placing concrete. Do not place concrete until these inspections have been completed and all deficiencies reported by the Engineer have been corrected to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

5. Supply all moulds required for tests as described below, using moulds of the same type and manufacture for making all test specimens. If field tests show excessive slumps or other violations of the Contract Documents, the entire batch of concrete from which the sample in question was taken will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense. The Engineer will inspect all concrete operations in the plant and in the field. 6. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at job

Shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to checking by the Engineer at the plant and which shall contain the following information: a. The type and strength of the mix of concrete being

delivered. b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were

discharged into the delivery truck. If upon reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed within the time limits stated, or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, the Engineer will reject the load and it shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.

c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.

7. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the

Contractor will take specimens as per BS 1881 of each class of concrete from different locations on the job as follows:

a. At least four (4) specimens for each 40 cubic meters or fraction thereof each class of concrete and in any case not less than four (4) specimens for any one day’s operations.


___________________________________________________________________________________


b. Test specimens will be taken at pouring locations to give a fair average of the concrete in the part of the construction indicated. c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with B.S. 1881.

d. At least two slump tests: ASTM C 143.

e Testing shall conform to B.S. 1881 or ASTM C-31 in making,

curing and subsequently handling test specimens, except as modified herein. Cylinders shall be engraved with the date of placing and the serial number of the cylinders (1 to 12) plus a universal serial number representing the number of the pour.

f. The cylinder shall be placed in laboratory storage on Site

under moist curing conditions at approximately 21 Deg.C within 24 hours after moulding and maintained therein until ready for testing at the Laboratory. One cylinder specimen will be tested at seven days, and if the seven day strength is deficient, the Engineer will be notified. Three cylinders will then be tested at 28 days.

g. Two unit weight and yield tests : ASTM C138.

h. When a curing compound is needed for curing take 4

additional cylinder specimens and test at periods as specified above.

8. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the

Contractor will take specimens of each class of concrete, and an independent Testing Agency, approved by the Engineer, will perform one test for each 100 cubic metres to verify that the total Chloride ion content and the total Sulphate content are each within the specified limits. As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in no event more than 24 hours after placement, the Testing Agency will perform tests in accordance with the procedures herein specified under Paragraph 1.05.C.3.

9. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a Performa approved by the Engineer. Such records shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer.

F. Change of Current Margin:

When the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show that the previously established margin is significantly too large or too small, a change in the current margin used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic strength may be appropriate. Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out as before, but the adoption of recalculated value will


___________________________________________________________________________________


not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18% when based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on tests on 100 separate batches, or less than 5% when based on tests on 500 separate batches. This recalculated margin, if adopted, becomes the current margin for the judgment of compliance with the specified characteristic strength of concrete.

G. Testing Plan :

1. Each 3(three) cylinders shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly selected batch of concrete. The sample shall be taken from the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle. The characteristic strength of concrete shall comply with the following requirements:

a. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive sets of test cylinders exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.3 times the current margin.

b. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified strength.

The current margin shall be taken as given in Paragraph 1.05.C.1. If only one cylinders result fails to meet the second requirement mentioned above, that result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cylinder was taken, provided the average strength of the group satisfied the first requirement. If more than one cylinder fails to meet the second requirement or if the average strength of any group of our consecutive test cylinders fails to meet the second requirement, then all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such cylinder shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.

2. Enforcement: When the average strength of four consecutive test cylinders fail to meet the first requirement mentioned in the testing plan, the mix proportions of subsequent batches of concrete shall be modified to increase the strength. The Engineer shall decide as to what action may be taken for test cylinders that fail to meet the requirements mentioned. The Engineer’s decision shall be final and binding on the contractor who shall accept such decision(s) and bear all costs consequences. In estimating the quality of the sub-standard concrete and in determining the action to be taken the following shall be considered: a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen

sampling and testing have been carried out in accordance with ASTM C-39 Concrete shall be judged by the strength of specified characteristic strength, together with the cement content in comparison with the specified minimum cement content.


___________________________________________________________________________________


b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under

investigation.

c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test cylinders.

d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the strength and durability of this section of structure.

The Engineer may require tests to be carried out on the hardened concrete in structure. Where tests show that concrete is below specified strength, remove all, or a part of, the concrete in all of the batches deemed not to comply with the strength requirement as directed by the Engineer. Full cost of removal of low strength concrete and its replacement with concrete of proper specified strength shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. Strength: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cylinders at an age of 28 days. Not more than 5% of the cylinders test results shall be allowed to fall below the characteristic strength of concrete.

1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING : A. Within a reasonable time prior to commencement of Cast-in-Place concrete

work, the Contractor shall schedule a meeting at a mutually agreeable time to include the Engineer and his designated representatives, and the Contractors, Superintendent representatives, to discuss materials, methods of work and forming system for the concrete work.

B. Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all

pertinent information including written procedural outlines, description of forming systems, brochures of proposed equipment, sources of all materials and characteristics of all materials. The above information shall be received by Engineer at least 30 days prior to the pre-construction meeting.

C. During the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall present an outline

plan for all concrete work to be accomplished. The outline shall include reviews of sources of materials, commentary on source, source variations during the course of the work, storage and use of materials, description of all equipment necessary for batching, mixing, conveying, placing, forming, reinforcing, compacting and finishing of cast-in-place concrete.


___________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Samples:

1. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories of every type proposed for use in relation with the concrete works.

2. The cost of all samples shall be carried out by the Contractor. 3. Approval of samples must be obtained from the Engineer before

incorporating the related material in to the permanent works. B. Certificates and Catalogues:

1. All related catalogues, test certificates, brochures, and any requested technical data must be submitted.

2. Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, admixtures, additives and the like.

C. Test Reports:

Submit preliminary test results for the Engineer’s approval at least three weeks prior to the beginning of the works. In addition to the test reports specified under Section Clause 1.05C, submit the following directly to the Engineer.

1. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6) 2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C-88). 3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C-641) 4. Air Entrainment Test Reports (ASTM C-260)

D. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed fabrication and placement drawings for all

formwork and reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement techniques and requirements.

1. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which shall have been shown on shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to ensure that difficulties in execution of the work in the field are minimized.

3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations, sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include on the shop drawings, schedules and diagrams indication of bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.

4. Shop drawings, which show the sleeves and embedded items shall be co-coordinated with the other shop drawings in accordance with the criteria indicated on the contract drawings and contained in the various applicable sections of the Specifications.

5. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer (with corrections and re-


___________________________________________________________________________________


submittals as required by the Contract Documents). After review and approval by the Engineer, furnish all copies needed for fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.

6. Be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materials called

for or required by the Contract Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the reviewed shop drawings.

7. Submit shop drawings for all formwork showing locations of joints,

tie bolts, cones dummy cones, openings, chambers, inserts, fittings and accessories for the approval of the Engineer before fabrication of formwork.

8. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301,

Chapter 4, Para. 4.2, wherever required for the supporting system of the formwork along with the shop drawings for the supporting system, for approval of the Engineer.

9. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer’s review of the shop

drawings. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery:

1. Cement: Deliver in the original sealed and branded bags, or in the manufacturer’s containers, in batches not exceeding 100 tones.

2. Ready-mix Concrete: Delivery ticket shall record the actual batched weight of ingredients and the time of addition of water.

B. Storage:

1. Cement : Store off the ground, stacking each batch separately, and use in order of delivery. Do not use cement that is more than 12 months old.

2. Aggregate :

a. Store in suitable bins with a canopy cover, on a self-draining concrete base.

b. Segregate with suitable dividers. c. Stockpile coarse aggregate in three separate grading

(Note: Stockpiling is not necessary where a crushing screening plant is used in tandem with a batching plant): 1. 40 – 20mm 2. 20 – 10mm 3. 10 – 5mm

3. Chemical Curing Compounds: Store in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Handling:

Ready-mixed concrete: Discharge trucks within the approved period after addition of water to cement.


___________________________________________________________________________________


1.08 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Temperature (Shade Air Temperature):

1. Concrete placement temperature: a. Minimum 5 Deg.C. b. Maximum 38 Deg.C.

2. Obtain daily temperature forecasts from an approved source and

programmed concreting operation accordingly. 1.09 CO-ORDINATION

A. The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of other sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades which adjoin materials of this section before the installation of items herein.


2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The products and manufacturers specified herein are specified for the

purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Cement :

1. Alkali Content : Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide or certify that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed cement aggregate combinations (ASTM C-227).

2. Ordinary Cement : B.W. 12 or ASTM C-150, Type I, non-staining.

3. Sulphate Resisting Cement : B.S. 4027 or ASTM C-150, Type V. 4. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used as directed by the Engineer

in all work below the ground level which is in contact with soil, waterproofing, vapour barrier or blinding concrete.

5. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to the Engineer and shall be delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall be used for each type of cement. When received at the batching plant, all bags shall be intact and cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed to moisture or wetting of any kind during shipment or storage shall not be used on the job.

6. Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.


___________________________________________________________________________________


7. All cement shall be stored in water tight sheds on a floor raised at least 200 mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have labels indicating dates of manufacture and arrival at the storage site. Maximum of fifteen bags shall be stacked if the storage period is not more than three months. Any cement stored for more than three months shall not be used without the explicit written permission of the Engineer.

8. When tests performed on field samples, subsequent to the original

approve tests, show that the cement does not comply with the Specifications, the entire consignment from which the sample was taken shall be rejected. Rejected cement shall not be permitted in storage areas or on the site and shall be removed within twenty four hours.

9. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to Sun. Cement temperature shall not exceed 50 Deg.C.

10. All Type V Cement shall have tri-calcium aluminates content not exceeding five per cent (5%).

B. Aggregates

1. In general, aggregate shall comply with “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates” ASTM C-33, and shall be graded in accordance with requirements; irrespective of weather concrete is mixed on site or elsewhere. The contractor shall nominate the source of supply and shall provide grading curves of aggregate for approval.

2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and

crushed stone or crushed rock or gravel. Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of coarse aggregate gradation shall be used. Each aggregate type shall be from a single consistent source.

3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has good drainage. Stock-piles shall have walls separating adjacent materials and to preserve the gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to assure placement of concrete at the necessary rate. Use properly constructed sheds to protect aggregates from direct sun radiation and from blowing sands.

4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent

coatings and dust and when directed by the Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to remove deleterious substances.

5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar particles which may reduce the strength or durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall not contain any material that may be chemically active with reinforcement or that may react to cause efflorescence or that may be alkali reactive.


___________________________________________________________________________________


6. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as “Dolomitic” shall not be

used.

7. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources of supply shall be determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests shall be reported to the Engineer and shall be used to check whether the grading are similar to those of the samples used in the establishment of the batch weight used.

8. Supplier’s certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval

of the source of the aggregates.

9. Aggregates for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for colour as approved by the Engineer and shall come from a single source.

10. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less

than the following maximum salt contents as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The table also shows the maximum salt content allowed in the mixed concrete.

Chlorides Sulphates

Percent of weight of fine aggregate 0.06 0.4 Percent of weight of course aggregate 0.03 0.4 Total percent in concrete as percent 0.1(OPC) 4.0 by weight of cement

0.2 (SRPC) ___________________________________________________________

11. Fine Aggregate : Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed gravel sand having hard and durable particles or other inert materials having similar characteristics conforming to the following requirements:

a. Fineness Modulus : 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C-125

b. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in establishing mix proportions. If greater deviation, the use of such aggregates shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in mix proportions can be made and reviewed.

c. Sodium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 6 percent loss, ASTM C-

88, 5 cycles.

d. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C-289.

e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C-142.


___________________________________________________________________________________


f. Gradation requirements as follows:

Size of Sieve Opening (Square Openings) Percentage by weight Passing – ASTM C-33, C-117 3/8 inch (9.5mm) 100 No.4 (4.75 mm) 95-100 No.8 (2.36 mm) 80-100 No.16 (1.18mm) 50-85 No.30 (0.60 mm) 25-60 No.50 (0.30 mm) 15-30 No.100 (0.15 mm) 3-10 No.200 (0.075 mm) 0-5 Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.

g. Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C-

40) and other foreign matter.

12. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone. The crushing shall be regulated so that, of the material retained on the No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve, at least 90 percent by weight shall consist of pieces with at least one fractured face and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist of material with at least two fractured faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the following requirements.

13.

a. Sodium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 12% loss ASTM C-88, 5 cycles.

b. Potential Reactivity : Not Reactive ASTM C-289. c. Abrasion : Max. 10% loss ASTM C-131, 100 revolutions. d. Flat and Elongated Particles : 3:1 max. 30% ASTM C-125 5:1

max. 10%. e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 0.5% by weight ASTM C-142. f. Shale: Max. 2% by weight. g. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min.2.58 ASTM

C-125.


___________________________________________________________________________________


h. Gradation requirements as follows:

Size of Sieve Percentage by Weight Opening (Square Opening) Passing ASTM C-33 1 ½” 1” ¾” (37.5mm) (25.4mm) (19.0mm) Size Size Size 2 (50.0mm) 100 - 1 ½” (37.5 mm) 95-100 100 - 1” (25.4 mm) 60-85 95-100 100 3/4" (19.0 mm) 35-70 60-85 95-100 1/2" (12.7 mm) 20-50 25-60 60-75 3/8” (9.5 mm) 10-30 15-45 20-55 No.4 (4.75 mm) 0-5 0 -10 0-10 No.8 (2.36 mm) - 0 - 5 0-6

Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.

The maximum size of aggregate shall be 1 inch. (25.4 mm) for columns and walls and 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) for slabs and beams. In addition, the maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 20 percent of the narrowest member that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75 percent of the clear spacing between adjacent steel reinforcement or between reinforcement and adjacent formwork.

C. Water:

1. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean, fresh and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall be filtered to remove any colour or residues present due to contamination from water piping or transportation or storage methods.

2. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328. 3. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.

D. Admixtures:

1. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be

incorporated in the concrete only with the prior written approval of the Engineer. a. Water reducing set retarders. b. Set retarders. c. Water reducing agents. d. Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.


___________________________________________________________________________________


2. The Engineer shall be advised in advance of the following data : a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage

and over-dosage.

b. Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.

c. Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at manufacturer’s recommended dosage.

d. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the cement, nitrates, calcium chloride, sulphides and sulphates shall not be used.

e. Admixtures submitted for Engineer’s approval shall be certified in writing by the manufacturer to be in compliance with B.S. 5075 or ASTM C-494.

f. Air-entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with ASTM C-260 or B.S.5075: Part (2).

g. The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above mentioned standards must be to the approval of the Engineer. All admixtures must be mutually compatible.

h. Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufacturers whose products have previously been used successfully in Kuwait or on other international projects in countries having similar climate to Kuwait.

i. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for use during hot weather extremes.

j. Admixtures shall be stored safe from adverse temperatures in

accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions or recommendations.

k. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the Engineer shall be verified by trial mixes with the cements, aggregates and other materials to be used in the works before final approval is given.

l. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the type of admixture the proposes to use.

m. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufacturer’s recommended dispensers. No adding of admixture by hand is allowed.

n. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled sources of individual components such that the


___________________________________________________________________________________


total mix meets the requirements of the Contract Documents unless specified otherwise, the total chloride (Cl) ion content in the entire mix shall not exceed 0.20 percent of the weight of cement when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC is used. The total water soluble Sulphate (SO3) content in the entire mix shall not exceed 4 percent of the weight of cement in the mix. The total Calcium Chloride (Ca C12) content in the total mix shall not exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.

o. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na2O equivalent shall not exceed 3 Kg/m3. All sources of alkali shall be taken into account for calculating the total alkali content. In particular the contribution of Sodium Chloride whether from aggregate or from mixing water must be included.

E. Curing Materials :

1. Liquid Membrane Compound: ASSHTO M-148 or ASTM C-309,

Type 1-D with fugitive dye Type 2; formulated to disintegrate after 28 days, and guaranteed not to affect the bond of applied finish.

2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM Cl-71, 0.10mm thick, opaque.

3. Reinforced Waterproofing Building Paper : STM C-171, opaque.

4. Burlap: AASHTO M-182

5. Water : B.S. 5328 and B.S. 3148

6. Methods for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance with ASTM C-156 or United Kingdom Ministry of Public Building and Works (M.P.P.W.) for Curing Membrane or United Kingdom Department of Transport (D.O.T.).

7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the type of curing compound he proposes to use.

F. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum gauge 1000 of approved

manufacture tested in accordance with ASTM E-96 and E-154. G. Joint Fillers :

1. Joint Filler shall be a compressed sheet of wood fiber impregnated with bitumen emulsion complying with ASTM D-1751. The filler may alternatively be a compressed sheet of cork granules bonded with bitumen or synthetic resin complying with ASTM D-1752.

2. The material shall be rot-proof, water-proof, non-absorbent and non-

staining and shall not extrude under pressure or the weight of poured concrete.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3. Prior to pointing, the joint shall be cleaned and the edge of the filler tamped down to ensure that the joint is filled completely and continuous support is provided for the sealant.

H. Sealant: All sealant shall have good adhesion to the structure and shall

not age, harden or become brittle over a temperature range from –5 Deg. C to 60 Deg.C. The sealants shall not slump or flow after application is complete during seasonal contraction and expansion of the joint of upto + or – 12.5% of the joint width. They shall not stain or discolour the adjacent concrete surfaces and shall be formulated so that any toxic materials incorporated or generated during curing will not migrate to the surface where they could be extracted when the sealant has cured.

The colour of sealants shall match the colour of the surrounding finish in which they are placed and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Sealants for expansion and contraction joints and other outdoor uses shall be solvent free two component polysulphide (Thiokol) based joint sealing material consisting of a base containing a liquid polysulphide polymer and hardener acting as a curing agent as recommended by the manufacturer for use in the particular location and approved by the Engineer. Sealant shall comply with B.S. 4254.

The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s technical recommendations and specifications in respect of adhesion, compatibility, application and performance for the approval of the Engineer.

A foamed non absorbent polyethylene backing strip or equal shall be used as a bond breaker.

Sealants shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and used immediately after mixing. A thin brush coat of primer shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces of the joint and allowed to dry before application of the sealant.

The sealing compound shall be compacted into the corners of the joints to ensure that no air pockets are formed.

Masking tape shall be used where the sealant will be exposed. The tape shall be applied before priming and shall be removed immediately after the finish tooling and before the sealant begins to cure. A concave profile tool shall be used to recess the sealant in the joint. Joints shall not be sealed until any concrete adjacent to the joint is at least 28 days old.

I. Water stops: Extruded shapes formed of rubber to the following

requirements.

i) To US Federal Specification 22R-60 la


___________________________________________________________________________________


a) Compression shall be to ASTM D-395-527 b) Hardness shall be to ASTM D-676-49t

ii) Minimum tensile strength : 20.7N mm2

iii) Elongation at break : minimum 285%

iv) Joints and junctions shall be prefabricated

The type and size of the water stop shall be suitable to its particular application as recommended by the manufacturer and be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

J. Grout: Shall be non-metallic of a proprietary brand to be approved by the

Engineer.

K. Bearing Pads: AASHTO grade chloroprene pads made with 100% chloroprene (neoprene) conforming to the requirements of AASHTO standard specifications for High-Way Bridges sections with shore A hardness of 70D.

L. Dustproofer Lapidolith M. Reglets : Shall be 26 GA galvanized steel or PVC from a standard

manufacturer. N. Lightweight Concrete :

1. Mix Design: Design lightweight concrete mix to produce the following

physical properties. a. Dry Density : 500 kg/M3 b. Compressive Strength: 25 kg/cm2 c. Use minimum amount of water of produce a workable mix. d. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by

aggregate manufacturer. 2.03 MIXES :

A. Proportioning of Concrete:

1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, or BS 8110, Section 6, Para.6.2.4. Assume full responsibility for the strength, consistency, water / cement ratio, and handling of concrete. Cement, fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.

2. Water / Cement Ratio: Complying with BS 8110, Section 6, Para

6.2.4, or ACI 301, Chapter 3, para 3.8, Method 1. The water / cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall not exceed the specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value. If a maximum water / cement ratio has been determined the ability to comply with that


___________________________________________________________________________________


requirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes. Maximum water / cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by the Engineer.

3. Cement Content: The cement content of any batch of concrete shall

not be less than the specified minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified maximum value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may be determined from samples representative of any batch of concrete provided a suitable test is used to measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of +/-5% of the actual value with a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of BS 8110: Part 1 gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of aggregate in a Portland cement concrete, to provide acceptable durability under appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced minimum cement content shall only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with a maximum free water cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular condition can be consistently produced and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix design.

B. Classes of Concrete :

CHARACTERISTIC CUBE USE STRENGTH @ 28 DAYS

150 Kg./cm2 Blinding concrete Mass concrete filling 250 Kg./cm2 All reinforced concrete, except columns 350 Kg./cm2 Reinforced concrete columns

C. Where a sudden change in weather conditions occurs or is imminent during continuous casting operations such as will, in the Engineer’s opinion, affect the quality of the concrete, the specified characteristic cube strength forecast-in-place reinforced concrete shall be increased by 5 N/mm2.


___________________________________________________________________________________


PART – 3 : EXECUTION

3.01 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Ready Mixed Concrete:

1. For materials specifications refer to Part II

2. Comply with ASTM C94

3. Add mixing water only at the depot unless a written approval is obtained from the Engineer to use dry batching off site. In such cases begin the mixing operation a maximum of forty five (45) minutes after the cement has been intermingled with the aggregate. In hot weather reduce this time limit to the approval of the Engineer.

4. Discharge the concrete completely at the final location

into the forms within thirty minutes maximum after the introduction of the water to the mix. In hot weather reduce this time limit so, that no stiffening of the concrete shall occur until after it has been placed.

5. The supplier’s test certificate giving aggregate test results

for workability and strength shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor at weekly intervals.

6. B. Batch Mixing at Site: (if permitted by Government authority having

jurisdiction). 1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, OR ACI 301, Chapter 7,

Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5. 2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the

required consistency will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency which can be readily placed without segregation.

3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and dispensing the admixture.

C. Hand Mixed Concrete: This is not permitted. 3.02 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER

Obtain daily temperature forecasts from a source approved by the Engineer and concreting shall be programmed accordingly. When air temperatures conform with Clause 1.09 of Part I, in such conditions the following steps shall be taken:

A. The water for concreting shall be cooled to a temperature between 0 Deg. C. Where ice is introduced to a mix this shall be taken into account in


___________________________________________________________________________________


computing water / cement ratios and care shall be taken to ensure that all ice has melted before concrete leaves the mixer.

B. Aggregates shall be cooled by draughts and be protected from direct sunlight by heat reflecting covers.

C. All formwork and reinforcement shall be cooled by sprinkling of water and shall be protected from direct sunshine.

D. Mixed concrete shall be used without delay. Wet concrete or concrete

carrying vehicles shall not be exposed to the hot sun for more than an absolute minimum of time. The rotating drum of the mixer is to be insulated externally to avoid over heating of the drum metal and excessive heat transfer.

Steps shall be taken to maintain the temperature of the concrete below 32 Deg. C. until it has hardened.

E. Concrete is not to be mixed and placed when the ambient temperature in

the shade exceeds 38 Deg. C. or during heavy sand storms or during heavy rains.

Notwithstanding the above requirements, no concreting will be allowed during the months of May to September inclusive between the hour of 9 A.M. and 3 P.M. (0900 hours and 1500 hours) except with the written permission of the Engineer. 3.03 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Construction and Control Joints:

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12 or ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.1 and B.S. 5337.

2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept to a minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and design consideration. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to locations of construction joints.

3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful

consideration shall be given to their exact location. The location of construction joints shall be subject to agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor before any work commences. Construction joints shall be right angles to the general direction of the member and shall take due account of shear and other stresses.

4. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical

joints shall be formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level and reasonably flat unless design considerations make this undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the finished work.


___________________________________________________________________________________


5. Kickers (i.e. a starter stub) shall be at least 70 mm high and carefully constructed and shall be cast along with the main concrete.

6. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the

surface of the concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall be roughened to the extent that the largest aggregate is exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken that the joint surface is cleaned immediately before the fresh concrete is placed against it.

7. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of

1:1.1/2 cement-sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Clean horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar over joints in walls to a depth of 25mm before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space construction joints more than 15 metres apart, unless otherwise shown.

8. Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete

close to the joint. This concrete shall be particularly well compacted and vibrated.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE: A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para.8.1 for preparation before

placing and with BS 8110, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer 24 hours before each pour so that the forms and reinforcement may be examined. Do not place concrete until inspection has been made or waived.

B. Concrete shall not be mixed at a shade air temperature below 3 Deg. C. on a falling thermometer. When the shade air temperature is 32 Deg.C. and rising, special precautions shall be taken during concrete operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cooling of the mixing water or other methods approved by the Engineer so that the temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 30 Deg. C. The temperature of the concrete can be reduced by cooling the water and the aggregate.

C. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun to the satisfaction of the Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be mixed and placed when the shade air temperature is 38 Deg. C. or above.

D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened concrete and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure reinforcement, sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water and debris. Sprinkle with water any semi-porous sub grade to eliminate suction. Water shall be removed from excavations before depositing concrete; such water shall not be allowed to wash over newly formed concrete.

E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as


___________________________________________________________________________________


rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the required workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without addition of water. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork and damage to faces of formwork.

F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing the forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie pipe only, equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of variable lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one metre and a sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is approximately level at all times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are acceptable to the Engineer, then low slump concrete can be dropped vertically through greater heights than on metre.

G. Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of

concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the vibration is not used any closer than 75mm from the formed surface. Where permanent precise concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy absorption should be taken into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be used and the Engineer’s prior approval shall be obtained in respect thereof.

H. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall not be placed in the forms.

I. Concrete topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and brushed over with a coat of neat cement grout. The topping shall be placed before the grout has started to set.

J. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on

shop drawings. K. Lightweight Concrete: Provide lightweight concrete in thickness and slopes

as shown on drawings. Before applying lightweight concrete thoroughly clean the surface and wet with a coat of neat cement grout.

3.05 CURING:

A. General:

1. Comply with BS8110, Section 6, Para 6.6 and 6.8 & ACI Standard301,Chapter 12.

2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage undue cracking in the structure. Maintain concrete at a suitable temperature so that the rates of evaporation of moisture from the surfaces are kept to


___________________________________________________________________________________


appropriate value. Different curing or drying treatments will be appropriate to different members and products. Where necessary special care should be taken to ensure that similar components are cured as far as possible under the same conditions.

3. Curing shall be promptly commenced, total in coverage and continued without interruption.

B. Curing Methods:

1. Pounding with Water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall

not be more than 11 Deg. C. cooler than the concrete to prevent cracking and shall be free of substances that may stain or discolour concrete.

2. Saturated Material: Saturated material shall be held in close contact with concrete surfaces and maintained continuously in damp and moist condition so that a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. Saturated materials shall be kept wet at all times for a minimum of seven days after stripping.

3. Intermittent Spraying with Water: Prevent erosion damage of newly

finished concrete. Prevent the concrete surfaces from drying.

4. When curing concrete with water other than bonding, do not allow the surface to dry.

5. Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon

as formwork is loosened water curing shall be applied to sides to columns and walls, and shall continue uninterrupted for a minimum of seven days.

6. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured only be flooding. Flat

concrete surfaces shall be covered immediately after concrete is placed, tamped and leveled, with polyethylene sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial hardening of concrete occurs. Covering surface shall follow progress of concrete placement until the whole surface is covered and flooded. Polyethylene sheet may be removed after 24 hours and regular flooding maintained for a minimum of 7 days.

C. Curing Compounds:

1. In situations where there is lack of adequate supplies of clean water, curing membrane solution carefully applied at the right coverage rate (two coats, one at right angles to the other), immediately after placing concrete as per manufacturer’s instruction will ensure practicable curing.

2. Concrete surfaces shall normally be damp when the coating is applied. Curing compounds shall not be used if bond is necessary such as in base slab of two course floors, since it prevents the topping from bonding.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3. Conventional curing compounds shall not be used if a special finish

is to be applied. In such cases, special resin solutions that would not affect adhesion of finishes may be used as approved by the Engineer.

D. Normal Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for

all cast-in-place concrete under normal weather conditions (temperatures around 24 Deg.C. (75 Dec. F) and normal wind speed). This period shall be extended to a minimum of ten (10) to fourteen (14) days under hot weather or drying wind conditions.

3.06 TOLERANCES: A. Comply with B.S. 5606 or ACI Standard 117-81, Part 5, unless noted

otherwise. 1. Plumb (allowable variation)

a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers walls, and in arises:

In any 3m 6 mm Maximum for the total height of the structure 25mm

b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves and other

conspicuous lines :

In any 6m 6 mm Maximum for the total height of the structure 12 mm

3.07 COMPACTING CONCRETE:

Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means during the operations of placing and shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement, duct formers, embedded fixtures, and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids and having the required surface finish when the formwork is removed.

Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the vibrator is not used any closer than 75mm from the formed surface.

When directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall demonstrate the efficiency of the proposed method of compaction on a trial section prior to the commencement of the permanent works. When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased.


___________________________________________________________________________________


The number and size of the vibrators shall be such as to ensure vibration throughout the entire volume of the concrete. They shall be either the immersion type with a frequency of not less than 100 Hz when operating submerged in concrete or the exterior type with a frequency of not less than 50 Hz. The vibrators shall be applied systematically and at such intervals that the zones of influence overlap. The vibrator shall be applied at any point only for a period that the concrete is properly compacted and not for so long that segregation occurs. Whenever vibration has to be applied externally the design of formwork and disposition of vibrators shall receive special consideration to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes. Except where specifically required by the Engineer, all reinforced concrete shall be compacted by vibration with plunger (poker) type vibrators.

3.08 FINISHING

A. Fairface Concrete : All formwork joints for exposed surface to concrete finish shall form a regular pattern with horizontal and vertical lines continuous through each structure and all construction joints where permitted shall coincide with these horizontal or vertical lines. The surface shall be treated with two coats of water repellant Repelicon-L or approved equal if otherwise untreated.

B. General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic slabs true and

level within a tolerance of 3mm in 3m as measured with a 3m straight edge placed in any direction at any location. Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately and sufficiently rigid to support screeds and so that surface elevations and concrete thicknesses are achieved allowing for dead load deflection and camber of formwork. Take measurements and control tolerances by the use of transit instrument. Upon completion of leveling, remove screeds and fill spaces with concrete.

C. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding,

and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the disc type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling operations. Do the second troweling after the concrete has become so hard that no mortar will adhere to the edge of the trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true to a maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3m. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following:


___________________________________________________________________________________


a. Adhesive-set ceramic tile b. Carpeting c. Where no other finish is specified D. Motor Float Finish:

Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding, and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surfaces with motor-driven floats of the disc type. Leave floors with a smooth finish and true to a maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3m. Motor float finish surface scheduled to receive the following : Membrane Waterproofing .

E. Rough Slab Finish :

Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away from the surface, then screed with straightedge to produce a reasonably true and uniform surface. Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following: Ceramic tile (except adhesive-set). Marble and Granite Flooring. Insulation Terrazzo.

F. Interior Exposed Concrete Surfaces of Ceilings, Columns and

Walls :

Unless otherwise shown, leave with a smooth finish, even textured and free of blemishes. Repair or replace defective areas, as directed by the Engineer. As soon as the face forms are removed, remove all fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind where necessary. Repairing, replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to the Engineers satisfaction. Patch as specified under paragraph “Patching”.

3.09 FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE: A. Cover sub-base with vapour barrier of polyethylene sheeting. Do not lay

sheeting until immediately prior to placing of reinforcing mesh and concrete, in order to prevent damage to the film. Seal seams as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Do not place concrete over vapour barrier until all breaks have been

patched and sealed.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3.10 DUSTPROOFER A. Apply two coats of dust-proofer in accordance with the approved

manufacturer’s printer instructions, on the following concrete surfaces : Exposed in the finished work. To receive carpeting 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Fill-in :

Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs:

Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-trowelling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout. Use non-metallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas:

1. Comply with ACI 301 Chapters 9.

2. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Engineer.

3. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 6mm in any

dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 25mm. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.

4. Thoroughly clean, dampen, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.

5. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland Cement and

standard Portland Cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match colour surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and colour match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:

1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects

cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include colour and texture irregularities, cracks, spills, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain

defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

3. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 25mm in

diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 ½ parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.


___________________________________________________________________________________


4. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

5. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to

acceptance of Engineer.

3.13 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES A. In the event that efflorescence, stains, oils grease or any unsightly

accumulation of foreign materials are visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished concrete, the Engineer may require remedial action to be taken to remove these blemishes. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when irregular lapping can be avoided, only such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly appearances. No such remedial action is allowed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.



_______________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/03330-1 STAMPED CONCRETE

SECTION 03330

ARCHITECTURAL STAMPED CONCRETE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide cast-in-place architectural stamped coloured concrete over driveway and

walkway complete and in place, as required by the work, specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A Section 03100 “Form Work” B Section 03300 “Cast-in-place Concrete” 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Codes and Standards

Concrete work shall conform to the "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete", of the American Concrete Institute, ACI 318 or the equivalent British Standard as mentioned in Section 03300.

B. Qualification of Installers:

1) Throughout the progress of the work, provide at least one supervisor who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work. 2) Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the

specified requirements and the methods needed for proper execution of this Section.

3) In acceptance or rejection of work performed, the Engineer will make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of workmen.

C. Quality Control: Do not begin concrete production until all mix designs have been reviewed and certified by the Engineer. D. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work,

which does not conform to the specified requirements including strength, tolerances, and finishes. The Contractor shall correct deficient concrete as directed by the Engineer.

E. Should cylinders and/or cubes indicate unacceptable concrete, load testing or removal and replacement of the concrete may be required at no cost to the client.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


F. Concrete Testing Services: 1) Follow the requirement of the Section 03300. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including Colour Schedule, admixtures, joint systems, and chemical floor hardeners. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and placement techniques and requirements. C. Samples: 1. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories for coloured stamped concrete proposed for use including component parts of prefabricated formwork systems and manufacturer’s technical literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and carry out such tests on the proposed prefabricated formwork systems as may be required by the Engineer in order that he may be satisfied as to the system’s suitability. D. Test Reports: Submit preliminary test results for the Engineer’s approval at least three weeks prior to the beginning of the work. In addition to the test reports specified under “Quality Control”, submit the following directly to the Engineer:

1. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 SECTION 6) 2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88). 3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641). 4. Air Entertainment test Reports (ASTM C260).

1.05 Product Handling: A. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6. 1.06 Environmental Conditions: A. Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 “STANDARDS’. (ACI 305) 1.07 Quality Control: A. Follow the requirements of Section 03300


_______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

(1) STONECRETE

Local Agent: Roof Technology Gen. Trad. & Cont. Co. Shuwaikh, Kuwait. Tel: 4812544-4837472, Fax: 4815789

(2) STAMPCRETE International Ltd.

Local Agent: Roof Technology Gen. Trad. & Cont. Co. Liverpool, NY 13088, USA Tel: (315) 451-2837, Fax: (315) 451-2290 Web site: www.stampcrete.com

(3) Flex-c-ment Decorative.

Bağdat Cad. 198/1, Maltepe - Istanbul, Turkey, Tel: 0216 457 80 47 Web site: www.dekorbeton.com.

2.02 MATERIALS: A. Cement, Aggregates, Water etc. shall meet the requirements of Section 03300: B. Pigmented Concrete: Pigments for integrally colored concrete submitted for the Engineer’s approval shall be certified in writing by the manufacturer to be in compliance with ASTM C 979. C. Stamp concrete fiber: The Stamped concrete should contain approved quality “Monofilament Fiber” (Fiber type II, Polyester co-polymer fiber) at a minimum rate of one pre-weighed bag per one cubic meter of concrete. 2.03 COLOUR/PIGMENT FOR STAMPED CONCRETE

The colour shall be as per Owner or Engineer’s choice and from the approved manufacturer.

Choose Colour from the “DAVIS COLORS” USA (Tel: 323-269-7311, Fax: 323-269-1053, Web site: www.daviscolors.com), Lambo color Lambert Corporation of Florida, Inc.Corporate Office,20 North Coburn Ave,Orlando, FL USA 32805 ,(www.lambertusa.com), Solomon Colors 4050 Color Plant Road, Springfield, IL 62702 • PH: 800-624-0261 FAX: 800- 624-3147 (www.solomoncolors.com) or equal approved quality.

A. The colour shall be quality and mixed into the concrete, the concrete remains coloured even when paving becomes worn or chipped. Colours to be added to the concrete either at the batching plant or at the job site.

http://www.stampcrete.com/

http://www.dekorbeton.com/


_______________________________________________________________________________________


2.03. MIXES A. Proportioning of Concrete: 1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, OR BS 8110-85, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4.

Assume full responsibility for the strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete, Cement, fine aggregate shall be measured by weight.

2. Water/Cement Ratio: Comply with BS 8110-85, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4, OR ACI

301, Chapter 3, Para. 3.8, Method 1 or 2. The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall not exceed the specified maximum value by more than 5% of that value. If a maximum water/cement ratio has been determined the ability to comply with that requirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes. Maximum water/cement ratio may be judged from workability and approved by the Engineer.

3. Cement Content:

The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than the specified minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified maximum value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may be determined from samples representative of any batch of concrete provided suitable test is used to measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of + 5% of the actual value with a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of BS 8110: Part 1: 1985 gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of aggregate in a Portland cement concrete, to provide acceptable durability under appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced minimum cement contents shall only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with a maximum free water/cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer shall determine the degree of exposure to be adopted for mix design.

4. Requirements for Fresh Concrete:

Workability of concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork.

Workability shall be assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An acceptable value for the mean slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with the Engineer and a value of 65 mm can be taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of concrete for these tests:

Slump +/- 25 mm or CF +/- .03 where required value is 0.9 or more. +/- .04 where the required value is less than 0.9 but more than 0.8. +/- .05 where the required value is 0.8 or less.

The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights of aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for moisture content typical of the aggregates being used. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +/- 3% of the quantity of cement, water, or total aggregate being measured and within +/- 0% of the quantity of any


_______________________________________________________________________________________


admixture being used. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1305 or B.S. 4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall not be less than that used by the manufacturer in assessing the mixer performance. 5. Adjustment to Mix Proportions: During production adjustments of mix proportions will be made in order to minimize the variability of strength and to approach more closely the target mean strength as approved by the Engineer. Such adjustments are regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified limits of minimum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained. Such adjustments to mix proportions shall not be taken to imply any change to the current margin. B. Classes of Concrete: Grade Characteristic Cube Strength (28 days) Type and Use K-250 250 Kg/cm2 Stamped Cast-in-Place For uncontrolled hot weather and drying conditions, it is recommended that the specified characteristic cube strength for cast-in-place reinforced concrete shall be increased by 50 Kg/cm2. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Section 07910, “Joint Fillers and Gaskets” for expansion joint filler. B. Joint Filler (Cellular): Provide one of the following manufacturers, or equal, 12mm (1/2 inch) thick unless otherwise required:

a) Retnord, Inc. b) Hercules c) Sonneborn Building Products, a Div. of Contech.

C. Surface Hardner: Provide Surface Hardener over Stamped concrete and manufacturer’s instruction. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK A. For Formwork refer to Section 03100 and Section 03300. 3.02 MIXING CONCRETE A. Ready Mixed Concrete 1. Comply with ASTM C94.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Add mixing water only at the Site.

3. Discharge the concrete completely at the Site within one hour after the introduction of the water to the aggregates. In hot weather reduce this time limit so that no stiffening of the concrete shall occur until after it has been placed.

4. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been intermingled with the aggregates. B. Batch Mixing at Site (if permitted by Governmental authority having jurisdiction) 1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, OR ACI 301, Chapter 7, Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5. 2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency, which can be readily placed without segregation. 3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and dispensing the admixture. C. Hand Mixed Concrete: This is not permitted. 3.03 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Construction and Control Joints

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12, or ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.1 and B.S. 5337. For detail refer to Section 03300.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para. 8.1 for preparation before placing with BS 8110, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer 24 hours before each placement so that the forms and reinforcement may be examined. Do not place concrete until inspection has been made or waived. B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature below 2 Deg. C on a rising thermometer, or at a shade air temperature below 3 Deg. C on a falling thermometer. When the shade air temperature is 32 Deg. C and rising, special precautions shall be taken during concrete operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cooling of the mixing water or other methods approved by the Engineer so that the temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 30 Deg. C. The temperature of the concrete can be reduced by cooling the water and the aggregate. C. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun to the satisfaction of the Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be mixed and placed when the shade air temperature is 38 Deg. C or above. D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened concrete and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure reinforcement sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water and all debris. Sprinkle with water any semi-porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water shall be removed from excavation before depositing concrete, such water shall not be allowed to wash over newly formed concrete.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods, which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the required workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without addition of water. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork and damage to faces of formwork. F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing The forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie Tubes only equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of Variable lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one meter and a sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is approximately level at all times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are acceptable to the Engineer, then low slump concrete can be dropped vertically through greater heights than one meter. G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means during the operation of placing and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids and which will have required surface finish when formwork is removed. Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the vibrator is not used any closer than 75 mm from the Formed surface. Where permanent precast concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy absorption should be taken into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be used, and the Engineer’s prior approval shall be obtained in respect thereof. H. Concrete, which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall Not be placed in the forms.

3.05 COLOUR HARDENER APPLICATION: A. After an initial bull floating and the excess bleed water has dissipated, the Approved colour hardener shall be applied using the dry shake method. Two shakes are bull floated into the concrete and the final shake is slick finished with a Fresno or steel trowel until the concrete is uniformly coloured.

B. As the concrete reaches the plastic stage of set approved quality “Powder Release Agent is applied using the broadcast method. 3.06 IMPRINTING/TEXTURING: A. Placement of the first mat is critical to ensuring that the grout lines of linear patterns are kept square. Placement of the first mat will vary with job layout, stamp pattern, accessibility, and desired effect. For patterns with a straight running bond grout line, the stamps can be placed to run parallel or perpendicular to the line of sight of the observer.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


B. After the first row of stamp mats are laid on to the concrete, the second row of mats Are placed tightly in front of the first row. This process is repeated until the entire Slab Has been imprinted. Floppy mats are used to imprint areas that the regular Mats Cannot reach. Texture skins are used to texture the areas adjacent to walls, posts, etc. that the floppy mats cannot reach. C. Touch up work is done as needed after the stamps are picked up and moved to the

next row. A tamper or dirt pounder may be used to help imprint the design of the mats as the concrete hardens.

3.07 WASHING/SEALING: A. As soon as the concrete has set, usually the next day in most climates, the excess

powder release agent is pressure washed from the surface. Some release agent will be left in the grout lines and texture grooves of the pattern leaving the two toned, aged colour effect. After the slab has dried completely, two coats of Sealer (CHROMESEAL TM 30% Solids Clear Sealer) are applied by roller or sprayer, finishing the application.

3.08 CURING A. General 1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301, Chapter 12. 2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have

satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage, undue cracking in the structure.

3. Curing shall be promptly commenced, be total in coverage and continued without interruption.

B. Curing Methods 1. As per manufacturer’s recommendations and Engineer’s approval 3.09 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES A. Efflorescence, stains, oils, grease, or any unsightly accumulation of foreign

materials that are visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished concrete, shall be removed. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when irregular lapping can be avoided, only such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly appearances. No such remedial action shall be taken without the approval of the Engineer.

3.10 PATCHING



_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/04220- 1 UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 04220

UNIT MASONRY PART-I, GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Unit Masonry Walls.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS The Work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI A41.1 Building Code Requirements for Masonry.

ANSI A41 .2 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry.

B. American Society For Testing Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A 82 Specification for Cold Drawn Steel wire for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A 116 Specification for zinc coated (Galvanized) steel woven wire fence

fabric.

ASTM A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.

ASTM C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field .ASTM C 33

Specification for Concrete aggregates.

ASTM C 39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

ASTM C 90 Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

ASTM C 144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C 145 Specifications for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement.

ASTM C 207 Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

ASTM C 270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


ASTM C 279 Specification for Chemical Resistant Masonry Units.

ASTM C 331 Specification for lightweight aggregates for structural concrete.

C. British Standards Institute (BSI)

BS 12 Specification for Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Portland Cement.

BS 729 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel.

BS 877 Foamed or Expanded Blast furnace Slag Lightweight Aggregate for Concrete.

BS 890 Building Limes.

BS 1200 Building Sands from Natural Sources.

BS 4482 Hard Drawn Mild Steel Wire for the Reinforcement of Concrete

BS 5075, Specification for Air Entraining

Part 2 Admixtures.

BS 6073, Specification for Precast Concrete

Part 1 Masonry Units.

BS 6073, Method for Specifying Precast Concrete

Part 2 Masonry Units.


A. Erector Qualifications: Work is to be carried out by persons skilled in laying unit masonry

B. Fire Rated Partitions: Requirements for fire-rated or lateral support conditions are to be regulated in compliance with focal building codes and are not necessarily fully defined on the Drawings.

Whenever a fire-rating is shown for a wall use masonry units in that wall complying with the requirements established by the local governing authorities.

Use sufficient mortar to ensure that all joints are filled and imperforate.

C. Plant and Equipment: 1. Paint mixer drums white on outside and keep white.

2. Keep all equipment, used for mixing transporting and laying mortar, cool

3. Place a recording thermometer at each location of unit masonry work during its construction.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Literature:

Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s printed literature indicating product specification and installation instructions for each product required by this Section.

B. Manufacturer’s Data:

Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s certification that the following comply with the requirements specified:

1. Portland Cement. 2. Masonry Cement. 3. Hydrated Lime. 4. Mortar Aggregates. 5. Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified). 6. Reinforcing Bars. etc.

C. Samples:

Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and following the submittal of manufacturer’s literature and data, 3 samples of each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be reviewed for colour and/or texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Samples to be submitted as follows:

1. Hollow concrete blocks; one of each size.

2. Solid concrete blocks; one of each size.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit Shop drawing indicating details of anchors, inserts, joints, connections to adjoining work or materials. Also include elevations indicating setting out and placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs, etc.

2. In addition to above submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of reinforcement bars for unit masonry work. Comply with ACI 315. “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures” unless more stringent requirements are specified. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.

1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION

A. Pre-installation Conference:

Prior to the start of each major type of masonry work, meet at the site and review the installation procedures and co-ordination with other work. Meetings shall include Contractor, Engineer and Major Material Manufacturers as well as other whose work must be coordinated with the masonry work.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


B. Co-ordination with Inserts:

Ensure co-ordination between masonry work and concrete work such that all inserts and flashing reglets required for the proper installation of masonry work are correctly pre-installed.

C. Pre-installation Inspection:

Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation of masonry work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Hot Weather Work: Take all necessary precautions to keep mortar and blocks and other materials cool and in particular:

1. Do not mix mortar or lay units while shade temperature is above 40 Deg. C. on a rising thermometer or above 43 Deg. C. on a falling thermometer.

2. Do not allow temperature of fresh mixed mortar to exceed 32 Deg. C. Take suitable measures to ensure this.

3. Do not lay masonry units having a film of water on their surfaces.

4. The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for all steps necessary for compliance with the above

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the course

of the work.

B. Deliver unit masonry materials, other than bulk materials, to site in manufacturer’s unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard packaging devices, fully identified with name, type, grade, colour and size.

C. Protect all unit masonry material during shipment, storage and construction against wetting and soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.

D. Take all necessary precautions to prevent all masonry items from chipping, cracking or other damage during transportation, unloading and storage on site. Damaged units will not be allowed to be installed.

E. Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that will reduce or destroy bond.

F. Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms, off the ground, in dry locations.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


1.08 PROTECTION A. Protection during Progress of Work:

1. When the ambient air temperature is more than 30 Deg. C. in the shade and the relative humidity is less than 50% protect the masonry from direct exposure to the wind and sun for 48 hours after installation.

2. Protect partially completed unit masonry walls against weather when work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 600 mm down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place ensuring that there is free air flow sufficient to prevent heat build-up.

B. Protection of Completed Work: Keep completed walls clean and protect from staining. Use suitable corner guards to

protect the corners of exposed masonry walls.

1.09 CO-ORDINATION A. The Work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other

sections. Verify dimensions and Work of other trades which adjoin materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.

PART -2, PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - MORTARS: A. Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I, or BS 12, ordinary,

non-staining, without air entrainment, natural colour or white as required to produce the required colour of mortar or grout.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 ,Type S or BS 890

C. Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200 except for joints less than 6 mm use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm).

1. White aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

2. Coloured aggregates: Ground granite, marble or other stone as required to match Engineer’s sample

D. Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials salts, etc. which would impair the work.

E. Water Retaining/Reducing Admixtures: BS 5075 Part I or ASTM C 499 Type B, free from chlorides and compatible with cement. Do not use without prior approval of Engineer.

F. Plasticizers: BS 4887, free from Chlorides and compatible with cement. Do not use without prior approval of Engineer.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


2.02 . MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES, LOAD-BEARING MASONRY A. Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that proportions are controlled and

accurately maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition.

B. Mortar: Comply with the proportion and physical requirements of ASTM C 270 for the following type:

1. Type S.

C. Grout: Comply with the proportion requirements of ASTM C 476 for the following types, as applicable:

1. Fine Grout.

2. Course Grout.

D. Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 1.1/2 hours have elapsed after initial mixing.

E. Do not add plasticizers or other admixtures to mortar or grout materials specified.

2.03 MORTAR MIXES, NON LOAD-BEARING MASONRY

A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 270, except limited to the mix materials herein-before specified and the following cement/lime ratios by volume; wherein sand (in damp condition) equals 21/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime:

1. Type M: Not more than 1/4 part lime per part Portland cement. 2. Type S: Not more than 1/2 part lime per part Portland cement. 3. Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland cement.

2.04 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (BLOCKS ) A. General:

Provide blocks as shown, complying with type classifications, weights, grades and curing requirements as hereinafter specified and the following general requirements :-

1. Do not use blocks which have chips ,cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or other substances which might stain exposed finished surfaces

2. Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and colour, for each type required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.

3. Face Dimensions: Manufacturer’s standard, nominal 400 mm long x 200 mm high unless otherwise shown.

4. Provide special shapes wherever shown and wherever required to build corners, lintels, jambs, control joints and expansion joints ,and for other uses where necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance with the highest standard of workmanship.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


B. Moisture Controlled Curing:

1. Cure blocks by low pressure steam curing at a pressure of 0.7 kg/cm Raise the curing temperature uniformly at not more than 0.560C per minute from 300C to 660C and allow the masonry units to cure for approximately 3 1/2 hours from initial set period. Thereafter keep the units moist for a period of 7 days by means of a fine spray of water and then allow to air dry for 14 days.

Allow an interval of not less than 3 hours between the forming of the units and the curing process.

2. Cure blocks in a moisture-controlled atmosphere at normal temperature and pressure, and limit moisture absorption to 35% of saturation at time of delivery and until time of installation. Comply with ASTM Type I classification.

C. Finishes: Standard finish: Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the manufacturer’s standard colour and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.

2.05 METAL TIES, ANCHORS AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: Truss type welded wire units of 3 m (10 ft.) lengths with prefabricated corner and tee units. Fabricate from ASTM A 82 or BS 4482 cold drawn steel wire with deformed side rods and plain 9 gauge truss rods, crimped if used in cavity wall construction. Provide width of between 37 and 50mm (1.1/2” and 2”) less than wall thickness.

1. Fabricate with 9 gauge (3.7 mm) side rods, unless otherwise shown.

2. Provide units with a single pair of side rods, unless otherwise shown.

3. For use in interior partition walls, fabricate from mill galvanized wire.

4. For use in exterior walls, use stainless steel.

B. Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars for vertical reinforcement complying with ASTM A 615, intermediate grade, size as shown or specified herein, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits. Provide two 12 mm diameter bars in each block.

C. Concrete Inserts:

1. Unit Type: Furnish unit-type inserts of the type and size shown, of stainless steel or malleable iron, or fabricated from not less than 2.6 mm (12 gauge) steel with 458 g/sq m hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication (ASTM A 153, Class B-2 or BS 729 Table 1 ).

2. Dovetail Strap Type: Furnish dovetail slots with 22 mm wide flat bar anchors formed from 1.5 mm (16 gauge) stainless steel, with 6 mm upturned end or 12 mm dia. hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to extend to within 37 mm of face of masonry units.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


D. Anchoring Devices: Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size shown, but fabricated from not less than 1.5 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal or 9 mm diameter rod stock unless otherwise shown.

Fabricate devices from stainless steel.

E. Lateral Support for Wall Heads: Provide continuous 50 x 50 x 3 mm thick metal angle on both sides as wall head lateral support.

F. Vertical Restraints Block work to be restrained at vertical abutments with concrete with stainless steel adjustable ties at every course for building in.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wall Control Joint Filler:

Provide compressible control joint filler of closed cell PVC, SBR or Neoprene, either solid or tube type, of proper dimension to serve as back-up for joint sealant at face of masonry, (Do not use control joint filler at building expansion joints).

Provide solid rubber “key section” in control joint filler (60 to 80 Shore A durometer hardness) designed to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.

B. Wood Nailers:

For wood nailers and similar items to be set into the masonry work see other relevant sections of these specifications.

C. Reglets and Flashings:

For masonry reglets and flashings see other relevant sections of these specifications.

D. Joint Fillers:

Use approved material to meet the required fire rating and as specified in Section JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS.

E. Sealants: Use approved sealant to meet the required fire rating (if any) and as specified in Section SEALANT.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


PART -3, EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine Surfaces:

Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are satisfactory for work to proceed as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Engineer and do not proceed until rectified to satisfaction of Engineer.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP-GENERAL

A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Comply with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations for the installation of each type of masonry product, unless otherwise shown or specified.

B. Thicknesses:

Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except for single wythe masonry walls which may be built to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using blocks of nominal thickness shown.

C. Chases: Form chases and recesses as may be required for the work of other trades. Do not chase hollow blocks. Do not cut horizontal or diagonal chases in load bearing work. Provide not less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.

D. Construction Openings: Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to be installed at later date. Complete masonry work after equipment is in place using materials identical with those immediately adjacent to the opening.

E. Construction Joints: Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; toothing will not be permitted. Before new work is started clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose blocks and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Cutting Blocks: Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp corners. Cut blocks as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full blocks without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of less than half size blocks at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. Do not use chipped or broken blocks.

G. Age of Blocks: Do not build in concrete blocks until at least 28 days after manufacture and until they are fully cured.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


H. Mixing mortar Mortar for masonry work shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer, mixing by hand will not be permitted.

3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Mortar Types, General: Except as otherwise shown or specified use Type S mortar for exterior masonry work and Type N mortar for interior masonry work.

Use Type M mortar for special structural requirements where shown, and for grouting reinforcing steel in masonry lintels unless concrete is shown.

B. Bond: Use running bond for all single-wythe masonry walls unless otherwise shown .In multiple-wythe walls, bond wythes together with header blocks wherever possible, unless otherwise shown. Where wythes cannot be masonry bonded, use wire ties of the type and spacing shown, unless horizontal joint reinforcing provides the tie between wythes. Where type and spacing of wire ties is not shown provide either continuous or individual type ties, installed so that double wires will be spaced not more than 600 mm centers both horizontally and vertically.

C. Laying Procedure for Walls: 1. Lay solid blocks with completely filled bed head and collar joints. Butter ends

with sufficient mortar to fill head joints or perpends and tamp into place. Do not slush head joints.

2. Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and co-ordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more than 1/800 in any direction are unacceptable, and will be rejected.

3. Build bearing plates, as required on the drawings masonry anchors, flashings, sleeves, door frames and other miscellaneous items into masonry as work progresses. Fill hollow metal frames adjoining masonry work solidly with mortar. The maximum allowable gap around door frames will be 5mm.

4. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown, or of standard type if none are shown. Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members. Space anchors 600 mm centers at vertical and overhead support locations, and 600 mm centers both ways behind masonry veneer work, unless otherwise shown.

5. Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain bond alignment. Except for cavity wall construction leave no voids between blocks.

Slush and grout back joints against other work as blocks are pushed into place.

6. Finish masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered with other materials with flush joints, unless otherwise shown.

7. Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


8. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement and vertical reinforcement in all masonry walls, unless specifically noted or specified to be omitted. Space horizontal reinforcement 600 mm centers for interior walls and 400 mm centers for exterior walls unless otherwise shown or specified. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150 mm at ends and do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement except at wall openings. Use matching prefabricated “T” and “L” sections of reinforcement at corners and wall intersections to provide continuity. Centre reinforcement in wall to provide a minimum mortar cover of 15 mm at side rods.

9. Protect masonry walls with damp sacking to prevent drying out and to allow for chemical setting of bond.

D. Control Joints: Install control joints in masonry walls where shown. Rake out mortar in preparation application of sealant.

E. Control Joint Spacing:

If control joint locations are not shown, place joints vertically, spaced at each structural column or joint between bays of the building but in no case spaced more than 9 m. Also, place vertical joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following locations:

1. At locations where masonry wall height changes by more than 2G%

2. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.

3. Where end of masonry wall butts against supporting structure.

F. Control Joint Construction: Form continuous control joints 10 mm wide across which build-in 40 mm wide x 200 mm long galvanized mild steel flats minimum 1.6 mm (16 gauge) thick at each alternate course. Fill vertical joints with mortar except where wall is a fire compartment wall when it shall be filled as described in other relevant Section of the Specifications.

G. Grouting: 1. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 100 mm in both horizontal

directions.

2. Use coarse grout for filling spaces 100 mm or larger in both horizontal directions.

3. At the Contractor’s option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to the following requirements.

4. Place vertical reinforcing before grouting and either before or after laying blocks, as required by job conditions. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals shown. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcing bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends.


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


5. Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout holes. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position as required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures as required to resist grout pressures.

6. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.

7. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place pour in lifts which do not exceed .1.2 m. Allow not less than 30 minutes and not more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.

8. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcing beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 37 mm of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcing for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequences if more pours are required.

9. Low-Lift Grouting:

a. Place vertical reinforcing prior to laying of masonry. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position.

b. Lay masonry to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 1.2 m.

c. Pour grout using container with spout or chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours within 37 mm of top course of pour.

10. High-Lift Grouting:

a. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with grout.

• Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell.

b. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout.

• Limit grout pours to heights recommended by the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) for the type of blocks, reinforcing and grout used in the work, but in no case exceed 3 m height.

3.04 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels wherever shown, and wherever openings in the masonry of

more than 300 mm are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Unless otherwise shown provide one reinforcing bar for each 100 mm thickness of wall, and use bars of adequate size in relation to opening width. Provide minimum


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


lintel bearing at each jamb of 100 mm for openings which do not exceed 1.8 m width. Precast lintels, or form lintels in place with adequate temporary support. Cure precast lintels thoroughly before handling and installing.

1. In walls of concrete masonry units, provide specially formed U-shaped lintel units, with reinforcing bars placed as shown. Fill with Type M mortar or concrete grout.

B. Steel Lintels Steel lintels may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Contractor to provide sizes as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.05 LAYING EXTERIOR WALLS A. In addition to requirements herein before specified the following shall apply to the

installation of exterior masonry walls:

1. Space horizontal joint reinforcing 400 mm centers in exterior walls, unless otherwise shown.

2. Install reglets and nailers for flashings and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work.

3. Provide flashings in masonry work as shown and extend details to corners and intersections to provide complete waterproofing.

4. Provide weep holes in the exterior wythe of masonry work, located immediately above flashing, shelf angles, lintels and other structural elements supporting the masonry. Space weeps 600 mm centres unless otherwise shown. Place a length of 8 mm cotton sash cord in each weep as the work progresses, and withdraw cord to clear the hole after the work has been completed.

5. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings in cavity wall construction. Strike mortar joints flush as the work progresses.

6. Place wall ties in cavity work as the work proceeds and set with slope to outer wythe. Do not raise one wythe more than 1350 mm above the other where wire ties are used or 450 mm above the other where any other type of tie is used. Close cavities at openings and top.

7. Provide ties 150 mm long for cavities up to 50 mm wide and 200 mm long for cavities 56 - 100 mm wide.

8. Space ties in cavity as follows:

_______________________________________________________________

Wythes of thickness Cavity Width Spacing of Ties (one or both) Horiz. Vert.

mm mm mm mm 90 or more both wythes 50-75 900 450

90or more both wythes 1-75 750 450 90 or more both wythes 100-150 45 450


_________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


9. Protect masonry walls with damp sacking to prevent drying out and to allow for chemical setting of bond.

3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Replace blocks which are chipped, broken stained or do not match adjoining units as

intended, or are otherwise damaged; provide new blocks promptly to match adjoining blocks, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning:

During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance, properly prepared for the application of sealant compounds and other work to follow.

Clean the exposed masonry surfaces as follows:

1. All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning shall not be done until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.

2. Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood scraper, or, if necessary, by means of chisel or wire brush.

3. Pre-soak the wall, saturating the masonry with clean water and flush off all loose mortar and dirt.



__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/05165- 1 SPACE FRAME SYSTEM

SECTION 05165

SPACE FRAME SYSTEM

PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes responsibility of the Space frame Contractor and consists of furnishing everything necessary for and incidental to the execution and complete installation of the steel space frame, and accessory work. The complete system, including space frame, and related accessories shall be purchased from Space frame Contractor as a single source. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Reference Standards: See Division 1. In addition to requirements shown Or specified, comply with applicable provisions of following for design, materials, fabrications and installation of components parts: 1. ASTM A123-84 (Table 1) for hot dip galvanizing cylindrical tubes both interior and exterior, 55 microns. 2. ASCE 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings & Other Structures. 3. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel 4. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 9th Edition 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. The extent of the steel space frame and associated work as defined above is shown on the drawings. B. The work includes the following: 1. Engineering design of space frame and accessory parts by Space frame Contractor including structural calculation submittals. 2. Fabrication, packaging and delivery to job site by Space frame Contractor. 3. Erection by the Space frame Contractor or under the direction of a technical advisor of the Space frame Contractor by a specialist approved installer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Structural Calculations: 1. Prior to fabrication of space frames, submit design calculations prepared in accordance with current design rules of the AISC or EN and applicable codes as called for by the project engineer. Include analysis for all pertinent load cases live, dead, wind, thermal, seismic, etc. a. Supply reactions at supports for review by Project Engineer and maximum frame deflections. b. Supply calculations for support and other details as necessary. Members shall be sized by the space frame manufacturer. c. Existing test reports will not be acceptable in lieu of calculations but can supplement calculations.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit complete Shop Drawings including tube layouts and details. Show dimensioned layout of space frames in relation to adjacent work such as walls, columns, beams and slabs, etc

a. Include details of all supports and data to show provisions for vertical and horizontal expansion/contraction and sway of space frames as necessary.

b. Identify all materials and all attachments devices and accessories. D. Erection Drawings: 1. After approval of Shop Drawings, provide a detailed set of Field Erection Drawings. 2. Identify each part by size and number. Describe method for erecting space frame including sequence of installation. E. Samples: 1. Fabricator shall submit one (1) sample full size “node” with connecting member having the specified finish. 2. Submit product data showing compliance with galvanizing of components and other quality and fabrication requirements. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of structure. 1.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control of Space frame Components: 1. Quality control of nodes, tubes and bolts shall be carried out at the factory, with test loading. 2. In all cases, the loads applied in the tests must attain the following minimum value: 2 x the value of the permissible member load for all parts in tension; 1.7 x the value of the permissible member load for all parts in compression. 3. Submit certificate of compliance with the above factory test procedure. 4. All factory welding shall be by certified welders. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Space frame Contractor’s Qualifications: 1. The Space frame Contractor shall have not less than ten years experience in manufacturing forged solid spherical node space frame structures of equivalent size and complexity, as required by these Contract Documents. 2. The Space frame Contractor shall provide in-house services which include full design, engineering and manufacturing services for the structure as a single entity. Subcontracting with outside sources for any of these services by the Space frame Contractor will not be acceptable. The assembly of joint ventures to provide these services is not acceptable.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


3. Space frame Contractor must supply UBC/IAS (International Accreditation Service, Inc.; Formerly ICBO) quality control program prior to bid – without exception. 4. Project shall be tendered, sold, managed and contracted directly by the Space frame Contractor. Tenders or project management by a sales agent, intermediary, agent or distributor of the proposed manufacturer will not be acceptable. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory finished components shall be stored, handled and shipped in a manner that Will provide unscratched and undamaged units delivered to the site. Time the delivery of material to the site to insure uninterrupted progress of work. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Section 01100 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties. B. The Space frame Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee warranting all work of this section to be free of defects in material, workmanship and corrosion for a period of (10) year from date of completion. Completion shall be defined as the specific work of this section.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design space frame structure for the spans and overhangs shown on the drawings And to the following codes and loading requirements. 1. Applicable Codes:

a. International Building Code, 2003

2. Loading Requirements: a. Live Load: b. Superimposed Dead Load: . c. Wind Load: mph; Uplift: psf; Lateral: psf d. Temperature variation: + to degrees (ie: +/-) degrees from a medium temperature of degrees (F). e. Seismic loading: as per requirements for seismic zone . f. All loading shall be applied through the space frame nodes and not via bending of the tubular members.

g. Other miscellaneous loads shall be provided to Space frame Contractor prior to design. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide all structural members, member connectors, fasteners and accessories

Required for a complete installation of the space frame as indicated in approved Shop Drawings.

Design, engineering and fabrication of space frame shall be by one source. Outsourcing, subcontracting or joint ventures to achieve a single source are not acceptable. B. Code each part for easy identification. Cross reference coding to Shop and Erection Drawings and to shipping lists. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In order to define the requirements for quality, function, size, grade and finishes, a particular manufacturer has been designated in order to meet the project’s minimum requirements. B. The Contract Documents are based on the system/manufacturer indicated. As

such, the manufacturer shown below is the pre-approved manufacturer for the scope described under this section 1. Other manufacturers may be considered if they can successfully demonstrate the

items noted below and described under this section. All approvals will be granted in writing by the Contracting Officer issuing an Addendum, without an exception, a minimum of ten (10) days prior to bid. a. Must submit all data no later than 21 working days prior to the bid date.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


b. Submit a list showing a minimum of twenty (20) completed projects using the products and systems specified herein. c. Provide complete details for review by the Contracting Officer demonstrating

compliance with the Contract Documents. 2.04 MANUFACTURER A. The manufacturer shall provide all structural members, nodes and accessories

Necessary for a complete Space Frame installation. Each member shall be clearly marked in accordance with all shop and erection drawings for ease of identification and installation.

The Space Frame system shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9002. APPROVED MANUFACTURER’S :- 1. Khalid Ali Al-Kharafi & Bros. P. O. Box. 2886, Safat 13029, Kuwait. 2. Rafid Space Frame Factory P.O. Box. 89700, Riyadh 11692, Saudi Arabia. 3. Mero Structures Inc. N112, W18810 Mequoun Road, P.O. Box. 610, German Town, Winconsin 53022. Tel: 262/255-5561 or 800/323-0072 Fax: 262/255-6932 Or Approved Equal 2.05 MAJOR COMPONENTS A. The Contract Documents are based on the round ball and tube system. B. System Description: The system shall be formed from steel and consist of cylindrical Tubes and solid forged spherical nodes. Aluminum is not an acceptable alternative.

1. Steel Tubes: a. Tube material shall conform to ASTM A500 Gr. B or equivalent minimum. b. Assembly to consist of a hollow tube with forged cone welded on each end. Tube ends to remain open. Substitution of sealed tubes not acceptable.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


2. Steel Nodes: a. To consist of hot forged solid steel spheres conforming to A1S1 C1045 material - normalized. They shall be drilled and tapped as necessary. Extra holes other than those specifically shown in approved drawings not permitted. b. Joints using gusset plates, two piece assemblies, friction fit or castings shall

not be used. 3. Bolts: a. Shall conform to ASTM A307, A325 or A490 or equivalent.

C. Space frame Finish:

1. Galvanizing: a. All space frame tubes shall be hot dip galvanized on both exterior and interior

surfaces to a minimum zinc film thickness of 55 microns as per ASTM A123-84. Tubes shall be completely free of drip lines and blemishes from galvanizing process before painting. All threaded or tapped parts shall be electro-galvanized according to ASTM B633-85.

2. Color Coating: a. Tubes, connectors, purlins and bases shall be finished with a thermoset polyester powder applied by electrostatic spray process, minimum thickness two mils, oven dried and cured. Nodes to be coated with wet applied polyurethane finish in color to match. b. Color for all structural space frame components shall be as selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard colors.

D. Accessories: Purlins, if required, shall be of tubular sections galvanized and painted or as detailed in the drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Erector must examine the space frame support locations and the areas and conditions under which the space frame work is to be installed. Notify the Space frame Contractor of any known conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. However, ground assembly may proceed.


__________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect space frame and accessory items in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s approved Shop and Erection Drawings and installation procedures. 1. Members shall not be positioned by the use of force. 2. Members shall be installed such that condensation drain holes are

pointing downwards. 3. Provide temporary bracing and support as required to ensure stability

during erection process. 4. Touch up paint work with matching air dry paint as necessary.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Installed system shall be:

1. Structurally sound and free from distortion.

3.04 CLEANING A. Space frame shall be installed clean and in one visit. General Contractor shall

Provide protection measures for completed space frames and accessories to prevent damage or deterioration from subsequent work.



___________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/05500-1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide metal fabrication work in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract Documents. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Metal fabrication work is defined as including any items shown on the

Drawings and/or specified herein, fabricated from steel and iron shapes, plates, bars, pipes, tubes, casting and roll-formed shapes which are not a part of an overall system specified in any other Section of these Specifications.

B. Employ only experienced tradesmen for both fabrication and installation, who

are capable of producing work of the highest standards of quality in the industry.

1.03 STANDARDS A. The metal fabrication work, except as otherwise shown or specified, shall

comply with the following codes, specifications and standards: AISI - Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel

Structural Members”. AISC 5326 - “Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of

Structural Steel for Buildings” including commentary. AWS D1.1 - “Structural Welding Code - Steel” Industrial Fasteners

Institute - “Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards” SSPC - “Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and

Specifications” OSHA - “Part 1910 of the Occupational Safety and Health

Standards as applicable to stairs, railings and protection of floor openings”

ANSI A12.1 - “Safety Requirements for Flow and Wall Openings, Railings and Toe Boards”

ANSI A58.1 - “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”

AST, A36 - “Specification for Structural Steel”. ASTM A29 - “Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot

Wrought and Cold Finished, General Requirements”. ASTM A48 - “Specification for Gray Iron Casting” ASTM A53 - “Specification for pipe steel, block and hot dipped, zinc

coated, welded and seamless”


___________________________________________________________________________________


ASTM A108 - “Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished Standard Quality”

ASTM A123 - “Specification for Zinc (hot-Galvanized) Coatings as products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip”.

ASTM A153 - “Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware”.

ASTM A283 - “Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Pates, Shapes and Bars”.

ASTM A307 - “Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners”.

ASTM A501 - “Specification for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing”

ASTM A512 - “Specification for Cold Drawn Butt Welded Carbon Steel Structural Tubing”

ASTM A545 - “Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, Cold-Heading Quality for Machine Screws”.

ASTM A568 - “Specification for General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot Rolled Steel and Cold Rolled Steel”

ASTM A569 - “Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum percent) Hot Rolled Steel and Strip, Commercial Quality”

ASTM A575 - “Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon Merchant Quality, M-Grades”

ASTM A576 - “Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon Hot-Wrought, Special Quality”

ASTM E488 - “Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements” B. Copies of all above codes and standards shall be submitted to the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the

purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to or better than those specified will be considered acceptable. The decision as to acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

2.02 METAL STANDARDS A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ATM A 36 and ASTM A6. B. Steel Plate for Cold-Forming: ASTM A 283 Grade C and ASTM A6. C. Hot Rolled Steel Bars (including bar-size shapes): ASTM A575 (Merchant

Quality) of ASTM A 576 (Special Quality) Quality and Grade as selected by fabricator, and ASTM A29.

D. Cold Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, Grade as selected by fabricator and ASTM A29.


___________________________________________________________________________________


E. Steel Pipe: ATM A 53, Type E, F or S at fabricator’s option, Grade A black finish unless shown or specified as galvanized, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise shown or specified.

F. Hot Formed Rectangular Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501, butt welded, cold-

finished and stress relieved. G. Cold Drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A 512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-

finished and stress relieved. H. Gray Iron Catings: ASTM A 48, Class 30B. I. Malleable Iron Catings: ASTM A 47, Grade as selected. J. Steel Sheet for Cold Forming: ATM A569 and ASTM A568, hot rolled sheet

steel of commercial quality, pickled and oiled, free of defects which would impair the look.

2.03 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS A. General: Fasteners provided for exterior use, or where embedded in exterior

walls, floors or roofs shall be zinc coated complain with ASTM A 153. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 307, Grade A. C. Machine Screws: ASTM A545. D. Expansion Bolts: Toothed steel or lead shield expansion devices of the type

and size shown, with galvanized bolts, except do not use lead shield bolts for overhead anchorage.

E. Lag Bolts: FS FF B 561, Type and grade as required. F. Toggle Bolts FS FF B 588, Type and class as required. G. Washers: Carbon steel: plain, round complying with FS FF-W-92, locking,

helical spring complying with FS FF-W-84. H. Concrete Inserts: Furnish unit type inserts of the type and size shown of cast

iron malleable iron or hot-dip zinc coated steel. I. Power Driven Anchors: Type and size as shown or if not shown comply with

manufacture’s standards. Use only devices and tools which comply with ATM E488. Do not use as suspension member anchor.

J. Non-shrink, Nonferrous Grout: Por-Rok Anchoring Cement. 2.04 SHOP PRIMERS A. General: primers selected shall be compatible with finish paints. Refer to

Section 09900, “Painting” for finish paint material and applications. B. Ferrous Metal (Fast Drying): For clean smooth surfaces.


___________________________________________________________________________________


C. Ferrous Metal (Slow Drying): For clean rough surfaces with light rust or mill

scale. D. Galvanized Metal: Pre-treat galvanized metal surfaces in accordance with

SSPC-PT 2-64. prime coat. 2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. For the manufacture of metal fabrications which wil be exposed to view, use

only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, teating and application of finishes including zinc coatings.

B. Use materials of the size and thickness shown or if not shown of the required

size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability into he finished product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions when or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use the type of materials shown or specified for the various components of work.

C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces

and straight shaper edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1mm unless otherwise shown. From bent-metal corners to the smallest raise possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.

D. Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication wherever work

adjoins other work that proceeds if in construction. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting of metal fabrication work wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. On shop drawings note which dimensions have been verified by field measurement.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the

recommendations of AWS D1.1. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth,

using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type show or if not shown use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.

G. Pre-drill bolt and/or screw holes as shown and as required for attachment of

metal fabrication work and for the attachment of adjacent materials. H. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built

into masonry for the installation of metal fabrication work coordinate delivery of such devices with other work so as to avoid any delay. See concrete and masonry Sections of these specifications for installation of such inserts and anchoring devices.


___________________________________________________________________________________


I. Provide for anchorage of the type shown, coordinated with the supporting structure and the construction programme. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.

J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrication work as may be required to

receive finish hardware and similar items of work. K. Use hot rolled steel bar for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work is

shown or specified to be fabricated from cold finished or cold rolled stock. L. Preassemble work at shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize

field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary to comply with shipping limitations. Mark units clearly for reassemble and proper installation.

M. Where shown as galvanized, complete the shop fabrication prior to

application of the coating. Remove mill scale and rust, clean and pickle the units as required for coating. Apply hot-dip zinc coating of 0.6 kg/m2 in accordance with ASTM A123.

2.06 FINISHES A. Steel finish: Hop dip galvanized to comply with ATM A123 for galvanized iron

and steel products made from rolled, pressed and forged steel lupus, castings, plates, bars and strips.

2.07 SHOP PAINTING, GENERAL A. Clean, treat and paint metal fabrications work in the shop prior to delivery to

the project site, except for work which has been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Include all surfaces, inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.

2.08 PROTECTION A. Protect exposed finishes by covering with adhesive paper or other suitable

covering prior to shipment from the fabrication or finishing shop. B. Protect installed works from all damage until completion of the works.

2.09 CHEQUER PLATE A. Material shall be as indicated below, unless noted otherwise, or unless

otherwise approved by the Engineer. 1 Galvanized Steel for interior dry well areas. 2. Aluminum Alloy to for exterior exposures 3. Stainless Steel for interior wet well chambers


___________________________________________________________________________________


B. Design 1. Min. uniform live load: 1kN/m2 in machine areas, 5kN/m2 in other areas. 2. Min. concentrated live load: 5kN over any 300x300mm area. 3. Max. deflection: 0.2% of span. 4. Provide intermediate supports as required, to meet deflection and loading

requirements.

C. Fabrication 1. Size of fit operating shown on Drawings. 2. Minimum thickness: 4mm for steel, 6mm for aluminum. 3. Maximum unsupported span: 750mm 4. Chequer or other approved non-slip surface. 5. Provide kicker plate 50mm above plate surface on outer perimeter of

elevated floor (3mm thick for steel, 5mm for aluminum) 6. Use 316 stainless steel hardware. 7. Floor plates shall be neatly and accurately cut to the configuration

necessary, to clear structural members and pipes and to permit removal of the plates.

a. Reinforce openings to provide required load carrying capacity.

D. Coating (After Fabrication) 1. Carbon steel shall be galvanized. 2. Aluminum shall be anodized. 3. Stainless steel shall be treated and passivity.

E. Unless shown otherwise, frame openings as follows:

1. Angles of minimum size 40mm x 40mm x 6mm having 8mm dia x 150mm long anchor bolts spaced at maximum of 600mm along each side with not less than two anchor bolts per side.

2. Drill and tap frame to receive 8mm dia cap screws at not more thank 600mm centres with not less than two screws per side.

2.10 STEEL STAIRCASE A. Fabricate galvanized steel staircase for the locations shown and as required

for proper installation and use.

2.11 ACCESS LADDERS AND RUNGS A. Fabricate galvanized steel ladders for the locations shown and as required

for proper installation and use. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A14.3 for permanent ladders.

2.12 TUBULAR RAILINGS A. Comply with ANSI A 12.1, A 58.1 for railings provide galvanized steel

handrails on walls at stairs and similar locations as required by ANSI A 12.1. B. Provide brackets and anchors for railing posts and for handrail supports as

shown and as approved.


___________________________________________________________________________________


C. Custom fabricates pipe railings to the dimensions and details shown, with smooth bends and welded joints ground smooth and flush.

2.13 CORNER GUARD A. Provide corner guards, fabricated from galvanized steel angle section of the

size and at locations shown. Fabricate guards with anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry, all as shown on the drawing.

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS TRIM A. Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown. Except as

otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible provide cutouts, fittings and anchorage’s as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2.15 FULLY CONCEALED ITEMS A. Clean steel and wrought iron work by “Solvent Cleaning” method specified in

SSPC-SP 1-63, followed by “Hand Tool Cleaning” to remove loose mill scale and rust by methods specified in SSPC-SP 2-63.

B. Apply prime coat of slow drying type paint as soon as possible after cleaning.

Provide a smooth coat, with uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. C. Apply a second coat of the same slow drying type paint and same thickness

on concealed work which is to be built into roofs, decks or below grade work, or is to be the areas designated as high humidity areas.

2.16 EXPOSED INTERIOR ITEMS A. Clean and paint work which is not accessible to foot traffic, floor cleaning

operations or hand contact, as specified for “Fully Concealed Items”, except that mill scale and trust which would result in visible roughness must be removed and the surfaces must be made smooth before painting.

B. Apply the following cleaning, testament and painting to interior work which is

exposed (or partially exposed) and is subject to foot traffic, floor cleaning operations or hand contact by the buying occupants:

1. Clean by “Solvent Cleaning” method specified in SSPC-SP 1-63, followed by “Hand Tool Cleaning” by method specified in SSPC-SP 2-63 or “Power Tool Cleaning” by method specified, in SSPC-SP 3-63 to remove loose mill scale and rust. “Pickle” by methods specified in SSPC-SP 8-63 to remove all remaining mill scale and rust. Grind rough surfaces as may be necessary to provide smooth metal surfaces. Tool cleaning and pickling may be omitted from work fabricated from cold-rolled or cold-finished stock and from castings, provided the surfaces are not heavily rusted.

2. Apply pretreatment to inhibit corrosion and improve paint adhesion, by methods specified in SSPC-PT 2-64 for “Cold Phosphate” treatment.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3. Apply prime coat of metal primer paint as soon as possible after pretreatment. Provide a smooth coat, with uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set metal fabrication work accurately in locate, alignment and elevation,

plumb, level, true and free of rack measured from established lines and levels.

B. Anchor as shown or as required for the intended use, using concealed

anchors wherever possible. C. Where pipe sleeves are used to support miscellaneous iron work, anchor

sleeve to supporting concrete or structure to provide rigid support. 1. Pipe sleeves shall be of galvanized steel of size shown and adequate to

meet the requirements. D. Fit exposed connections together to form tight hairline joints.Weld

connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units, which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.



_______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/05510- 1 METAL LADDERS

SECTION 05510

METAL LADDERS

1.01 GENERAL

A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 4derh- 2. Space side rails as indicated on drawings. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm

o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder. 4. Where units are indicated to be cast in to concrete or built in to

masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick by 200 mm long at 600 mm o.c unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladders: 1. Side rails: Continuous, 9.5-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased

edges. 2. Rungs: 20 mm diameter steel bars, spaced 3 im o.c. maximum. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on

outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung

with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

5. Galvanize including brackets and fasteners. 6. Finish is to be field applied alkyd paint system of color and gloss as

selected by the Engineer.

1.02 LADDER SAFETY CAGES A. General:

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 6 m o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 1200 mm o.c. between primary hoops.


_______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/05510- 2 METAL LADDERS

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent

construction by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages: 1. Primary Hoops: 6.4-by-100-mm flat bar hoops. 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 6.4-by-100-mm flat bar hoops. 3. Vertical Bars: 10-by-64-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop ,spaced

approximately 230 mm o.c. 4. Galvanize exterior ladder cages and interior ladder cages, where

indicated, including fasteners.



_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/05520- 1 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 05520

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

◌A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Stainless-steel pipe and tube railings.

2. Steel pipe and tube railings.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine

allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.

2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied horizontally and concurrently with 1.46 kN/m applied vertically downward.

b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


3. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.

b. Uniform load of 1.2 kN/sq. m applied horizontally.

c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedure: Submittals shall be made according to Conditions of the

Contract and provisions of Division 1.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer’s product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work..

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color texture, or design, including mechanical finishes on stainless steel.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets.

3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.

a. Show method of finishing or connecting members at intersections. F. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


G. Welding certificates.

H.. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS Dl.l, “Structural Welding Code--Steel”.

2. AWS Dl .6, “Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel”.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction

contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.07 CO-ORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.00 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Industrial Metal Centre

Kuwait

Tel: 4812505

Fax: 4819470

2. Fanan International General Trading & Contracting Est.

Kuwait

Tel: 2465577

Fax: 2424523

3. Mohamed Al Otaibi Contracting Est.

Kuwait

Tel: 3920047 / 96426209

Fax: 3917952

2.01 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304 for interior installations and grade 31 6L for

exterior installations.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304 for interior installations and grade 3 16L for exterior installations.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20 for interior installations and grade CF 8M or CF 3M for exterior installations.

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for interior installations and grade 31 6L for

exterior installations.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


2.03 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: [ A 500 (cold formed)] [ [ A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn)].

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A ,Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1.Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 for interior applications and type 316 for exterior applications stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for

attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Hardware For Swing Rail Segments: Stainless steel of matching alloy as railing pipes or tubes

C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regularizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTMD 1187.

H. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

I. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws ,and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate steel railings with welded and fabricate stainless steel railing with non-welded connections, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer’s standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J. Non-welded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer’s standard splicing method.

K. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.

L. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.

O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.

R. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from matching-steel- alloy tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts ;limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.

S. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

T. Where railings are indicated to be swinging, furnish all necessary hardware as specified for securing smooth operation and stopping of swinging segments.

2.07 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products”

for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

2.08 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


2.09 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.

3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 1 53M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

6. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

7. For non-galvanized steel railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

8. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic- phosphate process.

9. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:

1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”.

2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4, “Brush- off Blast Cleaning”.

3. Interior Railings to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”.

10. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,” for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors,

to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variation from, parallel with rake of step, and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in- place construction.

3.03 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 “Fabrication” Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field

C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 150 mm of post.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


3.04 ANCHOR POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After

posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material.

D. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post.

E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.

2. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.05 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing

ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using non-welded connections.

3.06 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.

1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.


_________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________


C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and

repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary

protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



_____________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07110-1 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07110

SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide membrane waterproofing below grade and associated work in

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Drawings show the extent of “Membrane Waterproofing” works hereby

defined to include (but not necessarily limited to) the following areas. 1. Over blinding bed.

2. Over vertical face of basement walls. 3. Waterproofing System inside wet areas (Toilet & Kitchen). 4. Waterproofing System over Roof.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials

have been successfully utilized on work of a similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been completed and in use for minimum five (5) years without any evidence of failure.

B. Membrane Waterproofing shall be executed by an approved Specialist Sub-

Contractor with minimum of 10-year experience. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications and

installation instructions for the membrane waterproofing system and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Review: Before commencing Work submit written statement

signed by the Contractor, stating that the Contract Documents for the membrane waterproofing system have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the waterproofing materials manufacturer and that he is in agreement that the selected materials for membrane waterproofing system are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.

C. Guarantee 1. Provide 10-year manufacturer’s warranty.

2. Submit a 10-year guarantee effective from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing work. Upon notification of any leak within the guarantee period, make the necessary repairs and replacements including the removal and replacement of work superimposed over the membrane waterproofing, at the convenience of the Employer and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.


_____________________________________________________________________________________


3. The guarantee shall be supported by a bank guarantee to be obtained

from a bank approved by the Employer and shall be for a minimum amount of the value of the works in the Bills of Quantities.

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers identified with name,

brand, type, grade, class, and all other qualifying information. B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the

name, type, and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load (or furnish manufacturer’s blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the work.

C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or

intrusion of foreign matter. Conspicuously mark “Rejected” on materials which have once been wet or damaged and remove from the job site.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply membrane waterproofing during inclement weather or when air

temperature is outside the range recommended by the manufacturer. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect membrane waterproofing from damage during construction period so

that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion or covering with other materials.

B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping

of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during membrane waterproofing operations.

C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains. D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,

storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.


_____________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are

specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

B. Waterproofing Membrane: Flame bonded single-ply membrane, 4 (+/- 0.2) mm

thick, composed of asphalt or bitumen modified with thermoplastic resins and reinforced with non-woven polyester fabric. Provide the following or other equal and approved:

1. “Paralon NT4”; Imper, Italy (Supplied by Specialities Co., Kuwait).

2. Testudo Polyester Spunbond 16”; Index, Italy (Supplied by Al-Juman

Commercial Corporation, Kuwait). 3. “Marley Torch 400S”; Marley Waterproofing Ltd. Use primer as recommended by the approved waterproofing membrane

manufacturer. C. Protection Board: One of the following or as recommended by the manufacturer

of sheet membrane waterproofing: 1. “Sealtight Protection Course PC-2” (W.R. Meadows, Inc.). 2. “Elastoboard” (The Celotex Corp.). 3. “Servi-Pak 3mm” (Servicised Ltd.). D. Water stops: 240mm Four ribbed polyvinyl chloride water stop with nailing

flange. E. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum 0.15mm thick of approved

manufacturer in accordance with ASTM E96 and E154.


_____________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. Examine all surfaces to which the membrane waterproofing is to be installed. Do

not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

3.02 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to the installation of membrane waterproofing, meet at the Project Site to

review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination of the work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Contractor, the Engineer, the Sub-Contractor, Manufacturer’s Representatives, and any other Contractors/Sub-Contractors whose work requires coordination with this work.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material, which would impair the work. B. Do not proceed with membrane waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit,

vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed. C. Treat external and internal corners of substrate in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions except as hereinafter specified. B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Follow the recommended technique of the membrane manufacturer for cleaning,

seam, lap and splice areas, for the method and sequence of forming field joints in the membrane.

D. Flash all pipes, conduits, sleeves and other projections passing through

membrane waterproofing and provide tight construction throughout. Use prefabricated boots or field-fabricated boots, fitted coverings, and other accessories as required.

E. Provide water cut-off in accordance with the approved membrane

manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Install protection board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Upon completion of any portion of waterproofing, immediately cover that portion

with protective covering.



________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07120-1 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07120

FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART - 1, GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Fluid Applied Waterproofing.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the

following:- 1. Protective painting of concrete in contact with soil. 2. Protective painting for setting floor tiles in wet areas (Toilet & Kitchen) 3. Protective painting on top of Roof concrete slab

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 07100 - Protected Membrane Waterproofing 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies

as further cited herein :

BS 3416 Waterproofing Paint 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified

materials have been successfully utilised on work of a similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been completed and in use for a minimum five (5) years without any evidence of failure.

B. Fluid applied waterproofing shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub-Contractor.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for the fluid applied waterproofing system and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Review: Before commencing work submit written statement signed by the Contractor stating that the Contract Documents for the fluid applied waterproofing system have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the waterproofing materials manufacturer and that he is in agreement that the selected materials for fluid applied waterproofing system are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.


________________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING The Contractor shall deliver the approved products to the job site in their original

unopened containers clearly labelled with the manufacturer’s name, brand, designation, type and class as applicable, and the date of manufacture and expiration (if any).

Products shall be stored in an approved dry area and protected from contact with

soil. Products shall be kept dry at all times. Products shall be handled in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers

and/or damage to the products. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply fluid applied waterproofing during inclement weather or when air

temperature is outside the range recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Protect fluid applied waterproofing from damage during construction period so

that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion or covering with other materials.

B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and

dropping of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during fluid applied waterproofing operations.

C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.

D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. 1. Waterproofing Paint 2. Waterproofing cold applied Elastomeric coating. The rubber bitumen emulsion shall comply with BS 3416 Type I Class A or B and

shall be water bound emulsion with a minimum 60% total solids content by volume, comprising bitumen with fine particles of rubber. Not less than 10% nor more than 20% of the total solids shall be rubber. The consistency shall be such that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal temperature comply with CP 231 for application of paint.


________________________________________________________________________________________


2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. The product and manufacturer specified hereinafter are specified for the

purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than, those specified may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. Examine all surfaces to which the fluid applied waterproofing is to be applied.

Do not proceed with the application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

3.02 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to the installation of fluid applied waterproofing, meet at the Project Site

to review the material selections, installation procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Contractor, the Engineer, the Sub-Contractor, Manufacturer’s Representatives and any other Contractors/Sub-contractors whose work requires co-ordination with this work.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material which would impair the

work. B. Do not proceed with fluid applied waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit,

vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed. 3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install fluid applied waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions except as hereinafter specified.

B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. The second coat consisting of undiluted emulsion (Fluid waterproofing)

shall be applied as soon as the priming coat is dry, at the approximate rate of 10 litres per 15 square metres.

D. Extra thickness of waterproofing material to be applied at corners,

intersections and angles. E. The emulsion shall be applied by brush, squeegee or spraying strictly in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. It shall not be applied during, or when rain or dust storms are to be expected.


________________________________________________________________________________________


F. For underground structures back fillings shall not be commenced until the

second coat of emulsion is quite dry.



____________________________________ __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07210- 1 BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 –GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Building insulation in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Rigid polystyrene

1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1 ASTM CS 18-76 : Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter.

2 ASTM C 558-92 : Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket and Felt Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications .

3 ASTM C 578-92 :Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 4 ASTMC653-83 : Guide for Determination of Thermal Resistance of Low- Density Blanket-Type Mineral Fibre Insulation.

5 ASTM C 665-91 : Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket

Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

B. The applicable provisions of the following standard publications, codes

and specifications shall apply throughout the Building Insulation work: 1. Thermal Insulation: 1993 ASHRAE Hand Book Fundamentals,

Ch-20, Economic Thickness “Building Envelopes.”


____________________________________ __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________


1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative for information

only manufacturer’s specifications, standard details and installation instructions for the types of insulation required.

B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative 300 x 300 mm square samples of the types of insulation required.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The insulation shall have a minimum K value of 0.02 8 W/mat 24° C. B. The insulation shall be vermin proof and contain sufficient fire inhibitors

to achieve a class 1 resistance to surface spread of flame when tested. C. The insulation shall be waterproof and vapour proof. D. The insulation shall have a minimum compressive strength of 700 Kpa

when tested to ASTMD—1621.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualification: The products shall be manufactured by a

firm that has specialized in the manufacture of such items of the type specified for a continuous period of at least 5 years.

B. Installer Qualification: A firm which has specialized for not less than 5 continuous years in applicable type of work. The Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with the above requirements to the Engineer’s Representative for approval.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or

packages, fully identified with trade name, type, class and other identifying information. Store above grade and protect from weather and damage from any source

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not allow building insulation to become wet or soiled. Comply with other precautions and recommendations of the manufacturer to protect insulation from deterioration.

B. Water Absorption: 0.1% average, when tested according to ASTM D 2842.


____________________________________ __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________


C. Water Vapour Permeability: 0.67 perm-cm average, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E.96. 1. Minimum Thickness: 75 mm thick for roof, 50mm thick for

external wall unless otherwise shown. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under

which the insulation is to be installed, and notify the Engineer’s Representative in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers’ instructions for the particular condition of

use and type of insulation in each case. If printed instructions are not applicable to the condition of use, consult the manufacturer’s representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation.

B. Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be covered, unless otherwise shown. Cut and fit insulation tightly around all obstructions so that no voids exist in the insulation course. Seal in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Mechanical Attachment: Provide type and spacing of mechanical anchoring devices as shown and as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the thickness and condition of use shown. 1. For adhesively applied insulation clips, adhesive and spacing of

clips shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the condition and substrate indicated.

D. Vapour barrier: Where insulation is shown with vapour barrier facing; apply vapour t to all; scans, joints, penetrations and termination of the insulation so as to deliver full integrity of the vapour barrier



_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07430- 1 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL

SECTION 07430

COMPOSITE ALUMINUM BUILDING PANEL

PART – 1 GENERAL

A. Include the general conditions of the Contract as part of this section

B. This Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the specifications affecting work of this trade

C. Furnish all labors, materials, plants, Equipments and appliances and perform

all necessary operations required to execute the work of this section 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fixing of pre-finished Aluminium panel to horizontal or vertical profile for Walls, roofs, canopies and related flashing including all accessory components.

B. All supporting system, anchoring, adhesives and related accessories of the manufacturer.

C. The extent of the work is as shown on drawings or as implied therein. 1.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. References: The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be relevant BSI standards including but not limited to the following except as otherwise specified herein. Perform work in accordance with the specification codes and standards cited therein and addenda and supplements.

B. Components : Design and size to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind presser for normal to plane of panel. Design components for a wind pressure of 46 m/s.

C. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to system,

components or deterioration of seals, movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling dynamic loading release of loads, deflection of structural support framing shortening of building concrete structural columns, creep of concrete structural members, and a mid-span slab edge deflection.

D. Drainage; Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or

condensation occurring within panel system.

E. Tolerances: accommodate tolerances of building structure framing.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


F. Products: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements in conjunction with vapor retards specified.

G. Air Seal: Provide continuity of air barrier seal at building in conjunction with air

seal materials specified.

H. Kynere Coated: Panel shade to the discretion of Engineer.

1.03 TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate Components : to provide plumb, square, level and true installation to accommodate allowable tolerances for work of other sections

B. Erection Tolerances ; Apply to each individual panel and shall not be cumulative:

- Vertical position : + 3 mm - Horizontal position : + 3 mm - Deviation form plumb : + 3 mm maximum each plane - Racking of face : + 6 mm maximum - Racking in elevation : nil - Offset from true alignment between

two identical panels abutting end to end or in line : 0.3 mm

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data : Provide data on assembled panel structural capabilities

B. Shop Drawings : Indicate dimensions, panel profile and layouts, spans, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage and sequence of installation

C. Samples: Submit samples of size 1000 X 1000-mm panel finish illustrating

finish color, and texture.

D. Structure Calculations : to be submitted for Review tot he engineer

E. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions sequence and cleaning procedure.

F. Design And Performance Data : Indicate panel profile characteristics and

dimension of structural properties

G. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 MOCK – UP

A. Construction Mock –up : For 15 m2 which includes sliding system, attachments to building frame, associated vapor retarder and air seal materials, sealant and seals

B. Component Assembly ; To be demonstrated including panel materials, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors, and perimeter sealant

C. Staking, Storing and Handling: Protect sheets and components by storing

under cover. Stake sheets on timber battens on a level firm base, raised above ground level

D. Submit Warranty ; For Defective work, degradation of panel finish, color fading

and for water tightness for a period of 15 years


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


0BPART – 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

Aluminium Composite panels cladding system consists of aluminum composite panels made of double Aluminium sheets filled in between with a polythene core. The system consist of standard size panels, custom made panels, shaped, according to specific requirements, specifically extruded Aluminium sections for edges, joints and corners, beside other accessories, e.g. supporting sections, anchors etc to provide a complete work in accordance with the requirements of contract. Panel surfaces are finished as per the drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. 2BALUCO BOND Alu singen GmbH D-78221 sinGen Tel; 07731-80-2060 Agents in Kuwait : Alghanim international General Trading Tel: 2424775

B. Approved equal 2.03 SPECIFICATION

A. Thickness ; Panel thickness to be at least 4 mm but contractor to provide larger thickness if found necessary by the calculations to comply with requirements, for wind, impact and other loading the spacing between supports of panels and other contract requirements

B. Surface Finish : Exposed surface to be stove lacquered color to be selected by the engineer

C. Size and shapes: size and shapes of panels are in accordance with drawing

and the existing dimension of the building.

D. Weight : For 4 mm thick panel weight : 5.5 Kg/ m2

E. Cladding Sheets : Aluminium sheet 0.5 mm thick on each having the following properties

Alloy PERALUMAN - 100 ( AR MGI – NS41) Tensile strength 125 N/nm2 0.2% proof stress 80 N/nm2 Modules of elasticity 70000 N/nm2 Elongation 5.65 50 10%


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


F. Bending Strength : the bending strength of core material is neglected and the

maximum bending tension occurs at the outermost skin and depending on the applied moment and the panel thickness

Bending stress should not exceed the limits indicated in clause 5 above

G. Resistant to Chemical attack: the material of surface finishing (stove lacquered) shall be resistant to weather industrial atmosphere, sea climate and other factors.

2.04 SURFACE COATINGS:

A. All aluminum components shall be coated with fluoropolymer resin – base spray containing Kynar 500 (polyrinylidene fluoride – PVF2)

B. The finish shall be Metallic three – coat system, factory applied on properly

pretreated metal and thermo – cured at 240 degree C.

C. The system must consist of three - coats:

1. A Primer, which inhibits corrosion and promotes adhesion, based on Kynar 500.

2. A colored topcoat based on Kynar 500.

3. A protective clear coat based on Kynar 500.

D. The total dry thickness of the system must be minimum 40 microns and the system applied according to specifications supplied by M/S Penwalt Corporation or equal and approved.

E. All coatings must conform or exceed the requirements of AAMA 605.

“Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings or Architectural Extrusions and Panels”.

F. The applicator shall be approved by a major licensee of the Penwalt Corp.,

proofing competence to apply Kynar 500 resin coatings.

G. The Kynar 500 material must be sourced from the licensee, giving such approval. 1. PPG - (DURANAR) 2. WHITTAKER - (FLUROCERAM) 3. DESOTO - (FLUROPON)


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


H. Following standards shall be considered for application:

1. AAMA 605.1 Voluntary specification for high performance organic coatings on architectural extrusions and panels.

2. ASTM D 523 Gloss grades

3. ASTM 2244 Color uniformity

4. ASTM D 1400 Film thickness

5. ASTM D 3363 Pencil hardness

6. ASTM D 2794 Adhesion and impact

7. ASTM D 968 Abrasion resistance

8. ASTM D 117 Salt spray resistance

9. ASTM D 714 Humidity resistance

10. ASTM D 1308 Acid resistance and Alkali resistance

11. ASTM D 2244 Color conservation

12. ASTM D 659 Natural Weathering and resistance to chalking

Color shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard custom range by Engineer.

I. Temperature Resistance : From 50 C to + 80 C

J. Thermal Insulating Properties :

Thermal conductivity of the core material : K= 0.29 W/(M.K.) Thermal transmittance : R= 0.02 m2/cw at 6 mm thick panel m

K. Thermal Expansion : Linear Expansion = 2.4 mm/m/100 C

L. Fire Behavior : When tested according to BS 476 the following result a were

obtained :

1. BS 476 part 5 : Ignitability Class P - not easily ignitable 2. BS 476 part 6 : Propagation indices for 6 mm I= 2.1; i=2. 3. BS 476 part 7 : Spread of flame Class 1

M. Fabrication : The fabrication process the components of the cladding system

shall be completely by the approved manufacturer in accordance with the approved specifications and shop drawings.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________


1BPART –3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Substrate Framing : to be verified

B. Building Framing Members; to be verified whether ready to receive panel system.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Composite Metal Building Panel system : on walls in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

B. Protective Coatings: Coat cementitious surfaces containing cement and/or lime

mortar in contact with sheeting with 2 coats of bitumen solution and allow dry before fixing Aluminium panels

C. Fasten Aluminium Section : Permanently to structural supports aligned level

and plumb within specified tolerances

D. Fix Panel : To the channel with help of steel pins and spring washers

E. Cover Gaps : with manufacturers Aluminium cover sections

F. Panel Joints : to be located over located supports

G. Expansion Joints : to be provided where indicated

H. Concealed Fasteners : to be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer

I. Seal and place Gaskets: to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance wherever required.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Site Cuttings : to be removed from finish surfaces

B. Clean and Wash Pre-finished Surfaces: With mild soap and water rinse with clean water.


نموذجي ةإنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجر (الفروانية) محافظة

_________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07500-1 PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07500

PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Composite Roofing System.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to,

the following: - Waterproofing paint, Heat Insulation, Lightweight Concrete, Membrane roofing and flashing, Precast pavers, Sand-cement setting bed and polythene sheet, Sealant etc.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as

further cited herein:

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103 USA as published in “Compilation of ASTM Standards in Building Codes”.

UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc., Publications Stock, 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, Illinois 60062 USA.

General Specifications for Building and Engineering Works of the Ministry of Public Works of the Government of Kuwait, latest edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s

specifications and installation instructions for roofing membrane and accessory items and for each item of proprietary material used, showing compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing details, dimensions,

locations and installation methods of Roofing System including membrane, insulation, lightweight concrete, roofing tiles, flashing, etc. and all accessories; indicate the following: - profiles, slopes, low and high points, dimensions, joint and arrangement of units, detail of special design or shapes; detailed of anchors, inserts, joints, connections to adjoining work or materials, and method of installation and anchoring. Indicate positions of service outlets including roof drains, vent pipes, exhaust fans, roof hatches, skylights, etc., and co-ordinate with all other trades.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


C. Erection Procedures: Submit to the Engineer a detailed outline of

sequence and methods of erection. D. Samples: Submit samples of membrane insulation, roofing tiles and

other items required by the Engineer. E. Guarantee: Submit a guarantee stating that the roofing membrane

system installed will be waterproof and free from defects for a period of not less than ten (10) years from date of Substantial completion of the Works and that in the event any leaks occur within the period stipulated, the Contractor shall, at the convenience of the Employer, effect all repairs and replacements necessary to remedy defects all to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.04 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up (3 x 3 m bay) of roofing system with full sized roofing

tiles. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects indicating joint conditions and all other features as well be used in the final work. Mock-up assembly will be used as a standard for judging acceptability of work on project and may be used in the finished work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All membrane roofing, flashing, sheet metal and insulation materials

furnished and installed under this Section shall be the product of single manufacturer, or shall be specifically approved for use with his materials by the manufacturer whose roofing specification is used. Furnish a written affidavit stating that this requirement has been complied with.

B. Roofing and flashing shall be executed by a specialist roofing Sub-

Contractor licensed, franchised or approved by the roofing materials manufacturer, using experienced skilled roofers, having a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. Furnish a written affidavit stating that the roofing applicator is licensed.

C. All roofing and flashing work shall be applied in strict accordance with

the roofing manufacturer’s written requirements and specifications applicable to roof conditions.

D. Where additional work or materials, or greater quantities of materials

than required by roofing manufacturer are specified herein, these Project Specifications shall govern.

E. The roofing material manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the

work during roof installation and furnish a copy of his inspection reports to the Engineer. Reports shall be on roofing manufacturer’s standard inspection report form, dated and signed. This inspection shall be provided at no additional cost.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


F. Do not proceed with roofing work during inclement weather. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for application and curing under specific climatic conditions.

1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION A. Pre-Roofing Conference:

1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a pre-roofing conference shall be held at the job site.

In attendance shall be (1) Engineer (2) Contractors, (3) Roofing Sub-contractors and (4) Manufacturer’s representatives.

2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved

materials. Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements. Examine job site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and methods of storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and edges are provided and correctly installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and temperature requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof from other trades.

1.07 FINAL INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a

representative of the roofing material manufacturer in order to ascertain that the Roofing System has been properly installed.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or

bundles fully identified with brand, type, grade, class and all other qualifying information.

B. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating

the name, type and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying each load (or furnish manufacturer’s blanket certificate) for each bulk product used in the work.

C. Store materials in a dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage

or intrusion of foreign matter. Conspicuously mark “Rejected” on materials which have once been wet or damaged and remove from job site.

1.09 PROTECTION A. Protect roofing system installation from damage during construction

period so that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at the time of completion.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and

dropping of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing membrane operations.

C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains. D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during

delivery, storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with

local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the roofing

material manufacturer’s latest published manual for the slope and type of substrate shown.

B. Materials for Composite Roof Water proofing System:

1. Waterproofing paint coat over concrete roof slab. 2. Foam Concrete: Foamed light weight concrete, thickness as per drawings.

Heat Insulation: 75 mm thick rigid plastic insulation.

3. Waterproofing Membrane: 4 mm thick membrane waterproofing.

4. Primer for Bitumen Sheet Roofing Membrane as recommended by the manufacturer of the Sheet Roofing Membrane.

5. Vapour barrier: Polyethylene sheet min. 1000 gauge of approved

manufacturer in accordance with ASTM E96 and E154. 6. Roofing Tiles: For Precast Terrazzo size as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Where shown on Drawings, the surface on which the membrane

waterproofing is to be applied will be left by others without serious projections and sharp edges. Surfaces shall be free of projections, voids, depressions, scale efflorescence, loose material, laitance, oil grease and other foreign contaminants. Before starting work, inspect all surfaces to be waterproofed and report in writing to the Engineer, any


_________________________________________________________________________________________


surfaces that are not suitable for correct application of the waterproofing.

B. If any surfaces are unsuitable to receive waterproofing, the Contractor

shall see that the same are corrected by the respective trade prior to application of his work.

3.02 PREPARATION A. All preparation of surfaces, including construction joints shall be

completed before membrane waterproofing is installed. Commencement of application of membrane waterproofing to any surface will be construed as acceptance of that surface as proper to receive the waterproofing and any defects in the work thereafter shall be the responsibility of the Contractor without additional cost to the Employer.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Waterproofing Paint: Fluid applied waterproofing paint shall be applied

over concrete roof by brush in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as per section 07140

B. Heat Insulation: Set polystyrene insulation in thickness indicated, using

“dry method” (without the use of adhesive or bitumen) with long joints continuous and short joints staggered, butting each panel tightly to adjoining panel.

Discard all damaged insulation boards. Neatly cut and shape insulation at all projections through roof and at all other vertical projections allowing at least 12mm clearance. Under no circumstances allow insulation to remain uncovered in damp, wet weather, overnight or exposed to sunlight for prolonged periods of time.

Immediately after insulation is applied, apply polythene sheet directly on top of insulation.

C. Foam Concrete: Foam concrete shall be laid as methods of obtaining

falls to the roof all as per manufacturer’s instructions and over polyethylene sheet or building paper spread on top of the thermal insulation.

D. Mortar Screed: The mortar screed shall be laid in proper thickness and

carefully trowelled to an even surface, maintaining the falls. The cement, fine aggregates and water for the mix shall be as per section 09205, lath and plaster.

E. Waterproofing Membrane: The waterproofing membrane shall

comprise of two layers of 4 mm thick modified asphalt membrane as approved by the Engineer and shall be applied as per manufacturer’s


_________________________________________________________________________________________


recommendations. Before laying the membrane, ensure that the screeds are to the correct falls, and that any preliminary preparation

work including the formation of grooves is completed. The screed shall

be clean and dry and wood float finished. Prime all surfaces receiving roofing membrane. Use products and methods recommended by the roofing membrane materials manufacturers.

The overlaps between two contiguous layers shall be minimum 100 mm wide and carried out carefully. The overlap shall be smoothed-on with a hot round tipped trowel. Flash all roof outlets, pipes, sleeves and other projections through roof deck and provide tight construction throughout.

Skirting, up-stand, roof drains, pipe outlets etc. shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations with the materials well and carefully worked into corners, edges, angles holes etc. Additional reinforcement over those areas shall be provided where required as per Engineer’s instruction and approval.

F. Roof Tiles: Precast Terrazzo tile shall be provided and laid as described

in section 09420. Tiled skirting shall consist of a triangular fillet backing of concrete or sand cement mortar with a row of cement tile skirting or 20mm thick terrazzo tiles (size as required) bedded on in sand cement mortar to form a skirting to match the horizontal tiling. The top of the tile skirting shall be let into the wall/parapet and the joint carefully pointed and sealed with an approved quality sealant. Skirting may be laid recessed and vertically against parapet if shown in the drawings or agreed by the Engineer.

G. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints in roof tiling shall be formed where

and as required (generally 3.00mx3.00m bay) and shall be continuous throughout the depth of screed and tiling. The expansion joints shall generally be filled with bitumen impregnated joint filler and sealed with a resilient polyurethane polymer sealant, approved by the Engineer, to the required depth with rubber back-up rod and shall be finished with a tooled concave joint. The sealant shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

All surfaces, which will be in contact with the sealant, shall be primed with an approved primer made by the manufacturer of the sealant. Care shall be taken to prevent staining of the adjoining surfaces when filling the joint. Expansion joints shall continue into the tile skirting and fillet as required.

3.04 FLOOD TESTING A. The horizontal areas of waterproofing shall be tested prior to applying

consecutive layer. B. Such testing shall be by flooding sections of the waterproofed area with

a minimum 20 cm head of water for 48 hours. Flooding shall include proper damming of areas as required. This applicator shall provide his


_________________________________________________________________________________________


own hoses. Mark any leaks and repair when the membrane is dry. Before flood testing, ascertain from the Structural Engineer that the structure will withstand the dead load of the water.

C. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired

and then re-tested. D. At completion of flood testing, remove all dams and traces of water to

the satisfaction of the Engineer. E. Installation of mortar beds, insulation fill materials or concrete which are

applied over the waterproofing shall not start until such time as the membrane is leak free and has been accepted by the Engineer and has been protected with screed.

3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Make good, all damage to the building resulting from this work or

operations. Particular care shall be taken to avoid staining any part of the exposed structural or finished work. Hoisting of materials shall be done with extreme care. Use approved means to protect exposed surfaces.

B. At completion of work under this Section, remove from the site and

legally dispose of packaging, containers and other accumulated materials, and leave the work in a clean and satisfactory condition.



____________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/07910-1 JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS

SECTION 07910

JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS

PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide joint filler and gasket work, in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction for the installation of each type of

joint filler or gasket, unless otherwise shown or specified. 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit to the Engineer copies of the following

information from the manufacturer. 1. Published, data, or manufacturer’s letter, clearly indicating that each

product to be furnished complies with these specifications, is recommended for the application shown, and is compatible with each other material in the joint system.

2. Complete instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection

of each product. B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer (following the submittal of

manufacturer’s data) samples of each type of exposed joint filler or gasket. Samples will be reviewed by the Engineer for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Compliance with Performance Requirements: Notwithstanding the types of

joint fillers and gaskets specified herein, the Contractor shall in all cases be responsible for providing sealant materials the best of their respect kind, compatible with adjoining materials and suitable for the purpose intended all at no additional expense to the Employer.


____________________________________________________________________________________


PART - II PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Manufactures: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are

specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

B. Size and Shape: provide joint fillers and gaskets as shown or if not shown,

consult the manufacture and determine the proper size and shape considering joint movement and conditions at time of installation.

C. Hardness and Compressibility: Provide joint fillers and gaskets as

specified, and as recommended by the manufacturer for proper performance in each specific conditions of use.

D. Compatibility: Provide only the type of joint filler which is compatible with

the joint surfaces, and each sealant or caulking compound, as stated in the data published by the manufacturers of the joint filler and the sealant or caulking compound, or as certified by the joint filler manufacture for each application.

E. Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive: Apply to joint fillers and gaskets, wherever

applicable and at Contractor’s option, to facilitate installation. F. Color: For exposed gaskets or joint fillers, provide the color shown or if the

color is not shown, it will be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer’s standard collars. For concealed joints, provide the manufacturer’s standard color, which has the best overall performance characteristics.

2.02 MOLDED, RESILIENT NEOPRENE GASKET (MRNG) A. ASTM D 2000, 50 to 70 shore A durometer, non-cellular, molded or

otherwise fabricated to form the sizes and shapes shown or as required to effectively seal each joint.


____________________________________________________________________________________


PART - III EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examination: Examine the joint surfaces and the conditions under which

the work is to be done. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Apply in continuous runs without voids or interruptions, except as may be

otherwise shown. Trim for tight fit around obstructions or elements penetrating the joint.

B. Do not puncture the surface or self-skin on moulded or extruded types of

cellular joint fillers. C. Depress face edge of joint fillers accurately, wherever used as backup for

sealant, as shown or as specified by sealant manufacturer for proper application of sealant.

D. Recess expose edges of joint fillers and the remainder of the construction

period so that they will be without indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of the works.



______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08110-1 METAL DOOR & FRAME

SECTION 08110

METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances, and materials and performing all operations in connection with Hollow metal doors and frames, Steel door etc..

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Rated Fire Separating Requirements: Comply with fire rating requirements as

specified and applicable local codes. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with these requirements for the class of doors opening shown or scheduled. Provide required fire separation as tested in accordance with ASTM E 152 or equivalent test method.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in the

production of hollow metal work. B. Provide hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated openings manufactured

by a firm whose units are inspected and tested for fire rated doors and the certificates are approved by Kuwait Fire Brigade.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies

as further cited herein: -

1. AWS D1.1 “ Structural Welding Code – Steel”1.05 2. SDI-100 (Steel Door Institute USA) Standard Steel doors and Frames. 3. ANSI A151.1 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for physical

Endurance for steel doors and hardware reinforcing. 4. ASTM A569 Steel, Carbon, Hot-rolled sheet and strip, commercial

quality. 5. ANSI/ASTM A366 Steel sheet, Carbon, Cold-rolled, commercial

quality. 6. ANSI/ASTM E283 Rate of Air leakage through exterior windows and

doors. 7. BS 1245 Metal Door and Frame(Steel)


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer for information only, copies of

manufacturer’s specifications for fabrication and shop painting, and instructions for installation of hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Fire Rating Certificate: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s certification for

each steel door and frame which is shown as fire rated. Doors should comply with requirements of NFPA and Kuwait Fire Brigade.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract Documents, shop drawings for hollow metal doors and frames. Show typical details of all conditions at large scale (not less than 1:4) for every opening.

D. Samples: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, 450 x 600mm cut-away sample doors with provisions for lockset and a pair of hinges and corner section of door frame.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect hollow metal units from damage during transit, storage and

installation. Tool marks, rust, blemishes and only other damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Store material in a dry location, off the ground and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Sheet Steel: ASTM A366 and A568, free from scale, pitting or

other defects; finish, stretcher leveled for doors. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A526, galvanized in accordance with ASTM

A525, Coating Designation G90 (275 g/sq.m) zinc coating, phosphatized; stretcher leveled for doors.

C. Supports and Anchoring Devices: Structural steel, ASTM A 36; or sheet steel,

ASTM A366 cold-rolled or ASTM A569 hot-rolled and ASTM A568; as shown but not less than 16 gauge (1.5mm) fabricating; comply with ASTM A153, Class B.

D. Filler: Sound deadening and heat-retarding mineral fiber insulating material. E. Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. 1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A.

2. Expansion Bolts: FS FF-S-325, Group III, expansion shield (self-

drilling tubular expansion sheet bolt anchors), Type 1 or II recess, type 2c flat head.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3. Machine Screws: FS – FF – S – 92 carbon steel, type III cross

recessed, design I or II recess, style 2C plat head. F. Sheet Steel Primers: One of the following compatible with finish and intended

service refer to Section 09900, Painting. 1. FS TT-P-57 Type I (Oil/Alkyd, Zinc Chromate, Iron Oxide base)

2. FS TT-P-57 Type II (Alkyd, Zinc Chromate, Iron Oxide base)

3. FS TT-P-86 Type III (Alkyd, Red Lead base)

4. FS TT-P-664 (Rust-inhibiting, lacquer-resisting, Zinc Chromate, Iron Oxide base).

G. Galvanized Steel Primer: FS TT-P-641 Type II (Alkyd, Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide). H. Provide manufacturers standard hinges, pull and locking handles and all other

hardware required for the operation indicated. Finish of all hardware items to be approved by the Engineer.

I. Weather/Acoustic Seals: Closed cell sponge neoprene. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products manufactured by local manufacturers who are specialized in

manufacturing Metal doors and frame and have proven record of manufacturing metal door and frame for about 10 years. Submit the manufacturer’s qualification, data and work experience etc. to the Engineer for approval.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames to the design and dimensions shown in

accordance with best shop practices. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate doors and panels to a thickness of 45mm. Take field measurements where co-ordination with adjoining work is necessary.

B. Make hollow metal works strong, rigid, neat in appearance, and free from

defects. Reinforce corners of doors as required to prevent twisting or sagging. C. Form exposed surfaces free from warp wave and buckle, with all corners

square, unless otherwise shown. Form moulded members straight and true, with joints coped or mitre, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress welded joints on exposed surfaces smooth so they are invisible after finishing.

D. Provide undercuts and clearances for doors as required and for rated doors

and panels within the limitations established by the authority having jurisdiction. Prepare doors and frames to receive weather seals and acoustic seals shown or specified.

E. Provide a full mitre continuously welded on back side at frame corners and

stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.


______________________________________________________________________________________


F. Accurately machine, file and fit exposed connections with hairline joints

unless otherwise shown. G. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise shown. Countersink exposed screws

using flat, Philip head screws. H. Conform to the requirements of the “Structural Welding Code” of the

American Welding Society for the welding of steel. Provide welds of adequate strength and durability.

2.04 FIRE RATED DOORS A. Comply with the Specifications herein for flush doors and to the requirements

of Clause 1.03. 2.05 FLUSH DOORS: A. Construct interior doors with 18 gauge (1.2mm) outer sheets and exterior

doors with 16 gauge (1.5mm) galvanized outer sheets, with edges welded, and finished flush. Do not expose seams or joints on door faces or edges. Reinforce the outer face sheets with 20 gauge (0.85mm) interlocking vertical C-shaped or Z-shaped reinforcing members spaced not over 150 mm apart and spot welded to outer face sheets. Provide flush inverted 16 gauge (1.5mm) steel channels welded to outer sheets at top and bottom of door. Place filler between reinforcing members.

1. Optional Framing for Core: A continuous truss formed inner core of

sheet metal, not lighter than 28 gauge (0.4mm), spot welded to the face sheets every 70mm horizontally and 75mm vertically over the entire surface on both faces.

B. Provide flush closure at the top of exterior doors. Weld inverted steel

channels to both outer sheets to form integrally with edge construction of door.

C. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive mortise type

hardware in accordance with the contract hardware schedule and templates. Provide reinforcing, drill, and tap for doors to receive surface applied hardware, except at push plates and kick plates provide reinforcing only. Use steel secured by spot welding as reinforcement. Hardware reinforcement shall be as follows:

1. Hinge reinforcements: 5 x 38-x 225 mm.

2. Lock front reinforcement: 5mm thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer.

3. Lock reinforcement units: 16 gauge (1.5mm) by size as required by

hardware manufacturer.

4. Closer Reinforcement: 12 gauge (2.6mm) one-piece channel by size as required by hardware manufacturer.


______________________________________________________________________________________


5. Other hardware reinforcements: As required for adequate strength

and anchorage.

6. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing units may be used.

2.06 FLUSH PANELS AND TRANSOM PANELS A. Form to thickness and dimensions shown and comply with applicable requirements for flush doors. Prepare transom panels for concealed support and anchorage. 2.07 ACOUSTICAL DOORS A. Provide special acoustical doors where shown or scheduled complete with

panels and frames, using 14 gauge (1.9 mm) steel for frames and face sheets of doors and panels. Provide a Sound Transmission Class as required, in accordance with ASTM E90, for each door, panel, and frame assembly when installed. Unit shall be complete with necessary gasketing to achieve the rating.

2.08 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES A. Provide combination type fully welded hollow metal doors frames to be used

as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles indicated and, unless otherwise shown, of the following minimum gauges:

1. Interior Doors : 16 gauge (1.5mm) steel. 2. Exterior Doors : 14 gauge (1.9mm) galvanized steel. 3. Acoustical doors: 14 gauge (1.9mm) steel. B. Anchor frame jambs to concrete or masonry which has been placed prior to

setting of frames with 10mm countersunk flat head bolts into expansion type shields or inserts, minimum of 4 per jamb.

1. Face of frame shall be dimpled to accept counter-sunk bolt head.

Reinforce frame with spacer to prevent bowing. Bolt head shall be set slightly below soffit face, filled and ground smooth at the time of installation.

C. Provide 16 gauge (1.5mm) steel channel spreaders at the bottom of all 3

sided frames to prevent distortion during shipment and storage and to hold frames in proper position until anchorage and adjacent construction has been completed.

D. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. Where floor

fill or setting beds occur support frame by 4 gauge (1.9mm) metal strap welded to frame and adjustable anchor strip anchored to the structural substrate. Floor anchor strips shall be 14 gauge (1.9mm), punched for two (2) 6mm fasteners.


______________________________________________________________________________________


E. Reinforce head of frames over 900mm wide with 12 gauge (2.6mm) steel

channel unless a structural lintel is provided to support the wall construction above the frame or unless there is not wall construction above the frame.

F. Mortice, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortice type hardware. Provide

internal reinforcement for surface mounted hardware which is to be field drill and tapped. Locate hardware in frames to match location shown or specified for doors and in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates. Provide the following:

1. Hinge Reinforcements: 5 x 38-x 325 mm

2. Strike reinforcements: 5mm by size required by hardware manufacturer.

3. Closer and holder reinforcement: 12 gauge (2.6mm), by size as

required by hardware manufacturer.

4. Full enclosing steel cover boxes over all mortises: Provide removable access plates in the heads of frames to receive concealed door closers. Off-set reinforcement so that faces of hinges or keepers are flush with face of the frame rebate.

5. Holes for Rubber Door Silencers: 3 for single doors and 4 for pairs of

doors. Install plastic plugs in silencer holes to keep holes clean during installation.

2.09 WEATHER ACOUSTIC SEALS A. Comply with the Specifications herein for hollow metal door frames, and form to the profiles required to receive weather seals and acoustic seals. Drill and tap frame as required. B. Install seals in single lengths for each side with uniform exposure of 10mm, using adhesive and other attachments as per the seal manufacturer recommendations and instructions.

2.10 FIRE RATED DOOR FRAMES A. Comply with the Specifications herein for hollow metal door frames and to the

requirements of Clause 1.03. 2.11 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean, treat, and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal work, inside and

out, whether exposed, or concealed in the construction. B. Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, fillings, dirt and

other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by one of the methods specified in SSPC-SP-1-63 “Solvent Cleaning”. Fill as required to seal seams in edges.


______________________________________________________________________________________


C. Apply 2 coats of metal primer to all reinforcement and attachment steel and

framing, which will be contact with masonry or concrete. D. Chemically treat surfaces with phosphate compound to assure maximum

paint adhesion. Apply a sufficient number of coats of any approved enamel filler, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. In addition, apply one coat of light coloured primer, baked on, to both inside and outside surfaces. Touch-up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.

E. Provide minimum mil thickness of coatings as recommended by the paint

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under

which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set hollow metal frames at locations shown, in perfect alignment and

elevations, plumb, level, straight, true, and free from rack. Brace frames to prevent displacement.

B. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes, except over membrane

waterproofed areas. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with anchor bolts or with power driven fasteners. Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as required with other work.

C. After wall construction has been completed, remove temporary braces,

including spreaders at base of 3 sides frames. Leave surfaces smooth and undamaged.

D. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and fully coordinate with him in making the necessary door and frame preparations for and fixing all hardware. Drill and tap metal door and frames for machine screws as required and do not use self-tapping sheet metal screws. Anchor panels in place with concealed fasteners. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors, which are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames.

E. Remove hardware before painting and re-fix after painting of doors is

completed. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation at completion and throughout the Contract Maintenance Period, and instruct Employer’s staff in the proper maintenance and adjustment of all hardware supplied.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, clean exposed metal surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer and leave ready for final painting. B. Protect units during construction period against deterioration and damage,

replace damage components as instructed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


___________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08210- 1 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08210

WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES

PART- 1 : GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with wood doors and frames.

1.02 QUALITY CRITERIA A. Provide doors meeting or exceeding the minimum standards. B. All doors shall be the product of the same manufacturer to insure uniformity of

quality and appearance throughout the project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:

Submit Schedules and elevations indicating door sizes, construction, swing, label, undercut and applicable hardware locations. Dimension and detail openings for glass lights, louvers and grills.

B. Samples:

If doors are to be factory finished, manufacturer will submit veneer samples of specified veneer with their standard finish colors at Engineers request or a colour sample from the Engineer will be sent to the manufacture for duplication.

C. Product Information:

Submit manufacturer’s product installation instructions, finishing instructions and any general recommendations manufacturer may have for the use and care of each door type.

1.04 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and obtaining all necessary information from hardware and metal frame manufacturers. Door manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating all necessary information received by the Contractor from hardware and metal frame manufacturers in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive hinges and hardware. The contractor shall provide his supplier with two copies of approved frame schedule, two copies of hardware schedule and all necessary hardware templates.


___________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors shall not be delivered to the building until weatherproof storage space is

available. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 30 and 60 percent. Stack doors flat and off the floor, supported to prevent warpage and protected from damage and direct exposure to sunlight.

B. Factory finished doors shall be individually wrapped in black polybags to

protect the finish from damage by contact with other doors and exposure to ultra violet rays.

C. Do not walk or place other material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors

across one another. D. The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors from damage

prior to, during and after installation

1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide a written warranty from the door manufacturer that provides for the

replacing as originally furnished from the factory, any door exhibiting defects in materials, or workmanship, including the following :

1. Delaminating in any degree. 2. Warp or twist of ¼” or more. 3. Telegraphing of any part of core unit through face to cause

surface variation of 1/100 inch or more in any 3’’ span/ 4. Any defect which may, in any way, impair or a affect

performance of the door for the purpose which it is intended. Replacement under this warranty shall include hanging,

PART –2 : PRODUCTS

2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. All door frames shall be of solid hardwood (Teak or Oak) rebated and grooved

60-70 mm thick as approved and shall be fixed over sub-frame (concealed). Width of the door frame shall be up to the full width of the wall unless otherwise mentioned. Architrave shall be of solid hardwood and of size and decoration as per Engineer’s approval.

B. All door panels shall be 45-50mm thick unless otherwise shown and shall be

any of the following types as per drawings and approval of the Engineer.

1. Solid core teak veneer door (Natural/Lacquer Finish) 2. Solid core plastic laminated finish. 3. Solid (teak or oak) door (Natural Finish)


___________________________________________________________________________________


C. General:

1. Standards: In addition to requirements shown and specified, comply with applicable provisions for grading and workmanship of AWI ‘Quality Standards’

2. Surfaces & Patterns: Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and worked

to profiles shown.

3. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry lumber to the moisture content recommended by the AWI Section 100-G-3.

D. Particle Board Core: Single thickness slab of 3 ply particle board complying

with ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-L-1, average density not les than between 448-512 Kg/M3, hot pressed with synthetic resin glue. Linear expansion shall not exceed 0.03% in either direction when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037, Sections 76 through 79. Faces of core slab shall be of 0.254mm thick flakes, with resin content a minimum of 50% higher than core resin content. Face layer density shall be minimum of 25% higher than core density.

E. Lumber Core: AWI Section 100 with the following requirements: Low densities thoroughly kiln dried wood blocks not more than 76.2mm wide random lengths. F. Mineral Core: Incombustible mineral composition free of asbestos fiber. G. Top and bottom edge bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from

defects, which will be visible when finished as specified herein. H. Blocking: hardwood blocking as per manufacturer’s standard designed for the purpose intended. I. Side Edge bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects, which

will be visible when finished as specified herein.

1. Wood for side edge bands shall be matching face veneers for natural finish doors.

J. Cross bands: Minimum 1.6mm thick after sanding, properly dried hardwood. K. Face veneer for natural Finish: Standard thickness thoroughly dried

conforming to CS35, premium grade. Match face of doors in pairs and end match transoms. Face veneer shall tapeless spliced with grain running vertically, belt and polish sanded, of the following species: 1. Veneer: Anigre in cut and characteristics to match sample approved by the

Engineer L. Face veneers for opaque finish: Any hardwood veneer that, when finished,

will not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with the opaque finish specified.


___________________________________________________________________________________


M. Face veneer for Interior painted finish: Standard thickness sound grade hardwood veneer conforming to CS35, overlaid with medium density cellulose fiber sheets impregnated with phenolic resin.

N. Type of Veneer and Finish shall be as per Engineer’s choice and

approval. O. Door with Plastic Laminate Finish: High pressure laminated plastic

(Melamine resin surface), 1.2mm thick conforming to NEMA LD-1, special colour and texture as selected by the Engineer. Vertical edges shall be finished in plastic laminate to match door face, applied before face sheets are applied.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Fasteners:

1. Wood Screws: FF-S-111, Type, Sizes, material and finish as required for the condition of use.

2. Nails: FS FF-N-105, Type, Size, material and finish as required for

the condition of use.

3. Anchors: Type, Size, material and finish as required for the condition for use.

B. Adhesives:

1. For Laminating Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Melamine, phenolresin, or resorcinol-resin complying with FS MMM-A-81, Type, Grade and class best suited for the purpose.

2. For all other uses: Moisture resistant complying with FS MMM-A125,

Type II or MMA-A-188, Type I, II or III, Type best suited for the purpose. C. Joint Fillers: Back up rods for sealant as specified in Section “JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS”. D. Sealant: Sealant for joint sealing as specified in Section “SEALANT”. 2.04 MANUFACTURER A. Provide products manufactured by local manufacturers who are specialized in

manufacturing Wood doors and frame, have well equipped carpentry shop and have proven record of manufacturing wood fabrication for about 10 years. Submit the manufacturer’s qualification, data and work experience etc. to the Engineer for approval.


___________________________________________________________________________________


2.05 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Cores

1. Particleboard Core - shall conform to Type I density (28-30 pounds per cubic foot), Class 1, commercial standard # 236-66.

2.06 REFITTING AND PREMATCHING A. Pre-fit doors and panels in accordance with tolerance requirements of

Commercial Standard CS 171 or NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1, at the place of manufacture. Provide standard level or radius to edges of doors as required by the installation.

2.07 SHOP APPLIED LACQUER A. Door faces, edges and cutouts shall have one (1) coat shop applied lacquer as

specified at the place of manufacture. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before applying lacquer.

B. Apply lacquer uniformly without runs, sags or bare spots to a dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).

PART – 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install doors until concrete, masonry, plaster, tile and other wet work is

completed and dried in the areas to receive doors.

B. Doors shall be conditioned to the average prevailing moisture (humidity) of the locality before hanging. Doors shall not be subjected to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity. Avoid sudden changes such as forced heat.

C. Cutting, trimming, fitting and machining of pre-finished doors will not be

permitted. D. Install doors in required openings as shown. Install flush panels with

concealed fasteners. E. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s instructions.

Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames.


___________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation of doors, clean all exposed surfaces

as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Protection: Protect doors and hardware during construction. Replace damaged components as directed by the Engineer.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08520- 1 ALUMINIUM DOORS & WINDOWS

SECTION 08520 ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS

PART-I: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with aluminium doors windows and screens.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide aluminium doors, windows and screens manufactured by a firm specializing in production. Installation shall be carried out by workmen experienced in the type of installation required.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications and

installations and other data to show compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all components for review by the Engineer. Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned elevations, anchors and other accessories required. Show glass thickness and glazing details.

C. Samples:

1. Submit to the Engineer sets of samples for each type, finish and colour required. Submit sample of the specified alloy on 300 mm lengths of extrusion; show the maximum range or variation in colour and shade. Sample Submittal and approval shall be for colour, texture, and specular gloss only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Submit sample corners of door and window units, with hardware, representative of fabrication techniques and workmanship of the final products.

1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements including air

infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 classification “ PA-3 HP6O.”

B. Design, fabricate and install aluminium doors, windows and screens so that the total, installed, glazed unit will withstand the gravity loads and wind pressure as shown on drawing.

C. Make provisions at sill to drain water and condensation to exterior face of the frames.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Provide tight joints and effectively seal windows against water leakage and air infiltration. Water leakage is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water, other than condensation, on any inboard part of window, either during testing or under actual weather conditions.

E. Design Modification: Make design modification of work shown only as may be

necessary to meet performance requirements and co-ordinate the work. Variations in details and materials which do not adversely affect appearance, durability or strength shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

1.05 GUARANTEE A. Submit a guarantee for a period of 5 years that the powder coating will not develop

excessive fading or excessive non-uniformity of colour or shade.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Before dispatch from the Manufacturers’ Works all exposed surfaces shall be

protected with a suitable low tack tape, or other means of protection recommended by the manufacturer. The adhesion, resistance to atmospheric conditions and elasticity of the tape shall be suited to the purpose intended.

B. If during fixing or glazing any protection is removed it must be refitted or replaced immediately afterwards.

C. Deliver all components to project site completely identified. Store in accordance with manufacturers instructions, above grade on dunnage, properly protected from the weather, construction activities and other possibility of damage or loss.

PART-2, PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturers: The materials specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of

establishing better quality standards. Material equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminium Extrusions: Shapes as shown and as required to fulfill performance

requirements, but not less than 3 mm thick, unless otherwise shown. Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics, and suitable controlled alloy and temper as recommended by aluminium manufacturer to provide required colour and colour matching.

B. Aluminium Sheets and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to fulfill

performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as required.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________


C. Stainless Steel Sheet and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to fulfill performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as required.

D. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories Required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM A36 and ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanizing is not compatible with alloy or component parts, shop painted with zinc chromate primer after cutting to size.

E. Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: Alloys recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required strength of assembly.

F. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action with

the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval-head countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Weather Stripping: Moulded PVC gaskets, moulded expanded neoprene gaskets or moulded neoprene gaskets, factory applied in an integral dovetail self-locking groove.

H. Bituminous Paint: “Bitumastic 50”

I. Hardware:

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard hinges, supporting arms, pull and locking handles, and all other hardware required for the operation indicated.

2. Hardware shall be fabricated of stainless steel complying with ASTM A167 and finished to match the component to which it is fixed.

3. All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer

2.03 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS: A . Generally:

Construct aluminium door, window to the sizes and dimensions shown on the Drawings and as specified. Doors and openable parts of the window and screen units (ventilators) shall be complete with all necessary hardware.

B. Unit Construction:

1. Glazed Doors, Windows:

a. Provide framed members, fabricated with mitred joints, structurally welded with reinforcing inserts to develop the full strength of the metal and maximum rigidity in the frame assembly.

b. Fabricate doors of thickness indicated on drawings and of sections which shall allow replacement of glass from inside without disassembly of door stile and rails. Provide snap on extruded aluminium glazing stops with exterior stops anchored for non removal.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________


c. Provide sound deadening filler material on inside of stiles and rails. Clearances for door shall be 2.0 mm at jambs and heads and 6 mm clearance above finish floor except for carpet, where the clearance shall be 15 mm.

d. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors to receive hardware in accordance with hardware schedule.

2. Ventilators:

a. Miter cut all corners, weld throughout entire section profile and dress welds smooth on all exposed and contact surfaces.

b. Vent members shall be designed to overlap the frame members to provide an uninterrupted compression seal around the entire perimeter of the window members providing true pressure equalizing and to allow frictionless operation during opening and closing.

3. Frames, Mullions and Transoms: Mitred, Sealed rigidly and permanently joined. Frames to be in one piece of largest size possible. Provide intermediate support members where shown on drawings or as required.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Complete the welding, cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by the metal manufacturer in accordance with applicable recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind weld areas smooth before proceeding with other treatment.

B. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified.

C. Fit and assemble all work in the shop insofar as practicable. Mark and disassemble units which are too large for shipment to project site, retaining units in sizes as large as possible for shipment and erection.

D. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using rigidly secured joints with hairline contact, mitred corners, unless otherwise shown.

E. Reinforce members and joints with steel or aluminium plates, bars, rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance requirements. Use concealed fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded.

F. Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous paint or other suitable permanent separation as required to prevent galvanic action.

2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour range samples

for use in comparing against production material. Mark and code extremes of the colour range so that these will not be installed adjacent to one another in any one unit.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________


PART -3, EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so that aluminium doors.

Windows and screens will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.

B. Co-ordinate aluminium doors, windows and screens, with the work of other trades and provide items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the final location of doors, windows and screens.

C. Erect the doors, windows and screens, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.

D. Erection Tolerances: Erect aluminium doors, windows and screens within the

following tolerances:

1. Variation from plumb : 3 mm maximum. 2. Variation from level l : 3 mm maximum.

E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cuffing and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.

F. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection, as directed.

G. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to supporting structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers, shims and other items during erection which will not stain or mark the finish of units.

H. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

I. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind exposed welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding and grinding.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________


J. Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in accordance with component part manufacturer’s recommendations. Grind smooth and restore finish.

K. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed, with zinc chromate paint.

L. Seal joints in concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.

M. Adjust ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weather stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. In addition to specific protection and cleaning methods required for each component part by the respective Sections of these Specifications and recommended by the respective manufacturers, maintain the work throughout the construction period in a clean and properly protected condition so that it with not be damaged at the time of completion of the Works.

B. Carefully remove protective material and clean down aluminium doors, windows and screens.

Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied and maintained so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise impaired as a result of unequal exposure to weathering conditions.

C. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR ALUMINIUM WINDOWS A. Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and normal curing of

sealant and glazing compounds, test for water leaks in accordance with “Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage “AAMA Standard FC-1-76. Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer. Repair or replace any component that leaks and retest as directed.



______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08710-1 FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 08710

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Perform all work necessary to complete all finish hardware work as shown on Drawings or inferable there from and/or as specified herein, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Quality Assurance

1. Applicable Codes and Standards: The codes and standards generally applicable to work of this section are listed hereinafter:

BS – British Standards: 459 Doors 476 Fire Tests in building materials and Structures 1227 Hinges for General Building purposes 2038 Performance tests for locks 3827 Glossary of terms related to Builders Hardware 4951 Builders Hardware: Lock and Latch Furniture (Doors)

1.02 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the application of hardware items with door and frame details and with methods of fastening as hereinafter specified.

B. Adaptation of Hardware Items: Where the type of hardware

specified is not adaptable to the finished size of members requiring hardware, submit an item having a similar operation and quality to the Engineer for review.

C. Templates: Make finish hardware to templates, with wood and/or

machine screws as applicable to door and frame details. Provide templates and schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other trades requiring same, so that doors and frames can be cut, reinforced, and prepared in the shop to receive hardware.

D. No names, designs, or labels will be permitted on the following items:

Turnpieces, or operating trim of lock sets or latch sets, push bars, pull handles, plates.

E. Single Source: Use only the products of one manufacturer for each

type of hardware specified.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Hardware at rated openings: Provide hardware in accordance with NFPA standard No.80 for openings specified, shown or scheduled for a fire rated opening or to receive a UL table. In case of conflict between type of hardware specified and type required for fire protection, provide type required by NFPA and UL.

1. Provide hardware of type listed by UL for usage with the types

and sizes of fire doors and frames required. Unless otherwise shown or specified, arrange doors at fire rated openings to remain in the normally closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic closing device. Provide active latch bolts, of UL approved throw that cannot be held in the retracted position.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Provide to the Engineer, for information only, copies of manufacturer’s specifications, maintenance and keying manuals, and installation instructions (templates to suit each particular installation), for each item of finish hardware. Include photographs, catalogue cuts, marked templates and other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications.

B. Sample, Items: In conjunction with the submission of the finish

hardware schedule, submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, one sample of each typical item of exposed hardware. Engineer’s review of samples will be for design, pattern, and finish and colour only. All other requirements are the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. After final review, deliver samples to job site for comparison

with hardware delivered for installation. Unblemished samples may be used in work.

C. Shop Drawings, Finish Hardware Schedule: Submit to the Engineer

for review, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, copies of finish hardware schedules covering the complete identification of all items required for the Project. Include manufacturer’s names and identification of finishes. Include a separate schedule of the key and master-key system with the final submittal of schedule. The Engineer’s review of the schedules shall not be construed as a complete check and shall not relieve the contractor of any responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions from the requirement to provide complete hardware for the Project.

Coordinate hardware schedule with door manufacturer’s ‘Door

Schedule’.


______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Statement of Application: Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents, one copy of a statement confirming that the finish hardware work complies with these Specifications and, that the methods of installation were proper and adequate for the condition of installation and use. The Contractor shall sign the statement of Application.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Package and label each item of hardware separately. Tag each item in accordance with the final hardware schedule. Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings, instructions, and installation templates. Protect all items from loss or damage in shipment.

1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. After delivery of the hardware and prior to the installation, a meeting shall be held between the Contractor, the Engineer and all manufacturers’ representatives. Compare final samples with actual hardware delivered to assure acceptability. Review catalogues, brochures, template installation instructions and the final hardware schedules. Rehearse installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions; so as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work.

1. Finish and colour of each hardware item is to match samples

provided to, reviewed and selected by the Engineer as herein before specified.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Refer to Drawings for application of individual hardware items as referenced to each opening or function.

B. Manufacturers:

1. The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to or better than those specified will be considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

2. The hardware manufacture(s) shall have extensive experience

in manufacturing of contract hardware for large projects and must evidence this in the form of references from previous projects.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3. The hardware manufacture(s) must provide field service on

site in the form of an experienced qualified hardware consultant who has been with the hardware manufacturer for a minimum of five years. He must be available at reasonable times during the delivery and installation period and must be able to attend at the site within 7 days of receiving notice from the Contractor or Engineer.

2.02 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Produce finishes to an exact match with the Engineer’s selected sample(s). Reduce variance in hue in the colour of each finish, as much as possible, whether the base material is cast, forged or stamped, or when plating is applied over steel, brass or bronze. Finishes of the same designation, that come from 2 or more sources, shall match when the items are viewed at arms length and approximately 600mm apart. Unless otherwise specified, match the finish of each item of hardware with the finish selected for lock sets and latches.

1. Type of finish for each hardware shall be indicated in the

hardware schedule prepared by the contractor for Engineer’s approval.

2.03 HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. The following mounting heights shall apply throughout the works, unless otherwise shown or specified: 1. Lock sets and latches: 950 mm to center of handle from floor. 2. Butt Hinges: 250 mm to center of lowest hinge from floor,

125mm to center of upper hinge from top of door, space other hinges equally between lower and upper hinges.

3. Door Pulls: 1120 mm finished floor to center of pull, center line

in 125mm from edge of flush doors, and centered on stile of narrow stile glass doors.

4. Deadlocks: Center line of cylinder to align with centerline of

cylinder for locksets, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Cross-bar of exit device: 950 mm finished floor to center of

crossbar. 6. Push Bar: 1050 mm finished floor to center of push bar. 7. Push Plate: 1120 mm finished floor to center of plate through

mounted to pulls. 8. Flush bolt operating mechanisms: Top bolt 1650 to 1800 mm

above finished floor, bottom bolt 250 to 300 mm above finished floor.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.04 FASTENERS

A. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. The use of self-tapping or sheet metal screws is prohibited except for the applicable of flush mounted push and kick plates.

1. Concealed Fasteners: Furnish hardware items with appropriate

type and length of screws or other fastenings suitable to ensure permanent anchorage.

2. Exposed fasteners: Furnish hardware with countersunk Phillips

oval head type screws where concealed fastening is not possible. The finish or colour of these screws is to match that of the hardware item being fastened.

2.05 BUTT HINGES

A. General: Pack all hinges with machine or wood screws as required by door and frame construction. Where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the width of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim, furnish hinges with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Furnish template hinges in accordance with door and frame material requirements.

B. Butt Hinge Sizes Door Thickness Hinge Size Less than 100mm 114 x 114 mm (4.5” x 4.5”) 100mm and over 125 x 125 mm (5” x5”) C. Butt Hinge Quantities per door leaf: Height of Door No. of Hinges 1.50 m or less 2 1.51 m to 2.25 m 3 2.26 m to 3.00 m 4 D. Hinge Base metals: 1. Interior: Stainless Steel.

2. Exterior: Stainless Steel. E. Butt Hinge Characteristics: The following apply throughout the work:

1. Ball bearing: Bearings contained within or flush with barrels. Minimum metal gauge 0.130”.

2. Plain Bearing: Five knuckle flush barrel, minimum metal gauge

0.130” 3. Pins: All interior hinges shall have non-rising pins. All exterior hinges shall have non-removable pins (NRP).


______________________________________________________________________________________


4. Tips: Button. 5. Application: Full mortise.

F. Types and manufacturers: 1. Regular Weight, Ball Bearing, stainless steel: a. Hanger B.B. Type (U.S.A). b. Stanley: FBB 191 c. BSW: BB 01179 (West Germany) 2.07 MORTISE LOCKS, LATCHES, AND DEADLOCKS

A. General: Provide mortise type lock sets and latch sets as scheduled. All lock sets, latch sets or deadlocks to be provided complete with trim, armor fronts and 5 pin cylinders, concealed fastenings, washers and bushings. Provide wrought box strikes for each lock set, latch set or deadlock with curved lips of sufficient length to protect frame. All locks shall have special type self-locking square spindles with ball bearing guides, square front, and strike.

1. Provide a minimum 19-mm throw on locksets and latch sets for

pairs of doors. 2. Provide a minimum 22-mm throw on deadlocks for pairs of

doors.

B. Deadlocks: Furnish deadlocks from the same manufacturer as lock sets and latch sets with the same turnpiece and cylinder trim as furnished for lockets and latch sets provide deadlocks with 22mm throw bolts.

C. Manufacturer’s Lock series: 1. Mortise toilet lock case a. ASSA/Ruko: 565T b. Sargent: 7765 c. KFV: 706 WC. 2. Mortise cylinder lock case a. ASSA/Ruko: Equivalent b. Sargent: Equivalent c. KFV: 165 – DIN 18082. 706 PZW 3. Mortise dead lock case a. ASSA/Ruko: Equivalent b. Sargent: Equivalent c. KFV: GIG-706R 4. ANSI strike plate a. ASSA/Ruko: 408066 b. Sargent: ANSI strike c. KFV : DIN strike


______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Trims and accessories: 1. Lever handles

a. FSB: Equivalent b. Glutz: Equivalent c. Orgo: 8100

2. Roses

a. FSB: Equivalent b. Glutz: Equivalent c. Orgo: 6550 3. Escutcheon

a. FSB: Equivalent b. Glutz: Equivalent c. Orgo: F0 6550 4. Cylinder accessories a. ASSA/ Ruko: 2356 b. KFV: 730 Equivalent c. Orgo: Equivalent E. Toilet signs 1. Toilet sign, Male a. FSB: 4058.36 b. Quality: 58A c. Orgo: TZ 5646 2. Toilet sign, Female a. FSB: 4058.37 b. Quality: 58A c. Orgo: Female 2.08 CYLINDERS

A. General: 5-Pin with security profile key, removable core cylinders masterkeyed into building system, with cams to suit lock functions, and provide with square shouldered blocking removing cylinder.

B. Type and Manufacturers

1. Single cylinder a. ASSA/Ruko: 156 b. Sargent: 40 c. DOM: 33N d. KFV: 701

2. Cylinder for Panic Device a. ASSA/Ruko: 5103 b. Sargent: 34 c. DOM: 333N d. KFV: 700


______________________________________________________________________________________


3. Temporary construction cylinders

a. ASSA/Ruko: 156 b. Sargent: 40 c. DOM: Construction key d. KFV: Equivalent

2.09 PANIC DEVICES

A. General: Rim type for single door. UL-listed for fire exits. Cylinder outside or no outside operation. For double doors, one rim type and one rim vertical type UL-listed for fire exits. Provide panic devices where scheduled, subject to the following:

1. Keying: Keyed devices shall be provided less cylinders.

Cylinders shall be as hereinbefore specified, keyed to building system.

2. Outside Trims: Custom application as scheduled and as

follows: a. Pulls: Custom types as scheduled and as hereinafter

specified.

B. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Panic bolt for single doors a. FSB: Equivalent b. Sargent: Equivalent c. Dorma: 4000 Series d. Adams Rite: 8400 series 2.10 OVERHEAD SURFACE CLOSERS

A. General: Closer sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer unless larger sizes are scheduled. Closer shall have the following features; full rack and pinion, independent closing speed and latch regulating valves, adjustable backcheck. Additional features shall be provided as hereinafter specified. Closers are to be provided for 180-degree opening where partition will permit. Schedule indicates regular or parallel arms and hold-open features.

B. Single Size, Heavy Duty Reversible: Additional features

shall include reversible (non-handed) application permitting regular or parallel arm placement to suit door installation requirements.

C. Type and Manufacturers:

1. Overhead backcheck door closer, Regular arm fixing a. DORMA: TS 83RA b. Sargent: 1250 c. LCN: 1460


______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Overhead backcheck door closer, Parallel arm fixing

a. DORMA: TS 73A b. Sargent: 1250 PA c. LCN: 4010 3. Overhead backcheck door closer, Hold-open arm fixing a. DORMA: TS 83H0 b. Sargent: 1250 H c. LCN: 4010

2.11 FLOOR CLOSERS (FLOOR SPRINGS) A. General: Closer sizes and fittings shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer for size of door and application in consideration of the details shown and specified with special details as follows: -

B. Center Hung, Type and Manufacturers: 1. Floor spring single action with hold open a. GEZE: TS 500 - HO b. DORMA: BTS 84 c. YALE USA: Equivalent d. LCN (Canada): Equivalent 2.12 FLUSH BOLTS A. General: All flush bolts are to be provided in pairs (top and bottom of door).

Provide the top bolt in a length sufficient to locate the flush bolt operator no more than 1.8 m above the finished floor. Provide standard strikes for top bolts. Provide “Dust-Proof Strikes” for bottom bolts. Flush bolts for steel doors to comply with ANSI A115.4. Flush bolts to wood doors to have min 10-mm rods with a throw of min. 15-mm.

B. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Flush bolts and wood doors 250 x 25 mm a. Perkins and Powel (England): 7356 b. ASSA/Ruko: 1096 c. Trimco: 3999 2. Flush bolts for metal doors, 300mm and 600mm a. Perkins & Powel: (Equivalent) b. Trimco: 3917

c. Quality: (U.S.A) 1358


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.13 KICK PLATE

A. General: Kick plates shall be surface mounted, beveled 3 sides, 1.50 mm minimum metal thickness and mounted with oval head Philip fasteners. Size 100 mm high x door width less 37 mm for single doors or door leaf less 19 mm for pairs.

2.14 SLIDING DOOR MECHANISM

Shall be complete with motor and sliding mechanism along with vision pulse or radar door actuators. Motor to be controlled by a key switch for operation or stop mode.

2.15 DUST PROOF STRIKES/SOCKETS A. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Dust proof sockets a. Perkins & Powel: 7344 b. Frank Allart & Co.: 5640 c. Quality: 1226 2.16 COORDINATORS (DOOR SELECTOR) A. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Door selector to pair of doors a. DORMA: 390 b. Glyn Johnson: Equivalent 2.17 PUSH PLATES A. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Push plate 400 x 75x 1 mm a. Trimco: Equivalent b. FSB: Series 5325 c. OGRO: TZ2084 2.18 PULL HANDLES A. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Straight pull handle 125 x 19 mm secret fixing. a. D-Line 4212 b. FSB: 667038 and 667034 c. Ogro TG 9025


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.19 DOOR STOPS AND COAT HOOKS A. Type and Manufacturers: 1. Door Stop a. FSB: 3881 b. Balwin: Equivalent c. D-Line: 5070 2. Coat Hook with door stop a. FSB: 3646 b. Trimco: Equivalent c. Quality: Equivalent 3. Coat Hook a. FSB: 3645 b. Trimco: Equivalent c. Quality: Equivalent 2.20 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Type and Manufacturers: a. Zero: 555 b. Reese: 39 c. Pemko: Equivalent 2.21 THRESHOLDS A. Type and Manufacturers: a. Zero: 656 - 657 b. Reese: S206 – S207 c. Pemko: 180 AV 2.22 KEYING SYSTEM – KEYING CONTROL A. Provide 3 change keys per cylinder. B. A Great grand master key system has to cover all door types such as wood,

hollow metal and glass doors. The system has to be designed by the manufacturer in accordance with the Employer and Engineer’s requirement.

C. Cylinders must have a minimum of 5 pins. D. Provide keys of nickel silver only. E. Provide 5 keys for each master key level. F. Finish of cylinders shall be US 15 to match finish of the hardware finish.


______________________________________________________________________________________


G. Provide temporary cylinders for use during construction period only. H. Provide 10 construction keys during construction period. I. After completion of installation and prior to handing over to the Employer’s

representative, call the manufacturer who shall organize the transfer from construction master key system to the approved master key system. The Grand Master keys must be handed over directly to the Employer’s representative by the manufacturer and obtain a receipt for the same and provide the receipt to the Contractor as evidence of completing the obligation.

J. Provide steel key cabinet with cabinet lock having a capacity of 150 hooks.

Provide a complete colour cap key control system of the type specified. Provide complete accessories including key gathering envelopes, labels, reserve-pattern colour caps with self locking key clips, key receipt forms and holders, card index and temporary and permanent key markers.

1. Type and Manufacturers Key cabinet, 150 hooks a. ASSA/Ruko: 9801/150 b. Lund Equipment: Equivalent c. DOM: KC150 K. On handing over, each key shall be fitted to a coloured nylon key tag with

clear labeling of cylinder/key marking. On handing over, all individual keys shall be placed on the hooks inside the key cabinet except the master keys, which are to be handed over in a sealed envelope by the manufacturer.

2.23 MANUFACTURER’S NAMES Dorma GmbH + Co. KG P.O. Box. 4009 D-58247 Ennepetal Germany Dorma Door Controls Ltd. Dorma Trading Park Staffa Road London E10 7QX England Dorma Door Controls Dorma drive Reamstownn, Pa, 17567 U.S.A. Karl Fliether GmbH + Co. Nevigeser Strasse 22 P.O. Box. 100347 D-42503 Velbert Germany Franz Schneider Brakel Postfach 1440 D-43029 Brakel Germany


______________________________________________________________________________________


Hoppe AG CH-7537 Muestair (GR)

Switzerland D-Line International AS Carl Jacobsens Vej 28, Valby DK-1790 Copenhagen V Denmark Ogro Beschlagtechnik GmbH P.O. Box. 150140 Donnenberger Strabe 2 D-5620 Verbert 15 (Veviges) Germany Pemko MFG. P.O. Box. 3780 Ventura, CA 93006 U.S.A. Perkins & Powell Cobden Works Leopold Street Birmingham B12 OUJ England Frank Allart & Co. Ltd. 36 Sherborne Street Birmingham B16 8DB England. Dom Sicherheitstechnik GmbH+Co. P.O. Box. 1949 D-5040 Bruhl Cologne, Germany Ryobi Limited 762 Mesaki-cho, Fuchu-Shi Hiroshima-Ken, 726 Japan Or any equal approved manufacturers. Important Notes: The contractor shall submit the list of all required Hardware/Ironmongery for the doors (each door separately) for the Engineer’s approval. The list shall be provided/selected in conformity with the specifications. In the list the contractor shall mention the name of the approved hardware manufacturer(s). However the Engineer has the right to change any hardware listed by the contractor in view of function of the door and other technical criteria.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the

applicable hardware portions of these specifications. Store in a locked space to prevent loss.

B. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required.

Fit locks and latch in their respective doors and remove before painting. Reinstall after painting of doors is completed. Upon completion, adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation.

C. Instruct Employer’s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware.

3.02 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKING A. The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking

the installation of finish hardware. Check, test and adjust moving parts to ensure free and smooth operation. Provide to the Employer the special tools required to adjust and maintain hardware.

1. After the building is completed and in use, adjust hardware to

compensate for air movement and other conditions, so that all items will operate properly.

2. A factory representative of the lock and latch manufacturer shall

examine all hardware, with an Employer’s Representative, 6 months after handing over to the Employer. Adjust the hardware for proper operation.

3. Clean and polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to

the Employer.

END OF SECTION


________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08800- 1 GLASS AND GLAZING

SECTION - 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART I-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with glazing.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following:

Interior and exterior glazing of windows, doors and screens.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Clear float glass. 2. Clear tempered float glass. 3. Laminated glass. 4. Frosted glass. 5. Wire glass. 6. Clear Low-E glass. 7. Insulating glass. 8. Mirrors. 9. Dry gasket glazing.

10. Silicone glazing 11. Mechanical button glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:

A. Glass shall meet requirements of FS DD-G-451d for the applicable quality hereinafter specified for each type of glass, except that for heat absorbing glass, the acceptable range of colour and/or defects (as defined by FS DD-G 451d) shall be determined by samples of such defects and/or colour range. Glass which does not fall within the accepted sample range shall be subject to rejection by the Engineer. In the event that such samples are not or cannot be provided, the Engineer will determine the acceptability of glass relative to colour and/or observable defects in each case.

B. Comply with recommendations and requirements of “FGMA Glazing Manual” published by the Flat Glass Marketing Association.

C. Comply with recommendations and requirements of the “Glazing recommendations Sealing Systems Manual” published by the Flat Glass Marketing Association, except that for heat absorbing glass and insulating glass, comply with the manufacturers when they are at variance with FGMA.


________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Comply with recommendations and requirements of “Installation Recommendations for Tinted Glass”, Technical Service Report No. 104, latest edition published by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer the following information from the manufacturer:

1. Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed glazing details including the use of sealants and gaskets and that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown.

2. Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed all glass thicknesses as shown on the Drawings and the application of heat absorbing glass for the effects of partial or full shading under the expected service temperature ranges and that the resulting thermal stresses will not reduce the “Glass Statistical Factor” below 2.5.

3. Manufacturer’s literature for glazing gaskets and each type of glazing sealant (refer to Section SEALANTS, para. SUBMITTALS)

B. Certifications or Guarantees: Provide the manufacturer’s certification or

guarantee of performance of the glass supplied for the designed and specified performance required.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer (following the submittal of manufacturer’s

data), samples of each type of glass, glazing sealant or gasket. The Engineer for colour and texture will review samples only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Provide 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of glass specified.

2. Provide 300 mm long samples of glazing gaskets.

1.05 SAMPLE INSTALLATION A. Prepare sample installation as required to match specified work in all respects

before proceeding, with the work. Glaze sample in the presence of both glass and glazing materials manufacturers, not less than one (1) week in advance of the scheduled glazing work. Before actual glazing work proceeds examine the sample in the presence of those present earlier and obtain the Engineer’s approval to proceed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glazing materials to project site in manufacturer’s unopened containers,

fully identified with trade name, colour, size, hardness, type, class and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Deliver and store glass in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, protected from weather, staining, damage and loss. During storage and handling of glass provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage. Protect faces from scratches and abrasion.


________________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRICATION

A. Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut all glass.

Take field measurements of each opening, before glazing, to verify adequate bite on the glass and minimum edge clearance. Openings which do not fall within the tolerances for which precut glass has been sized shall be glazed only with glass specially cut to fit such openings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under which

work is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at the project site with the glass manufacturer’s

representative, sealant manufacturer’s representative, glazier and fabricator of framing or other supporting structure to receive glass. Review the glazing procedure applying glazing materials and installing removable stops. Evaluate suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated weather conditions. Review co-ordination with other work.

B. Before beginning work, inspect sash, frames and rebates to receive glass to determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash and frames are ready to receive glazing materials.

C. Sash, frames and members shall be adjusted, plumbed, and squared. All rivets, screws, bolts, nail heads, welds and other projections shall be finished flush in glazing rebates. All corners and intersections shall be sealed and watertight.

D. Operable sash shall be fastened and kept stationary until glazing compounds, except non-setting types, have cured or set.

E. Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed before glazing work is begun.

F. Any members that are not acceptable to receive glass shall be reported to the General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work by this installer shall constitute acceptance of surfaces to receive his work and all defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected by this installer without additional cost to the Employer.


________________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of each light of glass shall be watertight and airtight, and capable of withstanding temperature changes, wind loading (exterior glass) and impact from operation (doors and operable sash), without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal, exudation of sealant and excessive deterioration of glazing materials.

B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or any other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass before installation.

C. Do not begin glazing until all cleaning and repairing of concrete and masonry surfaces has been completed.

D. Aluminium glazed frames requiring dry glazing method shall be glazed in accordance with manufacturer's written specification which shall become a part of the work herein as though written out in full.

E. Do not begin glass installation until rebates and glazing stops have been primed and are thoroughly dry. Do no glazing when ambient temperatures are less than 4°C.

F. All glass shall be clean cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversize dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be shop cut to fit openings allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be perfectly square. Any out of square shall be reported and corrected before glass is sized. Protect edges of glass from abrasion with ground or adjacent surfaces.

G. Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on the Drawings are approximate only and the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required clearance and bite around full perimeter of glass as set forth in the FGMA Manual.

H. Apply glazing compounds and other materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

I. Glass shall be set without springing and with proper clearances at all edges. Edge clearance and tolerance shall be in accordance with recommendations of FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition.

J All edges of exposed glass shall be ground and polished to profiles indicated, except as hereinbefore specified for glass mullions and entrance glass doors.

3.04 INSULATING GLASS GLAZING A. Set insulating glass units as per manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent

water leakage. Do not glaze metal bound and organic bound insulating glass units with oil based mastic or other glazing compounds which might have a deleterious effect on the hermetic seal of the units. Completely conceal edge binding of insulating glass units with glazing material and extend material a minimum of 3 mm onto glass surfaces at each edge, to provide glazing seal independent of hermetic seal.


________________________________________________________________________________________


3.05 STRUCTURAL GLAZING GASKETS A. Comply with gasket manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

Mitre-cut corners of loose zipper strips slightly longer to provide permanent compression at joints. Use special tool to install and remove filler strips; lubricate as may be required, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use lubricants recommended by gaskets manufacturer.

B. Comply with glass manufacturer’s printed instructions for the use of setting blocks, liquid or tape sealants and weep holes in the glazing recess of lock strip gaskets.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After completion of exterior glazing and nominal curing of sealants and glazing

compounds, test for water leaks. Conduct tests in the presence of the engineer in accordance with “Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage”, AAMA Standard FC-1-76, except perform tests on not less than 5% of all exterior lights.

3.07 PROTECTION A. All glass shall be protected from damage until acceptance of the work and if

glass is broken remove and replace with specified type. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of glass and the replacement of all such damaged materials after glazing work is completed.

B. Glass breakage or damage to metal caused by negligence or any other reason shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

C. The Contractor may, at his own option, carry glass breakage insurance, but failure to carry proper insurance shall in no way relieve him of his responsibility in this regard.

D. All glazed openings shall be identified with markers such as tapes or flags that are not in contact with the glass, but which are held in position away from the glass.

E. All glass shall be examined on a monthly basis during the guarantee period to detect any formation of staining and/or etching. If staining or etching is noticeable, notify Engineer immediately for determination of proper remedial procedures. Plaster, mortar, paint spatter, or any other coating shall be removed immediately after contact and shall not be permitted to collect or remain on glass surfaces.

3.08 CLEAN UP A. Remove all labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, and spots from glass

and metal on completion of glazing.

B. Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each day’s work. Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work progresses.


________________________________________________________________________________________


C. At the completion of the work under this Section, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed. At the completion of the entire project, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed.



________________________________________________________________________________________


SECTION - 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART I-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with glazing.


Interior and exterior glazing of windows, doors and screens.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Clear float glass. 2. Clear tempered float glass. 3. Laminated glass. 4. Frosted glass. 5. Wire glass. 6. Clear Low-E glass. 7. Insulating glass. 8. Mirrors. 9. Dry gasket glazing.

10. Silicone glazing 11. Mechanical button glazing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:

A. Glass shall meet requirements of FS DD-G-451d for the applicable quality hereinafter specified for each type of glass, except that for heat absorbing glass, the acceptable range of colour and/or defects (as defined by FS DD-G 451d) shall be determined by samples of such defects and/or colour range. Glass which does not fall within the accepted sample range shall be subject to rejection by the Engineer. In the event that such samples are not or cannot be provided, the Engineer will determine the acceptability of glass relative to colour and/or observable defects in each case.

B. Comply with recommendations and requirements of “FGMA Glazing Manual” published by the Flat Glass Marketing Association.

C. Comply with recommendations and requirements of the “Glazing recommendations Sealing Systems Manual” published by the Flat Glass Marketing Association, except that for heat absorbing glass and insulating glass, comply with the manufacturers when they are at variance with FGMA.


________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Comply with recommendations and requirements of “Installation Recommendations for Tinted Glass”, Technical Service Report No. 104, latest edition published by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer the following information from the manufacturer:

1. Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed glazing details including the use of sealants and gaskets and that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown.

2. Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed all glass thicknesses as shown on the Drawings and the application of heat absorbing glass for the effects of partial or full shading under the expected service temperature ranges and that the resulting thermal stresses will not reduce the “Glass Statistical Factor” below 2.5.

3. Manufacturer’s literature for glazing gaskets and each type of glazing sealant (refer to Section SEALANTS, para. SUBMITTALS)

B. Certifications or Guarantees: Provide the manufacturer’s certification or

guarantee of performance of the glass supplied for the designed and specified performance required.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer (following the submittal of manufacturer’s

data), samples of each type of glass, glazing sealant or gasket. The Engineer for colour and texture will review samples only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Provide 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of glass specified.

2. Provide 300 mm long samples of glazing gaskets.

1.05 SAMPLE INSTALLATION A. Prepare sample installation as required to match specified work in all respects

before proceeding, with the work. Glaze sample in the presence of both glass and glazing materials manufacturers, not less than one (1) week in advance of the scheduled glazing work. Before actual glazing work proceeds examine the sample in the presence of those present earlier and obtain the Engineer’s approval to proceed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glazing materials to project site in manufacturer’s unopened containers,

fully identified with trade name, colour, size, hardness, type, class and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Deliver and store glass in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, protected from weather, staining, damage and loss. During storage and handling of glass provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage. Protect faces from scratches and abrasion.


________________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRICATION

A. Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut all glass.

Take field measurements of each opening, before glazing, to verify adequate bite on the glass and minimum edge clearance. Openings which do not fall within the tolerances for which precut glass has been sized shall be glazed only with glass specially cut to fit such openings.


3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under which

work is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at the project site with the glass manufacturer’s

representative, sealant manufacturer’s representative, glazier and fabricator of framing or other supporting structure to receive glass. Review the glazing procedure applying glazing materials and installing removable stops. Evaluate suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated weather conditions. Review co-ordination with other work.

B. Before beginning work, inspect sash, frames and rebates to receive glass to determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash and frames are ready to receive glazing materials.

C. Sash, frames and members shall be adjusted, plumbed, and squared. All rivets, screws, bolts, nail heads, welds and other projections shall be finished flush in glazing rebates. All corners and intersections shall be sealed and watertight.

D. Operable sash shall be fastened and kept stationary until glazing compounds, except non-setting types, have cured or set.

E. Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed before glazing work is begun.

F. Any members that are not acceptable to receive glass shall be reported to the General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work by this installer shall constitute acceptance of surfaces to receive his work and all defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected by this installer without additional cost to the Employer.


________________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The installation of each light of glass shall be watertight and airtight, and capable of withstanding temperature changes, wind loading (exterior glass) and impact from operation (doors and operable sash), without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal, exudation of sealant and excessive deterioration of glazing materials.

B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or any other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass before installation.

C. Do not begin glazing until all cleaning and repairing of concrete and masonry surfaces has been completed.

D. Aluminium glazed frames requiring dry glazing method shall be glazed in accordance with manufacturer's written specification which shall become a part of the work herein as though written out in full.

E. Do not begin glass installation until rebates and glazing stops have been primed and are thoroughly dry. Do no glazing when ambient temperatures are less than 4°C.

F. All glass shall be clean cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversize dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be shop cut to fit openings allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be perfectly square. Any out of square shall be reported and corrected before glass is sized. Protect edges of glass from abrasion with ground or adjacent surfaces.

G. Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on the Drawings are approximate only and the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required clearance and bite around full perimeter of glass as set forth in the FGMA Manual.

H. Apply glazing compounds and other materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

I. Glass shall be set without springing and with proper clearances at all edges. Edge clearance and tolerance shall be in accordance with recommendations of FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition.

J All edges of exposed glass shall be ground and polished to profiles indicated, except as hereinbefore specified for glass mullions and entrance glass doors.

3.04 INSULATING GLASS GLAZING A. Set insulating glass units as per manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent

water leakage. Do not glaze metal bound and organic bound insulating glass units with oil based mastic or other glazing compounds which might have a deleterious effect on the hermetic seal of the units. Completely conceal edge binding of insulating glass units with glazing material and extend material a minimum of 3 mm onto glass surfaces at each edge, to provide glazing seal independent of hermetic seal.


________________________________________________________________________________________


3.05 STRUCTURAL GLAZING GASKETS A. Comply with gasket manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.

Mitre-cut corners of loose zipper strips slightly longer to provide permanent compression at joints. Use special tool to install and remove filler strips; lubricate as may be required, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use lubricants recommended by gaskets manufacturer.

B. Comply with glass manufacturer’s printed instructions for the use of setting blocks, liquid or tape sealants and weep holes in the glazing recess of lock strip gaskets.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After completion of exterior glazing and nominal curing of sealants and glazing

compounds, test for water leaks. Conduct tests in the presence of the engineer in accordance with “Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage”, AAMA Standard FC-1-76, except perform tests on not less than 5% of all exterior lights.

3.07 PROTECTION A. All glass shall be protected from damage until acceptance of the work and if

glass is broken remove and replace with specified type. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of glass and the replacement of all such damaged materials after glazing work is completed.

B. Glass breakage or damage to metal caused by negligence or any other reason shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

C. The Contractor may, at his own option, carry glass breakage insurance, but failure to carry proper insurance shall in no way relieve him of his responsibility in this regard.

D. All glazed openings shall be identified with markers such as tapes or flags that are not in contact with the glass, but which are held in position away from the glass.

E. All glass shall be examined on a monthly basis during the guarantee period to detect any formation of staining and/or etching. If staining or etching is noticeable, notify Engineer immediately for determination of proper remedial procedures. Plaster, mortar, paint spatter, or any other coating shall be removed immediately after contact and shall not be permitted to collect or remain on glass surfaces.

3.08 CLEAN UP A. Remove all labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, and spots from glass

and metal on completion of glazing.

B. Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each day’s work. Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work progresses.


________________________________________________________________________________________


C. At the completion of the work under this Section, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed. At the completion of the entire project, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed.


نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة )الفروانيةمحافظة (

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/08910- 1 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall

SECTION 08910

GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL PART –1 GENERAL A. Include the general conditions of the contract as part of this section. B. The contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications

affecting work of this trade. C. Furnish all labours, materials, plant, equipment and appliances, and perform all

necessary operations required to execute the work of this section. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminium tube framing system with vision and spandrel glass.

B. Integral louvers. C. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 ERENCES

The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be relevant BSI standards including but not limited to the following. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specification codes and standards cited therein and to latest applicable addenda and supplements. 1. BS 729 : Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles 2. BS 1470 : Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys for General

Engineering Purposes. Plates, Sheet and strip 3. BS 1474 : Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys for General

Engineering Purposes. Bars, Extruded Round Tube and Sections

4. BS 1615 : Anodic Oxidation on Aluminium and its Alloys 5. BS 4255 : Preformed Rubber Gaskets for Weather Exclusion from

Building 6. BS 4360 : Specification for Weldable Structural steels 7. BS 4873 : Aluminium Alloy windows 8. BS 4368 : Methods of Testing Windows 9. BS 5516 : Code of Practice for design and Installation of Sloping

and vertical Patent Glazing 10. BS 5889 : Specification for Silicone Based Building Sealant 11. BS 6262 : Code of Practice for glazing 12. BS 6375 : Classification for weather tightness 13. BS CP 3 : Code of Basic Data for the Design of buildings


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.03 SIGN RESPONSIBILITIES

Not withstanding any acceptance of the design or details by the Engineer, assume responsibility for the design of the curtain walling system including:

A. All elements of the construction required to satisfy the other requirements of this specification.

B. Any necessary sub assemblies and fixings required to safely transmit all dead and imposed loads to the building structure.

C. Any weathering system required where the curtain walling abuts any other facing

element of the building or at the head or sill of the walling. D. All opening elements, doors, windows louvers, grilles or other apertures which are

wholly contained within the curtain walling system. 1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. System Design : Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads.

B. Design Wind Loads:

1. Design for wind load in accordance with BS 6399: Part 2 using the directional

method

2. Allow for all relevant negative and positive pressures

3. Take account of the influence of any neighboring buildings 1.05 OLERANCE ON BUILDING S STRUCTURE

Design curtain walling and fixing etc. to allow for the following tolerances and deviations on any other element of the building:

A. Any permissible tolerances and deviations stated elsewhere in this specification

B. The tolerances stated in Table 2 of BS 5606 in any other case 1.06 SYSTEM ASSEMBLY

Design, fabricate and install to accommodate the following, without damage to system or components, or deterioration of seals:

A. Movement between system and perimeter framing components.

B. Dynamic loading and release of loads.

C. Tolerance of supporting components

D. Shortening of structural concrete columns.

E. Creep of structural concrete members.


______________________________________________________________________________________


F. Inter-storey drift.

G. A mid-span slab deflection of 3mm. 1.07 EXPANSION/CONTRACTION;

Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components.

1.08 SYSTEM INTERNAL DRAINAGE:

Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system to exterior by a weep drainage network.

1.09 AIR AND VAPOUR SEAL:

Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.

1.10 NDOW WASHING ACCESSORIES:

Reinforce system to accommodate window washing eye bolts. Provide anchors sufficiently rigid to resist loads caused by equipment platform, without damage to wall system.

1.11 SAFETY TEST:

Test with impactor comprising a spherical canvas bag 400mm in diameter, filled with dry sand, or 3mm diameter glass spheres to give an approximate mass of 50 Kg. Carry out the test with the specimen panel, mounted vertically and the impactor attached to a 3m long pendulum, so arranged to deliver the force required.

1.12 FETY OF PERSONS:

When tested on both internal and external faces, the curtain walling must resist a soft body impact equivalent to 500Nm without.

A. Permanent damage or deformation to the framework of its fixings, nor deterioration of its performance as described elsewhere in this specification

B. The piercing of any infill panels, nor the dislodging infill panels, gaskets capping or any other part of the system which may fall and cause injury to people of outside the building

1.13 FIXINGS

Incorporate fixings, bolts, screws, brackets etc that;

A. Are adequate to transmit all dead and imposed loads transmitted by them

B. Are corrosion resistant for the life of the curtain walling system C. Will not be corroded nor promote corrosion when used in conjunction with the other

component parts of the system unless adequate measures to isolate them from such components are also undertaken


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data; Describe components within assembly, component dimensions,

anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and water-flow diagrams.

B. Design Data; To be provided for framing member’s structural and physical characteristics, calculations, dimensional limitations. Structural support framing structure must be designed under direct supervision of a professional structural Engineer in this work, and registered with Kuwait Society of Engineers.

C. Shop Drawings; Showing system dimensions, framed opening requirements and

tolerances, anticipated deflection under load, affected related work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint locations and details, and site welding required.

D. Samples; Two ,900 x 900mm, showing per-finished aluminum surface, specified

glass units, insulated infill panels, glazing materials showing edge and corner. E. Test Reports; substantiating engineering data, results of tests by independent

laboratory which claim to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data F. Installation Data; special installation requirements. 1.15 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer; specialist in this work with minimum five years documented experience

approved the manufacturer.

Complete Mock-Up; to be constructed for a single unit, including intermediate mullion, vision glass light and infill panel. Assemble to illustrate component assembly including glazing materials, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors and perimeter sealant. Accepted mock up can remain as part of the scope of work.

1.16 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery

1. Prepare and package units to ensure no undue stresses are caused in

transportation 2. Protect exposed surfaces with a suitable strippable plastic coating before

dispatch from the factory. The adhesion, resistance to atmospheric conditions and the elasticity of the coating shall be suitable for the purpose.

3. Protect corners and edges of units. 4. Secure units with proper spacers to ensure that metal surfaces do not come

into contact with one another. 5. Clearly mark units to indicate their location in the building, marking must not

appear on finished surfaces.


______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Storage:

1. Store Units Ina Protected Area Away From Construction Activities And

Weather.

2. Store units with spacers in place until immediately prior to fixing.

C. Handling 1. Do not remove packaging and protective coating until instructed by the

Engineer or his representative.

2. Protect edges and corners until units are fixed in position. 1.17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Sealant: Should not be installed when ambient temperature is outside the range

deemed acceptable by the manufacturer.

B. Maintain Acceptable Ambient Temperature: during and after installation of sealant.

1.18 WARRANTY

Written warranty signed by manufacturer or sub contractor to be submitted that the works involving glazed Aluminium curtain wall are of good quality free form defects and in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents and further promising to repair or replace defective work during a 5 year period following completion of that portion of the work.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART –2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

Approved manufactures or products are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. This list is binding and the contractor is to strictly adhere to one of the listed manufacturer or products and can no way wave this section, unless instructed otherwise.

A. Al Abbar Aluminium P.O. Box – 1626, Dubai, U.A.E Tel : 971 – 4 – 3331362 Fax: 971 – 4 – 3331283 Local, alloy designation Contact : Nables Glass & General Trading Tel : 2433434 , 2447442

B. ALICO / SCHUKO Profiles

P.O. Box 6011, Sharjah, U.A.E Tel ; 06 – 339178

C. AL UMACO

TEL: 2449541/2

2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminium: Extrude sections to BS 1474, anodized finish to BS 3987, and powder

coating to BS 6496. Provide alloy, temper and thickness recommended by the manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated for each Aluminium form required.

B. Mullion Profile: to be as proposed by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. Matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide bite on glass and infill panels, drainage holes, deflectors plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal weep drainage system , internal mullion baffles to eliminate stack effect air movement with in internal spaces.

C. Flashing: as required to be Aluminium finish to match curtain wall mullion selections

where exposed, secured with concealed fastening method. D. Glass : Provide glass of types and thickness as indicated in drawings. Fabricate

glass to sizes required for openings indicated with edge clearances and tolerances complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. Refer to Division 08800 section “ Glazing” for requirements.

E. Glazing Gaskets : Manufacturer’s standard sealed corner resilient elastomeric

glazing gaskets setting blocks and shims or spacers as required hardness as selected by manufacturer.

F. Glazing sealant and fillers : Comply with requirements in Division 08800 Section “

Glazing”


______________________________________________________________________________________


G. Concealed Flashing : Dead soft 26-gauge stainless steel concealed flashing of type selected for compatibility by the manufacturer.

H. Fire stopping Materials : Foam intumescent strip seal or other non-combustible

material that comply with governing regulations. I. Brackets and reinforcement : Manufacturer’s standard high strength J. Fasteners And Accessories: provide manufacturer’s standard non corrosive

fasteners and accessories compatible with materials used in the framing system and with exposed portions that match finish of the curtain wall system. Where movement is expected, provide split-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of fluorocarbon resin or a similar materials recommended by the manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Members : As shown in drawings. Wall thickness of extrusions shall be as

required to meet the design requirements frames which are to receive insulating glass units shall have a continuous thermal break.

B. Fabricate System Components : with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal

C. Fit and secure joints and corners: Accurately make joint flush, hairline and

weatherproof D. Prepare components : to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors E. Fasteners and Attachments : to ensure concealment F. Reinforce Interior Horizontal Head Rail : to receive louver blind track brackets and

attachments G. Reinforce Framing Members : for external imposed loads H. Pressure Equalizing and weep holes: To be provided per glazing unit located with

two holes occurring outside setting blocks at each end and one at center of unit. 2.04 FABRICATION AIR/VAPOUR BARRIERS A. Continuous and Homogenous air/Vapour Barrier: To be provided for this work for

installation on the interior side of the thermal insulation, and provide for connection of air/vapour seal at junction with adjacent air/vapour barrier work provided under other sections

B. Barrier Design: To accommodate movement resulting from thermal change and from structural deflection, and to accommodate positive and negative wind pressures.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.05 FINISHES A. Steel To Be Primed ; with oil alkyd primer

B. Concealed Surfaces : of Aluminium and galvanized steel shall be given a heavy

protective coating of Zinc chromate primer C. Coating to Aluminium : Will be powder coated finish conforming to BS 1615 PART –3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION’ A. Dimensions, Tolerances And Method Of Attachment : to be verified with other work

B. Openings And Adjoining Air Barrier And Vapour Retarder Materials: to be verified

whether ready to receive work C. Manufacturer’s Instructions : assemble and erect curtain-walling components strictly

in accordance with the manufacturer’s site work instructions. D. Deviations From Approved Drawings ; inform the Engineer any proposal to deviate

from the approved drawings and submit revision until the Engineer’s approval is received.

E. Abutment Against Concrete Or Masonry :

1. Isolate all Aluminium components against contact with concrete or masonry surfaces by coating either surface with three coats of bitumen paint

2. Apply sealant s in accordance with work section 07900

3. Ensure a permanent weather tight joint

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Alignment attachments and shims ; to be provided to permanently fasten system to

building structure.

B. Assembly to be Aligned, Plumbs And Level: free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work.

C. Thermal Insulation : to be provided where components penetrate or disrupt building

insulation. D. Flashings : To be installed E. Fire Stop : at each floor slab edge to be installed F. Attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapour retarder material : to be

coordinated.


______________________________________________________________________________________


G. Pack Fibrous Insulation in Shim Spaces; At perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

H. Install Glass: in accordance with section 08800, to glazing method to achieve

performance criteria. I. Gasket Glazing: Ensure gaskets are installed under slight compression. Do not

Stretch the gaskets when fixing glass. J. Perimeter Sealant: To be installed to method required to achieve performance

criteria. K. Prevention of Bi-Metallic Corrosion: Prevent any contact between different materials,

which may cause or promote the corrosion of either. Take effective measures to insulate any such materials, which may come into close proximity with each other.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative, or 12mm/30m, whichever is less

B. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting In Plane: 1 mm C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction : Maximum

20 mm, minimum 5 mm 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning Down or Completion: Remove all protective tapes or coatings and

identification numbers on completion of the exterior of the Works. Clean down the curtain walling, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. Excess Sealant: To be removed by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.05 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect the curtain walling system from damage until completion. Do not

allow Aluminium components to come into contacts with cement or gypsum based products or harmful chemicals.

B. Maintenance Manual: Provide a maintenance manual for the curtain walling.

END OF SECTION

نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة ) لفروانيةمحافظة (ا

______________________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering CenterI III-2/08920-1 4 Sided Struc.Glaz.Alum. C.Wall

SECTION 08920

4 SIDED STRUCTURALLY GLAZED

ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes 1.1.1 General Requirements. 1.1.2 The system for this project is 4 sided Structural Glazing from

Specified manufacturers & System designer and as supplied by their local certified partner, fabricator & installer. A letter of confirmation to submitted.

1.1.3 Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements. 1.1.4 Engineering, fabrication, supply and installation of aluminium

curtain wall, and all related ancillaries as specified herein and required.

1.2 Proposal Submission

1.2.1 Contractor shall append to his bid, a copy of all bids he received

from Subcontractors bidding the work of this section. 1.2.2 Contractor shall indicate in his bid, which of the subcontractors

bidding the work of this section, is included in the Contractor's bid price.

1.2.3 Proposals from the Subcontractors bidding the work of this section

shall be accompanied with three sets of drawings and data details which show how manufacturer intends to comply with requirements of this specification section for the exterior elements as follows:

1.2.3.1 Show typical head, sill jamb and corner details and typical

intermediate mullions. 1.2.3.2 Junctions with and anchorage to the building structure. 1.2.3.3 Air barriers and vapour barriers. 1.2.3.4 Dielectric separator details. 1.2.3.5 Thermal separator details. 1.2.3.6 Mechanical retention of the glazing.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.2.3.7 Provisions for thermally induced expansion and contraction of

members. 1.2.3.8 Provisions for absorption of the building structure

movements. 1.2.3.9 Water/Moisture drainage system. 1.2.3.10 Detail at parapet condition. 1.2.3.11 Detail at the cill condition 1.2.3.12 Pressure equalization system and air ventilation to the glass

rebate. 1.2.3.13 Methods of installation. 1.2.4 This proposal submission is required to assist with the

evaluation of proposals for the work of this section and subsequent award. By submitting a proposal, the bidders for the work of this section agree that the Owner has the right without penalty of any kind, to award this work to any bidders determined in consultation with the Consultant and not necessarily to the bidder with the lowest price.

1.2.5 By submitting a proposal, the bidders for the work of this

section agree that the data, submitted with the bid, and subsequent discussions do not negate the requirements of the Specifications.

1.3 This section of the Specifications is the performance type. The

design and performance specified are minimum requirements. Methods which may be suggested by these specifications for achieving the design and performance requirements are not intended to limit methods of achieving the required design and performance criteria. This shall not be construed to mean work of less quality and performance than specified, may be supplied.

1.4.1.1 Profiles used for this sub-contract shall be from the Schüco

FW50+ system and will maintain perimeter sizes and arrangements of components and assemblies indicated to obtain the required appearance to the Consultant's approval.

1.4.1 Glass units, of each type, shall be consistent in colour and

appearance. 1.4.2 Installed glass components shall be free of oil canning and

pillowing.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.4.3 Exposed metal components shall be of uniform colour, sheen and appearance, within elements and from element to element and shall match approved samples and mock-ups.

1.4.5 Exposed metal sheets, plates and extrusions shall be visually

flat under all lighting conditions, with the exception of the components shown radiused and so specified.

1.4.6 Grain and rolling direction of unpainted metal sheets and plates

when installed on the building shall run in the same direction. 1.4.7 Grain and rolling direction of unpainted braked formed trims,

sills and reveals and the extruded direction of unpainted metal reveals, trims, sills, when installed on the building shall run in same direction.

1.4.8 Engineer and install glass units so each glass unit can be

removed without removing adjacent glass units and metal panels. Glazing units, and metal panels where required, shall be designed to incorporate a concealed mechanical retention mechanism to all four edges of the infill panels.

1.4.9 Engineer and install metal panels so each panel can be

removed without removing adjacent metal panels and glass units.

1.4.10 Conceal securrement devices. Where possible only concealed

securrement devices should be used. Should it be demonstrated satisfactorily to Consultant's approval that some exposed securrement devices are necessary, they shall be of same finish and colour as the members in which they occur.

1.4.11 Provide a continuous fire and smoke seal at junctions between

edges of suspended concrete slabs and building envelope to prevent passage of fire and smoke from floor to floor and from floor to roof.

1.4.12 Ensure components and assemblies drain to building exterior.

1.4.13 Where double doors are incorporated within the façade a

trimmer transom shall be incorporated to ensure continuation of the system’s ventilation and drainage.

1.4.14 The mullion at the head of double doors shall incorporate a

drainage rebate seal to ensure that no capillary action of water or moisture is possible.

1.4.15 Ensure that no thermal bridging occurs at the underside of the

lowest transom and that ‘Vapour barriers’/ DPM’s, are installed continuously to the underside of the lowest transom and through the mullion.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.4.16 Insulation is to be installed, to the inner side of all Vapour

membrane installations. 1.4.17 Ensure components are designed, fabricated and installed to

prevent build-up of sand within the cladding cavities and glazing pockets that could cause blockages to air pressure equalization and to the drainage of water and moisture.

1.4.18 The supplied and installed curtain walling system shall resist

loadings imposed on it in accordance with the requirements of BS8200

1.4.19 The curtain walling system shall incorporate a triple level

controlled drainage management system. 1.4.20 Expansion joints occurring within the vertical aluminium profile

shall be sealed, with a system dedicated sealing piece, to prevent any leakage of water or moisture beyond the drainage table of the profile and into the room-side of the installation.

1.4.21 All sealing pieces within the system shall be sealed with

“Thiokol” 1.4.22 The transom to mullion interface shall be overlapped, transom

to mullion, and compression sealed, with an EPDM seal, between the mullion and the transom.

1.4.23 All the gasket joints shall be vulcanized or sealed by a

permanently elastic non-setting sealant compatible to the EPDM gasket material and in accordance with the system supplier’s recommendations.

1.4.24 No penetration of the transom or mullion water drainage table will be permitted. 1.4.25 Provide Thermal Isolators selected from the system’s available

range and suitable for the glazing thickness under consideration. The Isolators shall be in accordance with the System designer’s range of elements.

1.4.26 Glazing shall be supported on self-locating aluminium supports

without interruption of the thermal isolators, all as supplied from the system designer’s range of components and conforming to the requirements of DIN 4108.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.4.29 Opening Shutters

1.4.29.1 The opening shutters shall in all respects of operation and performance be in accordance with the system designer’s recommendations. These shutters are to be “side hung Outward Opening.

1.4.29.2 The size and weight of the opening shutters shall comply with the

system designer’s recommendations. Any Variations to the shutter size shall be as approved by the system designers. All approvals for such increased shutters shall be in writing.

1.5 Performance Requirements

1.5.1 Application

The performance requirements of this sub-contract shall apply to all connections, seals and joints between the installed glazing system and adjacent work provided under other trades and covered by separate sections within the overall specification.

1.5.2 Pressure Equalization (Exterior Walls):

1.5.1 Provide pressure equalization to glazing pockets, of exterior

components of frames, to spandrel panels, to column covers and to infill panels.

1.5.2.1 Horizontally orientated at window (vision areas) sills and heads. 1.5.2.2 Provide baffles to prevent excessive rain entry into the

components, which could lead, to water ponding and the prevention of pressure equalization.

1.5.2.3 Provide baffles to prevent excessive sand entry into the

components, which could lead to build-up/blockages and which would prevent pressure equalization.

1.5.3 Mechanical Design (Exterior Walls)

Engineer the cladding to maintain the mechanical design performance of interior ambient temperature when building exterior ambient temperatures cycle between a low of 10 deg. C to a high of 70 deg. C.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.5.4 Thermal Criteria (Exterior Walls)

1.5.4.1 The system design is to accommodate within its components,

between the system installation and the building structure, expansion and contractions due to cyclic temperature changes described under mechanical design conditions, to prevent damage and distortions.

1.5.4.2 Thermal conductance of the system:

1.5.4.3 The system shall be categorized as 2.1 in accordance with DIN

4108 unless other wise specified. 1.5.4.3 Provide Polythermide extruded thermal breaks between interior

and exterior components, to prevent thermal bridging and to maintain the thermal resistance class as determined in DIN 4108. The thermal isolator shall also assist with the sound attenuation across the profile as to provide a sound insulation class as stipulated within DIN 4109.

1.5.4.4 The system shall be designed to ensure that no thermal bridging

occurs throughout the system.

1.5.5 Water and Moisture (Exterior Walls) 1.5.5.1 Engineer work to dissipate any water and condensate moisture,

which may enter or form within the cladding components, to the building exterior.

1.5.5.2 Engineer the design of the system to prevent entry of water and

moisture to the building interior side of the work.

1.5.6 Air Infiltration and Exfiltration (Exterior Walls) 1.5.6.1 Air movement through the work, building interior to building

exterior and building exterior to building interior shall not exceed: 1.5.6.1.1 For fixed elements: 1.08 cu.m./hr/sq.m. under static pressure

difference of 75 pa. 1.5.6.1.2 For openable elements when closed: 0.55 (m3/h) per meter of

joint length under static pressure difference of 75pa. 1.5.6.2 Allow for mechanically induced air pressure at the building

interior. 1.5.6.3 No detectable drafts will be permitted.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.5.7 Glazing

1.5.7.1 Engineer work, metal, glass, and glazing to ensure no more

than 8 glass units per 1000 break during the building's life. 1.5.7.2 Glazing, gaskets, sealants on building exterior side of glass in

exterior walls shall be non-conductive. Gaskets used in exterior walls shall be either vulcanized, incorporate moulded corners or sealed at corners and shall be of high performance EPDM quality.

1.5.7.3 Where the gasket is installed: a) with gaskets sealed at the

corners or, b) fabricated with moulded corners, the straight cut gasket shall have a 0.5% allowance in its length to ensure that joints remain in compression.

1.5.7.4.1 Distortion, oil canning and pillowing of glass. 1.5.7.4.2 Pressure points on the glass, which could contribute to stress

breakage, shall be avoided. 1.5.7.5 Metal in direct contact with glass is not permitted. 1.5.7.6 The system shall be designed to ensure that Insulating glass

units are prevented from edge seals remaining in contact with water and they shall be set within the system to ensure that adequate ventilation is maintained.

1.5.7.7 Double glazed units shall be constructed to incorporate the

special 15mm edge spacer incorporating mechanical retention. 1.5.7.8 The mechanical retention edge spacer shall be sealant filled at

the head of the unit, after installation, to prevent water pockets.

1.5.8 Acoustics

The profile sections are to be designed to prevent the resonance from exterior sound sources to the inner profile.

1.5.8.1 Provide completed installation free of rattles, wind whistles and

other noise due to thermal and structural movements and due to differential atmospheric pressures.

1.5.8.2 Metal faced non insulated type panels incorporated within the

system shall incorporate an ‘anti-drumming material to the inner face.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.5.9 UV and Heat Resistance

All materials provided and which are exposed to atmospheric heat and are exposed to sunlight, including materials exposed through glass, shall be formulated not to lose properties due to exposure to heat and due to exposure to ultra-violet radiation.

1.5.10 Structural

1.5.10.1 Base design pressures, positive and negative, as created by

wind on a minimum velocity of 45 m/sec (162km/hr). Allow for impact, suction, up-lift and gusting of wind and take into account the building height and the proximity of adjacent buildings, which could cause an increase to the forces due to vortexing and the venturi affect. All in accordance with the recommendations given in BSCP3 Chapter V Pt. 2.

1.5.10.2 Design wind pressure, acting normal to the plane of the external

wall both positive and negative shall be (_____ KN/M2 - THIS FIGURE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONSULTANT).

1.5.10.3 All components must sustain the forces acting upon them and be

capable of transmitting them to the load bearing part of the building structure in accordance with DIN 18056.

1.5.10.4 Engineer work to withstand, within acceptable deflection limits, its

own weight, forces applied by building structure movements, forces applied by adjacent components, and design loads due to wind, stack effect and rain.

Engineer work to accommodate:

a) Movements within components.

b) Movements imposed, due to attachment to adjacent constructions.

c) Movement applied due to the building structure, long and short

term creep, column shortening, deflections, torsion, sway and racking (OBTAIN MAGNITUDE OF MOVEMENTS FROM THE CONSULTANT).

d) Movements due to vibrations.

e) Provisions shall ensure that no damage, distortions or

misalignments will occur in the work and that the thermal integrity, air infiltration / exfiltration, weather and water tightness barriers are maintained together with aesthetic considerations


______________________________________________________________________________________


f) Engineer work not to exceed the following deflections under full design loads:

g) Framing members of curtain wall, the lesser of 16mm or L/240

per span between anchorages to building structure Ensure deflection limits of glass are not exceeded.

h) Metal air barriers, maximum 3mm positive and maximum 3mm

negative and avoidance of contact with adjacent members and constructions due to movements.

i) Engineer the elastic deflections to prevent reduction of glass

bite, under full load, from exceeding 2.5 mm. j) Engineer deflection limits to ensure integrity of the seals and

glazing are maintained under full load, dynamically applied. k) Permanent deformation of members due to applied loads will

not be permitted. l) Engineer components in contact with fire-stopping to ensure

compression on fire-stopping is not less than 25%, under all load conditions.

m) Engineer work to keep stresses on components, assemblies

and materials within working range of components, assemblies and materials.

1.5.11 Expansion joints in the vertical aluminium profiles shall be

provided, as a minimum, at every second floor and shall be sealed in accordance with the system designers recommendations. The special sealing piece and sealant will allow movement and keep the air and water tightness below the specified limits. Refer to Clause 1.4.19

1.5.12 The interface between the transoms and mullions shall be sealed

with EPDM sealing strips. 1.5.13 Transoms and mullions shall be assembled using integral cleat

connections, structurally evaluated for the given location. Visible screws or connectors will not normally be acceptable except in cases where the structural performance demands bolted connections.

1.5.14 Transom fixing screws, located within the gasket channel and

secured into the mullion gasket channel, are to be fully tightened with the interface sealed with an EPDM sealing gasket. There must be no penetration of the transom fixing screw through the mullion drainage table.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.5.15 Where adapter profiles are required for the installation of elements of varying thicknesses, the adapter shall be sealed into the mullion/transom and screw retained.

1.6 Tolerances 1.6.1 Tolerances shall be in accordance with recognized standards. 1.6.1.1 Vertical position: plus/minus 2 mm; 1.6.1.2 Horizontal position: plus/minus 2 mm; 1.6.1.3 Racking in elevation: nil 1.6.1.4 Deviation from true plumb over full height: maximum 6 mm. 1.6.1.5 Deviation from true straight line of plane, over full length of each building face; maximum 6 mm. 1.6.2 Tolerances are not accumulative. 1.7 Quality Assurance 1.7.1 Engineering 1.7.1.1 All design work shall be engineered and certified by a licensed

Professional Engineer. 1.7.1.2 Submittals, proposals details, samples, and shop drawings,

certifications and proposed substitutions shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer.

1.7.1.3 Have fabrication and installation of work inspected and certified

approved by the Quality assurance engineer.

1.7.2 Fabricator's Qualifications 1.7.2.1 The fabricator shall be: regularly engaged in engineering,

manufacturing, fabricating, finishing, installing, glazing and sealing of the type of work specified in this section for minimum of ten years.

1.7.2.2 Able to demonstrate satisfactorily completed works of minimum

size as this project.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.7.2.3 The Fabricator installation company shall be ISO 9001

registered 1.7.2.4 Able to demonstrate a thorough understanding of the principles

of rain screen, stack effect, air seals, dynamic forces, behaviour of cast-in-place concrete structures, water and weather controls as affecting building cladding systems.

1.7.2.5 Recommended Manufacturing systems are as follows:

SUPPLIERS :

1. Al-Khalid Aluminium P.O. Box 3777 Safat 13038 State of Kuwait Tel: (+965) 888 111 Fax: (+965)484-5726 [email protected]

2. Al-Ahlia Aluminium

P.O BOX 42392 SHEWAIKK 70654 KUWAIT TEL: (+965)4747741 (+965)808050 [email protected]

3. Kuwait Aluminium [email protected]

A latest letter of Certification from the System designer/manufacturer to be submitted confirming the fabricators technical ability for design, supply and installation the works in the project.

Substitution : Approved equal fabricator, but with one of the specified manufacturer

mailto:[email protected]




______________________________________________________________________________________


1.7.3 Prototype for Laboratory testing

1.7.3.1 Provide a prototype of the curtain wall for inspection and, if required,

testing. Modify prototype as necessary to pass inspection and testing. (As per consultant requirements).

1.7.3.2 Prototype shall be 2 floors high and 5 m wide and shall include

framing, glass, spandrels, metal air/vapour barrier, insulation, seals, gaskets, flashings, anchorages on to structure, baffles, moving joints and all accessories as necessary to provide a complete curtain wall system.

1.7.3.3 Install prototype components in same sequence and utilizing same

methods and personnel as will be used for the project installation. 1.7.3.4 Where testing is required the sample Prototype shall be installed, to

achieve an airtight assembly, to the test chamber. 1.7.3.5 Should the prototype fail to meet specification performance

requirements, make corrections and modifications for further testing at no cost to the Owner. The curtain wall Sub-contractor shall be responsible for further costs associated with the retesting.

1.7.3.6 Test to be carried out The consultant is to stipulate which test

standards are to be utilized for the testing) 1.7.3.6.1 Air infiltration test according to ASTM E 283 & AAMA. 1.7.3.6.2 Water Penetration test according to ASTM E331 & AAMA. 1.7.3.6.3 Structural performance test according to ASTM E330 & AAMA.

1.7.3.6.4 Water test according to ASTM E331 & AAMA. 1.7.3.6.5 Structural performance test at 1.5 times the design load. 1.7.3.7 There should be no failure or permanent deformation when applying a

load of 1.5 times the design load.

1.8 Submittals

1.8.1 Product Data 1.8.1.1 Submit manufacturer’s specifications, fabrication requirements, and

installation instructions, with amendments to obtain requirements of this section of the specifications.

1.8.1.2 Include erection method statements and glazing details together with

maintenance and cleaning instructions.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.8.1.3 Furnish data clearly describing reglazing techniques. 1.8.1.4 Furnish maintenance and cleaning instructions.

1.8.2 Calculations

1.8.2.1 Submit calculations, under seal and signature of the

Professional Engineer, Showing following: 1.8.2.1.1 Design load assumptions. 1.8.2.1.2 Detailed engineering of mullions. 1.8.2.1.3 Moment of inertia of mullions. 1.8.2.1.4 Detailed engineering of anchorage hardware, clip angles, washers,

anchor bolts, welds, torque pressures. 1.8.2.1.5 Materials proposed and their allowable sheer and bending stresses. 1.8.2.1.6 Deflections and expansion and contractions. 1.8.2.2 Prepare calculations in a clear, comprehensive manner to permit

easy review. Incomplete or haphazard calculations will be rejected unreviewed.

1.8.3 Shop Drawings

1.8.3.1 Submit shop drawings as specified. 1.8.3.2 Each shop drawing shall bear seal and signature of the Professional

Engineer. 1.8.3.3 Show: 1.8.3.3.1 Elevations. 1.8.3.3.2 Details of dimensions, components, profiles, joint location and sizes,

arrangement of units. Horizontal to vertical connections, thicknesses. Details of special shapes, reinforcement, drainage details, and flow diagrams,. Pressure equalization system and air barrier system, baffles, flashings, insulation, and anchorage system interfacing with building structure. Connections and joints and seals to adjacent building envelope systems, provisions for thermally induced expansion and contraction, provisions for absorption of building structure movements and creep, thermal break details and locations.

1.8.3.3.3 Locations of exposed fasteners and joints.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.8.3.3.4 Glazing details, methods, if carried out in field or in shop, locations of various types and thicknesses of glass.

1.8.3.3.5 Panels, related reinforcements and securement methods. 1.8.4 Samples

1.8.4.1 Submit samples as specified. 1.8.4.2 Submit three samples of each material with respective finishes as

follows: 1.8.4.2.1 Extrusions: 300 mm long. 1.8.4.2.2 Sheets: 300 mm x 300 mm. 1.8.4.2.3 Gaskets and tapes: 900 mm long section of each type. 1.8.4.2.4 Sealants: 150mm bead strips applied to metal sheet, showing

colours. 1.8.4.2.5 Fasteners: Three of each type. 1.8.4.2.6 Glass: 300 mm x 300 mm of each type. 1.8.4.3 Samples shall represent physical and chemical properties, and

colours to be supplied.

1.8.5 Glass Stress Analysis Reports

Submit glass stress analysis performed by glass manufacturer/supplier of all glass. Identify locations of each glass unit on building, its stress factors and statement whether glass unit is to be annealed, heat strengthened or tempered. The bid price shall include for providing glass consistent with minimum requirements as determined by the glass stress analysis.

1.8.6 Certifications

1.8.6.1 Submit statements certified by the Professional Engineer stating:

1.8.6.1.1 Work of this section is engineered, supplied and installed as

specified herein. 1.8.6.2 Submit statements certified by the sealant manufacturers

attesting that:


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.8.6.2.1 Sealants selected are suitable for purposes intended. 1.8.6.2.2 Sealants will not deteriorate due to exposure to ultra-violet radiation

(sunlight). 1.8.6.2.3 Joint designs are correct. 1.8.6.2.4 Sealants are compatible with other materials with which they come in

contact. 1.8.6.2.5 Sealants are suitable for temperature and humidity conditions at time

of application. 1.8.6.2.6 Surfaces are properly prepared and primed, if required, to accept

sealants.

1.8.7 Project Close-out Data

Submit Data Books, Operating Instructions Manual and Preventive Maintenance Manual for work of this section and as specified.

1.9.0 Protection

1.9.1 Protect work from damage. 1.9.2 Do not apply transom or Mullion cover caps and spandrels until the

building is closed in, until the roofing is installed & until no possibility of alkaline substances can be washed from the building and building structure onto the work.

1.9.3 Should work be prefabricated into assembled units complete with glazing,

spandrel panels, insulated metal air barrier, in the factory and installed on the building as complete units, precautions shall be taken to protect units and glass from damage due to alkaline bearing water.

1.9.4 Clean glass as necessary to prevent etching due to alkaline bearing

water. 1.10 Warranties 1.10.1 Submit written warranty in form acceptable to Owner, jointly signed by

Contractor and by Subcontractor for the work, warranting against defective materials, products, workmanship, water-tightness, design, performance and glass breakage, due to defective engineering fabrication and installation and for five year period following date of Substantial Performance of the Work.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.10.2 Five year warranty shall include but not necessarily be limited to: 1.10.2.1 Complete watertight and airtight work within specified tolerances. 1.10.2.2 Structural soundness and freedom from distortion, and within elastic

deflection limits specified. 1.10.2.3 Glass or snap-on mullion covers will not break or "pop" from frames

due to design wind loads, expansion or contraction movements, or structural loading.

1.10.2.4 Metal finish will not crack, peel, pit, corrode, or dis-colour. 1.10.2.5 Sealants and gaskets shall remain free from deterioration, oxidation or

dislocation due to sunlight and weather conditions. 1.10.2.6 Completed installation shall remain free from rattles, wind whistles, and

noise due to thermal and structural movements and wind pressure. 1.10.3 Warrant seals on insulated glass units for ten years. Units shall be

free from condensation, fogging, and obstruction of vision due to film on internal surfaces.

1.10.4 Warrant the painted coatings will be free from peeling, cracking, pitting,

corroding, or non-uniformity of colour, or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's descriptive standards.

1.10.5 Warrant for five years, the metallic oxide coating on light and heat

reflecting glass. Coating shall be free of oxidation, delamination, colour change, streaks, disintegration and:

1.10.5.1 Scratches, except those maximum 75 mm in length and visible at a

distance of maximum 3000 mm. 1.10.5.2 Pinholes except those up to 1.2 mm in size. Large clusters of pinholes,

as assessed by the Consultant are not permitted.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 Materials : Inorganic, resistant to rodents, vermin, mildew, fungus and

algae, as necessary to obtain design and performance requirements and as follows:

2.1.2 Framing, Trim and Flashings: 2.1.2.1 Aluminium 2.1.2.1.1 Extrusions: 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper, or Al Mg,Si 0.5 F 22 anodizing

quality. 2.1.2.1.2 Sheet and Plates: 1100-H14 alloy, anodizing quality, and for spandrels,

controlled stretcher levelled optimum flats , stress relieved, to 1/2 commercial tolerances.

2.1.2.2 Steel: to BS 5950. 2.1.2.3 Screws, Bolts, washers, nuts and other fastening devices:200 or 300

series austenitic grade stainless steel. 2.1.2.4 Slip Washers : nylon. 2.1.2.5 Thermal Separator (thermal break): Use Polythermid insulator sizes to

conform to extruded aluminium members. 2.1.2.6 Dielectric Separator: Bituminous paint, tape or dielectric coating. 2.1.2.7 Bituminous paint: to BS 6949. 2.1.2.8 Insulation for packing in frames and between frames and

Adjacent construction: lightweight, inorganic mineral wool of 35/50 Kg/m cu. nominal density.

2.1.3 Fire-stopping

2.1.3.1 Mineral fibre fire and smoke insulation: Complete with galvanized steel. Fire-stopping shall be 25% wider than the space to be filled.

2.1.3.2 Fire-stopping sealant: one component silicone manufactured by Dow

Corning Ltd. or silicone as approved by the Institute fur Bautechik.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.1.4 Sealants

2.1.4.1 General: Sealants shall be Non-bleeding, non-drying and capable of supporting their own weight.

2.1.4.2 For concealed non-moving static joints and fixing device penetrations: One

component butyl rubber. 2.1.4.3 For moving working joints and exposed locations including edge spacer

seals to the double glazed units: One component silicone, U.V. resistant, non-discolouring, formulated not to attract airborne dirt and pollutants, manufactured by Dow Corning Ltd. or other approved supplier.

2.1.4.4 Sealants, cleaning solvents, fills and primers: Compatible with each other. 2.1.4.5 Colours for sealants: As designated by the consultant from the sealant

manufacturer's standard colour range. 2.1.4.6 Primers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer to suit conditions. 2.1.4.7 Cleaning material: Xylol, methyl-ethyl-ketone, Toluol or as recommended

by the sealant manufacturer. 2.1.4.8 Filler strips for back-up of sealants: Chemically compatible rod stock of

butyl or neoprene, or white non-absorbent closed cell foam polyethylene of a diameter sized 25% greater than the joint width before application.

2.1.4.9 Structural Sealant (Mullions)

2.1.4.9.1 All structural glazing, shall be done with an approved structural silicone sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM, C 920, black colour, approved products are Dow Corning Q3, 3332, Dow Corning 895 and Dow Corning 983. The glazing units in areas of vertical structural silicone joints shall be mechanically retained back to the structural mullion by a concealed clip arrangement. Vertical joints between the glazing elements shall be sealed with DC 917 (Black) onto a silicone support gasket. The silicone joint shall run the full height of the glazing and be continuous behind the horizontal (transom) gasket arrangement. All edge seals of double glazed units and face silicone seals shall be UV resistant.

2.1.4.9.2 In using specified sealants, strictly observe the printed instructions of

sealant manufacturer and ASTM C962 regarding joint size, limitations, backer rod, mixing, cleaning, surface preparation, priming and application. A primer shall be used only if required by sealant manufacturer to obtain specified adhesion and performance.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.1.4.9.3 Sealant shall not be applied when substrates are wet or when the

temperature is below 40 deg. F. Units shall not be moved until structural silicone seal has achieved full cure. The time parameters of when units may be moved is to be established and confirmed with silicone manufacturer in writing.

2.1.4.9.4 Contractor shall provide certification from sealant manufacturer that the

sealant manufacturer has reviewed the contractor’s shop drawings and sealant details and has tested all components, materials, finishes, etc. in contact with sealant, and finds same compatible and suitable for the purpose intended. Sealant manufacturer’s certification as to compatibility and adhesion shall be accompanied by actual test results on production substrates performed in accordance with applicable ASTM procedures and shall include the following based upon tests performed on the project production run materials:

a) Adhesion of each structural sealant to production samples of each

metal finish and glass type, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 794, establishing adhesion over the temperature range as described under the performance criteria section of this specification.

b) Compatibility of production samples of each material and finish in

contact with the sealants, such as other sealants, gaskets, spacers, and setting blocks when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1087.

c) Stress statement for sealant profile (per shop details), that when

exposed to the specified windload, the design stress on the silicone sealant does not exceed the permissible stresses specified by the manufacturer.

2.1.4.9.4 Sub-contractor shall establish and submit for review a quality control

programme covering the cleaning, priming, silicone sealant application, gaskets, spacers, setting blocks and other materials and finishes. Programme shall, cover the initial testing for adhesion/ compatibility, and also regular periodic testing to be done during the production of the project on production run materials, etc. Specifically including shop “peel and adhesion” test of silicone, prior to its use. Reports of such tests shall be kept in file available for review by Building Department and/or the Architects.

Also include methods which will be employed to monitor workmanship such as substrate cleaning and priming and sealant application both for shop fabrication and necessary job site replacement glazing, repair and remedial work. No sealant or glazing work shall be performed prior to sealant manufacturer’s written acceptance of the Quality Control Programme.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.1.4.9.5 Sealant manufacturer shall be requested to make periodic inspections of glazing work, the initial one being at the start of glazing for job production units, to verify that sealant work is proceeding in accordance with its recommendations. Randomly selected units inspected to verify quality of sealant and workmanship. Sealant manufacturer shall submit inspection reports covering his observations and any recommendations.

2.1.5 Glazing

2.1.5.1 Float Glass: Annealed, clear to ASTM C-1036-91 2.1.5.2 Tempered glass : To ASTM C -1048-97 tong free. Tempered glass

shall bear a factory applied permanently stamped impression in one corner and visible when glass is installed, which identifies the glass as being tempered.

2.1.5.3 Heat Strengthened glass: As specified for tempered glass except it

shall be of strength mid-way between annealed glass and fully tempered glass. Heat strengthened glass shall bear a factory applied permanently applied in one corner and visible when glass is installed which identifies the glass as being heat-strengthened.

2.1.5.4 Insulating glass units : To CAN2 - 12.8 - M76 or BS 5713 or IGCC to

ASTM E-774 and ASTM E-773, dehydrated air space, pressure equalized to suit position on building to prevent bowing, glass edges straight cut, free of nicks and other imperfections conducive to breakage. The air spacers should be continuous at the corners.

2.1.5.5 Where the glazing units are to be installed with a Two edge mechanical

retention incorporate concealed mechanical retention clips to the other two edges.

2.1.5.6 Labels: Identify glass panes and insulating glass units with labels,

showing thickness, glass type and manufacturer’s name. Labels on insulating glass units shall also show orientation and location of outer light.

2.1.5.7 Vision through glass: distortion free. 2.1.5.8 Shims: Pressure sensitive, resilient, extruded synthetic rubber as

recommended by glass manufacturer. 2.1.5.9 Spacers and setting blocks: 50 to 70 Durometer ‘A’ hardness

plus/minus 5 respectively, PVCu, resistant to sunlight, weathering, oxidation, and permanent deformation under load.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.1.5.10 Glazing tapes : Extruded, ribbon shaped, non - drying, non-skinning,

non-oxidizing, UV blocked, reinforced with internal shim rod, of sufficient width and thickness to permit continuous void-free seal between metal and glass.

2.1.5.11 Glazing gaskets: Shall be made from high performance

quality EPDM. At corners use single piece vulcanized gaskets. Use special sealing adhesive to joint the gasket and to fill grooves below the corner vulcanized gasket.

2.1.5.12 Colours of glazing compounds, gaskets: As designated by the

consultant from the manufacturer’s standard colour range.

2.1.6 Aluminium Glazing Systems

Glazing system should be from approved specified system designers/manufacturers.

2.2 Fabrication - General

2.2.1 Insofar as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop with the various parts or assemblies ready for erection at the building site.

2.2.2 Take field measurements and levels required to verify or supplement

those shown on the Drawings for the proper layout and installation of the work.

2.2.3 Co-ordinate dimensional tolerances in adjacent building elements and

confirm prior to the commencement of the work. Commencement of installation floor by floor shall be construed as acceptance of building conditions. Work shall not deviate from tolerances specified.

2.2.4 Accurately machine, fit and securely frame together all joints, corners,

mitres. 2.2.5 Location of exposed joints to approval. 2.2.6 Make exposed work free of machine marks and dimpling. 2.2.7 Fabricate components to avoid force fitting to obtain alignment with

adjacent components.

2.2.8 Weld aluminium with inert metal arc equipment. Make exposed welds continuous and flush with adjacent surface. Do not mark surface finishes with welds in back of exposed aluminium. Do not deform the exposed metal and finish in any way by welding. Where any Structural Aluminium components are to be welded an allowance is to be made, in the structural calculations, for the reduction of strength in the components due to welding.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.2.9 Welded joints of steel members shall be of adequate strength and durability with joints tight and flush. Where it is necessary to weld components already galvanized, remove galvanizing for 50 mm around weld and paint as specified hereinafter over welds where galvanizing is removed as specified hereinafter.

2.2.10 Reinforce all frames by concealed means as necessary to meet the

specified design requirements. 2.2.11 Provide extruded structural Aluminium, Non Ferrous or galvanized steel

brackets and support framing to fasten frames in place in openings. Provide slotted connections as required to accommodate deflection of opening components.

2.2.12 Seal hairline joints at junctions of frame members. Gun inject sealant

from inside ensuring a continuous seal over the joint. Ensure that the bead in the glazing space does not impair sealing of glazing materials. Remove excess sealant, which is forced onto face of frame assembly.

2.2.13 Where frame members are lapped, the faces exposed to the weather

shall be in full, tight contact. Allow minimal clearance for snap-on components.

2.2.14 Where mullions are extended and connected to the underside of the

building structure above, provide slotted or sleeved connections to accommodate the deflection of the structure.

2.2.15 Fabricate corner pieces and filler pieces of thick plate aluminium to

the profiles shown, by welding prior to application of finish. 2.2.16 Provide concealed clips for fastening plate assemblies in place. 2.3 Fabrication – Fire-stops

2.3.1 Supply and install fire stopping material at all suspended slabs, between

edges of slabs and exterior cladding. Place fire stop material under permanent 25% compression. Use impaling clips or metal trims to hold insulation in place.

2.3.2 Install fire / smoke barrier sealant continuous to exposed surface of the

fire-stopping. Make upper surface flush with floor.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.4 Finishes

2.4.1 Steel at building interior and not exposed to exterior environmental conditions shall be primed with primer.

2.4.2 Steel at building exterior or in exterior assemblies shall be

galvanized. 2.4.3 Paint Welded, galvanized items where galvanizing has been removed

for welding. Make good corrosion protection using two coats of touch-up primer for galvanized steel. Make good corrosion protection on prime painted steel using same primer.

2.4.4 All exposed aluminium shall have “Synthatec Premium” super durable

powder coated system finish and applied by an applicator approved by the coating manufacturer and under the coating manufacturer's direction. Pre-treat the aluminium in accordance with the paint system manufacturers recommendations. The system hall comply with the AAMA 2604 – 98 part 7.4.1.1

Colours and sheen shall be uniform with no variations detectable by the naked eye at a 3000 mm distance. In accordance with the procedures stated in ASTM D523.

2.4.5 Exposed fastenings if occurring: Finished and coloured to match the

finish and colour of the material in which they appear. The finish provided shall be permanent and durable.

2.4.6 The cured continuous film coating shall be of a minimum 60 micron

thickness. 2.4.7 The finishing system shall be guaranteed for a period of 25 years

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1 Take field measurements from actual structure and verify prior to commencement of fabrication.

3.1.2 Remove dust and other loose material from openings. 3.2 Installation - General 3.2.1 Erect all work plumb and true and in proper alignment and relationship

to established lines and grades and to specified tolerances.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.2.2 All devices for anchoring the frame assemblies to the building

structure shall have sufficient adjustment to permit correct accurate alignment. After alignment, rivet, weld or positively lock anchorage devices to prevent movement other than those designed for expansion and contraction.

3.2.3 Site located fixings to the in-site structure shall be an approved

material. Perform drilling of concrete as required to install fixings. Bear cost of repair satisfactory to the Consultant of concrete chipped by drilling or fixing operations.

3.2.4 Supply and install aluminium parapets, copings flashings, cap

flashings and base. 3.2.5 Provide continuity of thermal and air barriers with adjacent thermal

and air/ vapour barrier systems. 3.2.5.1 Gun-apply a continuous 6 mm bead of sealant, not less than

6mm, to all joints and barrier junctions with adjacent construction Liberally butter screw fastenings with sealant.

3.2.5.2 Apply insulation to the building interior side (metal on warm side

) of the metal air barriers erected. Cut insulation slightly over-size as required to ensure tight butt joints.

3.2.6 Ensure air tight seal at air barrier penetrations for mechanical and

electrical services.

3.3 Installation - Sealant

3.3.1 Make surfaces to be sealed, sound, dry, free from dirt, water, frost, loose scale, corrosion, asphalt, paints or other contaminants which may adversely affect the performance of the sealing materials.

3.3.2 Perform cleaning to the extent required to achieve acceptable joint

surfaces. 3.3.3 Joints and spaces which are to receive sealing compound shall in no

case be less than 6 mm deep; nor shall they be less than 6mm wide nor more than 15 mm wide.

3.3.4 Fill joints to within 5 mm of the surface with backup material. 3.3.5 Mask areas adjacent to the joints as required. Prevent

contamination of adjacent surfaces. Remove masking promptly after the joint has been completed.

3.3.6 Perform priming immediately before installation of sealant.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.3.7 Before any sealing is commenced, test the materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion.

3.3.8 Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints. Sealants shall

bond to all sides of joint except where backup material is used, sealant shall bond to both sides of joint and shall not adhere to the backup materials.

3.3.9 Sealant installations shall be a full bead free from air pockets and

embedded impurities and having smooth surfaces, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, and imbedded impurities.

3.3.10 After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight

concave profile. 3.3.11 Cover all fasteners penetrating the air seal with sealant. 3.3.12 Seal all gasketting at sills. 3.3.13 Immediately clean adjacent surfaces, which have been soiled and

leave work in a neat, clean condition. Remove excess materials and droppings using recommended cleaners and solvents.

3.3.14 The fact that the Drawings do not shown all locations to be

sealed does not limited responsibility to seal all locations required to create and secure a continuous enclosure.

3.4 Adjustments

3.4.1 Upon completion of the project and prior to the handing over of the

building to the Owner or at a time as directed, inspect and make good installation.

3.4.2 Adjust all operating devices, windows and doors to proper and trouble

free operating condition. 3.4.3 Inspect all units for damage and correct same immediately.

3.5 Cleaning

3.5.1 When building is completed, clean metal and glass thoroughly.

END OF SECTION


_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09205- 1 LATH AND PLASTER

SECTION 09205

LATH AND PLASTER

PART – 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Portland cement plasterwork.


The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies as further cited herein: 1. American Society for Testing Materials :

ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland

Cement ASTM C 206 Finishing Hydrated Lime ASTM C 631 Bonding Compounds for Interior

Plastering ASTM C 897 Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland Cement Based

Plasters ASTM C 926 42.2 Portland Cement Plastering and Stucco.

2. British Standards Institute:

BS 12 Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement BS 822, 1201 Aggregates from Natural Sources for Part 2 Concrete (including Granolithic) BS 890 Building Limes BS 1198 Building Sands from Natural Sources BS 1199 BS 1200 BS 1369 Metal Lathing (Steel) for Plastering BS 1485 Galvanized Wire Netting BS 5492 Code of Practice for Internal Plastering

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Work shall be carried out by persons

skilled in plastering and rendering.

B. Tolerances and Permissible Deviations: Finish surfaces within following tolerances and deviations. 1. Finish Plaster: Straight, true, square with adjoining work, smooth or

keyed where required free from imperfections impairing appearance or performance, and where not textured, not deviating more than 3mm from a 180mm straight edge placed anywhere on surface. Make angles plumb and true.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


2. Ceilings: Make surface of ceilings and bulkheads horizontal, vertical or

sloping as applicable and level. Do not deviate more than 5 mm from a 3 m straight edge.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers’ Data: Submit to Engineer, manufacturers’ specifications and

installation instructions for each material required, including other data to show compliance with Contract Documents.

B. Sample Panel: 1. Furnish sample panels of each finish not less than 600 mm square,

on movable frames for preliminary review.

2. Sample panels shall be representative of materials, colour, textures and workmanship for the entire work. Acceptance will be for colour and texture only.

3. For final review of each finish complete one wall or ceiling area on job site

before proceeding with the work. C. Accessories: Samples of all miscellaneous accessories as specified herein.

1.05 CO-ORDINATION A. The work of this Section shall be co-coordinated with that of associated trades. In

no case shall work-requiring inspection be concealed by plaster until the Engineer has approved it.

B. Make all changes and adjustment of the materials of this Section necessary to accommodate the prescribed work of other Section, including cutting and patching.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unopened packages,

containers, or bundles, bearing manufacturers name and brand, and shall be stored under cover in a dry and well-ventilated enclosure.

B. Store plaster, cement and lime off ground, under watertight cover, away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces, until ready for use. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from site at first reasonable opportunity.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature and Ventilation: Generally comply with ASTM C-926 and BS 5492

as appropriate.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydration of plaster. Begin ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and continue until it sets.

1.08 PROTECTION A. Protect all fixtures, frames, inserts and other contiguous work from rusting,

soiling or clogging due to plastering.

PART – 2 : PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregates :

1. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coats: ASTM C-897, natural sand.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Finish : ASTM C-897 and one of the following as directed: a. Graded Silica sand passing a 30 mesh screen in colour required to

match Engineer’s sample. b. Gem Silica sand passing a 30 mesh screen in colour required to

match Engineer’s sample. B. Bonded Plaster:

Bonding Agent : Provide a bonding agent composed of a resinous emulsion about the consistency of paint, formulated for use in bonding plaster work to walls, columns etc. in accordance with ASTM C-631.

C. Portland Cement : For all uses ASTM C-150 Type I or Type II or BS-12.

D. Miscellaneous Accessories :

1. Corner Beads: Not less than 26 gauge (0.45 mm) galvanized steel, formed with a bead not exceeding 5 mm, with expanded flanges at least 63 mm wide.

2. Casing and Stop Beads: Not less than 24 gauge (0.60 mm) galvanized steel, formed with expanded wing unless otherwise shown.

3. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large mesh diamond lath fabricated from zinc alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from 1.2 mm diameter zinc coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corner of Portland cement plasters on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


4. Control Joints - Two piece Type: Pair of galvanized steel casing beads

with back flanges formed to provide slip joint action, adjustable for joint widths 3 mm to 15 mm.

5. Control Joints – One Piece Type: Folded pair of galvanized non-

perforated screed in ‘M’ shape configuration, with expanded flanges.

6. Strip Lath: Expanded copper bearing steel not less than 1.36 kg/sq.m.

E. Water : shall be potable and free from deleterious materials.

F. Metal Lath : Shall be galvanized (in accordance with BS 2989 Class IC) steel lathing (in accordance with BS 4058) weighing a minimum of 1.25 kg/m2 complete with a protective coating of black asphalt paint.

Lathing shall be mechanically fixed to masonry or concrete to the complete approval of the Engineer.

2.02 MIXES A. General :

1. Proportions: All mixes are by volume unless otherwise specified. All mix proportions are suggestive only; variations to meet local conditions and achieve the desired finish are permitted within the limits specified in ASTM C-926 or BS 5492/5262 as appropriate.

2. Lime Putty: Make from hydrated lime; machine – mix with water to putty

form; allow standing at least 15 minutes before using.

B. Portland Cement Plaster Mixes :

1. Base coat : ASTM C-926 or BS 5492 / 5262 as appropriate as follows: 1 part Portland Cement 3 to 5 parts natural sand 1/4 part lime putty

2. Brown Coat : ASTM C-926 or BS 5492 / 5262 as appropriate as follows :

1 part Portland Cement 3 to 5 parts silica sand 1/4 part lime putty

3. Finish Coat: Same as brown coat.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


PART – 3 : EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and

do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Acceptance of Background : Ensure the following background conditions are

satisfied before applying coatings: 1. Adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerance. 2. Adequately fixed. 3. Free from contamination and loose layers. 4. Adequately prepared to give a good bond. 5. Free of any coatings of bituminous compound or any

other detrimental waterproofing or damproofing agent. B. Preparation of Surfaces:

1. Comply with ASTM C-926 or BS 5262 Para 20 for all plaster.

2. Do not apply materials to damp or wet surfaces or to concrete that is less than 6 weeks old.

3. Do not begin plastering until : a. Openings, chases or other apertures required for services are

formed. b. Fixing for pipes, fixing pads and plugs have been fixed. c. Making good has been completed. d. Cut ends of metal mesh beads etc., and damaged areas of

conduit, switch and outlet boxes etc. have been coated with black tar-based paint.

C. Bonding Agents: These may not be used in lieu of metal lath or wire lath for

monolithic bonding of plaster to concrete ceilings or wall surfaces which require more than 10 mm of plaster, to produce required lines or surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General : The term “Plaster” shown on the drawings means Portland Cement

plaster unless otherwise noted. Apply 3-coat work on all bases. Apply finish coat with a reasonably uniform thickness over entire surface with ceilings level and with vertical surfaces flat, straight and plumb.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


Make interior angles square, and make arises square but slightly rounded. Solidly grout hollow metal frames occurring in plaster walls with plaster specified for base or brown coat. Where casing beads do not occur at the juncture or plaster and hollow metal frames, cut a groove in the base coat and later in the finish coat to minimize the appearance of cracks at these joints.

B. Mixing: Use mechanical mixers for mixing plaster. Hand mixing is not permitted. Do not use frozen, caked or lumped material. Clean mechanical mixers, mixing boxes and tools after mixing each batch; keep free of plaster from previous mixes. Thoroughly mix plaster with proper amount of water until uniform in colour and consistency. Re-tempering not permitted; discard plaster which has begun to stiffen. Provide waterproof protection under mixer.

C. Machine Applied Plaster: Determine proper consistency by slump test as

follows: Take slump test samples from nozzle of plastering machine hose using a 50 x 100 x150 mm slump cone. Samples will be taken at random as often as may be required and without prior notice.

Portland Cement Plaster : Maximum 63 mm slump.

D. Method of Application: By hand or machine application. Limit machine application to base coats, except where machine texture finish is specified.

3.04 THICKNESS OF PLASTER

Portland Cement Plaster: Comply with ASTM C-926 or BS 5262 / 5492 as appropriate for all applications not otherwise shown or specified.

3.05 APPLICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER A. General : To avoid abrupt changes in the uniform appearance of the succeeding

coat, each plaster coat shall be applied to an entire wall or ceiling panel without interruption. Joining of wet plaster to set plaster should be made at naturally occurring interruptions in the plane of the plaster, such as arises or wall and ceiling openings. Where this is not possible, such joining shall be cut square and straight and at least 150 mm, away from a joining in the preceding coat.

B. Apply Portland Cement Plaster in accordance with ASTM 926 or BS 5262 / 5492 as applicable.

3.06 APPLICATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads : Provide on all external corners and arises and in single

lengths where the length of a corner or arises does not exceed the standard stock lengths. Mitre or cope the beads at corners and fasten securely with tie wires, hardened galvanized nails, staples or offset head or hook head lath nails spaced not more than 200 mm staggered.

B. Casing or Stop Beads : Provide where shown and where plastering terminates and is not covered by other finish. Provide sheet metal closures at reveals. Set the beads level, plumb and true on line. Install in lengths as long as is practicable and align joints with concealed splice or tie plates.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


Secure beads with tie wire, hardened galvanized nails or other accepted methods. Space fastenings not more than 200 mm apart.

C. Strip Lath: Where plaster is to be applied across differing backgrounds and over

chases provide strip lath 300 mm wide located centrally over joint; except that where small widths of one material are involved completely bridge the one material with mesh wide enough to extend 75 mm each side. Insert an isolating membrane of building paper under lath to separate plaster from base material, and bed lath in undercoat.

3.07 APPLICATION OF BONDING AGENT

Apply in accordance with manufacturers’ printed instructions.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Plaster Sampling : Samples may be taken from work in place at any time.

Areas represented by samples that show over standing or wrong aggregate proportion will be rejected.

3.09 PATCHING A. Work containing cracks, blisters, pits, checks, or discoloration will not be

accepted. Remove such work, including rejected work, and replace with new. Patching of defected work permitted only with the Engineer’s approval.

B. Perform cutting, patching, repairing and pointing-up operations neatly and thoroughly. Repair the cracks and indented surfaces by moistening the plaster and filling with new material, troweled or tamped flush with adjoining surfaces. Point-up and finish surfaces around fixtures, outlet boxes piping, fittings, tile and other work flush with adjacent plaster. Where new plaster adjoins plaster which has been installed more than 48 hours cut existing plaster at an angle of approximately 45 Deg. with the surface before installing new plaster.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Make provisions to minimize the spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly

clean windows and other surfaces, which have been soiled.

B. Protect plaster from the weather, premature drying, marking, dirt, dust, marring or other damage throughout the construction period so that it will be without any indication of damage at the time of Substantial Completion of the works.


نموذجي وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة إنشاء (الفروانية) محافظة

________________________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09250- 1 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION – 09250 GYPSUM BOARD

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Gypsum Board Installations.

B . The principle work of this section includes:

i Gypsum Board Wall Linings.

ii Gypsum Board Partition Systems

iii Suspended Gypsum Board Ceiling size 600 x 600 x 12.5 mm

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with the applicable specifications and standards of UL, ASTM, ANSI and

all other standards of manufacturer’s associations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the engineer, manufacturer’s specifications,

installation instructions and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings : Submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings at full scale of all unusual conditions in connection with gypsum board construction.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer’s unopened bundles and

containers with manufacturer’s name, brand, type and grade clearly indicated thereon.

B. Material Protection: Avoid exposure of material to the weather by using protective covers. Handle materials to avoid damage.

C. Storage: Store materials above grade in a dry ventilated space, under cover and in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Protect from soiling or damage.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Install gypsum board only when temperature, humidity and ventilation can be

maintained at or above levels recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer.


________________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide gypsum board materials, including accessories and fasteners

produced or recommended by one manufacturer.

B. Gypsum Drywall Board: 16mm thick, unless otherwise shown. Complying with

the following requirements

1. Face Layer: ASTM C36, with tapered edges, Type X, unless stated otherwise.

2. Base Layer: ASTM C36, Type X, unless stated otherwise.

3. Water Resistant: ASTM 0630, with tapered edges.

C. Fasteners: For all applications involving gypsum board comply with manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

D. Joint Treatment Materials: Joint compound, joint tape and finishing compound. ASTM C475, asbestos-free and materials recommended by the gypsum drywall board manufacturer.

E. Laminating Adhesive: Type recommended by gypsum drywall board manufacturer.

F. Sealants : Type recommended by gypsum drywall board manufacturer to produce required acoustical ratings.

G. Trim Accessories: Galvanized steel or plastic corner beads, edge trim and control joints, of sizes and profiles as recommended by the gypsum drywall board manufacturer to suit the intended use. Trim materials, profiles and sizes shall be approved by the Engineer.

H. Structural Members Accessories: ASTM 0645, galvanized steel studs, furring channels and runners, of type, size and gauge as recommended by the gypsum drywall board manufacturer to suit the intended use.

I. Ties: Comply with the requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. and the gypsum drywall board manufacturer for the following types:

1. 1.2mm tie wire.

2. 13mm x 0.38mm galvanized steel strapping.

J. Acoustical Insulation: Type and thickness as recommended by the gypsum drywall board manufacturer to produce the required acoustical ratings.

K. Water: Clean and free of deleterious material.

L. Primary Suspension Members for Ceilings: 1. Hanger Inserts: Galvanized steel fiats, 25mm x 5mm with 11 mm holes on

center line and lower ends, or approved hanger inserts for rod hangers.

2. Hangers : 5mm x 25mm galvanized steel straps or 6mm diameter galvanized rods as approved and height adjustable.

3. Carrying Channels : Galvanized cold rolled steel channels , 38 mm, 0.7 kg/m.


________________________________________________________________________________________


2.02 MIXES A. Mix joint compound in the proportions recommended by the approved gypsum

drywall board manufacturer. Re-tempering of mix will not be permitted, nor will the use of partially set joint compound be permitted. Allow complete breakdown of binder before use.

PART-3, EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and the conditions under which

the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Framing Members: Install framing members for drywall board in accordance with

ASTM C754, or more stringent requirements of the manufacturer, to produce rigid flat, surfaces with supports at all edges of drywall board.

1. Space metal studs at maximum 400mm centers. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout as required to limit deflection to Lu 20 at 360 Pa.

2. Provide additional framing and blocking as required to support drywall board at openings and to support built-in anchorage and attachment devices for other work.

B. Gypsum Wall Board: Install gypsum wall board in accordance with ASTM 0840, or more stringent requirements of the manufacturer, to produce rigid true surfaces and to comply with required sound resistance ratings.

1. Install maximum practical lengths of wallboard with minimum number of end butt joints. Where butt joints are necessary stagger joints and locate as far as possible from center of walls.

2. Install control joints as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer.

3. Install metal trim accurately at exposed edges, doors and other locations as shown. Fasten trim securely.

4. Use joint compound and apply before inserting face layer into frame.

5. Cut openings in wallboard for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates or escutcheons. Do not allow electrical outlets back to back on opposing sides of partitions.

6. Install water resistant wallboard where shown.

C. Single Layer Application: Walls : Apply on walls vertically with long joints on framing members.

Space screws at not more than 400mm centers.


________________________________________________________________________________________


D. Double Layer Application: 1. Base Layer: Apply on walls vertically with long joints on framing members.

Space screws at not more than 400mm centers.

2. Face Layer: Screw, attach or apply face layer to base layer with laminating adhesive, with joints on surface spaced 250mm from the parallel joints in the base layer.

E. Sound Rated Partitions: Provide the combination of wallboard, sealant and

framing to produce the ratings shown. Apply acoustical sealant at perimeters of partitions to produce the required STC ratings. Provide acoustical sealant in back of control joints, around outlets boxes, and at perimeter of all cutouts to completely sea! all openings and joints. • Install acoustical insulation where shown. Form continuous layer for full height

and length of partition and tightly abutting web of studs. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other penetrations.

F. Water Resistant Drywall: 1. Use as a substrate for ceramic tile and elsewhere as shown.

2. Pre-cut panels to required size and make necessary cut-outs. Apply compound to all cut or exposed panel edges before installation.

3. In areas to receive ceramic tile finish, treat all joints and fastener heads with water resistant compound.

G. Ceilings: 1. Use only height adjustable rod hangers or strap hangers. Wire hangers are

not acceptable.

2. Provide hangers and inserts necessary to support suspended ceilings below concrete slabs. Give particular attention to the correct location and alignment of hangers and inserts. Frame openings so that recessed items finish flush.

3. Provide sufficient hangers for runner channels on each side of light fixtures, ceiling diffusers and grilles, access panels and other items penetrating the ceiling.

4. Fasten drywall board to furring channels at not more than 300mm centers.

H. General Finishing Requirements: 1. Fill openings around cutouts with compound or acoustical sealant as

recommended by manufacturer

2. Reinforce all joints at tapered edges and interior corners with joint reinforcing tape set in joint compound.

3. Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions with joint compound. Finish smooth and flush so that joints, screws and other items will not be visible after painting.


________________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tolerance: Finish surfaces within 6mm in 2.4m for plumb, level, warp and bow.



______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09310- 1 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES

SECTION 09310

CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILES

PART – 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with ceramic and quarry tile installation.


Floor and Wall Tiles


A. Except as modified by the Contract Documents comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of “ Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” from Tile Council of America and Recommended Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile TCA-137.1 or BS 1281 and 1286

B. Obtain each material required for any one type and colour of the work from a single source, so as to minimize variations in appearance and quality.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. The tile work shall be executed by a firm having a minimum of five (5) years

experience in the installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers’ Data:

For each product or material used, submit manufacturer’s product data, including installation instructions, use, limitations and recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.

B. Samples: Submit the following duplicate samples: For each tile type, submit samples of four tiles, each mounted on rigid panel board. Board shall include grouted joints. Engineer’s acceptance shall be for colour, pattern, texture and joint width only Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor

C. Shop Drawings Provide shop drawings for installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations and details where tiles terminate and at meeting of floor and walls. Take measurements in the field and verify all dimensions before submitting Shop Drawings.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent damage. Replace damaged items with no change in Contract price.

Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages indicating the name, brand, type, class, size and colour.

Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

Sequence deliveries to avoid project delays and to permit proper co ordination of the work.

1.06 CO-ORDINATION A. Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other work. Verify

field dimensions and condition of work which adjoins material of this Section, and notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract Documents before proceeding with the work specified in this Section. Commence work only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work which are to be in or behind tile work are installed.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Method of installation of ceramic and quarry tile shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.08 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver to owner at his specified store unopened boxes of glazed and unglazed

tiles, 3% of installed area.

PART – 2, PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE ACCESSORIES A. Trim Shapes: Shapes as shown for typical conditions, and as required to make a

complete installation at all conditions. Match type, class, colour and edge of adjoining field units and co-ordinate sizes with field units.

2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, white where required.

B. Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, resistant to alkalis, non-fading and weatherproof, colours as required and approved by the Engineer.

C. Water: Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work.

D. Sand: ASTM C 144


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.03 MORTARS AND GROUTS A. Latex Mortar Setting Beds: One 1) part Portland cement with three (3) parts sand

mixed dry and then gauged with a sufficient quantity of liquid latex additive to bring the cement setting bed to the proper consistency for placing. Amount of gauging liquid required and the consistency of cement setting bed for using a dry tamp method shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the liquid latex additive.

B. Liquid Latex Mortar (Thin Set): Liquid latex additive and Portland cement mixed in a ratio of 2.25 kg Portland cement to one litre liquid latex manufacturer. Addition of fine sand to cement shall be only as necessary for filling rough surfaces and as recommended by the liquid latex manufacturer.

1. Use of the above is required for all thin set applications and as slurry bond coats at mortar and bed applications.

Latex Quarry Tile Grout: One (1) part Portland cement with one (1) part sand, or factory prepared floor tile grout, gauged with liquid latex. The amount of gauging liquid and consistency of grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the liquid latex additive.

C. Grout for Non-Vitreous Tiles: Colour as shown or as required, gauged with grout admix.

D. Grout for Vitreous Tiles: Colour as shown or as required, gauged with grout admix.

E. Tile Adhesive: Water-resistant ceramic tile adhesive complying with ANSI A 136.1 and as recommended by the manufacturer to suit the type of application.

F. Chemical Resistant Tile Grout: As recommended by the tile manufacturer and approved by the Engineer

2.04 SEALANT A. Sealant for tiles shall be based on silicone type recommended for tile work. Colour

to match adjoining tile colour.

PART-3, EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify Engineer in writing of all conditions which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.

B. Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator that shall from that time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work and any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Engineer.

C. Allow slabs to dry adequately before applying materials. At the direction of Engineer, perform simple calcium-chloride test to ensure concrete surfaces are free of contained moisture.

D. Fill all cracks in sub-surfaces using approved crack-filler in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Clean sub floors of all remaining dirt and loose particles before application of flooring materials.


______________________________________________________________________________________


E. Underlayment used to correct floor slabs with surfaces not constructed to specified tolerances shall be provided as part of the work in CONCRETE Division. However, small dips and minor imperfections on the floor surface shall be corrected using specified latex leveling mortar as part of the work under this Section.

F. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels:

1. Mortar Set Floors: 1/500 distance and 9 mm total maximum variation from Level shown. 2. Mortar Set Walls and Ceilings: 1/400 distance and 6 mm total maximum variation from planes shown.

G. Thin-Set Work: Same as allowable variation in finished work.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove

curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.

B. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Standards: Unless otherwise shown or specified comply with applicable of TCA,

“Handbook requirements of ANSI A 108.1 through A 108.6, ANSI 137.1 and recommendations for Ceramic Tile Installation.”

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with the manufacturers’ instructions for the installation of each material required.

C . The tile applicator shall install all tiles using lighting conditions that will represent the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. This requirement will be insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out tiles.

D. Tiles shall be applied to full wall areas where mirrors and surface mounted accessories are to be installed.

E. Surfaces to receive tile finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter detrimental to the bond.

F. Room temperatures at areas in which tile materials are being installed shall be maintained at not less than 4 Deg. F. (5 Deg. C) for a period of twenty-four hours prior to commencement of work, during work, and afterwards until completion of construction. Areas in which tile work is being done shall be closed to traffic until the installation has set.

G. As far as possible, lay out work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile. Co-ordinate with plumbing and other trades.

H. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown:

1. Floors: 1/1000 run, any direction; +/- 3 mm at any location ; 8.0 mm offset at any location


______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Walls: 1/800 run, any direction; +/- 3 mm at any location; 0.8 mm offset at any location.

I. Joints: +/-0.8 mm joint with variation at any location; 1/600run for deviation from I.Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown Centre tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area and adjust to minimize tile cutting Use uniform joint widths for ceramic tile and for quarry tile unless otherwise shown or approved. Cut field tile, not trim shapes, unless otherwise shown.

J. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without interruptions except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required complying with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.

K. Liquid Latex Mortar Thin-Set Installation: Use liquid latex mortar for thin-set tile work, unless otherwise shown.

L. Latex Mortar Setting Beds for Quarry Tiles: Install quarry tiles over latex mortar setting beds with a slurry bond coat of Liquid Latex Mortar as hereinbefore specified.

M. Adhesive Installation: Use appropriate adhesive for setting tiles where adhesive installation is shown.

N Non-Slip Tile Installation: Use non-slip tiles in areas shown as “Non- Slip”. Install as specified for normal ceramic tiles of the same type and class.

O Metal Edge Strip Installation: Install a continuous stainless steel edge strip adequately anchored into the substrate; as follows:

1. Where shown.

2. Where exposed edge of quarry tile flooring meets carpet or other soft floor covering.

P. Provide control joints or expansion joints where shown, or required by ANSI or TCA standard or by job condition for proper workmanship. Install removable divider strip of proper width and depth of the tile and setting bed. Remove strips after grouting tiles and properly curing the work, Install joint fillers and sealants, in control joints and expansion joints, of type as recommended by the tiling manufacturer.

3.04 GROUTING A. Do not commence grouting for at least 24-hours after placing of tile .Follow specific

instructions of listed standards. Mix and apply in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Grout wall and floor tiles with indicated grout mixed to a workable stiff consistency in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

C. Force maximum grout into joints with trowel or squeegee. Before grout sets, strike or tool joints to base of cushion and fill all skips and gaps. Do not permit setting bed materials to show through grouted joints. Cure grout joints by maintaining damp condition.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.05 SEALANT APPLICATION A. Apply silicone sealant in joints where ceramic tile terminates at thresholds, floor

drains, control joints in walls and other areas indicated. Co-ordinate with trades affecting these items.

Application of sealant shall conform to applicable requirements set forth under SEALANTS AND CAULKING Section. Requirements therein shall become a part of the work under this Section as though written out in full herein.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After tile has thoroughly set, sponge and wash tile thoroughly and diagonally

across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage tile or adjacent materials. Do not use acid cleaners. Finally, clean all tiles using dry cloths.

B. Remove from the site and legally dispose of at the end of each day, all cartons, rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Section.

C. Protect tiles after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other approved coverage until acceptance of the building.

3.07 MAINTENANCE LITERATURE A. Upon completion of all work specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the

Owner’s Representative, literature on the “Care of Quarry Tiles” for future maintenance use.



_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09420-1 PRECAST TERRAZZO

SECTION 09420

PRE-CAST TERRAZO

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Pre-cast Terrazzo tiles.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete

Section 09310 - Ceramic Tiles.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with

applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: NTMA - “Terrazzo Specifications, Details and Technical Data”. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The terrazzo work shall be performed by a firm having 5 years experience in the

installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation

instructions for each material, to show compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Samples: Submit samples of each of the following items: Tiles: 3 No. 30 cm x 30 cm. Base: 3 No. 30 cm long Sample submittal shall be for colour, pattern and texture only. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing large scale details of layout,

jointing and edge conditions, and showing plans for layout of work. Include details of anchorage and other special features required.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers fully identified with trade

name, grade and colour. B. Store materials above grade, protected from the weather, soiling or damage from

any source. Store in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.07 CO-ORDINATION A. Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other work. Verify

field dimensions and condition of work, which adjoins materials of this Section, and notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract Documents before proceeding with the work specified in this Section.

B. Commence work of this Section only after work of other Sections, to be covered by terrazzo tiles, has been installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST TERRAZZO UNITS A. Floor Tiles and base shall be to sizes indicated on drawings. B. Precast Steps: One-piece full width of stair incorporating tread and riser size to suit

step. C. Face section of terrazzo units shall consist of Portland Cement conforming to ASTM

C-150 Type I, non-staining white marble chips, selected natural aggregate (clean and free of all impurities), and background cement and colours. Aggregate proportion shall be not less than 70% selected aggregate and 30% matrix. No aggregate with a value below Ha 10 as tested for abrasion resistance (ASTM C-241) shall be used.

D. Back or underlaying section of terrazzo units shall consist of Portland Cement and

coarse sand. Back section shall have a cement/sand ratio of 1:3. E. Terrazzo units shall be compressed to produce the exact size as per drawings with

square, flush edges. Compressive strength shall be minimum of 280 Kg/cm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C-150 after curing for one day in moist air and 6 days in water.

F. Marble chips shall be natural sound marble chips without flats or flakes of sizes and

colours necessary to match sample. G. Cement, Sand and Water shall be as specified in Clause 2.02.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Cement: shall be standard brand of Portland Cement, conforming to current ASTM

C-150, Type I. B. Sand: shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay, soluble

salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-to-coarse within the following limits: 100% passing No. 8 sieve, 90% to 100% passing No. 16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing No. 30 sieve 25% to 55% passing No. 50 sieve and 0 to 15% passing No. 100 sieve.

C. Water: shall be clean, free from oils, acids, alkalis, organic and other injurious

matter. D. Waterproofing additive: Liquid latex additive for external painting. 2.03 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS A. Metal Divider Strips: shall be of “white metal” zinc alloy, 3mm thick top angle shape

approved by the Engineer. Overall depth shall suit conditions of the job. B. Cleaning Solution: shall be a specially prepared neutral chemical terrazzo cleaner

that will not change colour of terrazzo or damage it in any way. C. Terrazzo Sealing Compound: shall be penetrating type, free from harmful alkali or

acid content. Sealer shall be specially prepared for the terrazzo trade. Compound shall not be yellow terrazzo or leave tacky finish on surface after buffing.

2.04 MORTARS AND GROUTS A. Mix bedding mortar in accordance with Tile Council of America Specifications for

Conventional Cement Mortar and ANSI A108.1, 1976. B. Mortar bed mix shall be one part Portland Cement, 6 parts damp sand and upto 1/10

part hydrated lime by volume. C. When mixed with water, the mortar shall be of such consistency and workability to

allow maximum compaction during tamping of mortar bed. D. Grout shall be inorganic Portland Cement dry curing grout, ready to use with addition

of water. The Engineer shall select colour of grout.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify Engineer

in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.

B. Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute

acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work and any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Engineer.

C. Allow surfaces to dry adequately before applying materials. D. Fill all cracks in sub-surfaces using approved crack-filler in accordance with

manufacturer’s printed instructions. Clean sub floors of all remaining dirt and loose particles before application of flooring materials.

E. Underlayment used to correct floor slabs with surfaces not constructed to specified

tolerances shall be carried out in a manner approved by the Engineer. However, small dips and minor imperfections on the floor surface shall be corrected using specified latex levelling mortar as part of the work under this Section.

F. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels:

Mortar Set Floors: 1/500 distance and 9 mm total maximum variation from levels shown.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove

curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.

B. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for the

installation of each material required. B. Surfaces to receive tile finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter detrimental

to the bond. C. Room temperatures at areas in which tile materials are being installed shall be

maintained at not less than 4 deg. F. (5 Deg. C) for a period of twenty-four hours prior to commencement of work, during work, and afterwards until completion of construction. Areas in which tile work is being done shall be closed to traffic until the installation has set.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


D. As far as possible, layout work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints

in floor tiles at right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile. Coordinate with plumbing and other trades.

E. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from

level and plumb and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown: 1. Floors: 1/1000 run, any directions; +/- 3 mm at any location; 0.8mm offset at any location.

2. Joints: +/- 0.8mm joint with variation at any location; 1/800 run for deviation from plumb and true; and for other variations in alignment of joints.

F. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces

shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without interruptions except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required complying with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.

3.04 APPLICATION OVER CONVENTIONAL MORTAR BED A. Mix and apply mortar bed in accordance with Tile Council of America Specifications

for conventional Cement Mortar and ANSI A108.1. When mixed with water the mortar mix shall be of such consistency or workability as to promote maximum density, determined by stroking of mortar surface with a trowel. When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a smooth, slickened appearance. Screed and tap mortar bed firmly. Mortar beds shall be in thickness required, determined by the depression. Any required pitch, which is not already in the slab, must be provided in the mortar bed.

B. While the mortar bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows: Trowel or brush a thin layer 1 mm to 1.5 mm in thickness, of neat Portland Cement

paste over the bed and/or the back of tile. A thin layer of dry Portland cement 1 mm. to 1.5 mm. thick over the setting bed worked lightly with a trowel may be permitted. These areas (mortar bed and cement paste) shall be limited to what can be covered with tile before the mortar bed sets. Tile shall be pressed firmly into the bed, tamping with wood blocks to obtain smooth surface. All tiles shall be aligned properly with straight joints in even widths. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after placing tile. Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer to drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout to receive sealant.

3.05 CONTROL JOINTS A. Cut through setting beds at perimeter joints and at projections through the floor.

Install neoprene or butyl rubber strip (Shore A Hardness 70) full depth of setting bed. Caulking of joint with approved pouring grade sealant will be done under Sealants Section.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


B. Provide control joints where floor tiles meet restraining surfaces such as perimeter

walls, cove bases, curbs, columns, pipes, etc. Control joints shall not exceed 10 meters c.c. each way in floors, located as directed by Engineer. Form control joints in neat, straight lines. Cut tile cleanly and to accurate radius at exposed junctions with pipes, etc. Tile control joints shall be same width as grouted joints, but not less than 6 mm.

C. Fill control joints that will be exposed in the finished work to full depth of setting beds

from sub-surface to rear face of tile, with control joint backing. Keep remaining void clear of grout and debris. After completion of grouting operations, control joint sealant of colour to match adjoining grout will be applied under Sealants Section.

3.06 DIVIDER STRIPS INSTALLATION A. Install white alloy or zinc divider strips adequately anchored into the substrate; as

follows: - 1. At 2 M centres in both directions.

2. Between terrazzo tiles and dissimilar floor finish where thresholds do not occur. Where divider strips are located across door openings, locate strip on the door side, in line with the edge of doorstop, terminating at the rebate.

3.07 GROUTING A. Do not commence grouting for at least 24 hours after placing of tiles. Follow specific

instructions of listed standards and apply in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.08 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Cleaning: After tile has thoroughly set, sponge and wash tile thoroughly and

diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage tile or adjacent materials. Do not use acid cleaners.

B. Sealing: As soon as terrazzo surfaces are thoroughly dry, apply sealer. The sealing

shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions, leaving a polished surface approved by the Engineer.

3.09 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. Protect tiles after cleaning and sealing with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other

approved coverage. Replace torn or worn papers until acceptance of the building. B. Remove from the site and legally dispose of at the end of each day, all cartons,

rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Section.


_________________________________________________________________________________________


3.10 MAINTENANCE LITERATURE A. Upon completion of all work specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the

Owner’s representative, literature on the “Care of Terrazzo” for future maintenance use.



______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09450-1 STONE CLADDING

SECTION 09450

STONE CLADDING

PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Natural Stone cladding/facing work in accordance with the Contract

Documents. B. The principal work of this Section mainly includes, but may not be limited to

the following:

1. Stone cladding to walls, columns and beams etc. using Mechanical Fixation System

1.02 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, complies with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards and references, but not limited to: 1. National Building Granite/Stone Quarries Association Inc. 2. Marble Institute of America. 3. ASTM C97 Tests Methods for absorption and bulk specific gravity of natural building Stone. 4. ASTM C99 Test Method for models of rupture of natural building Stone. 5. ASTM C119 Definitions of terms relating to natural building Stone. 6. ASTM A123 Zinc (not-galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strip. 7. ASTM A153-82 Zinc coating (not dip) on iron and steel hardware. 8. ASTM A167-82 Stainless and heat resisting chromium nickel steel plate, sheet, and strip. 9. ASTM C176 Specification for stainless and heat resisting chromium steel-plate, sheet and strip. 10. ASTM C24 Test method for compressive strength of natural building Stone. 11. ASTM C24 Test method for abrasion resistance of Stone subject to foot traffic.


______________________________________________________________________________________


12. ASTM A386-78 Zinc coating (hot dip) on assembled steel products. 13. ASTM A480/ General requirements for flat rolled stainless And A480M-83A heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip. 14. ASTMC503-79 Exterior building Stone. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the

fabrication of Stone-work units of similar sizes, shapes and finishes to the units required for this Project and which has ample production facilities to produce, furnish and supply the units as required for installation without delay to the work.

B. Erector: A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience in the successful

erection of Stone work units of similar sizes and shapes and of similar quantities to the units required for this project.

C. The work in this Section shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub- Contractor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work for approval, and obtain approval prior to fabrication of stone.

1. Shop drawings shall indicate and show the following:

a. Showing in detail the layout, jointing, dimensions sizes and locations of cutouts, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone. Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere (flashing, insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this submittal. Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.

b. Indicate materials, sizes, shapes, and thickness including dimensions of

each panel, finishes and fabrication tolerances.

c. Details of setting and anchorage system including type, size, weight, gauge or diameter of anchors and supports, materials identification and installation methods for anchors, fasteners, clips, dowels and supports. Provide detail of steel back-up support over masonry wall surface.

d. Erection method and other relevant information.

e. Jointing clearances and clearances between the units and the structural

building framework.

f. Joints and connections to the work of other trade; locations of items required by work of other trade, coordinated with the work of this section.


______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer 300 x 300mm sample of Stone work required, showing the full range of color and texture expected in the finished work; color and texture range. Engineer’s review and approval of samples shall be for color, texture, and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide also 400 x 400mm Stone sample panels with central cross joint to show sealant materials for the Engineer’s review and selection off jointing materials.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit manufacturer’s data sheet or equivalent printed literature indicating product information correlated to specified requirements. D. Test Reports and Calculations

1. Submit reports of testing and inspection of anchor plugs and fasteners. Provide manufacturer’s certification stating that these inserts are appropriate for the intended purpose.

2. Submit calculations, certified by a licensed professional Engineer for

structural adequacy of Stones and anchorage system. 3. Submit reports of Stone panel testing. E. Certification: After review of samples by the Engineer and prior to fabrication certify in writing and submit any additional evidence required indicating that a sufficient quantity of materials within the range of approved materials are available from a single quarry, for each specified or approved Stone to satisfy the total requirements of the Project. 1.05 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Design, fabricate and install the Stone work and anchorage systems to

support the gravity loads and to withstand the inward and outward pressures normal to the wall plane as per the “Wind Pressure Diagrams” based on local regulation.

B. Stone breakage, anchorage failure, or displacement, either from the Stone or from the support system, shall not occur under loading equal to 2.5 times the design load pressures, positive and negative as given by the Engineer. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit to the Engineer recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions for the Stone materials being provided.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.06 TESTING A. Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone will be performed

prior to all other testing programs.

1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the following tests:

Physical Property Test Method No. of Tests a. Compressive Strength ASTM C1170 2 b. Modules of Rupture ASTM C99 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 c. Flexure Bending ASTM C880 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 d. Density ASTM C97 2 e. Absorption (% by weight) ASTM C97 2

2. Above samples shall be taken at random locations from areas, which will be quarried for the Project. Do not take all the samples from a single block. Identify and transmit a record of the samples and quarry locations from which they were taken.

3. Based on the properties of Stone as determined by the above test

program, the Engineer may revise the design safety factor as specified. B. Stone Panel Tests: In a certified testing laboratory acceptable to the

Engineer, test three full sized Stone panels and their anchors under gravity loads and uniform loads as pr properties. Per sq. meter increments. Stone panels and anchors shall be representative of the sizes and shapes as proposed for the installation.

1. Test the assembly to failure and record the test pressure at failure. Also

record the type of failure, anchor pullout, or Stone breakage, whether pressure was positive or negative and any other pertinent information.

2. Prior to testing, submit for acceptance a description of the test assembly

(including pertinent data on materials), test apparatus, and procedures. C. Welding: Provide visual inspection for 100% of welds, reporting on defects

and measures taken to correct those defects. 1.07 VISUAL MOCK-UPS A. Following approval of sample slabs construct mock up as follows: 1. Wall Facing: Assembled to simulate final conditions, direction of grinning,

and indicating joint conditions, use of spacers, shims, anchorage, relieving anchors, supports and all other features of the final work. Erect a full wall pattern as per the approved shop drawing in place selected and agreed by the Engineer, adequately reinforced and braced to sustain the


______________________________________________________________________________________


imposed loads, build in all items of anchorage and support. Maintain sample installation during construction as a standard for the acceptability of work. Sample may be retained as a portion of the completed work.

2. Provide mock-up for any other Stone work as shown on the drawings or

as required by the Engineer. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary precautions

against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using protection and handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no leakage, chipping, soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other damage. Store above grade on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces using polyethylene film to separate Stone from wood or other supporting or protecting members. Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of every kind.

B. Deliver other materials, except bulk materials, to project site in manufacturer’s unopened containers with name, brand, type, grade, and color fully indicated thereon. Store bulk materials as required avoiding any deleterious effects of weather, soiling, or contamination. C. Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and

installation shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 2% extra stock of stone of each type and colour and pattern. Store

where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type stone code and dimensions.

PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 2.01.1 STONE A. General: Provide stone of soundness (hardness and density), texture,

graining, finish, crystal patterning, color and tone matching samples available for viewing at the Consultant Office. Stone shall be sound and free from defects which will impair strength, durability, finish appearance and is supplied from a single quarry source, with sufficient capacity to satisfy the total requirements of the project.

1. Single Quarry : Quarry and fabrication plant facilities shall be available for the Employer's inspection at any time.

2. Stone: Provide the stone types in the materials schedule shown on drawings

3. Visual Qualities of Stone: The color, grain and general character of all stone provided shall be of a range consistent with the samples approved by the Engineer. Stone which, in the opinion and judgment of the Engineer; fails to comply with


______________________________________________________________________________________


this requirement may be rejected by the Engineer at any time during the course of the Work. The Contractor shall bear all the costs associated with the removal and replacement of such rejected stone with acceptable material.

2.02 SUPPLIERS:

1. Al-Naseeb International for Granite & Marble Farwaniya Tele: 24758305 2. Taj Mahal for Granite & Marble

Industrial Streel, Shuwaikh Tele: 24818544

3. Al-Ahmadi for Marble & Granite

Ahmadi Tele: 23984233

4. Or other Equal Approved

2.03 FIXINGS

A. Stone Anchors: Provide anchors embedded within stone in sizes, configurations and profiles as shown or as required to sustain imposed loads without exceeding allowable design stresses, and install anchorages and supports free from rattle or displacement.

Select stainless steel for this project :

1. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302 or 304. a. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A666, Stretcher level sheets. b. Bar Stock: ASTM A276. c. Angles: AISI Type 304. d. Pins, Dowels, Rods and Other Custom Anchors: AISI

Type 304.

2. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Type, grade, class and style best suited for the respective purpose. a. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Stone Anchors:

Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers of same alloy as anchors. ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594, for nuts.

B. Anchor Inserts: Provide stainless steel inserts located in masonry or

concrete for the attachment of stone anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed.

C. Cushions: Clear plastic shims and/or 50 Durometer neoprene pads

non-staining, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stonework involved without intruding into required depths of mortar joints or joint sealants or causing third-side adhesion between sealant and cushions.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.04 FABRICATION A. Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit and finish Stone-work to shapes and

dimensions shown on Drawing and approved shop-drawings. Make expose plane surfaces true in line and exposed curved surfaces true in radius. Thickness of Stone shown is minimum. Any deviation below these minimums will cause rejection and replacement of those Stone panels.

B. Design Responsibility: The requirements shown by the Contract Drawings

and details are intended to establish basic dimensions of units or modules, profiles and sight lines. Within these limitations the contractor is responsible for the implementation of the design intent of the entire system and make whatever modifications of, and additions to, the details as may be required to fulfil the performance requirements. Maintain the visual design concept as shown, including sizes, profiles, and alignment of components.

C. The Contractor shall supplement the general design shown with more detailed shop drawing. Shop drawings shall include major aspects of the system proposed, such as sections, shapes, show how temperature movement is handled, joint connections, anchorage to building, and moisture weeping system.

PART-3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Prior to installation examine surfaces to receive Stone and do not proceed

until any defects detrimental to the finished work are corrected, including moisture protection, structural supports, provisions for expansion, or any other condition, which might affect the finished work in appearance, water tightness or integrity of the completed installation.

B. Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of inserts

for this work and coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the location and size of cutouts required accommodating mechanical, electrical, and other work of adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.

C. Co-ordinate shop drawings of items or assemblies related to the support or anchorage of Stone-work, including requirements for clearances for proper installation.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical Fix: 1. Stone setting, anchoring, and pointing shall be in accordance with

applicable requirements of specifications of the Marble Institute of American unless otherwise specified or shown.

2. Set Stone in accordance with approved shop drawings, level, plumb,

square and true with uniform joints, accurately aligned with grain running in the direction shown. Match work to visual mock-up.

3. After all adjustment have been made to Stone work anchorage devices;

weld adjustable supports so as to prevent future displacement or movement. All welds will be subjected to visual inspection.

4. The quality of field cutting shall be the same as for shop cutting. 5. Provide dowels, anchors and ties in sufficient quantity to eliminate “rattle”

or loose pieces and to ensure a rigid installation. Extent of anchorage and installation details shown is intended to indicate minimum requirements. In general, a minimum of one anchor per 0.18 sq. meter of area is required, with additional anchorage provided where necessitated by size, thickness, setting of shape.

6. Provide steels back-up support for Stone work over masonry surface

area as required providing rigid installation. Anchor steel support framing securely to building structure (over concrete Beams, columns etc.). Do not provide the steel anchor support directly over the masonry wall.

B. Erection Tolerances: Comply with the following maximum non-cumulative erection tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: +/- 2mm in story height. 2. Variation from Level: +/- 2mm in 12m. 3. Variation from Location: +/- 3 mm in any bay

4. Edge alignment: 1 mm

C. Joint Widths: Provide Stone work joints widths as approved by the Engineer.

3.03 PROTECTION A. After initial cleaning, provide non-staining temporary wood guards at corners and other surfaces subject to damage. B. Protect works from damage due to subsequent building operations.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.04 CLEANING A. Immediately prior to completion of the work clean Stone by washing with water and bristle brushes; removing all stains, dirt and other discoloration. Do not use acids, cleaning compounds or wire brushes. B. On completion of construction, remove all temporary protection. 3.05 ENGINEER’S APPROVAL A. Installed units, which are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged or which in the opinion of the Engineer do not conform to the specification requirements shall be removed and replaced such that the completed work meets the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.



______________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09510- 1 METAL CEILING SYSTEMS

SECTION 09510

METAL CEILING SYSTEMS

PART – 1 : GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Metal Ceilings and accessories.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following : Suspended Metal Acoustical Ceiling.


Comply with the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies as further cited herein: 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

ASTM C 423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

ASTM C 523 Test Method for Light Reflectance of Acoustical Materials by the

Integrating Sphere Reflectometer. ASTM C 635 Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile

and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. ASTM E 90 Method for Laboratory Measurement of Air-Bourne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 2. British Standards Institute :

BS CP 290 Suspended Ceilings and Linings of Dry Construction using Metal Fixing Systems.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Employ only experienced tradesmen who are capable of producing work of the highest

standard of quality in the industry. Acoustical ceilings shall be executed by an approved specialist

Sub-Contractor.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


1.04 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Fire-Rated Acoustical Ceiling Assemblies: Provide ceiling assemblies to achieve the

fire-resistance classification or rating as required. Comply with the material and installation requirements of the UL “Building Materials Test” and other referenced guides for the UL design numbers corresponding with the construction systems shown.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples :

Submit to the Engineer samples of each type of acoustical material specified. Each set of samples shall show the full range of texture and colour to be expected in the completed work. Sample submittal and Engineer’s acceptance will be for colour and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Acoustic Tile – full size. 2. Exposed Tees and Moldings – 300 mm lengths.

B. Shop Drawings :

Submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings, including reflected ceiling plans of acoustical ceilings, before proceeding with work. Show location of all items of work which are to be coordinated with the acoustical ceilings or are to be supported by the acoustical ceiling system and detail, in suitably large scales, all edge conditions, fixing details and accessories. Scales to be approved by the Engineer.

C. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical material, suspension system and other products required, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide 3 x 3.6 m mock-up of each type of acoustical ceiling, including all services

outlets such as sprinklers, supply and return air grilles lighting fixtures, etc., in spaces within the building to be designated by the Engineer. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects and may, when approved, form part of the permanent work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery materials to the project site in manufacturer’s unopened containers, clearly

indicating manufacturer’s name, brand, type, style, size, colour, texture and all other identifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage,

deterioration and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been damaged, or are otherwise unfit for use, as directed.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical materials unless temperature and humidity conditions closely approximate to the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied.

Maintain temperature / humidity conditions before, during and after installation. Plastering, concrete and tiling work (including grinding) shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

1.09 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide 1% of installed quantity of each type of acoustic tile to Employer and store where directed.


2.01 MATERIALS GENERALLY

Material type and face size as shown with the following minimum characteristics: 1. Light Reflectance: 80-85% 2. Flame Spread: Manufactured to meet BS 476: Part 6 – fire propagation and

Part 7 – surface spread of flame, Class 0. 3. Sound Absorption : Mean Alpha Sabine coefficient of 0.8 for frequencies of

between 125 and 4000 Hz. 4. Sound Transmission Class : 42 dB to 51 dB 5. Suspension System : Heavy Duty Classification.

2.02 METAL ACOUSTIC TILE A. Type E-“Orcal Corridor” perforated steel square or rectangular suspended ceiling

panel system, matt finish, hole diameter 2.9 mm diameter giving 20% open area

2.03 METAL ACOUSTIC TILE SYSTEM A. Manufacturer’s standard design Exposed Mechanical Suspension System.


______________________________________________________________________________________________


PART – 3 : EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the

work is to be installed and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL

SYSTEMS A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and co-ordinate the work

with the work of other trades, with particular attention given to the work of mechanical and electrical trades.

B. Install all materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise shown or directed.

C. Make all exposed surfaces of acoustical units level and flush with all joints straight and

true. Neatly cut and fit units around light fixtures and around other items protruding through acoustical ceilings. Install all exposed members with flush hairline joints.

D. Factory drill acoustic tile occurring at hidden loud-speakers and fire alarm gongs. E. Centre tile or board pattern both directions in each major space or room as shown or

directed and where possible adjust pattern so that edge pieces will be not less than 1/2 unit in width.

F. Run grain of units in one direction, as shown or directed and align joints in both

directions unless otherwise shown. G. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during installation.

Replace units which are damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM, GENERAL A. Install primary suspension members and mechanical suspension system in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to support required loads and to prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of the span. Spirit level accurately in both directions.

B. Co-ordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners and moulding with the location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling.

C. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 636 and the following :

1. Attachment Devices: Device locations shall be co-ordinated to final layouts.

2. Hangers : Space not more than 150 mm from each end and not more than 100 mm o.c. between ends of members to be supported. Provide additional hangers for support of fixtures and other items to be supported by the ceiling


______________________________________________________________________________________________


suspension system, as required to prevent eccentric deflection or rotation of supporting runners. Provide necessary bracing and supports to allow for irregular stresses imposed on the suspension system by any mechanical ductwork connection to air handling fixtures.

3. Mouldings : Provide mouldings where ceilings meet walls, partitions and other

vertical elements. Provide meter cut inside and outside corners.

D. Co-ordinate spacing of hangers and other suspension members with the location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling. Provide additional members or heavier members where necessary to suit interferences.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTIC TILE, EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM A. Install tiles with edges resting on flanges of tees. Cut and fit tiles neatly against

abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall mouldings. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of the work remove all unused materials, debris, containers and

equipment from the project site. Clean and repair surfaces that have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged.

B. Protect acoustical ceilings during the construction period to prevent damage, replace damaged units with new.



__________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-1 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING

SECTION 09515

ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD CEILING

PART - 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Provide Gypsum Board Ceilings in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, which including but not limited to the followings: 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system

2. Gypsum Panels (Plain or Decorative) Jointless Ceiling

3. Perimeter trims

4. Sound Absorbing pad if indicated or specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK

1. Access doors.

2. Integrated Ceilings

0B3. Light Fixtures in ceiling system

1B4. HVAC Duct, Air Diffusers and Grill in Ceiling System

5. Section 09250: Gypsum Board Wall/Partition system 1.03 REFERENCES 1. ASTM C 423 – Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound

Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

2. ASTM C 523 - Test Method for Light Reflectance of Acoustical

Materials by the Integrating Sphere Reflectomer. 3. ASTM C 635 - Specification For Metal Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 4. ASTM 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 5. ASTM 90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Air-Borne

Sound Transmission Loss of building partitions. 6. BS CP 290 - Suspended Ceiling and Linings of Dry Construction

Using Metal Fixing Systems. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Installed system conforms to UL rating for ceiling and roof assembly.


__________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system

and suspended ceiling panels with ten years minimum experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable local code for fire rated assembly, combustibility

requirements for materials. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop drawings and products data. B. Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finisher, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. C. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units. D. Submit samples. E. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 °C) during and after

installation. 1.09 SEQUENCING / SCHEDULING A. Do not install gypsum board ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient cooling is

provided, dust-generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Schedule installation of gypsum board ceiling after interior wet work is dry. C. Co-ordinate the work of this section with other affected sections.


__________________________________________________________________________________


PART - 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Obtain gypsum boards, trim accessories, adhesives and joint treatment products

from a single manufacturer or from manufacturer’s recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Kuwait Gypsum Manufacturing & Trading Co. Tel. 4816761 2. National Gypsum Co. Tel. 495 3780/3730 Or equal approved quality of any G.C.C. Country’s Gypsum Company

C. In general, all material shall be the product of one manufacturer; products of

different manufactures may be used only after approval by the Engineer. D. Accessories, joint treatment materials, fasteners, stud and furring channels, etc.

shall be integrated systems. E. Sound absorption pads (if required) : Line with sound-absorbent blanket encased

in flameproof membrane and supported on wire grid spacers. Form blanket of glass fiber or mineral wool insulating material having a minimum density of 16 Kg/cu.m. and a minimum thickness as required to provide a noise reduction coefficient of not less than 0.75 for the complete assembly, moisture absorption not exceeding 2.0% by weight.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Grid: ASTM C635, light, intermediate, heavy duty, non-fire rated exposed T / one

direction concealed T and concealed H and T paired access T downward access removable T concealed Z concealed T metal pan T; components: die cut and interlocking.

B. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate, fire rated to 1 ½ hour assembly two directional

concealed components die cut and interlocking. C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars clips splices edge mouldings, hold down clips required

for suspended grid system. D. Grid Materials: commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. E. Grid Finish: Colour as selected. F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized primed steel; size and type to suit

application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.


__________________________________________________________________________________


2.03 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board Ceiling: conforming to the following:

1. Size : Gypsum board, plane or decorated as shown in the drawings:

(a) Conforming to ASTM C-36 Type X - 2 Hour Min. Fire Rating

(b) Conforming to ASTM C630 for Water Resistant Gypsum Board

2. Composition : Gypsum board

3. Surface Finish (a) Plain or decorated jointless ceiling with paint finish

(b) Water Resistant Gypsum Board with waterproof paint over wet or external areas

4. Thickness : 12.5 mm thick gypsum board panel. 5. Light reflectance : 75 percent 6. Fire Hazard Clarification: Non-combustible 7. Surface Color : White or as selected 8. Grid : For jointless gypsum board ceiling use

concealed grid as per Engineer’s approval.

PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions and work finished by other section is ready to

receive work. B. Verify hangers to be properly fixed and positioned so a not to interfere with other

work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 of

span maximum. C. Install after major above ceiling work is completed. Coordinate the location of

hangers with other work.


__________________________________________________________________________________


D. Supply hangers of inserts for installation with instructions for their correct

placement. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection provide additional hangers and inserts as requires.

E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

F. Where ducts of other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce

the nearest affected spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

G. Center and locate system on room axis leaving equal border units according to

reflected plan and shop drawings. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes

total dead load to exceed deflected capacity. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within ( 150 mm) or each corner, or support components independently.

I. Do not eccentricity load system or produce rotation of runners. J. Install edge moulding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corner: Provide edge moulding at junctions with other interruptions. Field ribbett tile panel edge. Where bullnose concrete block corners round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match edge moulding. K. Form expansion joints as detailed to accommodate plus or minus (20 mm).movement, maintain visual closer. L. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges of the defects detrimental to appearance and function. M. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest shortest room axis in basket weave pattern. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. N. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within (6 m) of an exterior door. O. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixture in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from flat and level surface (3 mm in 3 m). B. Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: Two degrees

maximum.

END OF SECTION


______________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-1 GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM

SECTION 09535

GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,

equipment, appliances, and materials and performing all operations in connection with Glass Reinforced Gypsum (GRG) Ceilings and accessories.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the

following:

1. All pre-fabricated GRG ceiling units such as bulkhead waffles, bulkhead grids, perimeter closure panels, uplighters, infill coffers and plain panels, etc., and all shapes as shown on various suspended ceiling systems.

2. Prefabricated plain and vaulted GRG ceiling units with site applied

painted finish.

3. All associated HVAC plenum, diffusers, metal moulding, electrical lighting waffles, etc.

4. All associated fixing, anchorage, suspension, and supporting systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications

and installation instructions for each unit, suspension system and other products required, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings, including

reflected ceiling plans for all GRG work. Provide typical and particular details of all conditions at large scale to show services outlets, fittings and accessories, anchorage, methods of support and complete coordination with all other trades. Include final engineering calculations with shop drawings.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer samples as follows:

1. Two full size samples of each type of panel showing full profile, reinforcing and finish.

2. One full size sample of each type of bulkhead waffle and grid showing

reinforcing and finish. 3. Two samples of each type of uplighter.


______________________________________________________________________________


D. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification stating that units comply with

the flame spread rating specified, Submit certified test reports of an independent laboratory indicating compliance with specified criteria.

E. Maintenance: Submit in an approved form, the manufacturer’s printed

instructions for maintenance of the GRG units. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installers: The Work of this Section shall be executed by an approved

specialist Sub-Contractor who can demonstrate past experience and capability in this type of work.

1.04 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-ups of the proposed ceiling systems as shown on the Drawings

and as directed by the Engineer. Locate the mock-ups where directed. Mock-up shall include all services outlets such as lighting fixtures, sprinklers, diffusers, reveals, edge conditions, etc. The approved mock-ups shall serve as a standard for the project and may form part of the permanent work.

1.05 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Structural: The GRG system, when installed, shall not develop structural

failure, joint failure, cracking, crazing, permanent distortion or displacement or other damage. Permanent distortion and displacement are defined as values exceeding 50% of installation tolerances.

B. The maximum temporary deflection due to all loads shall not exceed 1/360 of

the distance between supports. C. Design, fabricate and install component parts and all associated supporting

and suspension system so that no movement will occur which might abrade abutting members, loosen fastenings or anchorage or cause other detrimental effects.

D. Fire Resistance: The GRG units shall have ratings not exceeding the

following when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread 0 2. Fuel Contributed 0 3. Smoke Developed 5 E. Submit test certificates to the Engineer confirming material conformance to

the above tests from a recognized competent authority. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect GRG units during transit, storage, and installation, store above grade

on dunnage so as to avoid damage of any kind all in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.


______________________________________________________________________________


1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install GRG units unless temperature and humidity conditions closely

approximate to the interior conditions, which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature/humidity conditions before, during, and after installation. Plastering, concrete and tiling work (including grinding) shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Glass Reinforced Gypsum: Glass fiber reinforced and polymer modified

gypsum, as fabricated by Gillespie (UK) Limited, Alma House, 38 Crimea Road, Aldershot, Hants GU11 1UD, UK. (Fax No. 252 336836).

B. Adhesive: Casein, conforming to FS MMM-A-125C, Type 2. C. Joint Prefill: “Durabond 90 Joint Compound” (US Gypsum). D. Joint Treatment Materials: Joint compound, joint tape and finishing

compound; ASTM C 475, asbestos free (UL Gypsum). E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, AISI Type 302 or Type 304, gauge and finish

as recommended by the GRG manufacturer. F. Fasteners, Inserts and Attachment Devices: Stainless steel. G. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars Rods and Other Steel Accessories to Join,

Reinforce or suspend Assemblies: ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 283, galvanised and painted, where exposed to match GRG units.

H. HVAC Plenum: Form plenum in bulkhead waffle units as shown. Provide 24

gauge galvanized steel sheet bottom with sufficient stiffeners, held in position with galvanized steel angle cleats. Line plenum with 20 mm thick aluminium foil covered fiberglass insulation complying with HVAC requirements.

J. Diffusers, Trims Mouldings, etc.: Provide diffusers, trims, mouldings, etc., as

shown, of the type approved and with baked enamel finish to match the units. K. Lighting Baffles: Aluminium moulded construction to sizes shown, fabricated

from aluminium sheet of approved thickness. Aluminium extruded hollow section track of approved size and design to meet the performance requirements. All in baked enamel finish to match GRG units.

L. Suspension System: Provide a complete, fully designed and engineered

suspension and supporting system fabricated and installed to produce a rigid system capable of supporting the proposed ceiling units including light fittings, HVAC installations, etc., with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. Provide galvanized steel suspension system unless shown or required otherwise. Use only galvanized steel rod or flat hangers. Use of wire hangers is not acceptable.


______________________________________________________________________________


2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to the shapes shown. Provide integral rib and edge reinforcing

for units as necessary for loads and handling stresses, and for anchorage reinforcing where shown and where required. Provide necessary openings, reveals, supports, etc., for electrical and HVAC installation.

B. Moulding tolerances shall be as follows : 1. Length, corner to corner of any straight or curved edge +/- 1.6 mm 2. Twist or wrap, corner to diagonally opposite corner measured along straight line across back of unit. +/- 1.6 mm 3. Radius of curved surfaces measured with rigid template of full cross section +/- 1.6 mm 4. Thickness +/- 3 mm C. The finished product shall be free of visual defects, such as foreign matter,

dry spots, air bubbles, pin holes and pimples. Identifying markings shall not appear on any exposed surface.

2.03 FINISH A. Factory Finish: Alkyd enamel painting applied to give a total minimum dry film

thickness of 3.5 mils (0.09 mm) in semi-gloss, eggshell or flat finish and of colour, all as approved by the Engineer.

B. Site Applied Paint Finish: Alkyd enamel painting as specified in Painting

Section. 2.04 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Kuwait Gypsum Manufacturing & Trading Co. Tel. 4816761 2. National Gypsum Co. Tel. 495 3780/3730 Or equal approved quality of any G.C.C. Country’s Gypsum Company


______________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under

which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and fabricate

bulkhead waffles to precisely fit “as-built” dimensions of erected prestressed concrete beams.

B. Install all materials and systems as shown on the Drawings and approved

shop drawings and in accordance with the GRG manufacturer’s instructions. C. Make all exposed abutting surfaces of units level, plumb, true to curve and

flush with all joints straight and true. D. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during

installation. Do not erect units, which are damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Replace units, which are damaged, or cannot be adequately repaired or cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. Install supporting members to support required loads and to prevent distortion

in excess of that specified. F. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Comply with the

following erection tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb 3 mm in 6 m 2. Joint alignment +/- 0.8 mm 3. Joint Width + 0.8 mm –0.0 mm 4. Surface alignment across joints +/- 0.8 mm G. Paint all surfaces designated for site applied finish, as specified in the

Painting Section. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces using

materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer. All surface stains shall be removed by means compatible with paint finish as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Protect exposed surfaces during the construction period so that they will be

without any indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of the Works.

END OF SECTION


______________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-1 LINEAR METAL CEILING

SECTION 09545

LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide linear metal ceilings in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. B. Work included - The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to the followings: 1. Acoustical Metal pan ceiling

2. Ceiling suspension System

3. Plenum Sound barriers

1.02 RELATED WORK

1. Access doors.

2. Integrated Ceilings

3. Light Fixtures in ceiling system

4. HVAC duct, Air Diffusers and Grills in Ceiling System 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Except as otherwise specified comply with the

recommendations and requirements of the following documents: 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM B 209 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and plate. b. ASTM C 635 Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. c. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. British Standards Institute a. BS CP 290 Suspended Ceilings and Linings of Dry Construction Using Metal Fixing Systems. B. Installer Qualifications: Employ only experienced tradesmen who are capable

of producing work of the highest standard of quality in the industry. Linear metal ceilings shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub-Contractor.


______________________________________________________________________________


1.04 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide panel units with surface burning

characteristics indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of metal panels and sound absorption pads identical to those required in this section, in accordance with ASTM E 84.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each material specified. Each set of samples

shall show the full range of textures, colours and patterns to be expected in the completed work. Where finishes involve normal colour and texture variations, include samples showing full range of variations expected. Sample submittal and Engineer’s acceptance will be for colour, and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Linear Metal Panel – full size. 2. Exposed Trims and Moldings – 600 mm lengths. 3. Suspension System Members – 600 mm lengths. 4. Filter Strips – 600 mm lengths. 5. End caps. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings including reflected ceiling

plans of linear metal claddings before proceeding with work. Show location of all items of work, which are to be coordinated with the linear metal ceilings, or are to be supported by the ceiling system and detail in suitably large scales all edge conditions fixing details and accessories. Scales to be approved by the Engineer.

C. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation

instructions for each material, suspension system and other products required, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

1.06 MOCK-UP: Provide 3 x 3m mock-up of linear metal ceilings, including all

services outlets such as sprinklers, supply and return air grilles lighting fixtures, etc., in spaces within the building to be designated by the Engineer. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects, and may, when approved, form part of the permanent work.

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer’s unopened containers,

clearly indicating manufacturer’s name, brand, type, style, size, color, texture, and other identifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent

damage, deterioration, and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials, which have been damaged or are otherwise unfit for use, as directed.


______________________________________________________________________________


1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install linear metal materials unless temperature and humidity

conditions closely approximate to the interior conditions, which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature/humidity conditions before, during, and after installation. Concrete and tiling work and other wet work (including grinding) shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS GENERALLY A. Material type and face size as shown with the following minimum

characteristics: 1. Light Reflectance: ASTM C 523, 0.75 or more. 2. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84, Flame Spread 25 or less. 3. Sound Absorption: ASTM C 423, NRC not less than 0.65. 4. Sound Transmission Class: ASTM E 90, not less than 35. 5. Suspension System: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty Classification. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS Approved manufacturers for the products specified in this section are as

follows: 1. Dampa Ceiling System

2. Hunter Douglas, U.K 3. Armstrong World Industries, U.K 4. USG Interiors Inc. U.S.A Or 5. Equal Approved quality The contractor shall submit catalogues with data and specifications for the

above products for Engineer’s approval. The Engineer has the sole discretion to approve or select the product, as he thinks reasonable. In this regard Engineer’s decision shall be considered as final.

2.03 LINEAR METAL PANELS A. Metal Panel: Aluminium roll formed sheet, alloy AA5050. Similar to Luxalon

type 84R (Hunter Douglas). 1. Size and Thickness:

a. 84mm wide x 16mm deep x 0.5mm thick or as per drawings and Engineer’s approval.


______________________________________________________________________________


2. Tile Edges: Rounded edges.

3. Pattern and Finish Description: Unperforated or Perforated as per Engineer’s choice and approval, with baked enamel finish, colour to be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.

2.04 SOUND ABSORPTION PADS A. Width and length to fill completely between carriers joined at the center of a

panel. Manufacturer’s standard sound-absorbent blanket encased in flameproof membrane and supported on wire grid spacers. Form blanket of glass fiber or mineral wool insulating material having a minimum density and a minimum thickness as required to provide a noise reduction coefficient of not less than 0.75 for the complete assembly, moisture absorption not exceeding 2.0% by weight.

2.05 PRIMARY SUSPENSION MEMBERS A. Hanger Inserts: Galvanized mild steel flats, 25 x 5 mm with 11mm holes

punched on center line and lower ends for strap hangers, and manufacturer’s appropriate hanger inserts for rod hangers designed to develop the full strength of the type of hangers used.

B. Hangers: Galvanized steel straphangers, 25 x 5mm or 6mm diameter

galvanized steel rod hangers with facility for length adjustment to achieve accurate leveling.

C. Carrying Channels: Galvanized cold rolled steel channels, 38 mm, 0.7 Kg/m. 2.06 CONCEALED ACCESSIBLE MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturer’s standard design system complying with ASTM D 635

structural classification “Heavy Duty” with operational and material requirement as follows:

1. Primary Suspension Members: As hereinbefore specified.

2. Access Panels: Manufacturer’s standard system consisting of door hinge assembly, retainer bar. Assembled with ceiling panels and carrier sections into access doors of required size, with upward or downward opening.

B. Typical Metal Wall Mouldings: Manufacturer’s standard finish mouldings as

shown with factory finish to match Engineer’s selected tile sample. 2.07 EXPOSED TRIM A. Provide exposed members as indicated or required for edges of ceiling,

fixture trim, changes in height and other conditions with baked enamel finish.


______________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction, and the conditions under

which the work is to be installed, and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and coordinate the

work with the work of other trades, with particular attention given to the work of mechanical and electrical trades.

B. Install all materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions unless otherwise shown or directed. C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of linear metal panel units to

balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders and comply with reflected ceiling plans.

D. Make all exposed surfaces of panels level and flush with all joints straight and

true. Neatly cut and fit units around light fixtures and around other items protruding through ceilings.

E. Factory drill panels occurring at hidden loudspeakers and fire alarm gongs. F. Run grain of units in one direction, as shown or directed, and align joints in

both directions unless otherwise shown. G. Install acoustical insulation so that it does not hang unsupported. H. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during

installation. Replace units, which are damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM, GENERAL A. Install primary suspension members and mechanical suspension system in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to support required loads and to prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of the span. Spirit level accurately in both directions.

B. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C 636 as applicable and the

following:

1. Attachment Devices: Device locations shall be coordinated to final layouts. Devices shall be secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger involved.


______________________________________________________________________________


2. Hangers: Space not more than 150mm from each end and not more

than 100mm O.C. between ends of members to be supported. Provide additional hangers for support of fixtures and other items to be supported by the ceiling suspension system, as required to prevent eccentric deflection or rotation of supporting runners. a. Provide necessary bracing and supports to allow for irregular

stresses imposed on the suspension system by any mechanical ductwork connection to air handling fixtures.

3. Mouldings: Install mouldings of types indicated where ceilings meet

walls, partitions and other vertical elements, and at exposed edges. a. Provide miter cut inside and outside corners. C. Coordinate spacing of hangers and other suspension members with the

location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling. Provide additional members or heavier members where necessary to suit interferences.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of the work remove all unused materials, debris, containers,

and equipment from the project site. Clean and repair surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove or replace work, which cannot be successfully cleaned or repaired.

B. Protect ceilings during the construction period so that they will be without any

indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of the works.

END OF SECTION

نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة الفروانية)-محافظة (

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-1 STONE FLOORING

SECTION 09600

STONE FLOORING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Stone Work shall include Marble, Stone and Granite flooring,

skirting, counter, steps (treads & riser), etc. all in accordance with the Drawings and Bills of Quantities.

B. Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services, and accessories necessary

to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and functional, as indicated in Documents and as specified herein.

C. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the

following:

1. Stone flooring 2. Stone Skirting 3. Stone to Staircases 4. Stone for Counters 5. Mortar materials for setting Stone.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Sealant except as specified herein, specified under SEALANT AND

CAULKING Section. B. Concrete floor slab construction, specified under CONCRETE Division. C. Ceramic tile work, specified under CERAMIC TILE Section. 1.03 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,

comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards and specifications, but not limited to:

1. National Building Stone/Granite Quarries Association Inc. 2. Marble Institute of America. 3. ASTM C97 Tests Methods for absorption and bulk specific

gravity of natural building Marble. 4. ASTM C99 Test Method for models of rupture of natural

building Marble.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


5. ASTM C119 Definitions of terms relating to natural building

Marble. 6. ASTM A123 Zinc (not-galvanized) coatings on products

fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strip.

7. ASTM A153-82 Zinc coating (not dip) on iron and steel

hardware. 8. ASTM A167-82 Stainless and heat resisting chromium nickel

steel plate, sheet, and strip. 9. ASTM C176 Specification for stainless and heat resisting

chromium steel-plate, sheet and strip. 10. ASTM C24 Test method for compressive strength of

natural building Marble. 11. ASTM C24 Test method for abrasion resistance of Marble

subject to foot traffic. 12. ASTM A386-78 Zinc coating (hot dip) on assembled steel

products. 13. ASTM A480/ General requirements for flat rolled stainless

and A480M-83A heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip. 14. ASTMC503-79 Building Marble (exterior and interior) 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the




C. The work in this Section shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub-

Contractor.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work showing in detail

the layout, jointing, anchors and dowels, dimensions, sizes and locations of cut-outs, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone. Special attention shall be given over the curved/circular areas of Stone floor & clad. In such areas smaller sizes stone shall be required to match the curvature. Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere (flashing, insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this submittal. Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.

B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer 600 x 600mm samples of each type

and finish of Stone required, showing the full range of color and texture expected in the finished work; in addition submit one (1) full size sample of each type and finish, falling in the average color and texture range. Engineer’s review and approval of samples shall be for color, texture, and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide also 400 x 400mm Stone sample panels with central cross joint to show sealant materials for the Engineer’s review and selection of jointing materials.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit manufacturer’s data sheet or

equivalent printed literature indicating product information correlated to specified requirements. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions.

D. Certification: After review of samples by Engineer and prior to fabrication

certify in writing and submit any additional evidence required indicating that a sufficient quantity of materials within the range of approved materials is available from a single quarry, for each specified or approved Stone to satisfy the total requirements of the Project.

1.06 TESTING A. Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone will be performed

prior to all other testing programs. 1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the

following tests:

Physical Property Test Method No. of Tests a. Compressive Strength ASTM C1170 2 b. Modules of Rupture ASTM C99 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 c. Flexure Bending ASTM C880 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 d. Density ASTM C97 2 e. Absorption (% by weight) ASTM C97 2


_______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Above samples shall be taken at random locations from areas, which

will be quarried for the Project. Do not take all the samples from a single block. Identify and transmit a record of the samples and quarry locations from which they were taken.

3. Based on he properties of Stone as determined by the above test

program, the Engineer may revise the design safety factor as specified. 1.07 SAMPLES A. Submit in suitable containers samples of all grout, cement, sealant, and other

materials specified herein to the Engineer for approval. B. Submit duplicate samples approximately (300mm x 300mm) for each Stone to

be used in respective thickness. Samples shall show full colour variation that can be expected in the finished work.

C. The samples submitted shall show range in quality, colour and finish that will

occur in the material used on the job. Where there is little variation in character an average single sample in lieu of duplicate may be submitted. The approved samples shall become the standard for selection and finish of the materials furnished under this Contract. All subsequent work shall comply with approved samples.

1.08 VISUAL MOCK-UPS Following approval of sample slabs construct mock up as follows: 1. Provide mock-up for Stone work as required by the Engineer. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary

precautions against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using protection and handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no leakage, chipping, soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other damage. Store above grade on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces using polyethylene film to separate marble from wood or other supporting or protecting members. Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of every kind.

B. Deliver other materials, except bulk materials, to project site in

manufacturer’s unopened containers with name, brand, type, grade, and color fully indicated thereon. Store bulk materials as required to avoid any deleterious effects of weather, soiling or contamination.

C. Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and

installation shall be borne by the Contractor.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 2% extra stock of stone of each type and colour and pattern. Store

where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type stone code and dimensions.

1.11 WARRANTIES A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding

guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their warranties for work under this Section.

However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities, which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE WORK A. General: Stone shall be in thickness and sizes as shown on Drawings and as

specified hereinafter. All surfaces and exposed edges shall have a polished finish. Stone shall be sound, dense, and free from defects, which may impair its strength and durability. Care shall be exercised in selecting Stone when matching, to produce an even, overall colour range. All cut outs for anchoring shall be done at plant.

All Stone shall be of standard grade, free of cracks, seams, or starts, which

may impair its structural integrity or function. Inherent variations characteristic of the quarry from which it is obtained will be acceptable.

B. Stone Types: All Stone shall be of soundness (hardness and density), texture,

graining colour tone, and range matching the sample approved by the Engineer.

1. See BOQ and Drawings for the exact requirement of

Stone/Marble/Granite types, sizes, thickness etc. C. Suppliers: 1. Al-Naseeb International for Granite & Marble Farwaniya Tel: 24758305


_______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Taj Mahal for Granite & Marble

Industrial Streel, Shuwaikh Tele: 24818544

3. Al-Ahmadi for Marble & Granite

Ahmadi Tele: 23984233

4. Or other equal approved.

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS FOR STONE A. Cement: used for conventional setting beds shall be standard brand Portland

Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type II. Cement used where exposed for joints shall be non-staining, conforming to ASTM C-91. Colour to be selected by the Engineer.

B. Cement Colouring: Cement used for grouting exposed joints shall be mixed

with approved non-fading, acid resistant pigmented colour as approved by the Engineer.

C. Sand: used in cement beds shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free

from silt, loam, clay, soluble salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine to coarse within the following limits: 100% passing £16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing £30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing £50 sieve and o to 15% passing £100 sieve.

D. Hydrated Lime: shall be ASTM C-206, Type S or ASTM C-207, Type S. E. Water: shall be clean, fresh and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Divider Strips: Where required provide divider strips complying with ASTM

A167-82, size and finish as approved by the Engineer. G. Non-slip Inserts: Provide non-slip inserts for treads, finish as approved by

the Engineer. 2.03 LATEX GROUT A. General: Grouting mortar shall be Portland cement/sand mortar gauged with

an approved latex admixture in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as further specified herein.

B. Latex Additive: styrene butadene based latex liquid specifically designed for

this purpose. The use of polyvinyl acetate, natural rubber or resin latex emulsions shall not be permitted. Additive shall be latex liquid based on “Laticrete 3701” as manufactured by Laticrete International Incorporated or equal approved by the Engineer.

C. Cement: Portland Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type I.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Sand: Clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay soluble salts

and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-to-coarse within the following limits: 100% passing £8 sieve, 90% to 100% passing £16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing £30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing £50 sieve and 0 to 15% passing £100 sieve.

E. Water: clean, fresh, and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Physical characteristics of grout shall be as follows: Water absorption less than 4% Compressive strength 3000 psi Bond strength 300 psi

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION A. All Stone work shall be carefully packed for transportation, exercising

reasonable precautions against damage in transit and shall be delivered promptly as ordered and in sequence in which it is to be installed.

B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent all Stone work from chipping,

cracking, or other damage, during the unloading and storage on the site. Damaged Stone work will not be allowed to be installed, and should any damage be found in erected work, such work shall be removed immediately and replaced with new work at no additional expense to the Employer.

C. Stone work shall be stored at the building site on planking set entirely clear of the ground and shall be protected by proper means from damage to arises and from contact with anything which would result in the accumulation of dirt, dust, soot, mud, grease or any other staining, discolouring or disfiguring elements. During extended period of storage, cover the cut Stone with tarpaulins, non-staining building paper or boards.

D. Cements and Limes: shall be delivered in original sealed containers plainly

marked with name and brand of manufacturer and kept dry until use. Cements and limes which are defective or show partial set or caking shall not be used and shall be immediately removed from the premises.

E. Sand: shall be stockpiled on platforms or otherwise protected from direct

contact with the ground and shall be so stockpiled and handled as to prevent the inclusion of foreign deleterious substances.

3.02 REQUIREMENTS A. All Stone work shall be based on requirements established under the

American Standard Specifications for Interior Marble, of the Marble Institute of America Incorporated (MIA) latest revision.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Method of installation of Stone work shall be in strict accordance with

recommendations and specifications of the MIA. All Stone shall be installed, grouted, cleaned; protected and cured in accordance with requirements of Standard Specifications and as specified herein.

C. All materials (Stone, Marble & Granite) shall conform to the requirements of

applicable specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials. D. Work shall be commenced only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers and

bucks, which are to be in or behind the Stone work are installed. All surfaces shall be dry and clean before setting beds are applied.

E. Note: The Stone setter shall install all work using lighting conditions that will

represent the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. These requirements will be insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out Stone tiles.

F. The Stone setter shall cooperate fully with other trades to do all cutting,

drilling, and fitting to accommodate work of others. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify

Engineer in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.


acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work, and any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Employer.

3.04 STONE/MARBLE/GRANITE INSTALLATION (Conventional Set) A. General: Concrete to receive setting beds, shall be completed and properly

cured before commencement of Stone/Marble/Granite floor and wall tile installation.

B. Setting Bed for Floor: shall be composed of one part Portland Cement, six

parts damp sand by volume with waterproofed compound, mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. The setting bed for floor shall be applied with reinforcing mesh over entire area. When mixed with water the mortar mix shall be of such consistency of workability as to promote maximum density, determined by stroking the mortar surface with a trowel. When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a smoothed, slickened appearance, screed and tamp setting bed firmly. Setting beds shall be in thickness as shown on the Drawings.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


While the setting bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows. Setting: The setting bed shall be applied and rodded to a true and even

surface. Tamp tile in place with mallet until firmly bedded then removed. Trowel or brush a thin layer, (.1mm) to (2mm) in thickness, of neat white Portland cement paste over the back of tile. A thin layer or dry Portland Cement, (.1mm) to (2mm) thick may be applied over the setting bed and worked lightly with a trowel. These areas (setting bed and cement paste) shall be limited to what can be covered with tile before the mortar sets. Tile shall be pressed back firmly into the bed tamping with wood blocks to obtain smooth surface. All tile shall be aligned properly with straight “hairline” joints. All edges of marble tile shall be uttered with neat non-staining white cement before closing joints. Wipe off excess immediately with sponge and clear water. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after placing tile. Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer to Drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout to receive sealant. Note: Threshold shall be set in the same manner as Stone tile with ends keyed into jamb.

Pattern: Floor shall be applied in pattern in accordance with Drawings including subsequent modification to the Shop Drawings.

1. Mortar Mixes

i. Mix mortars in small batches, to a stiff plastic mass, until thoroughly homogeneous mortar achieved. Do not use mortar until it has set for one hour. Mortar may be used only up to one hour after mixing.

ii. Mortar for Setting Stone: One part white Portland cement, one part

hydrated lime, three parts sand. Provide waterproof additive for wet areas and exterior Stone. Prepare mortar with a shrinkage reducing accelerator diluted with water in the ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

iii. Pointing Mortar: One part white Portland cement, two parts sand, and

mineral coloring admixture as required to match stone. Mixed as dry as can be worked. Provide waterproof admixture for exterior and wet area pointing

C. Stone Counters Provide Stone counters of the size and profile shown all as

per shop drawings. Provide cutouts as required. Accurately cut, dress, drill, laminate, fit and finish Stone to shape and dimensions shown. Make exposed plane surfaces true and in line. Cut all joints and edges square and at right angles to face unless otherwise shown. Cut and drill stone in the shop as required for supports, anchors, ties and other inserts.


_______________________________________________________________________________________


3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: After Stone has thoroughly set, sponge, and wash thoroughly and

diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage marble or adjacent materials. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. Type of cleaner shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application. Finally, clean all tile using soft, dry cloths.

B. Protect work after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other

approved coverage until acceptance of the building. The Contractor shall replace torn or worn papers after the tile setter has completed his work.



_______________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09632-2 GRANITE TILES

7. ASTM A153-82 - Zinc coating (not dip) on iron and steel

hardware. 8. ASTM A167-82 - Stainless and heat resisting chromium nickel

steel plate, sheet, and strip. 9. ASTM C176 - Specification for stainless and heat resisting

chromium steel-plate, sheet and strip. 10. ASTM C24 - Test method for compressive strength of

natural building Marble. 11. ASTM C24 - Test method for abrasion resistance of Marble

subject to foot traffic. 12. ASTM A386-78 - Zinc coating (hot dip) on assembled steel

products. 13. ASTM A480/ - General Requirements for flat rolled stainless

and A480M-83A heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip. 14. ASTMC503-79 - Building Marble (exterior and interior) 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the




C. The work in this Section shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub-

Contractor. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work showing in detail

the layout, jointing, anchors and dowels, dimensions, sizes and locations of cut-outs, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone. Special attention shall be given over the curved/circular areas of Stone floor & clad. In such areas smaller sizes stone shall be required to match the curvature. Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere (flashing, insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this submittal. Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.


_______________________________________________________________________________


B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer 600 x 600mm samples of each type

and finish of Stone required, showing the full range of color and texture expected in the finished work; in addition submit one (1) full size sample of each type and finish, falling in the average color and texture range. Engineer’s review and approval of samples shall be for color, texture, and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide also 400 x 400mm Stone sample panels with central cross joint to show sealant materials for the Engineer’s review and selection of jointing materials.

C. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit manufacturer’s data sheet or

equivalent printed literature indicating product information correlated to specified requirements. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions.

D. Certification: After review of samples by Engineer and prior to

fabrication certify in writing and submit any additional evidence required indicating that a sufficient quantity of materials within the range of approved materials is available from a single quarry, for each specified or approved Stone to satisfy the total requirements of the Project.

1.06 TESTING A. Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone should be

performed prior to all other testing programs. 1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the

following tests: Physical Property Test Method No. of Tests a. Compressive Strength ASTM C1170 2 b. Modules of Rupture ASTM C99 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 c. Flexure Bending ASTM C880 Tested Dry 4 Tested Wet 4 d. Density ASTM C97 2 e. Absorption (% by weight) ASTM C97 2 _______________________________________________________ 2. Above samples shall be taken at random locations from areas, which

will be quarried for the Project. Do not take all the samples from a single block. Identify and transmit a record of the samples and quarry locations from which they were taken.

3. Based on the properties of Stone as determined by the above test

program, the Engineer may revise the design safety factor as specified.


_______________________________________________________________________________


1.07 SAMPLES A. Submit in suitable containers samples of all grout, cement, sealant, and other

materials specified herein to the Engineer for approval. B. Submit duplicate samples approximately (300mm x 300mm) for each Stone to

be used in respective thickness. Samples shall show full colour variation that can be expected in the finished work.

C. The samples submitted shall show range in quality, colour and finish that will

occur in the material used on the job. Where there is little variation in character an average single sample in lieu of duplicate may be submitted. The approved samples shall become the standard for selection and finish of the materials furnished under this Contract. All subsequent work shall comply with approved samples.

1.08 VISUAL MOCK-UPS Following approval of sample slabs construct mock up as follows: Provide mock-up for Stone work as required by the Engineer. 1.09 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary precautions against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using protection and handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no leakage, chipping, soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other damage. Store above grade on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces using polyethylene film to separate marble from wood or other supporting or protecting members. Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of every kind.

B. Deliver other materials, except bulk materials, to project site in manufacturer’s

unopened containers with name, brand, type, grade, and color fully indicated thereon. Store bulk materials as required to avoid any deleterious effects of weather, soiling or contamination.

C. Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and

installation shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.10 WARRANTIES. A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding

guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract. B. Manufacturers shall provide their warranties for work under this Section.

However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities, which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.


_______________________________________________________________________________


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE WORK A. General: Stone shall be in thickness and sizes as shown on Drawings and as

specified hereinafter. All surfaces and exposed edges shall have a polished finish. Stone shall be sound, dense, and free from defects, which may impair its strength and durability. Care shall be exercised in selecting Stone when matching, to produce an even, overall colour range. All cut outs for anchoring shall be done at plant.

All Stone shall be of standard grade, free of cracks, seams, or starts, which

may impair its structural integrity or function. Inherent variations characteristic of the quarry from which it is obtained will be acceptable.

B. Stone Types: All Stone shall be of soundness (hardness and density),

texture, graining colour tone, and range matching the sample approved by the Engineer.

See BOQ and Drawings for the exact requirement of Stone/Marble/Granite types, sizes, thickness etc.

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS FOR STONE A. Cement: used for conventional setting beds shall be standard brand Portland

Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type II. Cement used where exposed for joints shall be non-staining, conforming to ASTM C-91. Colour to be selected by the Engineer.

B. Cement Colouring: Cement used for grouting exposed joints shall be mixed

with approved non-fading, acid resistant pigmented colour as approved by the Engineer.

C. Sand: used in cement beds shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free

from silt, loam, clay, soluble salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine to coarse within the following limits: 100% passing £16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing £30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing £50 sieve and 0 to 15% passing £100 sieve.

D. Hydrated Lime: shall be ASTM C-206, Type S or ASTM C-207, Type S. E. Water: shall be clean, fresh and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Divider Strips: Where required provide divider strips complying with ASTM

A167-82, size and finish as approved by the Engineer. G. Non-slip Inserts: Provide non-slip insert for treads, finish as approved by the

Engineer.


_______________________________________________________________________________


2.03 LATEX GROUT A. General: Grouting mortar shall be Portland cement/sand mortar gauged with

an approved latex admixture in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as further specified herein.

B. Latex Additive: Styrene butadene based latex liquid specifically designed for

this purpose. The use of polyvinyl acetate, natural rubber or resin latex emulsions shall not be permitted. Additive shall be latex liquid .

C. Cement: Portland Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type I. D. Sand: Clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay soluble salts

and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-to-coarse within the following limits: 100% passing £8 sieve, 90% to 100% passing £16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing £30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing £50 sieve and 0 to 15% passing £100 sieve.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Physical characteristics of grout shall be as follows: Water absorption less than 4% Compressive strength 3000 psi Bond strength 300 psi


3.01 DELIVERY AND PROTECTION A. All Stone work shall be carefully packed for transportation, exercising

reasonable precautions against damage in transit and shall be delivered promptly as ordered and in sequence in which it is to be installed.

B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent all Stone work from chipping,

cracking, or other damage, during the unloading and storage on the site. Damaged Stone work will not be allowed to be installed, and should any damage be found in erected work, such work shall be removed immediately and replaced with new work at no additional expense to the Employer.

C. Stone work shall be stored at the building site on planking set entirely clear of the ground and shall be protected by proper means from damage to arise and from contact with anything which would result in the accumulation of dirt, dust, soot, mud, grease or any other staining, discoloring or disfiguring elements. During extended period of storage, cover the cut Stone with tarpaulins, non-staining building paper or boards.

D. Cements and Limes: Shall be delivered in original sealed containers plainly

marked with name and brand of manufacturer and kept dry until use. Cements and limes which are defective or show partial set or caking shall not be used and shall be immediately removed from the premises.


_______________________________________________________________________________


E. Sand: Shall be stockpiled on platforms or otherwise protected from direct contact with the ground and shall be so stockpiled and handled as to prevent the inclusion of foreign deleterious substances.

3.02 REQUIREMENTS A. All Stone work shall be based on requirements established under the

American Standard Specifications for Interior Marble, of the Marble Institute of America Incorporated (MIA) latest revision.

B. Method of installation of Stone work shall be in strict accordance with

recommendations and specifications of the MIA. All Stone shall be installed, grouted, cleaned; protected and cured in accordance with requirements of Standard Specifications and as specified herein.

C. All materials (stone, marble & granite) shall conform to the requirements of

applicable specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials. D. Work shall be commenced only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers and

bucks, which are to be in or behind the stone work are installed. All surfaces shall be dry and clean before setting beds are applied.

Note: The stone setter shall install all work using lighting conditions that will

represent the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. These requirements will be insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out stone tiles.

The stone setter shall cooperate fully with other trades to do all cutting,

drilling, and fitting to accommodate work of others. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify

Engineer in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.


acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work, and any defects occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Employer.

3.04 STONE/MARBLE/GRANITE INSTALLATION (Conventional Set) A. General: Concrete to receive setting beds, shall be completed and properly

cured before commencement of Stone/Marble/Granite floor and wall tile installation.


_______________________________________________________________________________


B. Setting Bed for Floor: Shall be composed of one part Portland Cement, six parts damp sand by volume with waterproofed compound, mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. The setting bed for floor shall be applied with reinforcing mesh over entire area. When mixed with water the mortar mix shall be of such consistency of workability as to promote maximum density, determined by stroking the mortar surface with a trowel. When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a smoothed, slackened appearance, screed and tamp setting bed firmly. Setting beds shall be in thickness as shown on the drawings. While the setting bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows.

Setting: The setting bed shall be applied and rodded to a true and even

surface. Tamp tile in place with mallet until firmly bedded then removed. Trowel or brush a thin layer, (.1mm) to (2mm) in thickness, of neat white Portland cement paste over the back of tile. A thin layer or dry Portland Cement, (.1mm) to (2mm) thick may be applied over the setting bed and worked lightly with a trowel. These areas (setting bed and cement paste) shall be limited to what can be covered with tile before the mortar sets. Tile shall be pressed back firmly into the bed tamping with wood blocks to obtain smooth surface. All tile shall be aligned properly with straight “hairline” joints. All edges of marble tile shall be uttered with neat non-staining white cement before closing joints. Wipe off excess immediately with sponge and clear water. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after placing tile. Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer to Drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout to receive sealant.

Note: Threshold shall be set in the same manner as stone tile with ends

keyed into jamb.

Pattern: Floor shall be applied in pattern in accordance with drawings including subsequent modification to the Shop Drawings

C. Wall cladding: Non-Mechanical Fixation with mortar backing. 1. Stone setting and pointing shall be in accordance with applicable

requirements of specifications of the Marble Institute of American unless otherwise specified or shown.

2. Set Stone in accordance with the approved shop drawings, level,

plumb, square and true with uniform joints, accurately aligned with grain running in the direction shown. Match work to visual mock-up.

3. The quality of field cutting shall be the same as for shop cutting. 4. Mortar Mixes

a. Mix mortars in small batches, to a stiff plastic mass, until thoroughly homogeneous mortar achieved. Do not use mortar until it has set for one hour. Mortar may be used only up to one hour after mixing.

b. Mortar for Setting Stone: One part white Portland cement, one part hydrated lime, three parts sand. Provide waterproof additive for wet areas and exterior Stone. Prepare mortar with a shrinkage reducing accelerator diluted with water in the ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.


_______________________________________________________________________________


c. Pointing Mortar: One part white Portland cement, two parts sand, and

mineral coloring admixture as required to match stone. Mixed as dry as can be worked. Provide waterproof admixture for exterior and wet area pointing

D. Stone Counters: Provide stone counters of the size and profile shown all as

per shop drawings. Provide cutouts as required. Accurately cut, dress, drill, laminate, fit and finish stone to shape and dimensions shown. Make exposed plane surfaces true and in line. Cut all joints and edges square and at right angles to face unless otherwise shown. Cut and drill stone in the shop as required for supports, anchors, ties and other inserts.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: After stone has thoroughly set, sponge, and wash thoroughly and

diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage marble or adjacent materials. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners. Type of cleaner shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application. Finally, clean all tile using soft, dry cloths.

B. Protect work after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other

approved coverage until acceptance of the building. The Contractor shall replace torn or worn papers after the tile setter has completed his work.



______________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09650-1 VINYL FLOORING

SECTION 09650

VINYL FLOORING

PART-1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,

appliances, and Tile/Roll Flooring. materials and performing all operation in connection with Vinyl .

1. Resilient (PVC/Vinyl) - Composition Tile/Roll flooring. 2. Vinyl Base/skirting. 3. Edging Strips 4. Insets. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Precast Terrazzo - Section 09420

1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM F1066 (1987) B. Vinyl composition floor tile. C. NFPA 99 - Conforms to the requirements of NFPA99 in effect at the time of installation. D. UL 779 - shall meet standard 779 "Standard for Electrically conductive flooring" and is UL listed. E. Asbestos free vinyl. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing with manufacture of products specified

with minimum (ten)10 years documented experience. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings: Provide shop drawings for installation and erection of all

parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations and details where vinyl tiles and sheet terminate and meeting of floor and walls.

B. Take measurements in the field and verify all dimensions before submitting shop drawings. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit samples for each tile type, sheet, and base as per Engineer's requirements.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.07 PRODUCT LITERATURE A. Product Data: For each product or material used, submit manufacturer's

product data, including installation instructions, use, limitations and recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. Submit maintenance data with recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in a manner to prevent

damage. Replace damaged items with no change in contract price. B. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. C. Store and handle in strict compliance with instructions and

recommendations. D. Sequence deliveries to avoid project delays and to permit proper co-

ordination of the work. 1.09 CO-ORDINATION A. Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other

work. Verify field dimensions and condition of work, which adjoins material of this section, and notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract Documents before proceeding with the work specified in this section.

B. Commence work only after all electrical and mechanical work, which are to

be in or behind flooring work are installed. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Method of installation of PVC/Vinyl tile shall be in strict accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl composition tile/roll: Shall conform to ASTM F1066, Class 2

(through pattern tile) composition 1, asbestos free. Tile shall have the color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout the thickness of the tile. Flooring in any one continuous area shall be from the same lot and shall have the same shade and pattern. Tile thickness shall be as mentioned in the drawings (from 3 to 5mm) colour, texture, pattern and style shall be as per choice and approval of the Engineer.

B. Base/Skirting: Base shall conform to the requirement of ASTM F1066 and

shall be matching with surrounding floor tile/sheet. Base shall be either straight or coved as per requirement and shall be of same thickness of tile and 10cm high or as specified. Preformed outside corners shall be furnished. Colour, style, texture shall be matching with floor.

C. Edging strips: Leveled edging strips composed of vinyl 25mm wide by 900mm long

by 3.2mm thick (or same thickness of floor vinyl). D. Insets: Insets shall be of design, location and colour as indicated on the drawings

and as approved by the Engineer E. Adhesive: Adhesive for flooring and wall base shall be as recommended by

the flooring manufacturer. F. Performance Data: The vinyl tile, base shall meet the following

requirements: 1. Thickness: 3 to 5mm thick as shown or mentioned in the

drawings/BOQ. 2. Sizes of Tiles: As shown in drawings but shall be pre-grooved or

square edge custom size. 3. Electrical resistance (average of 5 or more readings per NFPA 99 or

ASTM F-150) : (a) Between two electrodes: 2.5 x 104 to 106 ohms (b) Floor to ground :106 to 108 ohms. 4. Static generation: less than 100 volts with conductive footwear per

AATCC-134 at 20% relative humidity. 5. Fire resistance: (a) Critical radiant flux (ASTM E-648 or NFFA253) - 1.03W/cm2 (Class interior floor finish, NFPA life safely code 101) (b) Flame spread (ASTM E-84 or NFPA 255) - less than 450.


______________________________________________________________________________________


6. Abrasion resistance: ASTM D-1044, CS-10-F wheel, 500 gm, weight. Cycles % Gauge loss 2,500 0.40 5,000 0.80 7,500 1.20 10,000 1.60 7. Thermal conductivity: Ranges between 0.40 to 0.65 W/mK. 8. Tensile strength: Upton 28 N/mm2 . 9. Effect of high and low temperatures: Continuous exposures to

temperatures in excess of 30 Deg C should not cause discoloration. 10. Chemical resistance: Shall be highly resistance to alkalis, grease, oil,

and other chemicals. 11. Resistance to cigarette burns - No surface damage occur.

PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION/ VERIFICATION OF SUB-FLOOR CONDITION A. Prior to material installation verify the sub-floor. This would include insuring

that the sub-floors are structurally sound and rigid (inflexible), dry, clean, smooth and free from all dust, dirt, adhesive, loose or scaly paint, wax, oil, grease etc.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Sub-floor shall be in a true, level plane except where indicated as sloped.

Since all sub-floor irregularities may affect the appearance of the finished floor any imperfections and defects such as rough or scaling concrete, cracks, or breaks, low and high spots and uneven surfaces etc. shall be corrected.

B. Grind down all ridges and other irregularities. Fill all cracks, holes, and

depression with latex cement underlayment as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

C. Broom or vacuum-clean sub-floor prior to the installation of flooring material.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 MOISTURE TEST A. Determine the suitability of the Terrazzo or Screed sub floor for receiving the resilient

flooring with regard to the moisture content by a bond test as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Tile flooring shall be installed with adhesive in accordance with the

manufacturer's installation instructions. Tile lines and joints shall be kept square, symmetrical, tight, and even. Each floor shall be in a true, level plane, except where indicated as sloped. Edge width shall vary as necessary to maintain full size tiles in the field, but no edge tile shall be less than one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible. Flooring shall be cut to and fitted around all permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Edge tile shall be cut, fitted, and scribed to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF EDGE STRIPS A. Edge strips shall be secured with adhesive as recommended by the

manufacturer. Edge strips shall be provided at locations where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent finished flooring, except at doorways where threshold are provided.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE A. All bases shall be installed with adhesive in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. Base joints shall be tight and base shall be even with adjacent resilient flooring.

3.07 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of installation of tile in a room or an area,

flooring and adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all surplus adhesive. No sooner than 5 days after installation, flooring shall be washed with a non-alkaline cleaning solution, rinsed thoroughly with clear cold water, and except for raised pattern flooring and static control vinyl tile, given two coats of polish. After each polish coat, floors shall be buffed to an even luster with an electric polishing machine.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.08 PROTECTION A. From the time of laying until acceptance, flooring shall be protected from

damage. Flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled shall be removed and replaced.



______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09680-1 CARPET

SECTION 09680

CARPET

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide and install carpeting in accordance with the requirements of

the Contract Documents. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,

comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. The Carpet and Rug Institute “The Carpet Specifier’s Handbook”. 1.03 QUALIFICATION A. Manufacturer: A firm (carpet mill) with not less than 5 years of production

experience with carpet similar to types specified in this Section and whose published product literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this Section.

B. Employ only experienced tradesmen for installation, who are capable of

producing work of the highest standard of quality in the industry. The installation of carpet shall be carried out by an approved specialist Sub-Contractor.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s printed literature, specifications

and installation instructions for materials specified herein and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents to the Engineer.

B. Certification: Submit certified laboratory test reports for fire hazard

classification of carpet and carpet cushion to the Engineer. C. Samples: Submit samples of each type, colour, and pattern of carpet required

to the Engineer. Submit 150 mm long samples of carpet edge strip. Submit samples of carpet tile in standard tile sizes. Samples of sheet carpet shall be 100cm x 100cm. Submit samples as many as required for Engineer’s choice of colour, texture etc.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet layout, seam locations

and edge strip locations to the Engineer. Indicate direction of pattern and lay of pile. Show details of cutouts.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of manufacturer’s printed

instructions and recommendations for care, cleaning, maintenance and repair of carpeting to the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers identified with name,

brand type, grade, class and all other qualifying information location of installation.

B. Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage. 1.06 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 2% extra stock of carpet tile and carpet of each type and colour and

pattern. Store where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type carpet code and dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are

specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineer’s approval.

B. Carpet Fibers: Types as scheduled and as recommended by the carpet

manufacturer for the conditions of installation and use. C. Pile Yarn: Provide yarn spun in the manner recommended by the yarn

manufacturer and the carpet manufacturer, in number of piles and denier indicated or required, to achieve the pile yard weight, texture and pattern indicated.

D. Dye: Use dyes and dyeing methods recognized by the industry as successful

for the type of fiber being dyed and to achieve the required colours and fade resistance. Achieve the fade resistance established by the Association of Textile Chemists and Colourists for carpet when tested on the Atlas Fadeometer for 40 hours.

E. Carpet Cushion: Provide and install one of the following in areas where sheet

carpet is installed:

1. “Rubber-Loc” (Dayco Carpet Cushion Co., USA), 1.9 kg/m2, 9.5mm minimum gauge, mothproof, antistatic.

2. “Str-Lock” (Chris-Craft Industries, Strianese Associates, Inc., USA),

1.9 kg/m2, mothproof, antistatic. 3. Eurosol Heavy, 1.0 Kg/m2, 7.5mm thickness mixture of wool jute and

man made fibres mothproof antistatic.

4. Louis DePoortere, Rue DeLa Royenne, 45-7700 MOUSCRON, BELGIUM, Tel: 056-34-1010, Tlx 57367 LDPB, Fax 056-34-6856.

Or other approved equal.


______________________________________________________________________________________


F. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Release-type as recommended by the carpet

manufacturer. G. Tape: Woven fabric impregnated with plastic and coated with adhesive having

high-tack adhesion forming a secure bond. Provide water-resisting plastic-coated tape which will unwind without adhesive transfer.

H. Tackless Stripping: Manufacturer’s standard wood tackless carpet stripper,

arranged for nail anchoring to wood, concrete and other hard surface floors. Size stripping as required to be compatible with types of carpet and cushions provided.

2.02 CARPET CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate the carpet by construction methods indicated in the schedule by

manufacturer’s standard process, which is recognized by the carpet industry for that method.

B. Carpet, other than 100% wool carpet:

1. A minimum radiant flux of 0.22 watts/sq.cm when tested in accordance with ASTM E648, based on the average of three replicate tests, and a specific optical density in both the flaming and non-flaming modes not exceeding 300 within the first 4 minutes of test when tested in accordance with ASTM E662.

2.03 SCHEDULE Refer to Drawings for Carpet locations. A. Carpet Tiles 1. Manufacturer a. Milliken & Company, 201 Lukken Industrial Drive West, La Grange, Georgia 30240, USA, Tel: 404-883-6711.

b. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. P.O. Box. 1503 Orchard Hill Road, La Grange, Georgia, 30241, USA, Tel: 404-882-1891,

Fax: 706 882 0500. c. Brinton Ltd., P.O. Box. 16 Exchange Street, Kidderminster,

Worcestershire, DY101AG, England, Telephone: 0562 820000

Fax: 0562 515597. Or other approved equal. 2. Quality: Shall be of the following selection as a minimum requirement:

a. Manufacturer: Milliken Contract.

b. Product: P/8503 Dalesman.


______________________________________________________________________________________


c. Construction: Tufted, Textured loop pile.

d. Face Yarn: Dupont Antron Legacy Continuous Filament Nylon with antimicrobial and static guard and Stain resistant treatment (or equal). e. Dye Method: Yarn Dyed. f. Yarn Weight: 24 oz./sq.yd. (814 g./sq.m.). g. Gauge: 1/8 in. (31.5/10 cm) h. Tufts: 78.8/Sq.in. (1221/sq.cm.) i. Finished Pile Ht: 0.14 in. (3.56 mm). j. Backing: Everwher(R) or equal.

k. Total Thickness: Nominal: 0.296 inch. (7.5 mm) or as shown in the drawing.

l. Module Size : 18" x 18" (457.2 x 457.2 mm). m. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard color range. n. Warranty: 10 year commercial. B. Sheet/Roll Carpet 1. Manufacturer a. Brinton Ltd., P.O. Box. 16, Exchange Street, Kidderminster, Worcestershire, DY101AG, England, Tel: 0562 820000, Fax: 0562 515597. b. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. P.O. Box. 1503, Orchard Hill Road, La Grange, Georgia, GA30241, USA, Tel: 404-882-1891 Tlx: 540450. c. Milliken & Company, 201 Lukken Industrial Drive West, La Grange, Georgia 30240, USA, Tel: 404-883-6711. Or other approved equal. 2. Quality: Shall be of following selection as a minimum requirement: a. Manufacturer: Brintons Ltd. b. Product: Broadloop c. Construction: Genuine Woven Wilton d. Face Yarn: 100% Polymide (Nylon)


______________________________________________________________________________________


e. Rows: 8/in. (31.5/dm)

f. Pitch: 8/4 per inch (31.5/15.75 per dm.) g. Width: 6′6 ¾" (2.0m) h. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard color range. i. Static Control: Will generate no more than 2.5 KV at 2.5 KV at 21 Deg. C., 30% Relative Humidity.

j. Total Thickness: Nominal: 0.296 inch. (7.5 mm) or as shown in the drawing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the

building or interfere with the completion of construction. B. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under

which the Work is to be installed. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work complies acceptance.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Sheet Stock

1. Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Place seams at locations indicated on approved shop drawings. Maintain direction of pattern, texture and lay of pile.

2. Extend carpet into closets and offsets, and under moveable

equipment of the rooms and spaces shown or scheduled to receive carpet, including recessed covers within those spaces.

3. Provide cutouts as required for removable access covers in substrates

except do not cutout for floor closer cover plates. Bind edges neatly and secure to substrate. Cut only 3 sides wherever feasible to provide carpet flap in lieu of fully removable cutout.

4. Cut opening in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other

penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and escutcheons.

5. Install edge strip as approved by Engineer at every location where

edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, unless otherwise shown. Install carpet in single lengths wherever possible, secured in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.


______________________________________________________________________________________


6. Tackless Installation

a. Install tackless strip at perimeter of carpeting in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Maintain uniform spacing from stripping to wall so that cut carpet edge will turn down to substrate in a tight slot.

b. Install carpet cushion in the largest possible size over the

entire area to be carpeted. Place cushion with face in direction recommended by the manufacturer. Butt cushion tight against tackless strip. Layout cushion seams so as not to occur under carpet seams. Butt edges of cushion and adhere cushion to substrate with daubs of adhesive approximately 100 mm in diameter, spaced approximately 600 mm apart at all edges.

c. Stretch, adjust and trim carpet in accordance with recognized

industry practice. Use power stretcher of a type recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Secure edges to tackless strip.

d. Make seams so that pile of adjoining pieces has the same

directional run and so as to be practically invisible. Install carpet with seams sewn or taped using permanent type construction, which is of sufficient strength for stretching and wear without failure during the life of the carpet. Maintain straight seams running true with the lines of the building.

B. Carpet Tile

1. Carpet tile with release adhesive shall be laid in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s latest detailed written installation instructions, copies of which shall be on the job site at all times.

2. Each tile shall be laid in a random ashlar pattern identified on the shop

drawings, which will alternate the direction of the pile lay so that it is not in continuous direction in any one case.

3. The installation shall be designed so that all tiles abutt as tightly as

possible with perimeter units restrained by a reliable vertical surface, to prevent the build-up of any accumulated spaces.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Vacuum carpet with a commercial vacuum, with rotating agitator or beater in

the nozzle. Remove soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Protect carpet from damage and soiling. Use non-staining cover material for

protection. Tape joints in protective covering.

END OF SECTION


________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09900-1 PAINTING

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART - 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services and perform operation

required complete in all field painting and finishing of all items of architectural works, interior and exterior which require paint finish for protection and/or appearance in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, which shall be including but not limited to the following:

1. Internal Painting over masonry, plaster or fair face concrete surface. 2. External Painting over masonry, plaster or fair face concrete surface. 3. Painting over gypsum board. 4. Painting over wood surface. 5. Painting over metal surface.

6. Painting to exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

7. Special/ Miscellaneous paint as described B. Painting work shall be executed by an approved specialist sub-contractor. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall examine other Sections of the Specifications for the

various other trades and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all such terms and surfaces to be included in this work, which are not included in other Sections.

B. The term “paint”, as used herein, includes paints, enamels, stains, varnishes, lacquers, sealers, fillers, and other types of coatings whether used as primers, intermediate or finish coats. 1.03 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Shop Primed Items: Certain items of work are specified under other Sections To be shop primed with finish painting specified in this Section. B. Shop Primed Items: Certain items of work are specified under Sections to be shop finished and do not require finish painting in the filed. C. Wood preservative treatments, specified under CARPENTRY WORK Section. D. Painted lines at parking area, specified under PARKING MARKING Section. E. Identification stenciling required for utility lines and ducts, specified under MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL Section.


________________________________________________________________________________


1.04 REFERENCES/STANDARDS 1. SSPC-SP (Surface Preparation Specifications). 2. SSPC-PT (Pre-treatment Specifications) SSPC-PA (Paint Application

Specifications). Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, “Systems and Specifications” published by the Steel Structure painting Council, 400 Fifty Avenue, Pittsburgh, Pa. and by reference are made a part of the painting specifications.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer the manufacturer’s

specifications and installation instructions for paint materials and systems, including certifications, verification of mill thickness specified and other data to show compliance with these specifications.

B. Detailed Painting Schedule: Submit a “Detailed Painting Schedule” for review

of the Engineer. Prepare this schedule based on surfaces, types of paint materials, types of primers and sealer, number of coats and list the brand name of the product of the manufacturer for each use.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer samples as hereinafter listed. Sample

submittal shall be for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Sample Boards: Match Engineer’s Color chips on 300 x 300mm hardboard, with color, texture and sheen duplicated to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit sample boards as necessary for selection by the Engineer.

2. Sample Areas: Using selected 300 x 300 mm sample boards as a guide

and prepare and finish partial areas as directed by the Engineer for final approval of color, texture and sheen. When approved, these areas shall serve as the standard for workmanship, appearance and materials for similar areas throughout the project.

1.06 MOCKUP A. Prepare sample panels, after approval of paint displays, totaling approximately

40 M2 in spaces designated by the Engineer for his final review. Accepted work may retain as a part of the work.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where manufacture makes more than one grade of any material specified, this

applicator shall use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications.

B. Include on labels of all containers the manufacturers name, the product name

and number, the color and the batch number.


________________________________________________________________________________


1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Paint shall not be applied in rain, fog, or mist, or when the air is dust laden, or

when the relative humidity exceeds 85%. Paints, other than water-thinned coatings, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of surfaces moisture as determined by sight, touch, and moisture meter, as specified.

B. Paint shall not be applied when temperature of the surfaces to be painted and

the surrounding atmosphere is below 10 Deg. C. for water-thinned coatings and below 7 Deg.C. for other coatings. Maintain temperatures within the building at a minimum of 16 Deg.C. during painting and drying periods.

C. During periods of inclement weather, painting may be continued if the areas

and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and artificial heat is supplied, provided that temperature and humidity conditions prescribed above are maintained.

D. Where the paint manufacturer’s specifications or instruction differ from the

above specifications, the more stringent requirements shall apply to this work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All materials shall be stored in designated spaces in a manner, which meets the requirements of applicable code and fire regulations. When not in use, such spaces shall be kept locked and in accessible to those not employed under this Section. Each space shall be provided with a fire extinguisher of carbon dioxide.

Dry Chemical type bearing the label of the National Board of Fire Underwriters’ and tag of recent inspection

B. All materials shall be brought to the site and stored in the mixing room in manufacturer’s original sealed containers, bearing the manufacturer’s standard label, indicating type and color. Materials shall be delivered in sufficient quantities in advance of the time needed in order that work will not be delayed in any way.

C. Deliver work under this Section to site in ample time to avoid delay in job

progress and at such items as to permit proper coordination of the various parts.

1.10 PROTECTION A. Place paint or solvent soaked rags, waste, or other materials, which might

constitute a fire hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the close of each days work. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire.

B. Protect the work of all other trades against damage the progress of the painting

and finishing work. Repair any damage done. C. Re-finish any work made necessary by defective workmanship or materials, or carelessness as directed by the Engineer.


________________________________________________________________________________


PART - 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials used into this work shall be as hereinafter specified. No claims as

to the suitability of any material specified, or the Contractor’s inability to produce first class work with these materials will be considered.

B. Provide only absolutely pure linseed oil, turpentine, shellac, and other like materials that are of the highest quality with identifying labels intact and seals unbroken. Use no thinners other than those specified by the manufacturer. C. Use only primers and undercoats that are suitable for each surface to be covered and that are compatible with the finish coat required. D. Use products of the same manufacturer for succeeding coats. Where shop

primed materials are to be finish painted and/or prime coat materials are by a different manufacture than the finish coat materials, confirm compatibility of the primers with the manufacturer of the finish coat paints.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Knotting: Shall comply with B.S. 1336. B. Stopping: Stopping for: 1. Plaster work shall be plaster-based filler. 2. Concrete rendering or brickwork shall be similar material to the

background and shall be finished with a similar texture. 3. Internal woodwork, plywood, shall be putty complying with B.S. 544 and

shall be tinted to match the color of the undercoat. 4. External woodwork shall be white lead paste and shall be tinted to match

the color of the undercoat. 5. Clear finished woodwork shall be a stopping tinted to match the

surrounding woodwork. C. Linseed Oil: 1. Refined linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 242. 2. Raw linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 243. 3. Boiled linseed oil shall comply with BS 259. D. Turpentine: Turpentine shall comply with B.S. 244 and B.S. 290. E. White Spirit: White spirit shall comply with B.S. 245. F. Priming/ Under Coat: 1. For plaster and concrete surfaces shall be an alkali resistant primer

obtained from the maker of undercoat and finished coat to be used.


________________________________________________________________________________


2. For alkaline surfaces shall be special primers obtained from the maker of undercoat and finishing coats.

3. For bituminous surfaces to be finished with oil paint: special primer recommended by the maker of undercoat and finishing coats.

4. For iron and steelwork: Red oxide priming paint complying with B.S. 2524.

5. For external galvanized steelwork: Apply a wash coat for the pre-treatment of new galvanized surfaces.

6. For internal wood work: an approved leadless white or light gray primary paint, compatible with undercoat and finishing coats and obtained from the same maker.

7. For external woodwork: a ready mixed aluminium primary paint to comply with B.S. 4756.

8. For hardwood: a special ready mixed primer obtained from the maker of the undercoat and finished coats.

9. For external block or concrete surface use Paint as specified and shown in the drawings.

10. For external white textured paint: use an alkali resistant under coat. G. Emulsion Paint: Emulsion paint shall be of the polyvinyl acetate type. H. Oil Paints: Hard gloss and flat oil paints and their respective undercoats shall be from

approved manufacturers. I. Oil alkyd based enamel paint for steelwork:

Apply an undercoat based on a thixotropic alkyd resin, air-drying type. Apply two coats of oil alkyd resin based gloss enamel.

J. Teak Oil: Teak oil shall be of an approved brand and applied in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. K. Varnish: Varnish for woodwork shall be of an approved brand. 2.03 PAINT OVER EXTERNAL CONCRETE/ BLOCKWALL A. External Paint System:

External paint system shall be including plastering of the external block/concrete wall surface and applying paint in the following sequence:

1. Expanded metal lathe over whole are of plaster and painting surfaces including corner/stop beads as per requirements.

2. Grouting of surfaces including special additives. 3. Apply sand cement plaster (1:3) as per required thickness, smooth

surface applying special additives. 4. Provide all required joints (Expansion and Architectural joints).


________________________________________________________________________________


5. Apply texture paint to the required thickness as per approved color and texture.

6. Provide two (2) coats of protection layer. B. Texture Paint:

Exterior quality: 5 mm thick texture paint finish including protection layer may be used if it is mentioned in the drawings and BOQ. In case the above-mentioned external quality pant is used, the Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s specifications and data including color schedule for Engineer’s review and approval.

2.04 COMPATIBILITY OF COATINGS A. It is essential that paints applied in the shop and in the field be mutually

compatible. Shop drawings for fabricated items will indicate manufacturer and type of shop coat applied.

B. This applicator shall determine that the materials specified in the Painting

Schedule are compatible with shop coats to which these materials are to be applied and he shall bring to the Engineer’s attention any condition, which may require a change in the specifications before proceeding with his work. Failure to do so shall be construed as acceptance of the paints specified and this applicator shall correct at his own expense, any defects in his work resulting from the use of such materials.

C. No claim by this applicator concerning the unsuitability of any material specified, his ability to produce first class work with same will be entertainment after Contract is signed.

2.05 COLORS

A. The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colors for each area and surface. All colors shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Colors shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew proof, sun proof, finely ground in approved medium. Colors used on concrete, wallboard surfaces (as applicable) shall be lime proof. All materials shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.

PART - 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrata and adjoining construction, and the conditions under

which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.


________________________________________________________________________________


3.02 GENERAL

A. Inspect all surfaces about their suitability to receive a finish. In the event that imperfections due to materials or workmanship appear on any surfaces after the application of paint or coating, the cost of any correction shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Remove hardware, switch-plates, trim for mechanical work, lighting fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting, set aside and re-fix on completion of painting work. Protect items where not practicable to remove and upon completion of painting work remove protection.

C. Clean all surfaces to be painted as required to remove dust and dirt. Sand as necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive paint or natural finish.

D. Before applying succeeding coats, primers and undercoats shall be completely

integral and shall perform the function for which they are specified. Properly prepare and touch up all scratches, abrasions, or other disfigurements. Remove any foreign matter before proceeding with the following coat. All spot priming or soft coating shall be featheredge into adjacent coatings to produce a smooth and level surface.

E. Do not apply final coats until after other trades whose operations would be detrimental to finish painting have finished with their work in the area to be painted and the areas have been released for painting. F. The Contractor must comply with the manufacturer’s instructions, Engineer’s

requirements and the following recommendations for the preparation of the under listed type of surfaces wherever applicable.

1. Plaster, Concrete and Rendering: All splashes of plaster, mortar etc. shall be removed from plastered,

concrete surfaces by scraping. All holes, cracks, etc. shall be stopped and the whole of the surfaces shall be brushed down to remove dust and loose material.

Plastered surfaces shall receive two coats of linseed oil putty complying with B.S. 544 well worked in and spread over the entire surface and to be sanded down to give a completely smooth and even surface. All traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with water and detergent and rinsing with clean water to remove all detergent. When efflorescence has occurred or is suspected, painting shall be postponed for a period as required by the Engineer.

2. Gypsum Board: Minor imperfections in gypsum board to be painted shall be filled with the

same filler used for jointing the gypsum board. The whole of the surface shall be brushed down to remove dust.

3. Plywood: Surfaces of work to be painted shall be primed, filled as required with

filler, rubbed and dusted down and a second coat of primer applied. After final priming all imperfections shall be stopped, rubbed down and

brushed off.


________________________________________________________________________________


4. Woodwork to be painted: Before fixing woodwork, all surfaces, which will be visible after fixing, shall

be rubbed down and all knots and resin pockets shall be coated with knotting.

After priming and fixing, all nail holes and other imperfections shall be

stopped and the whole surfaces shall be rubbed down and all dust brushed off.

5. Wood work to receive a clear finish:

All holes and other imperfections in surfaces to receive a clear finish shall be stopped and the whole surfaces shall be rubbed down and all dust brushed off.

6. Waterproof Coatings:

Surfaces of concrete shall be smooth and clean of dust and dirt before receiving the primers of the waterproof coating.

All cracks, tie bolt holes, fins, etc. shall be filled, ground as per instructions of the manufacturer of waterproof coating.

The waterproof coating shall be applied strictly as per manufacture’s recommendations and instructions.

7. Ferrous Metals

Clean and prime ferrous metal surfaces, which have not been shop primed, before the surface is damaged by weather or other exposure. After erection is completed touch up heads of bolts, welded surfaces, which are unpainted, and surfaces or areas where the primer has been abraded or otherwise damaged.

Prior to application of any field coats on ferrous metal surfaces, remove oil, grease, welding flux residues and other contaminants harmful to painting in accordance with the applicable requirements of SSPC-SP 1-63 “Solvent Cleaning”. After solvent cleaning prepare any bare metal surfaces by removing all stratified rust (rust scale), all loose mill scale, all loose or non-adherent rust and detrimental welding deposits by methods specified in SSPC-SP 3-63 “Power Tool cleaning”. Prepare any corroded or abraded surfaces of Architectural Steel or other shop-coated metal by sanding to bare metal.

8. Galvanized Metals

Clean galvanized metal surfaces of all oil, grease and other contaminants in accordance with the applicable requirements of SSPC-SP1-63 “Solvent Cleaning”, and pre-treat in accordance with SSPC-PT 2-64 “Cold Phosphate Treatment”, prime as follows:

Prime with a Zinc Dust, Zinc Oxide, Alkyd Paint.

Prior to application of subsequent coats, thoroughly clean all surfaces to ensure the removal of any grease, soil, dust, or foreign matter. Take


________________________________________________________________________________


particular care to prevent the contamination of cleaned surfaces with salt, acids, alkali, or other corrosive chemicals before prime coating and between subsequent coats of paint.

9. Touch-Up Painting of Primed Metal Surfaces Heads of bolts, surfaces, which are unpainted because of welding, field connections and any other areas on which the shop coat has been abraded or otherwise damaged shall be touched up with the specified primer after erection.

All field welds and all areas within 50mm of weld on exposed surfaces of steel, which are to be painted, shall be cleaned before painting, using surface preparation methods as hereinbefore specified.

Touch up primer shall be the same metal primer used initially.

Surfaces requiring touch-up painting shall be cleaned and primed as soon as practicable after erection and before excessive rusting or other damage occurs to such surfaces from weather or other exposure.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR PAINTING

A. Paint exterior surfaces exposed to view in accordance with this Schedule of Exterior Painting, except as specifically shown or specified.

B. Ferrous Metal

1. Shop-Primed

a. 1st Coat: Alkyd Flat Semi Gloss. b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Flat Semi Gloss

2. Galvanized

a. 1st Coat: Zinc Dust Primer Vinyl Wash Primer b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Flat Semi Gloss c. 3rd Coat: Alkyd Flat Semi Gloss

C. Concrete Masonry Units

1. Paint System: 5 mm thick as mentioned in article 2.03 A

2. External Texture paint over plaster surface as mentioned in article 2.03 B

D. Wood

1. Stain Finish a. 1st Coat: Stain Penetrating Wood Preservative

b. 2nd Coat: Clear Penetrating Wood Preservative


________________________________________________________________________________


2. Gloss Semi Gloss or Eggshell Finish a. 1st Coat: Wood Primer b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Paint c. 3rd Coat: Alkyd Paint

3. Flat Finish a. 1st Coat: Wood Primer b. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Latex c. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Latex

3.04 SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR PAINTING

A. Paint interior surfaces exposed to view in accordance with this Schedule of Interior Painting, except as specifically shown or specified in the drawings, BOQ or other contract documents:

B. Ferrous Metal

1. Shop-Primed a. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater

b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

2. Galvanized a. 1st Coat: Zinc Dust Primer

b. 2nd Coat: Enamel Undercoater

c. 3rd Coat: Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

C. Plaster and Drywall

1. Enamel Finish a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer



2. Flat Finish a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer

b. 2nd Coat: Latex Flat

c. 3rd Coat: Latex Flat D. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units

1. Enamel Finish a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer




________________________________________________________________________________


2. Flat Finish

a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer

b. 2nd Coat: Latex Flat

c. 3rd Coat: Latex Flat E. Wood, except shop finished

1. 1st Coat: Alkyd Primer Sealer

2. 2nd Coat: Enamel Undercoater

3. 3rd Coat: Alkyd Eggshell Enamel F. Piping and Mechanical Equipment: paint piping, pipe hangers and supports,

heat exchangers, tanks, ductwork, insulation, motors, electrical conduits, switchgear and other mechanical and electrical equipment except equipment which is non-ferrous metal, plated, finished by manufacturers, permanently concealed or noted to be painted under other Sections. Properly clean, prepare and finish as specified. Paint materials shall be heat-resisting type when applied to heating lines and equipment.

1. Un-insulated Piping Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment:

a. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

2. Insulated Piping Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment: a. 1st Coat: Latex Flat b. 2nd Coat: Alkyd Flat Semi Gloss

3. Machinery and Equipment:

a. 1st Coat: Epoxy Type Machinery Enamel b. 2nd Coat: Epoxy Type Machinery Enamel

3.05 PAINT APPLICATION

A. General: 1. All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and to the approval of the Engineer. Recommended dry film thickness (dft) is 75-125 microns/coat or as specified by the manufacturer.

The contents of all cans and containers must be properly and thoroughly studied before and during use and stirred as and when necessary.

2. Paint shall be applied by a brush, roller, or spray in accordance with the

manufacture’s instructions. All materials, when brushed, shall be evenly flowed on with brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. When using a roller, the covers shall be carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep wool best suited for material and texture selected by the Engineer. Sprayed paint shall be uniformly applied with suitable equipment. Provide for periodic supervision by representatives of paint manufacturers.


________________________________________________________________________________


3. Spread all materials evenly and smoothly without runs, sags, or other defects. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shape and clean, without overlapping. Allow sufficient time between coats to ensure proper drying. Sand between coats with fine glass-paper, or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required in accordance with manufacture’s directions to produce an even, smooth finish.

4. “Exposed surfaces” shall mean all areas visible when all permanent or

built-in fixates, grilles, mechanical and electrical equipment housings, ducts, and conduits are in place in all areas specified or scheduled to be painted.

5. Access panels and similar items in painted areas shall be painted to

match the areas in which they occur unless otherwise as specified in the schedules.

6. Paint the back side of access panels, removable or hinged covers. Do not

paint nameplates on equipment. 7. Wherever steel or other metal parts are shown to be built into and

concealed by masonry construction the Contractor shall paint all such work same as herein specified for exposed parts. Coordinate the work with all related trades, so that all finish painting of concealed parts is completed before such work commences. Do not finish paint-exposed parts until after completion of works.

B. Coatings to be dry and smooth:

All coatings shall be allowed to dry before application of succeeding coats.

All undercoats of oil paints and clear finishes shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface with abrasive paper and all dust removed before succeeding coat is applied.

C. Color of undercoats: Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoats shall be sufficiently different

in color as to be readily distinguishable.

D. Unsuitable conditions:

No painting shall be applied to surfaces affected by wet, damp, or other unsuitable conditions.

External painting work shall not be carried out during inclement weather. 3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protection of Wet Surfaces: Suitable precautions must be taken to protect surfaces, which are still wet by

means of screens and “wet paint” signs.

B. Protection to other trades: Contractor shall ensure that work of other trades is protected from damage and

soiling from paint materials.


________________________________________________________________________________


Moveable objects like furniture, equipment, fittings shall be moved, protected and re-placed upon completion of an area.

All surfaces fixed ironmongery, fittings etc. shall be removed before painting and re-fixed on completion.

3.07 CLEANLINESS

A. All brushes tools, etc shall be kept in a clean condition. Painting shall not be carried out in the vicinity of other operations, which might raise dust. Contractor shall not throw any liquids; slop washings etc. into gullies, manholes, sinks, basins, W.C’s or any other sanitary fittings. Suitable receptacles shall be provided by the Contractor to receive such liquids and slop washings. All inflammable residues shall be removed from the site.

3.08 CLEAN UP A. On completion of the work, thoroughly clean the areas affected by painting

works. Remove all paint splashes and smears and surplus construction materials and debris resulting from the work and dispose of the same legally off the site.



______________________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10200-1 LOUVERS

SECTION 10200

LOUVERS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide louvers in accordance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents. B. Louvers / Grilles shall be provided and installed by an approved specialist

Sub-Contractor. C. The Drawings show the extent of “Aluminium Louvers” work, hereby defined

to include (but not necessarily limited to) the following components: 1. Architectural Fixed Aluminium Louvers / Grilles. 2. Aluminium Frame. 3. Aluminium bird screens. 4. Sealant, joint fillers and gaskets in conjunction with the above items. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NAAMM Standards: In addition to the requirements shown and specified in

this Section comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

1. AWS “Structural Welding Code – Steel, D.1.1” 2. AWS “Structural Welding Code – Aluminium, D.1.2” 3. “ANSI/AAMA 302.9”. 4. AMCA Standard 500. 5. SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. B. Obtain louvers / grilles from a single source where alike in one or more

respects with regard to type, design and factory applied colour finish. C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of louvers / grilles by a firm that

can demonstrate successful experience in items similar in type and quality to those specified.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications

and installation instructions and other data to show compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings of all components for review

by the Engineer. Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned elevations, anchors, and other accessories required.

C. Samples

1. Submit sample of each type of metal finish prepared on 150mm square metal samples of the same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of work. Sample submittal and acceptance shall be for colour, texture, and specular gloss only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Submit sample corner of operable louver unit and adjustable louver,

with hardware, representative of fabrication techniques and workmanship of the final products.

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Deliver all components to project site completely identified. Store in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, above grade on dunnage, properly protected from the weather, construction activities, and other possibility of damage or loss.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are

specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified will be acceptable, subject to the Engineer’s approval.

B. Approved Manufacturers

1. Universal Molding Co. 10807 Stanford Avenue

P.O.Box 292 , Lynwood California 90262

2. American Abrasive Metals Co. 460 Coit Street, Irvington, New Jersey 07111-4693 USA. 3. Construction Specialities Inc. P.O. Box. 4658, Safat, Kuwait.

4. Or equal approved quality


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminium Extrusions: Shapes as shown and as required to fulfill

performance requirements, but not less than 3 mm thick, or of larger thickness if otherwise shown. Alloy designation 6063 T6 and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics, and suitable controlled alloy and temper as recommended by aluminium manufacturer to provide required colour and colour matching.

B. Aluminium Sheets: ASTM B 209, Sizes, and minimum gauge as required to

fulfill performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as required.

C. Stainless Steel Sheets and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to

fulfill performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as required.

D. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories Required to

Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM A36 and ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanizing is not compatible with alloy or component parts, shop painted with zinc chromate primer after cutting to size.

E. Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members Required to

Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: Alloys recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required strength of assembly.

F. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action

with the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval-head countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic. H. Hardware

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard hinges, supporting arms, pull and locking handles, crank and crank operator and all other hardware required for the operation indicated. Finish of all hardware items to be approved by the Engineer.

2. Link locking devices to the central master keying system as directed

by the Engineer.

3. All hardware shall be of stainless steel or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.03 LOUVERS / GRILLES A. Architectural Fixed Aluminium Louvers / Grilles

1. Fabricate of extruded aluminium shapes as shown with welded joints. Blades and frame shall be minimum 3mm thick extruded aluminium. Provide bird screens consisting of number 2 mesh 12 x 12 mm, 1.5 mm diameter aluminium wire held in extruded aluminium frames. Finish of bird screens shall match finish of louvers unless otherwise shown.

2. Free Area: 50%. 2.04 ALUMINIUM FINISHES A. Generally: Remove die markings prior to finishing operations. Where

necessary to remove die markings from any part of the work, all members must be finished by the same process, whether or not die marking exists. Perform this work in addition to the finish specified. Scratches, abrasions, dents and similar defects are unacceptable.

B. Polyester Powder Coating: Thermosetting polyester powder in colour to be

selected by the Engineer, applied electrostatically on pre-treated aluminium and cured to a dry film thickness of 60 microns. The finish shall meet the following requirement:

1. Gloss: (DIN 67530) The minimum gloss level of powder coating

delivery is 65% when measured at 60 Deg. Incident light.

2. Impact Resistance: (ASTM 2784) Withstand 20 in./lbs without film cracking.

3. Flexibility: (DIN 53152/150 ISO 1519) Pass the 6mm cylindrical

mandrel bending test.

4. Film Hardness: (DIN 53153/ISO 2815) Indentation resistance acc. To buchholz : 80-115.

5. Drilling, Milling and Sawing Test : No flaking of coating.

6. Salt Spray: (ASTM B 117-73) No blustering or loss of adhesion after 1000 hours.

7. Humidity Test: (ASTM/DIN 50017) To withstand 1000 hours, 100%

relative humidity at 40 Deg. C and retain adhesion, corrosion resistance, colour and gloss.

8. Water Resistance: (ISO/R 1621-1971) to withstand 100 hours in de-

ionized (but not aerated) water at 40 Deg. C.

9. Adhesion Test: (DIN 53151/ISO 2409-2mm) Cross hatch rating Gt 0 (100%) adhesion).


______________________________________________________________________________________


C. Anodized Coating (OPTIONAL)

1. All visible external and internal aluminium surfaces shall be finished with electro-colour anodized to a depth of 25 microns in strict accordance with BS 1615 Grade AA25.

2. Colour to be selected by the Engineer. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Provide louvers / grilles and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth,

arrangement, and metal thickness indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; air leakage, where applicable (for adjustable units); strength; durability; and uniform appearance.

B. Pre-assemble louvers / grilles in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and co-ordinates installation.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing including separation between blades and

frames at head and sill to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with

tolerances for installation, including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete

assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing indicated but not further apart

than recommended by manufacturer. At horizontal joints between louver units provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.

G. Join frame members to one another and to stationery louver blades by

welding, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

H. Separate dissimilar metals with di-electric separator to prevent molecular

breakdown. 2.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour range

samples for use in comparing against production material. Mark and code extremes of the colour range so that these will not be installed adjacent to one another in any one unit.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under

which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so that metal louvers

will be accurately designed, fabricated, and fitted to the structure. B. Coordinate metal louvers / grilles with the work of other trade and provide

items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the final location of louvers.

C. Erect the louvers in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions

and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors. D. Erection Tolerances: Erect metal louvers within the following tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb: 3 mm maximum. 2. Variation from level: 3 mm maximum. E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the

manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.

F. Do not erect members, which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed,

or otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection, as directed.

G. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal

shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to supporting structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers, shims, and other items during erection, which will not stain or mark the finish of units.

H. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating

of bituminous paint, or provides other separation as per manufacturer’s recommendations.


______________________________________________________________________________________


I. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of

material being welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods, which will avoid distortion or dis-colouration of exposed faces. Grind exposed welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding and grinding.

J. Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in

accordance with component part manufacturer’s recommendations. Grind smooth and restore finish.

K. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts, which will be concealed, with

zinc chromate paint. L. Seal joints in a concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown. M. Adjust hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points. Lubricate hardware

and other moving parts. N. Refer to Section SEALANTS for Sealants in connection with installations of

louvers. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. In addition to specific protection and cleaning methods required for each

component part by the respective Sections of these Specifications and recommended by the respective manufacturers, maintain the work throughout the construction period in a clean and properly protected condition so that it will not be damaged at the time of completion of the works.

B. Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied and

maintained so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise impaired so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise impaired as a result of unequal exposure to light and weathering conditions.

C. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.

END OF SECTION


_______________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10270- 1 ACCESS FLOORING

SECTION 10270

ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Access floor contractor shall provide submittals, materials and installation of the access floor system as shown on the contract drawings and as specified in this document.

1.02 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED

A The Contractor shall provide clear access, dry secure storage, and a clean sub-floor area which is free of construction debris and other trades during installation of the access floor system. Area to receive the access floor shall be enclosed and be maintained at a temperature range of 40°C to 90°F and a humidity range of 20% to 70% relative.

B Concrete sealer shall be compatible with access floor pedestal adhesive, see Division 3.

C Electrical Contractor shall provide necessary material and labor to electricity connect the access floor to the building, see Division 16.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A Access floor system shall consist of inter-changeable square panels selected to meet specific load requirements. Panels shall be supported by adjustable pedestal assemblies which positively locate, engage and secure panels and which accommodate horizontal grid members when specified.

B Finished floor height of the system above the sub floor shall be as shown on the shop drawings.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit shop drawings showing complete access floor system including floor panel layout and all accessories that are a part of the system.

B. Submit details and descriptive notes for finishes of components, anchoring, edge details, and interfaces with adjoining work.

1.05 SAMPLES

A. Submit for approval one full size floor panel with finished surface and understructure components for each type of access floor system being supplied.


_______________________________________________________________________________



Submit certified laboratory test data for approval, which indicates that the supplied system complies with the performance indicated herein.

Test Methods:

1. Test methods for concentrated, ultimate, rolling, overturning moment, and axial loads shall be in accordance with the "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors" as published by CISCA, the Ceiling and Interiors Systems Construction Association.

2. Test Method for Impact Load: Panel without floor covering shall be supported on actual understructure. An impact load is applied to the panel via a one square inch indenter which is struck by a predetermined load dropped from a height of 36". The panel shall be loaded at its weakest point. Weakest point to be determined by an independent test lab.

3. Test Method for Electrical Resistance: The electrical resistance of the access floor system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 99. The test is modified for access floors where one electrode is placed on the floor surface covering and the other electrode is attached to the understructure.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. Floor Panels: Shall consist of a high-density particleboard core totally encased and bonded to a galvanized steel top sheet and bottom pan (wood core).

B. Understructure System:

Stringerless - Gravity Held Panel 6"-18" (Finished floor height).

The understructure system to be supplied shall be Stringer less -Gravity Held Panels.

B1. Pedestal Assembly:

a) A 24" FFH assembly shall provide 8000lb axial load without permanent deformation.

b) Assembly shall provide 2" total adjustment with a minimum finished floor height of 6" without requiring rotation of the pedestal head.


_______________________________________________________________________________


c) Provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a selected height which requires deliberate action to change height setting and which prevents vibrating displacement.

B2. Pedestal Bases;

Fabricated of a square base with not less than 16 square inches of bearing area and assembled to a stud or tube, which is designed to engage the pedestal head assembly; secure to sub-floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B3. Pedestal Heads:

Fabricated of a head plate with a corresponding stud or tube, which is designed to engage the pedestal base assembly. The head must, be the proper type to positively locate the floor panel or to receive a stringer system. The head shall provide a means to fasten the floor panel or stringer directly to the head.

C. Floor Surface Covering:

Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material indicated on shop drawings or in this specification. Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer, the type, color and pattern to be selected from manufacturers standards.

D. Accessories:

1. Service outlets to be provided in locations and as detailed on the contract drawings. Outlets to accommodate power, communications and data wiring.

2. Air Flow Panels: Panels shall be all steel welded construction with a 25% open air perforated top sheet and shall be supplied with an adjustable damper assembly. Panels shall be capable of supporting a design load of 1250lbs on one square inch anywhere on the panel. Permanent set under this design load shall not exceed 0.010 inches.

Panels with an adjustable damper assembly and 1250lb design load shall provide 525 CFM at a static pressure of 0.1" H2O. Panels without an adjustable damper assembly shall provide 800 CFM at a static pressure of 0.1" H2O. 3. Provide manufacturers standard steps, ramps, handrails, closure plates, Plenum dividers, cove base, access holes in locations and as detailed on shop drawings.

4. Provide ten spare floor panels and ten square feet of understructure systems for each type used in the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer's standard packages clearly marked with the contents.

5 Provide panel-lifting devices.


_______________________________________________________________________________


PART - 3. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Qualification: Floor system and accessories to be installed by the manufacturer's authorized representative to maintain the integrity of the products and acceptable performance of the completed installation.

B. Inspection

1. Examine sub-floor for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect the quality and execution of the work.

2. Do not proceed with installation until sub-floor surfaces are clean, dry, clear of other trades and ready to receive access flooring.

C. Preparation and Installation

1. The access floor to be prepared and installed in accordance with the access floor manufacturer's instructions covering preparation, layout, alignment and installation.

2. Installed access floor shall be level within plus or minus 0.060 inches in 10 feet, and plus or minus 0.10 inches over the entire area. Floor to be rigid and free of rocking panels.

D. Adjust and Clean

1. Remove access floor installation debris as work progresses, maintaining area under finished floor in a clean condition.

2. The Contractor is to protect the finished access floor from damage and misuse.


نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة ) الفروانية محافظة (

______________________________________________________________________________________

Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10400-1 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10400

SIGNAGE

PART – 1 GENERAL

A. Include the general conditions of the Contract as part of this section B. This Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the specifications

affecting work of this trade

C. Furnish all labors, materials, plants, Equipments and appliances and perform all necessary operations required to execute the work of this section

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES;

The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installation of interior and exterior directional, information signage and road signs. Main LOGO

1.02 PERFORMANCE AND STANDARDS

Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and standards.

1.03. RELATED ITEMS

A. Excavation and Earthwork

B. Cast-In-Place Concrete

C. Metal First Fixing Materials

D. Metal Finishes

E. Special Coatings

F. Painting 1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site.


______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Samples

Samples of materials specified herein and shall be submitted for approval, and approval obtained before materials are delivered to the site.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Exercise proper care in the handling of work so as not to injure the finished surfaces, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place.

B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use. Assemblies shall be identical to

submitted and reviewed shop drawings, samples and certificates.

C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at no additional cost.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 2- MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Interior and exterior signs specified herein shall be as manufactured by an approved manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as required for complete installations.

2.03. FABRICATION

Provide interior and exterior signs of design, basic profile and materials recommended by the Manufacturer.

2.04. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SIGNS

A. General

The materials used are 0.7mm thick aluminium panels, extruded aluminium and injection moulded plastics. The paperflex front as well as the frame members are made of polycarbonate. The remaining components are made of ABS.

Surfaces shall be painted.

All signs are mounted on wall rails by means of frame members. Use 1 frame member for 29mm high panels and 2 for all other sizes. Use 1 wall rail for 157mm wide panels and 2 wall rails for all other widths.

B. Suspended Sign

Plate aluminium, punched and bent, injection moulded polycarbonate frame members. Extruded aluminium rails, injection moulded ABS end clips and locking elements.

Surface treatment: Polyester paint.

C. Wall Sign

Plate aluminium, punched and bent, injection moulded polycarbonate frame members. Extruded aluminium rails, injection moulded ABS end clips and locking elements.

Surface treatment: Polyester paint.


______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Paperflex Door Sign Injection moulded ABS back plate injection moulded PC front. Only 1 wall rail to be used.

The front is secured by a clip function in top and bottom. The front can be removed without tools. Still, it is recommended to use a suction disk.

E. Polyester String and Steel Wire

Steel wire (1.3mm) or polyester string (1mm). Injection moulded ABS end clips for double sided mounting. End clips black, wire in steel look or black string.

Wire shall be delivered inclusive of all necessary accessories for mounting. Weight of suspended sign shall not exceed 12.5kg.

F. Wall Sign

Aluminium plate with welded bolts. Frame members are extruded ABS plastic strips equipped with frame member clips. Wall rails are bent aluminium.

All visible parts are painted with oven hardened polyester paint.

G. Pictogram Wall Sign

The sign plate is made of 3mm rolled aluminium with welded mounting bolts. The wall fittings are also aluminium.

Surface treatment: only oven-hardened polyester paint. 2.05. ROAD SIGNS

A. Aluminium Plates

Plates shall be 3mm thick and smooth at all edges.

B. Posts and Accessories

Posts shall be stainless steel with cross-sectional profile as depicted on the drawings. The heads shall be flushed with the sign. Caps over pipes shall be stainless steel, well fitted to prevent their removal. Generally, all accessories shall be in accordance with the general specifications as per Ministry of Communication - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.


______________________________________________________________________________________


2.06. MAIN LOGO

A. Stainless Steel Plates

Plates shall be 2mm thick and smooth at all edges. Size and shapes as detailed in drawing and to the satisfaction of Architect.

B. Posts and Accessories

Posts shall be stainless steel with cross-sectional profile as depicted on the drawings. The heads shall be flushed with the sign. Caps over pipes shall be stainless steel, well fitted to prevent their removal. Generally, all accessories shall be in accordance with the general specifications as per Ministry of Communication - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.


______________________________________________________________________________________


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01. EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.

3.02. PREPARATION

A. Examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section.

B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the

coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades.

C. Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and

anchorage items. 3.03. INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS

A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer’s instructions recommendations for phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials, and protection of installed units.

B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing

interior signs to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for masonry and concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated.

3.04. INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SIGNS

A. Installation of signs shall be performed as indicated on the drawings.

B. All excavation shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 02200, Earthwork.

C. Pipe supports shall be embedded in concrete footing.

D. Concrete shall be Cast-In-Place after setting the post.

3.05. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10536-1 AWNINGS

SECTION 10536

AWNINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Includes drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and

Particular Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes Contractor to design, fabricate and install, maintain textile fabric including supports and fixings as shown on drawings.

B. RELATED SECTIONS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL


A. Warranty: Not less than 10 years. 1.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor engaged to sample materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. www.ferrari-architecture.com Ferari Textiles corp 1510 SW 5 Court Pompano Beach, FL 33069 USA Tel: 954 942 3600 Fax:954 942 5555


_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10536-2 AWNINGS

2. Flontex AG

CH 8203 Schaffhausen Winkelriedstrasse 82 Tel:0041 0714403 487 Fax:0041 0714401 331

3. Or approved and equal

PART 3 –EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

As per manufacturers instruction and recommendation.



______________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10615-1 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

SECTION 10615

DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work included in this Section are indicated on the drawings and specified

herein, pertains to the fabricating , furnishing and installing of demountable partitions, their framing and all support systems of glass and solid partition as indicated on the drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All sections affecting this section and all sections affected by this section shall

be related sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following submittals, as defined in Section 01330: Submittals Procedures

are required: 1. Shop drawings: Details of any special conditions. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications,

performance data, physical properties for each item furnished hereunder. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer with a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein and approved by Manufacturer.

1.05 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-ups where directed by Engineer’s Representative. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-214,

GA-216 and GA-600. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire resistance ratings: Where gypsum board system with fire-resistance

ratings are indicated, provide materials and assemblies of the rating required, tested per ASTM-E119.

1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one work prior to commencing work of this section.


______________________________________________________________________________________


1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery:

1. Be responsible for the proper scheduling of delivery and installation of components all in accordance with the construction schedule in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and for proper co-ordination.

2. Deliver materials to protest site in original, unopened packaging bearing manufacturer name and label intact and legible.

3. Prepare and package units to ensure no undue stresses are caused in transportation.

4. Protect exposed surfaces with a suitable covering before dispatch from the storage area.

5. Clearly mark units to indicate their location in the building, marking must not appear on finished surfaces.

B. Storage: Store units and profiles in a protected area away from construction

activities and weather influences. C. Handling:

1. Do not remove packaging and protect coverings until instructed by the installation supervisor.

2. Protect edges and corners until units are ready for installation. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Do not install demountable partitions until all floor works or other such works

are completed and approved. B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for

installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.

1.11 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall provide warranty for five (5) years for the products and their

installation for warping, cracking, breakage or failure due to deflective workmanship under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Demountable partitions subject to compliance with the requirements specified

herein, manufacturers offering equal or superior products may be considered, subject to approval by the Engineer.

1. Maars Partition System B.V. Tel: +31 341465211/ Fax: +31 341465346 Website : www.maarsgroup.com Email : [email protected]

http://www.maarsgroup.com/



______________________________________________________________________________________


2. Interwand Eibergen BV Local agent: CPF Int. Company Tel.: (965) 25756147 – Fax: (965) 25711058 Email : [email protected] 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. String system is a fully bi-block system made of galvanized steel and

aluminium components, with a flush pencil-joint or 5mm groove connection between the modules. The system is for interior wall applications and it is fully de-mountable and re-locatable. All visible components are finished with high quality polyester epoxy powder coating, smooth or “soft-touch” textured within RAL colour collection. Being a Bi-block system String provides the accessibility for power, communication and data wiring services even after the installation.

String partition is 100 mm thick, non-load bearing.

2.03 COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS A. Ceiling track : U-channel profile of 1.5mm thick galvanized steel, recessed

13.5mm behind face of panel. Ceiling track is visible and it is coated with epoxy powder. It is 13mm adjustable to variation of ceiling level and provided with dual compression seals for continuous light and sound seal.

B. Floor track: U-channel profile of 1.5mm thick galvanized steel, recessed 23 mm behind face of panel. Floor track is visible and it is coated with epoxy powder. It is used in combination with an adjustable floor track, which will be not visible. This adjustable floor track will level the system and provide 13mm adjustment in the height. The floor track is provided with dual compression seals for continuous light and sound seal.

C. Wall tract: Different profiles will be provided with the sytem for connections with fixed walls and columns. These profiles are provided with dual compression seals of continuous light and sound seal.

D. Construction ; Galvanized clamping studs o-joint or 5mm joint for solid module connections and unique (patented) twist connectors for frame –frame and solid-frame connections.

E. Solid modules: On both sides galvanized steel sheets 0.8mm thick with factory assembled 12.5mm thick plasterboard back plate. Or wooden panels 18mm thick with Melamine / HPL/ veneer finish. Maximum dimensions 1200mm width by 3200 mm height. Panels to be coated with epoxy powder coating.

F. Insulation material: 40mm thick Rock wool with a density of 35kg/m3 shall be placed in the cavity of the solid modules during installation. For extra sound rating 60mm thick Rockwool.

G. Glazing elements: Double –glazed in aluminium frames that can be provided with different types and thickness of glass. The glazed elements can be provided with vertical or Venetian blinds that can be operated manually or with remote control. Double Flush glazing on Aluminium frames is also an option.

H. Doorframes: Aluminium doorframes available in square, provided with 2-3 ball bearing steel hinges. The doorframes will be used in combination with a door spacer to compensate any floor irregulations.



______________________________________________________________________________________


I. Doors: The doorframes can be provided with steel, wooden or glass doors

according to the manufacturer regulations. J. Door furniture: Different types can be provided according tio the

manufacturer. 2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Inter-changability: Standardized modules of steel panels, with negligible

damage to adjacent floors, walls and ceilings. B. Solvability; Exceed 955 recovery of installed materials with neglible damage

to adjacent floors, walls and ceilings C. Erection: To obtain inter-changeability the most ideal situation is the erection

over finished floors, including carpeting and below false ceilings. D. Sound insulation: Following units have been tested by an approved

independent testing laboratory in accordance with ISO 717, leading to following results: upto Rw 47dB for solid steel modules up to Rw 43-45 dB for solid wood modules (additional 2x layers of gypsum board up 49dB), upto Rw 46 for glazed modules & up to 44 dB for XL Steel doors double strike / 40 dB XL Glass doors with double strike.

E. Fire resistance: The solid modules have been tested by an approved

independent testing laboratory in accordance with clause 5 of BS 476 part 22, leading to following results:

Standard up to 30 minutes in Steel panels & wooden chipboard panels with melamine finish.

Integrity up to 70 minutes in Steel panels. Insulation up to 63 minutes in Steel panels Insulation up to 60 minutes in wooden chipboard with melamine finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examination of Surfaces: Installer must examine conditions under which work

is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Installer shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to themselves.

B. Measuring: Measure prior to installation to minimize out of square or

unbalanced border conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. During the operation of partition/gypsum board work, protect, all wood, metal

glass, flooring and other finished materials against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Comply with manufacturer’s written

installation instructions and comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work. Scribe and cut units as required for uniform appearance and fit at borders and penetrations. For interior work, commence installation only after glazing is complete, exterior openings are closed, wet work is dried out, and a uniform temperature of at least 15 deg. C is maintained in the building.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. After the installation of the demountable partitions has been completed any

holes cut or breakages made in the finished surfaces shall be properly repaired and the disfigured areas shall be then painted over or otherwise resurfaced to match the existing finish. Any abrasion or disfigurement of the finished work or of any portion of the building where such abrasion or disfigurement is caused by the activities of this work shall be repaired and neatly finished to match the adjacent work. Upon completion of the work waste material and debris shall be removed and legally disposed of off the site.

3.05 FINISH HARDWARE AND DOOR INSTALLATION A. Fit all doors and install proper hardware. Fitting of doors and frames shall be

done carefully and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. All hardware shall be accurately and securely installed and all mortising and

sinkage required to receive the hardware, shall be neatly made. Door knobs and handles shall be protected by a wrapping of tough paper or cloth until Final Completion of the Project.

C. The requirements for the location of locks and latches should be coordinated

with the location of strikes on frames. 3.06 CLEANING A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris, scraps, and

deposits of compound, etc. B. After completion of the work of this section, remove equipment, and clean all

wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of materials installed under this Section.

3.07 PROTECTION A. Procedures: Protect finished work in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations, from damage during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

نموذجي إنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشروع مبني إدارة هجرة ) الفروانيةمحافظة (

______________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10800-1 Toilet & Bath Accessories

SECTION 10800

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Toilet and Bath Accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Work Included: The work of this Section shall include, but not be limited to the

following:

1. Flexible Hose.

2. Paper Towel Dispensing Units.

3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers.

5. Soap Tray

6. Soap Dispensers.

7. Grab Bars.

8. Framed Mirrors.

Notes: For the exact requirement of work refer to Drawing and BOQ

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Sanitary Fixtures

2. Toilet Partitions.

3. Reinforcing Plates within Partitions. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of referenced standards specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Whenever a conflict arises, consult the Engineer as to which requirements shall apply.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site.

B. Samples: When requested submit samples of materials specified herein for

approval and obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate delivery with the work of other trades so as not to delay the job process.


______________________________________________________________________________________


B. Protection: Use means necessary to protect the materials of this section

before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades.

C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and

replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Toilet room accessories, as listed by catalog or model number and manufacturer under “Accessories” refer to the products of the manufacturer listed for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality, construction, appearance, function, size design, finish and properties. Similar products of the following manufacturers may be submitted for approval by the Engineer. Provide toilet room accessories from a single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible, to provide undivided responsibilities for this work.

1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc., 509 Temple Hill Road, N.Y. 12553 Tel: (914) 562-3323 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc., Los Angeles, California, U.S.A. 3. Accessory Specialist Inc. 441 Sawmill River Road, Yonkers NY 10701 USA, Tel. 914-476-9000.

4. Or approved equal.

B. Toilet room accessories provided for the project shall be by one of the above manufacturers, except where other specific products are indicated under “Accessories”.

C. No stamped, printed, or other manufacturer identification shall appear on the

exposed surfaces of accessories furnished under this section. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: When used for metal accessories and shall be AISI Type 302 or 304. Exposed surfaces of stainless steel shall receive a No.4 satin finish as approved by the Engineer.

B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525. C. Chrome Plating: When specified shall be applied over a coating of nickel. On

steel, the nickel coating shall be applied over a coating of copper. Chrome plated surfaces shall receive a US26D finish, as approved by the Engineer. Note that die-cast base metal is not acceptable.


______________________________________________________________________________________


D. Fastening Devices: Anchors, clips, screws, bolts, expansion shields and

plates shall be furnished with each accessory as required by the type of accessory and the construction to which it is attached, and shall be concealed where possible. Finish of exposed fastening devices shall match that of the accessory. Exposed to view fastening devices shall be tamper-resistant.

E. Mirrors: Locations and size indicated on the drawings or listed in the schedule

shall be framed with satin finished stainless steel with corners welded, ground smooth and finished to match adjacent surfaces. Mirror shall have theft-resistant concealed mountings with two setscrews. Glass for mirrors shall be “silvering” quality, conforming to Federal Specification DD-G-00451. Mirrors shall receive two coats of silver and electrolytically clad copper.

F. Sound Deadening Material: On back of recessed toilet room accessories shall

be as approved equal to “Aquaplas” by H.L. Blachford, Inc. and shall be applied by spraying or troweling to a thickness of not less than 3.2mm.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.

1. Unless otherwise noted, items specified herein are wall-mounted

accessories. B. For location of the following Toilet Accessories, refer wet area details in Architectural Drawings. C. The required toilet accessories shall be as per drawings and BOQ. The following accessories from the particular manufacturer are provided herewith to provide as a guideline and as minimum requirement in the contract. The final selection shall be as per Engineer’s choice and approval.


______________________________________________________________________________________


LIST OF TOILET ACCESSORIES FOR GUIDANCE

0BItem

1BDescription

2BBobrick Model

3BRemark

1

Mirror with stainless steel channel frame

4BB-165-Series

For required size, refer architectural drawings.

2 Mirror without frame & water resistant plywood back

---------- For required size, refer architectural drawings.

3 Stainless steel with bright polished finish lavatory mounted soap dispenser.

B-8225 See manufacturer technical specifications.

4 Recessed multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser for serving one compartment only.


5 Bright polished brass finish, stainless steel paper towel dispenser for mounting in countertop

B-526

See manufacturer technical specifications.

6 Recessed stainless steel toilet paper holder with bright polished brass finish.


7 24” surface mounted stainless towel bar with bright polished brass finish.


8 32mm diameter, stainless steel grab bar with snap flange cover and 38mm clearance between grab bar and wall.

B-6806

For required size, refer architectural drawings.

9

Coat hook stainless steel

B-682

See manufacturer technical specifications.

D. Contractor to submit comparative analysis (as against specified Bobrick Model

Nos.) for all items/accessories proposed by him from other equivalent sources, of Engineers approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Templates: Furnish to the metal toilet partition Subcontractor templates required to locate drilled holes and cutouts for installation of partition mounted accessories.


______________________________________________________________________________________


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Toilet Room Accessories: Install where indicated on drawings, as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer’s Representative, rigidly secured and in perfect alignment with other fixtures.

B. Mirrors: Install in a perfectly flat plane, showing no distortion of image, strictly

in conformance with approved shop drawings. C. Metal Trim: Items exposed in the finished work shall be free from buckle,

warping and oil-canning effects. Metal to metal contact shall have hairline joints.

D. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. E. Provide anchors, bolts and other necessary anchorages, and attach

accessories securely to walls and partitions in locations as shown or directed. F. Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricated of the same

material as the accessories, or of galvanized steel, as recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Install exposed mounting devices and fasteners finished to match the

accessories. H. Provide theft-resistant fasteners for accessory mountings. I. Secure toilet room accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions for each item and each type of substrate construction.

3.04 PROTECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor shall suitably protect the work in order to maintain finishes in perfect condition until final completion and acceptance. Any damaged or defective work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Engineer.

B. The finished installation shall be sound and free from defects of materials and

workmanship. After the inspection of the installation and its approval by the Engineer, protection, labels, smears and stains shall be removed and mirror shall be washed clean.

END OF SECTION

نموذجي ع مبني إدارة هجرةإنشاء وإنجاز وصيانة مشرو ) الفروانيةمحافظة (

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center II-2/11150-1 BARRIER GATE

SECTION 11150

BARRIER GATE

1. CABINET

The cabinet enclosure is fabricated from 12 – gauge steel, dichromate-plated throughout to maintain a long-lasting, weather-tight, rust-resistant service life. All structural seams and corners are welded to assure structural integrity. The main shaft is centered within the cabinet by self-lubricating bushings. Access to the inside is provided by a single gasket door with a flush-mounted T-handle lock assembly. Four mounting holes at the bottom of the AG50 cabinet provide a secure installation platform. The entire cabinet has an electrostatically applied polyester powder finish with a pre-engineered texture on the outside. The polyester powder finish is baked on at an extremely high temperature which provides abrasion resistance. It has highly rated UV protection, and is resistant to acids, alkali solvents and salt, which will provide an attractive maintenance – free appearance for many years. The standard cabinet color is white, and optional colors are available.

2. GATE ARM

The gate arm is constructed of 1" x 4" x 20' clear white pine. The exterior finish is an exterior painted enamel with a safety warning sticker attached to the gate arm.

3. ELECTRICAL OPERATION

The Auto Gate is equipped with logic controls and operational controls. The logic controls are provided in a factory-sealed enclosure. The operational controls, which are a relay logic design, incorporate a plug-in-style wiring harness to the connection box, for easy field service and/or lane modifications. Gate arm travel is controlled by a limit switch and cam assemblies. Brake devices are not necessary. The galvanized connections box contains heavy-duty toggle switches to activate power to the terminal strip, heat controls, and automatic or manual operations. Convenience outlet is incorporated within the connections box to make field service easier. Thermal-overload protection is provided within the motor design, and can be reset by a push button located on the motor housing.

Weight Kg

Voltage Motor Current

Motor Power

Duty cycle %

Reduction ratio

Torque N . m

Opening time s

V A,C, V D,C, 230V 24V W

72 230 24 1,3 max 15 max 300 Intensive use

1/202 600 4 - 8

END OF SECTION


_______________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________ Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/12357- 1 KITCHEN CABINETS

SECTION 12357

KITCHEN CABINETS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes custom-fabricated cabinet units; counter tops; cabinet

hardware; preparation for installing utilities in cabinets; and shop finishing.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06150 – Wood Floor. 2. Division 15 - Plumbing utilities and fixtures.

1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (USA):

1. AWI - Quality Standards Illustrated. C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

1. BHMA A156.9 (1988) Cabinet Hardware. E. British Standards Institution.

1. BS 1186 : Part 2 Quality of Workmanship in Joinery. 2. BS 1202 : Nails

3. BS 1204 : Synthetic Resin Adhesives (Phenolic and Aminoplastics) for Wood. 4. BS 1210 : Wood Screws. 5. BS 1455 : Plywood Manufactured from Tropical Hardwoods. 6. BS 3444 : Block-board and Laminboard 7. BS 5669 : Specifications for Wood Chipboard and Methods for test for particle board.

F. Deutche Industrie Fuer Normung:

1. DIN 16926 – for Decorative Surfaces (Worktops). 2. DIN 18022. 3. DIN 53799 – for Decorative Surfaces (Carcase) 4. DIN 68861 – for Furniture Surfaces Generally.


_______________________________________________________________________________


G. Federal Specification Unit: 1. FS A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber.

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, Assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Submit data for hardware accessories. D. Samples:

1. Submit two, 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating cabinet finish. 2. Submit two, 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating counter top finish and edge. 3. Submit two samples of drawer pulls and hinges, illustrating hardware finish.

E. Certification: Submit copy of fabricator’s authorization to use AWI Grade Stamps. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium Grade. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke Developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with Minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 MOCKUP A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mockup requirements. B. Construct mockup of full size base cabinet including hardware and accessories. C. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. D. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.


_______________________________________________________________________________


1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. During and after installation of Work of this section, maintain same

temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN/CUSTOM CABINETS

A. Fabricators: 1. Alno – Mobelwerke GMBH & Co. KG

7798 Pfullendorf, P.O. Box 1160 Germany, Tel: 07552-21-0

2. Poggenpohl U.K. Ltd. Thames House, 63 Kingston Road New Molden Surrey KT3 3PB Great Britain P.O. Box 66 UK G Tel: 01 949 5716

3. Siematic Limited 11-17 Fowler Road, II ford Essex 166 3 UU Great Britain

4. Approved Equal


_______________________________________________________________________________


2.02 COMPONENTS A. Softwood Lumber: AWI Grade I; maximum moisture content of 6-8

percent. B. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Type 1; composed of wood chips or sawdust, medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; sanded faces. C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, GP50 for horizontal

surfaces, GP28 for vertical surfaces, CL20 for cabinet liner surfaces, BK20 for undecorated backing sheets, FR50 for fire-retardant surfaces; color, pattern, and surface texture as selected.

D. Synthetic Surfacing: Synthetic marble of polyester resins, with integral

color And design, stain resistant to domestic chemicals and cleaners. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates: FS A-A-1936 contact adhesive. B. Plastic Edge Trim: Extruded convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking

Serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; color as selected.

C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Plastic material for cut-outs. G. Shelf Rests: Formed steel; chrome finish. H. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped pull, steel with epoxy powder-coated finish, 100 mm centers. I. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys for each lock, master keyed,

steel with satin finish. J. Catches: Magnetic. K. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating T racks, full extension type. L. Hinges: Pin type, five-knuckle with epoxy powder-coated finish.


_______________________________________________________________________________


2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop-assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and

to Permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with plastic edging. Use one

piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed high-pressure decorative laminate finish edges with 3 mm plastic trim. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 19 mm thick; reveal overlay style. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply high-pressure decorative laminate finish in full-uninterrupted

sheets Consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 600 mm from sink cutouts.

G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. H. Mechanically fasten back splash to counter tops with steel brackets at 400 mm on center. I. Fabricate cabinets and counter tops with cutouts for plumbing fixtures,

inserts and outlet boxes. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.

PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.


_______________________________________________________________________________


3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum

gaps of 1 mm. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting and

balancing. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
